View MC68HC908MR32_248016.PDF datasheet online --- IC-ON-LINE

Datasheet File OCR Text:

MC68HC908MR32/D REV 5
68HC08M6 HC08M68HC 8M68HC08M
MC68HC908MR32 MC68HC908MR16 Advance Information
HCMOS Microcontroller Unit
blank
MC68HC908MR32 MC68HC908MR16
Technical Summary
Motorola reserves the right to make changes without further notice to any products herein. Motorola makes no warranty, representation or guarantee regarding the suitability of its products for any particular purpose, nor does Motorola assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any product or circuit, and specifically disclaims any and all liability, including without limitation consequential or incidental damages. "Typical" parameters which may be provided in Motorola data sheets and/or specifications can and do vary in different applications and actual performance may vary over time. All operating parameters, including "Typicals" must be validated for each customer application by customer's technical experts. Motorola does not convey any license under its patent rights nor the rights of others. Motorola products are not designed, intended, or authorized for use as components in systems intended for surgical implant into the body, or other applications intended to support or sustain life, or for any other application in which the failure of the Motorola product could create a situation where personal injury or death may occur. Should Buyer purchase or use Motorola products for any such unintended or unauthorized application, Buyer shall indemnify and hold Motorola and its officers, employees, subsidiaries, affiliates, and distributors harmless against all claims, costs, damages, and expenses, and reasonable attorney fees arising out of, directly or indirectly, any claim of personal injury or death associated with such unintended or unauthorized use, even if such claim alleges that Motorola was negligent regarding the design or manufacture of the part. Motorola, Inc. is an Equal Opportunity/Affirmative Action Employer.
Motorola and are registered trademarks of Motorola, Inc. DigitalDNA is a trademark of Motorola, Inc.
(c) Motorola, Inc., 2001
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA
Advance Information 3
Revision History
To provide the most up-to-date information, the revision of our documents on the World Wide Web will be the most current. Your printed copy may be an earlier revision. To verify you have the latest information available, refer to: http://www.motorola.com/semiconductors/ The following revision history table summarizes changes contained in this document. For your convenience, the page number designators have been linked to the appropriate location.
Revision History
Date Revision Level Description Figure 2-1. Memory Map -- Added FLASH Block Protect Register (FLBPR) at address location $FF7E 3 Figure A-1. MC68HC908MR16 Memory Map -- Added FLASH Block Protect Register (FLBPR) at address location $FF7E 4 19.4.3 Conversion Time -- Reworked equations and text for clarity. Figure 10-1. Monitor Mode Circuit -- PTA7 and connecting circuitry added Table 10-2. Monitor Mode Signal Requirements and Options -- Switch locations added to column headings for clarity 5 Section 11. Timer Interface A (TIMA) -- Timer discrepancies corrected throughout this section. Section 12. Timer Interface B (TIMB) -- Timer discrepancies corrected throughout this section. 199 225 388 346 187 189 Page Number(s) 41
August, 2001
October, 2001
December, 2001
Advance Information 4
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA
Advance Information -- MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32
List of Sections
Section 1. General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Section 2. Memory Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Section 3. Random-Access Memory (RAM) . . . . . . . . . . 55 Section 4. FLASH Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Section 5. Configuration Register (CONFIG) . . . . . . . . . 67 Section 6. Central Processor Unit (CPU) . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Section 7. System Integration Module (SIM) . . . . . . . . . 89 Section 8. Clock Generator Module (CGM) . . . . . . . . . . 109 Section 9. Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control (PWMMC) . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Section 10. Monitor ROM (MON) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Section 11. Timer Interface A (TIMA). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Section 12. Timer Interface B (TIMB). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Section 13. Serial Peripheral Interface Module (SPI) . . 249 Section 14. Serial Communications Interface Module (SCI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 Section 15. Input/Output (I/O) Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Section 16. Computer Operating Properly (COP) . . . . 325 Section 17. External Interrupt (IRQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA List of Sections
Advance Information 5
List of Sections Section 18. Low-Voltage Inhibit (LVI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 Section 19. Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) . . . . . . 343 Section 20. Power-On Reset (POR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 Section 21. Break Module (BRK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 Section 22. Electrical Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 Section 23. Mechanical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 Section 24. Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 Appendix A. MC68HC908MR16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Advance Information 6
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 List of Sections MOTOROLA
Advance Information -- MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32
7DEOH RI &RQWHQWV
Section 1. General Description
1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 MCU Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
1.5 Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 1.5.1 Power Supply Pins (VDD and VSS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 1.5.2 Oscillator Pins (OSC1 and OSC2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 1.5.3 External Reset Pin (RST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 1.5.4 External Interrupt Pin (IRQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 1.5.5 CGM Power Supply Pins (VDDA and VSSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 1.5.6 External Filter Capacitor Pin (CGMXFC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 1.5.7 Analog Power Supply Pins (VDDA and VSSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 1.5.8 ADC Voltage Decoupling Capacitor Pin (VREFH) . . . . . . . . . 36 1.5.9 ADC Voltage Reference Low Pin (VREFL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 1.5.10 Port A Input/Output (I/O) Pins (PTA7-PTA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 1.5.11 Port B I/O Pins (PTB7/ATD7-PTB0/ATD0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 1.5.12 Port C I/O Pins (PTC6-PTC2 and PTC1/ATD9-PTC0/ATD8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37 1.5.13 Port D Input-Only Pins (PTD6/IS3-PTD4/IS1 and PTD3/FAULT4-PTD0/FAULT1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 1.5.14 PWM Pins (PWM6-PWM1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 1.5.15 PWM Ground Pin (PWMGND) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 1.5.16 Port E I/O Pins (PTE7/TCH3A-PTE3/TCLKA and PTE2/TCH1B-PTE0/TCLKB). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 1.5.17 Port F I/O Pins (PTF5/TxD-PTF4/RxD and PTF3/MISO-PTF0/SPSCK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Table of Contents
Advance Information 7
Table of Contents Section 2. Memory Map
2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Unimplemented Memory Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Reserved Memory Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 I/O Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Monitor ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Section 3. Random-Access Memory (RAM)
3.1 3.2 3.3 Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Section 4. FLASH Memory
4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8 4.9 4.10 4.11 Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 FLASH Control Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 FLASH Page Erase Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 FLASH Mass Erase Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 FLASH Program/Read Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 FLASH Block Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 FLASH Block Protect Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Wait Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Stop Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Section 5. Configuration Register (CONFIG)
5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Configuration Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Advance Information 8
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Table of Contents MOTOROLA
Table of Contents
Section 6. Central Processor Unit (CPU)
6.1 6.2 6.3 Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
6.4 CPU Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 6.4.1 Accumulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 6.4.2 Index Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 6.4.3 Stack Pointer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 6.4.4 Program Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75 6.4.5 Condition Code Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 6.5 Arithmetic/Logic Unit (ALU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 6.6 Low-Power Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 6.6.1 Wait Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78 6.6.2 Stop Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78 6.7 6.8 6.9 CPU During Break Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Instruction Set Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Opcode Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Section 7. System Integration Module (SIM)
7.1 7.2 Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
7.3 SIM Bus Clock Control and Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 7.3.1 Bus Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93 7.3.2 Clock Startup from POR or LVI Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 7.3.3 Clocks in Wait Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 7.4 Reset and System Initialization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 7.4.1 External Pin Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 7.4.2 Active Resets from Internal Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 7.4.2.1 Power-On Reset (POR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 7.4.2.2 Computer Operating Properly (COP) Reset. . . . . . . . . . . 97 7.4.2.3 Illegal Opcode Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 7.4.2.4 Illegal Address Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 7.4.2.5 Forced Monitor Mode Entry Reset (MENRST). . . . . . . . . 98 7.4.2.6 Low-Voltage Inhibit (LVI) Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Table of Contents
Advance Information 9
Table of Contents
7.5 SIM Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 7.5.1 SIM Counter During Power-On Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 7.5.2 SIM Counter and Reset States. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 7.6 Exception Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 7.6.1 Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 7.6.1.1 Hardware Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 7.6.1.2 Software Interrupt (SWI) Instruction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 7.6.2 Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 7.7 Low-Power Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 7.7.1 Wait Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102 7.7.2 Stop Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104 7.8 SIM Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104 7.8.1 SIM Break Status Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 7.8.2 SIM Reset Status Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 7.8.3 SIM Break Flag Control Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Section 8. Clock Generator Module (CGM)
8.1 8.2 8.3 Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
8.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 8.4.1 Crystal Oscillator Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 8.4.2 Phase-Locked Loop Circuit (PLL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 8.4.2.1 PLL Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 8.4.2.2 Acquisition and Tracking Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 8.4.2.3 Manual and Automatic PLL Bandwidth Modes . . . . . . . 115 8.4.2.4 Programming the PLL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 8.4.2.5 Special Programming Exceptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 8.4.3 Base Clock Selector Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 8.4.4 CGM External Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 8.5 I/O Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 8.5.1 Crystal Amplifier Input Pin (OSC1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121 8.5.2 Crystal Amplifier Output Pin (OSC2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 8.5.3 External Filter Capacitor Pin (CGMXFC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 8.5.4 PLL Analog Power Pin (VDDA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 8.5.5 Oscillator Enable Signal (SIMOSCEN). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Advance Information 10 MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Table of Contents MOTOROLA
Table of Contents
8.5.6 8.5.7 8.5.8
Crystal Output Frequency Signal (CGMXCLK) . . . . . . . . .122 CGM Base Clock Output (CGMOUT). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 CGM CPU Interrupt (CGMINT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
8.6 CGM Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 8.6.1 PLL Control Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 8.6.2 PLL Bandwidth Control Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 8.6.3 PLL Programming Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 8.7 8.8 Interrupts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Wait Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
8.9 Acquisition/Lock Time Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 8.9.1 Acquisition/Lock Time Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 8.9.2 Parametric Influences on Reaction Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132 8.9.3 Choosing a Filter Capacitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 8.9.4 Reaction Time Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Section 9. Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control (PWMMC)
9.1 9.2 9.3 Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
9.4 Timebase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 9.4.1 Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141 9.4.2 Prescaler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 9.5 PWM Generators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 9.5.1 Load Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 9.5.2 PWM Data Overflow and Underflow Conditions. . . . . . . . .147 9.6 Output Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 9.6.1 Selecting Six Independent PWMs or Three Complementary PWM Pairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147 9.6.2 Dead-Time Insertion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 9.6.3 Top/Bottom Correction with Motor Phase Current Polarity Sensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 9.6.4 Output Polarity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 9.6.5 PWM Output Port Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Table of Contents
Advance Information 11
Table of Contents
9.7 Fault Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 9.7.1 Fault Condition Input Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 9.7.1.1 Fault Pin Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161 9.7.1.2 Automatic Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 9.7.1.3 Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164 9.7.2 Software Output Disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 9.7.3 Output Port Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 9.8 Initialization and the PWMEN Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 9.9 PWM Operation in Wait Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 9.10 Control Logic Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168 9.10.1 PWM Counter Registers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 9.10.2 PWM Counter Modulo Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 9.10.3 PWMx Value Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 9.10.4 PWM Control Register 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 9.10.5 PWM Control Register 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 9.10.6 Dead-Time Write-Once Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 9.10.7 PWM Disable Mapping Write-Once Register . . . . . . . . . . . 176 9.10.8 Fault Control Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 9.10.9 Fault Status Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 9.10.10 Fault Acknowledge Register. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 9.10.11 PWM Output Control Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 9.11 PWM Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Section 10. Monitor ROM (MON)
10.1 Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 10.2 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 10.3 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 10.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 10.4.1 Entering Monitor Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188 10.4.1.1 Normal Monitor Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 10.4.1.2 Forced Monitor Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 10.4.2 Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 10.4.3 Echoing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 10.4.4 Break Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 10.4.5 Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192 10.4.6 Baud Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196 10.5 Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
Advance Information 12 MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Table of Contents MOTOROLA
Table of Contents
Section 11. Timer Interface A (TIMA)
11.1 11.2 11.3 Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
11.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 11.4.1 TIMA Counter Prescaler. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 11.4.2 Input Capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 11.4.3 Output Compare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205 11.4.3.1 Unbuffered Output Compare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 11.4.3.2 Buffered Output Compare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206 11.4.4 Pulse-Width Modulation (PWM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 11.4.4.1 Unbuffered PWM Signal Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 11.4.4.2 Buffered PWM Signal Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 11.4.4.3 PWM Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 11.5 11.6 Interrupts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Wait Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
11.7 I/O Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 11.7.1 TIMA Clock Pin (PTE3/TCLKA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 11.7.2 TIMA Channel I/O Pins (PTE4/TCH0A-PTE7/TCH3A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 11.8 I/O Registers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 11.8.1 TIMA Status and Control Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 11.8.2 TIMA Counter Registers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 11.8.3 TIMA Counter Modulo Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 11.8.4 TIMA Channel Status and Control Registers . . . . . . . . . . . 217 11.8.5 TIMA Channel Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Section 12. Timer Interface B (TIMB)
12.1 12.2 12.3 Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
12.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 12.4.1 TIMB Counter Prescaler. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 12.4.2 Input Capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Table of Contents
Advance Information 13
Table of Contents
12.4.3 Output Compare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230 12.4.3.1 Unbuffered Output Compare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 12.4.3.2 Buffered Output Compare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231 12.4.4 Pulse-Width Modulation (PWM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 12.4.4.1 Unbuffered PWM Signal Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 12.4.4.2 Buffered PWM Signal Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 12.4.4.3 PWM Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 12.5 12.6 Interrupts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Wait Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
12.7 I/O Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 12.7.1 TIMB Clock Pin (PTD4/ATD12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 12.7.2 TIMB Channel I/O Pins (PTE1/TCH0B-PTE2/TCH1B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 12.8 I/O Registers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 12.8.1 TIMB Status and Control Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 12.8.2 TIMB Counter Registers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 12.8.3 TIMB Counter Modulo Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 12.8.4 TIMB Channel Status and Control Registers . . . . . . . . . . . 242 12.8.5 TIMB Channel Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Section 13. Serial Peripheral Interface Module (SPI)
13.1 13.2 13.3 13.4 Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Pin Name Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
13.5 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 13.5.1 Master Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 13.5.2 Slave Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 13.6 Transmission Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 13.6.1 Clock Phase and Polarity Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255 13.6.2 Transmission Format When CPHA = 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 13.6.3 Transmission Format When CPHA = 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 13.6.4 Transmission Initiation Latency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Advance Information 14
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Table of Contents MOTOROLA
Table of Contents
13.7 Error Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 13.7.1 Overflow Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 13.7.2 Mode Fault Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262 13.8 13.9 Interrupts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Resetting the SPI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
13.10 Queuing Transmission Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 13.11 Low-Power Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 13.12 I/O Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 13.12.1 MISO (Master In/Slave Out) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 13.12.2 MOSI (Master Out/Slave In) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 13.12.3 SPSCK (Serial Clock). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 13.12.4 SS (Slave Select) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 13.12.5 VSS (Clock Ground) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 13.13 I/O Registers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 13.13.1 SPI Control Register. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 13.13.2 SPI Status and Control Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 13.13.3 SPI Data Register. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Section 14. Serial Communications Interface Module (SCI)
14.1 14.2 14.3 Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
14.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 14.4.1 Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 14.4.2 Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283 14.4.2.1 Character Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 14.4.2.2 Character Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 14.4.2.3 Break Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 14.4.2.4 Idle Characters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 14.4.2.5 Inversion of Transmitted Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286 14.4.2.6 Transmitter Interrupts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 14.4.3 Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 14.4.3.1 Character Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 14.4.3.2 Character Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Table of Contents
Advance Information 15
Table of Contents
14.4.3.3 14.4.3.4 14.4.3.5 14.4.3.6 14.4.3.7 14.5 14.6 Data Sampling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Framing Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 Receiver Wakeup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 Receiver Interrupts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 Error Interrupts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Wait Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 SCI During Break Module Interrupts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
14.7 I/O Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 14.7.1 PTE2/TxD (Transmit Data). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 14.7.2 PTE1/RxD (Receive Data) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 14.8 I/O Registers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 14.8.1 SCI Control Register 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 14.8.2 SCI Control Register 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 14.8.3 SCI Control Register 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 14.8.4 SCI Status Register 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 14.8.5 SCI Status Register 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 14.8.6 SCI Data Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 14.8.7 SCI Baud Rate Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Section 15. Input/Output (I/O) Ports
15.1 15.2 Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
15.3 Port A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 15.3.1 Port A Data Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 15.3.2 Data Direction Register A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 15.4 Port B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 15.4.1 Port B Data Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 15.4.2 Data Direction Register B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 15.5 Port C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 15.5.1 Port C Data Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 15.5.2 Data Direction Register C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 15.6 Port D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 15.7 Port E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 15.7.1 Port E Data Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 15.7.2 Data Direction Register E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Advance Information 16 MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Table of Contents MOTOROLA
Table of Contents
15.8 Port F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 15.8.1 Port F Data Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 15.8.2 Data Direction Register F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Section 16. Computer Operating Properly (COP)
16.1 16.2 16.3 Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
16.4 I/O Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 16.4.1 CGMXCLK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327 16.4.2 COPCTL Write . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 16.4.3 Power-On Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327 16.4.4 Internal Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 16.4.5 Reset Vector Fetch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 16.4.6 COPD (COP Disable). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 16.5 16.6 16.7 16.8 16.9 COP Control Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Interrupts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Monitor Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329 Wait Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Stop Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Section 17. External Interrupt (IRQ)
17.1 17.2 17.3 17.4 17.5 17.6 Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 IRQ Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335 IRQ Status and Control Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Section 18. Low-Voltage Inhibit (LVI)
18.1 18.2 18.3 Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Advance Information 17
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Table of Contents
Table of Contents
18.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 18.4.1 Polled LVI Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 18.4.2 Forced Reset Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 18.4.3 False Reset Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339 18.4.4 LVI Trip Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 18.5 18.6 18.7 18.8 LVI Status and Control Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340 LVI Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341 Wait Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 Stop Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Section 19. Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC)
19.1 19.2 19.3 Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
19.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 19.4.1 ADC Port I/O Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 19.4.2 Voltage Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 19.4.3 Conversion Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346 19.4.4 Continuous Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 19.4.5 Result Justification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 19.4.6 Monotonicity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 19.5 19.6 Interrupts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 Wait Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
19.7 I/O Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 19.7.1 ADC Analog Power Pin (VDDAD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 19.7.2 ADC Analog Ground Pin (VSSAD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 19.7.3 ADC Voltage Reference Pin (VREFH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 19.7.4 ADC Voltage Reference Low Pin (VREFL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 19.7.5 ADC Voltage In (ADVIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 19.7.6 ADC External Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 19.7.6.1 VREFH and VREFL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 19.7.6.2 ANx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 19.7.6.3 Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 19.8 I/O Registers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 19.8.1 ADC Status and Control Register. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Advance Information 18 MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Table of Contents MOTOROLA
Table of Contents
19.8.2 19.8.3 19.8.4
ADC Data Register High . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 ADC Data Register Low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 ADC Clock Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Section 20. Power-On Reset (POR)
20.1 20.2 20.3 Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Section 21. Break Module (BRK)
21.1 21.2 21.3 Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
21.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362 21.4.1 Flag Protection During Break Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 21.4.2 CPU During Break Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364 21.4.3 TIM1 and TIM2 During Break Interrupts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 21.4.4 COP During Break Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364 21.5 Low-Power Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 21.5.1 Wait Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364 21.5.2 Stop Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365 21.6 Break Module Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 21.6.1 Break Status and Control Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365 21.6.2 Break Address Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 21.6.3 Break Status Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 21.6.4 Break Flag Control Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Section 22. Electrical Specifications
22.1 22.2 22.3 22.4 22.5 22.6 Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 Absolute Maximum Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 Functional Operating Range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 Thermal Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 DC Electrical Characteristics (VDD = 5.0 Vdc 10%) . . . . . . . 372
Advance Information 19
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Table of Contents
Table of Contents
22.7 22.8 22.9 FLASH Memory Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373 Control Timing (VDD = 5.0 Vdc 10%) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374 Serial Peripheral Interface Characteristics (VDD = 5.0 Vdc 10%) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
22.10 TImer Interface Module Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 22.11 Clock Generation Module Component Specifications . . . . . . 378 22.12 CGM Operating Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 22.13 CGM Acquisition/Lock Time Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 22.14 Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) Characteristics. . . . . . . . .380
Section 23. Mechanical Specifications
23.1 23.2 23.3 23.4 Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 64-Pin Plastic Quad Flat Pack (QFP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382 56-Pin Shrink Dual In-Line Package (SDIP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
Section 24. Ordering Information
24.1 24.2 24.3 Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 Order Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Appendix A. MC68HC908MR16
A.1 A.2 A.3 Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 Memory Map. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Advance Information 20
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Table of Contents MOTOROLA
Advance Information -- MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32
List of Figures
Figure 1-1 1-2 1-3 1-4 2-1 2-2 4-1 4-2 4-3 4-4 5-1 6-1 6-2 6-3 6-4 6-5 6-6 7-1 7-2 7-3 7-4 7-5 7-6 7-7 7-8 7-9 Title Page
MCU Block Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 64-Pin QFP Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 56-Pin SDIP Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Power Supply Bypassing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Memory Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Control, Status, and Data Registers Summary . . . . . . . . . .42 FLASH Control Register (FLCR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 FLASH Programming Flowchart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 FLASH Block Protect Register (FLBPR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 FLASH Block Protect Start Address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Configuration Register (CONFIG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 CPU Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Accumulator (A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Index Register (H:X). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Stack Pointer (SP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Program Counter (PC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75 Condition Code Register (CCR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 SIM Block Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 CGM Clock Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 External Reset Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Sources of Internal Reset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Internal Reset Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 POR Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Interrupt Entry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Interrupt Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Interrupt Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Advance Information 21
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA List of Figures
List of Figures
Figure 7-10 7-11 7-12 7-13 7-14 7-15 7-16 8-1 8-2 8-3 8-4 8-5 8-6 8-7 9-1 9-2 9-3 9-4 9-5 9-6 9-7 9-8 9-9 9-10 9-11 9-12 9-13 9-14 9-15 9-16 9-17 9-18 9-19 9-20 9-21 9-22
Advance Information 22
Title
Page
Interrupt Recognition Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Wait Mode Entry Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Wait Recovery from Interrupt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103 Wait Recovery from Internal Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103 SIM Break Status Register (SBSR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104 SIM Reset Status Register (SRSR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106 SIM Break Flag Control Register (SBFCR) . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 CGM Block Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 CGM I/O Register Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 CGM External Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 CGM I/O Register Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123 PLL Control Register (PCTL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124 PLL Bandwidth Control Register (PBWC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 PLL Programming Register (PPG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128 PWM Module Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137 Register Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Center-Aligned PWM (Positive Polarity). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Edge-Aligned PWM (Positive Polarity) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Reload Frequency Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 PWM Interrupt Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Center-Aligned PWM Value Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Center-Aligned Loading of Modulus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Edge-Aligned PWM Value Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146 Edge-Aligned Modulus Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Complementary Pairing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Typical AC Motor Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Dead-Time Generators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150 Effects of Dead-Time Insertion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Dead-Time at Duty Cycle Boundaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Dead-Time and Small Pulse Widths. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Ideal Complementary Operation (Dead-Time = 0) . . . . . . . 154 Current Convention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Top/Bottom Correction for PWMs 1 and 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 PWM Polarity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 PWM Output Control Register (PWMOUT) . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Dead-Time Insertion During OUTCTL = 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 List of Figures MOTOROLA
List of Figures
Figure 9-23 9-24 9-25 9-26 9-27 9-28 9-29 9-30 9-31 9-32 9-33 9-34 9-35 9-36 9-37 9-38 9-39 9-40 9-41 9-42 9-43 9-44 9-45 9-46 9-47 10-1 10-2 10-3 10-4 10-5 10-6 11-1 11-2 11-3 11-4
Title
Page
Dead-Time Insertion During OUTCTL = 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 PWM Disable Mapping Write-Once Register (DISMAP) . . 161 PWM Disabling Scheme. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 PWM Disabling Decode Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 PWM Disabling in Automatic Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163 PWM Disabling in Manual Mode (Example 1) . . . . . . . . . . 165 PWM Disabling in Manual Mode (Example 2) . . . . . . . . . . 165 PWM Software Disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 PWMEN and PWM Pins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 PWM Counter Register High (PCNTH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 PWM Counter Register Low (PCNTL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 PWM Counter Modulo Register High (PMODH) . . . . . . . . 169 PWM Counter Modulo Register Low (PMODL) . . . . . . . . .169 PWMx Value Registers High (PVALxH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 PWMx Value Registers Low (PVALxL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 PWM Control Register 1 (PCTL1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 PWM Control Register 2 (PCTL2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Dead-Time Write-Once Register (DEADTM) . . . . . . . . . . . 176 PWM Disable Mapping Write-Once Register (DISMAP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176 Fault Control Register (FCR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177 Fault Status Register (FSR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Fault Acknowledge Register (FTACK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 PWM Output Control Register (PWMOUT) . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 PWM Clock Cycle and PWM Cycle Definitions . . . . . . . . .184 PWM Load Cycle/Frequency Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Monitor Mode Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Monitor Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Sample Monitor Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Read Transaction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Break Transaction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Monitor Mode Entry Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 TIMA Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 TIM I/O Register Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 PWM Period and Pulse Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 TIMA Status and Control Register (TASC). . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Advance Information 23
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA List of Figures
List of Figures
Figure 11-5 11-6 11-7 11-8 11-9 12-1 12-2 12-3 12-4 12-5 12-6 12-7 12-8 12-9 13-1 13-2 13-3 13-4 13-5 13-6 13-7 13-8 13-9 13-10 13-11 13-12 13-13 13-14 13-15 14-1 14-2
Advance Information 24
Title
Page
TIMA Counter Registers (TACNTH and TACNTL) . . . . . . . 216 TIMA Counter Modulo Registers (TAMODH and TAMODL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217 TIMA Channel Status and Control Registers (TASC0-TASC3) . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 CHxMAX Latency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 TIMA Channel Registers (TACH0H/L-TACH3H/L) . . . . . . 222 TIMB Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 TIMB I/O Register Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228 PWM Period and Pulse Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 TIMB Status and Control Register (TBSC). . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 TIMB Counter Registers (TBCNTH and TBCNTL) . . . . . . . 240 TIMB Counter Modulo Registers (TBMODH and TBMODL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241 TIMB Channel Status and Control Registers (TBSC0-TBSC1) . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 CHxMAX Latency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 TIMB Channel Registers (TBCH0H/L-TBCH1H/L) . . . . . . 246 SPI Module Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 SPI I/O Register Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Full-Duplex Master-Slave Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Transmission Format (CPHA = 0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 CPHA/SS Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256 Transmission Format (CPHA = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 Transmission Start Delay (Master) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259 Missed Read of Overflow Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Clearing SPRF When OVRF Interrupt Is Not Enabled . . . . 262 SPI Interrupt Request Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 SPRF/SPTE CPU Interrupt Timing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267 CPHA/SS Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270 SPI Control Register (SPCR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272 SPI Status and Control Register (SPSCR). . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 SPI Data Register (SPDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 SCI Module Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 SCI I/O Register Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 List of Figures MOTOROLA
List of Figures
Figure 14-3 14-4 14-5 14-6 14-7 14-8 14-9 14-10 14-11 14-12 14-13 14-14 15-1 15-2 15-3 15-4 15-5 15-6 15-7 15-8 15-9 15-10 15-11 15-12 15-13 15-14 15-15 15-16 15-17 15-18 16-1 16-2 16-3 17-1 17-2
Title
Page
SCI Data Formats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 SCI Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 SCI Receiver Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287 Receiver Data Sampling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 SCI Control Register 1 (SCC1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 SCI Control Register 2 (SCC2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 SCI Control Register 3 (SCC3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 SCI Status Register 1 (SCS1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Flag Clearing Sequence. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 SCI Status Register 2 (SCS2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 SCI Data Register (SCDR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 SCI Baud Rate Register (SCBR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 I/O Port Register Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 Port A Data Register (PTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Data Direction Register A (DDRA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312 Port A I/O Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313 Port B Data Register (PTB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 Data Direction Register B (DDRB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314 Port B I/O Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315 Port C Data Register (PTC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 Data Direction Register C (DDRC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316 Port C I/O Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317 Port D Data Register (PTD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Port D Input Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Port E Data Register (PTE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 Data Direction Register E (DDRE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320 Port E I/O Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320 Port F Data Register (PTF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 Data Direction Register F (DDRF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Port F I/O Circuit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323 COP Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 COP I/O Register Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 COP Control Register (COPCTL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 IRQ Module Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 IRQ I/O Register Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Advance Information 25
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA List of Figures
List of Figures
Figure 17-3 17-4 18-1 18-2 18-3 19-1 19-2 19-3 19-4 19-5 19-6 19-7 19-8 19-9 21-1 21-2 21-3 21-4 21-5 21-6 21-7 22-1 22-2 23-1 23-2 A-1 Title Page
IRQ Interrupt Flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 IRQ Status and Control Register (ISCR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 LVI Module Block Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 LVI I/O Register Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 LVI Status and Control Register (LVISCR) . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 ADC Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 8-Bit Truncation Mode Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 ADC Status and Control Register (ADSCR). . . . . . . . . . . . 351 ADC Data Register High (ADRH) Left Justified Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 ADC Data Register High (ADRH) Right Justified Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 ADC Data Register Low (ADRL) Left Justified Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 ADC Data Register Low (ADRL) Right Justified Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 ADC Data Register Low (ADRL) 8-Bit Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 356 ADC Clock Register (ADCLK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 Break Module Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363 I/O Register Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 Break Status and Control Register (BRKSCR) . . . . . . . . .365 Break Address Register High (BRKH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 Break Address Register Low (BRKL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 SIM Break Status Register (SBSR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367 SIM Break Flag Control Register (SBFCR) . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 SPI Master Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 SPI Slave Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377 MC68HC908MR32FU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382 MC68HC908MR32B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383 MC68HC908MR16 Memory Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Advance Information 26
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 List of Figures MOTOROLA
Advance Information -- MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32
List of Tables
Table 2-1 4-1 6-1 6-2 7-1 7-2 8-1 8-2 9-1 9-2 9-3 9-4 9-5 9-6 9-7 9-8 9-9 9-10 10-1 10-2 10-3 10-4 10-5 10-6 10-7 Title Page
Vector Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53 Examples of Protect Start Address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Instruction Set Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Opcode Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87 Signal Name Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 PIN Bit Set Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94 Variable Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 VCO Frequency Multiplier (N) Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 PWM Prescaler. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 PWM Reload Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 PWM Data Overflow and Underflow Conditions . . . . . . . . . . 147 Current Sense Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Correction Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 OUTx Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Correction Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 PWM Reload Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 PWM Prescaler. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 OUTx Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Mode Differences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188 Monitor Mode Signal Requirements and Options . . . . . . . . .189 READ (Read Memory) Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 WRITE (Write Memory) Command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 IREAD (Indexed Read) Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 IWRITE (Indexed Write) Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 READSP (Read Stack Pointer) Command. . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
Advance Information 27
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA List of Tables
List of Tables
Table 10-8 10-9 11-1 11-2 12-1 12-2 13-1 13-2 13-3 13-4 14-1 14-2 14-3 14-4 14-5 14-6 14-7 15-1 15-2 15-3 15-4 15-5 15-6 18-1 19-1 19-2 24-1 Title Page
RUN (Run User Program) Command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Monitor Baud Rate Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Prescaler Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Mode, Edge, and Level Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Prescaler Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Mode, Edge, and Level Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Pin Name Conventions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 SPI Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 SPI Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271 SPI Master Baud Rate Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Start Bit Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 Data Bit Recovery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289 Stop Bit Recovery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290 Character Format Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 SCI Baud Rate Prescaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 SCI Baud Rate Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 SCI Baud Rate Selection Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308 Port A Pin Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 Port B Pin Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 Port C Pin Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 Port D Pin Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Port E Pin Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 Port F Pin Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 LVIOUT Bit Indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 Mux Channel Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 ADC Clock Divide Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 Order Numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Advance Information 28
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 List of Tables MOTOROLA
Advance Information -- MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32
Section 1. General Description
1.1 Contents
1.2 1.3 1.4 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 MCU Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
1.5 Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 1.5.1 Power Supply Pins (VDD and VSS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 1.5.2 Oscillator Pins (OSC1 and OSC2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 1.5.3 External Reset Pin (RST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 1.5.4 External Interrupt Pin (IRQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 1.5.5 CGM Power Supply Pins (VDDA and VSSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 1.5.6 External Filter Capacitor Pin (CGMXFC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 1.5.7 Analog Power Supply Pins (VDDA and VSSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 1.5.8 ADC Voltage Decoupling Capacitor Pin (VREFH) . . . . . . . . . 36 1.5.9 ADC Voltage Reference Low Pin (VREFL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 1.5.10 Port A Input/Output (I/O) Pins (PTA7-PTA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 1.5.11 Port B I/O Pins (PTB7/ATD7-PTB0/ATD0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 1.5.12 Port C I/O Pins (PTC6-PTC2 and PTC1/ATD9-PTC0/ATD8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37 1.5.13 Port D Input-Only Pins (PTD6/IS3-PTD4/IS1 and PTD3/FAULT4-PTD0/FAULT1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 1.5.14 PWM Pins (PWM6-PWM1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 1.5.15 PWM Ground Pin (PWMGND) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 1.5.16 Port E I/O Pins (PTE7/TCH3A-PTE3/TCLKA and PTE2/TCH1B-PTE0/TCLKB). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 1.5.17 Port F I/O Pins (PTF5/TxD-PTF4/RxD and PTF3/MISO-PTF0/SPSCK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA General Description
Advance Information 29
General Description 1.2 Introduction
The MC68HC908MR32 is a member of the low-cost, high-performance M68HC08 Family of 8-bit microcontroller units (MCUs). The M68HC08 Family is based on the customer-specified integrated circuit (CSIC) design strategy. All MCUs in the family use the enhanced M68HC08 central processor unit (CPU08) and are available with a variety of modules, memory sizes and types, and package types.
1.3 Features
Features of the MC68HC908MR32 include: * * * * High-performance M68HC08 architecture Fully upward-compatible object code with M6805, M146805, and M68HC05 Families 8-MHz internal bus frequency On-chip FLASH memory with in-circuit programming capabilities of FLASH program memory: MC68HC908MR32 -- 32 Kbytes MC68HC908MR16 -- 16 Kbytes On-chip programming firmware for use with host personal computer FLASH data security(1) 768 bytes of on-chip random-access memory (RAM) 12-bit, 6-channel center-aligned or edge-aligned pulse-width modulator (PWMMC) Serial peripheral interface module (SPI) Serial communications interface module (SCI) 16-bit, 4-channel timer interface module (TIMA) 16-bit, 2-channel timer interface module (TIMB) Clock generator module (CGM)
* * * * * * * * *
1. No security feature is absolutely secure. However, Motorola's strategy is to make reading or copying the FLASH difficult for unauthorized users.
Advance Information 30
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 General Description MOTOROLA
General Description MCU Block Diagram
* * *
Low-voltage inhibit (LVI) module with software selectable trip points 10-bit, 10-channel analog-to-digital converter (ADC) System protection features: - Optional computer operating properly (COP) reset - Low-voltage detection with optional reset - Illegal opcode or address detection with optional reset - Fault detection with optional PWM disabling Available packages: - 64-pin plastic quad flat pack (QFP) - 56-pin shrink dual in-line package (SDIP) Low-power design, fully static with wait mode Master reset pin (RST) and power-on reset (POR) Stop mode as an option Break module (BRK) supports setting the in-circuit simulator (ICS) single break point
*
* * * *
Features of the CPU08 include: * * * * * * * * * * Enhanced M68HC05 programming model Extensive loop control functions 16 addressing modes (eight more than the M68HC05) 16-bit index register and stack pointer Memory-to-memory data transfers Fast 8 x 8 multiply instruction Fast 16/8 divide instruction Binary-coded decimal (BCD) instructions Optimization for controller applications C language support
1.4 MCU Block Diagram
Figure 1-1 shows the structure of the MC68HC908MR32.
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA General Description Advance Information 31
General Description
DDRA
PTA
DDRB
USER FLASH -- 32,256 BYTES TIMER INTERFACE MODULE A USER RAM -- 768 BYTES TIMER INTERFACE MODULE B SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE MODULE
PTB
DDRC
USER FLASH VECTOR SPACE -- 46 BYTES
PTC
RST
SYSTEM INTEGRATION MODULE IRQ MODULE ANALOG-TO-DIGITAL CONVERTER MODULE
POWER-ON RESET MODULE
IRQ VDDA VSSA(3) VREFL(3 VREFH PWMGND PWM6-PWM1 VSS VDD VDDA VSSA
SINGLE BRKPT BREAK MODULE
PTD
DDRE
PTF0/SPSCK(1) POWER Notes: 1. These pins are not available in the 56-pin SDIP package. 2. This module is not available in the 56-pin SDIP package. 3. In the 56-pin SDIP package, these pins are bonded together.
Figure 1-1. MCU Block Diagram
DDRF
PTF
PULSE-WIDTH MODULATOR MODULE
PTF5/TxD PTF4/RxD PTF3/MISO(1) PTF2/MOSI(1) PTF1/SS(1)
PTE
32 General Description MOTOROLA
Advance Information MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0
INTERNAL BUS M68HC08 CPU CPU REGISTERS ARITHMETIC/LOGIC UNIT PTA7-PTA0 PTB7/ATD7 PTB6/ATD6 PTB5/ATD5 PTB4/ATD4 PTB3/ATD3 PTB2/ATD2 PTB1/ATD1 PTB0/ATD0 PTC6 PTC5 PTC4 PTC3 PTC2 PTC1/ATD9(1) PTC0/ATD8 PTD6/IS3 PTD5/IS2 PTD4/IS1 PTD3/FAULT4 PTD2/FAULT3 PTD1/FAULT2 PTD0/FAULT1 PTE7/TCH3A PTE6/TCH2A PTE5/TCH1A PTE4/TCH0A PTE3/TCLKA PTE2/TCH1B(1) PTE1/TCH0B(1) PTE0/TCLKB(1)
LOW-VOLTAGE INHIBIT MODULE
CONTROL AND STATUS REGISTERS -- 112 BYTES
COMPUTER OPERATING PROPERLY MODULE
MONITOR ROM -- 240 BYTES
OSC1 OSC2 CGMXFC
CLOCK GENERATOR MODULE
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE MODULE
General Description Pin Assignments
1.5 Pin Assignments
Figure 1-2 shows the 64-pin QFP pin assignments and Figure 1-3 shows the 56-pin SDIP pin assignments.
PTB1/ATD1
PTB0/ATD0
CGMXFC
PTA6
OSC2
OSC1
PTA7
PTA5
PTA4
PTA3
PTA2
PTA1
PTA0
VDDA

VSSA

PTB2/ATD2 PTB3/ATD3 PTB4/ATD4 PTB5/ATD5 PTB6/ATD6 PTB7/ATD7 PTC0/ATD8 PTC1/ATD9 VDDA VSSA VREFL VREFH PTC2 PTC3 PTC4 PTC5

RST

IRQ PTF5/TxD PTF4/RxD PTF3/MISO PTF2/MOSI PTF1/SS PTF0/SPSCK VSS VDD PTE7/TCH3A PTE6/TCH2A PTE5/TCH1A PTE4/TCH0A PTE3/TCLKA PTE2/TCH1B

PTE1/TCH0B
PWMGND
PTD0/FAULT1
PTD1/FAULT2
PTD2/FAULT3
PTD3/FAULT4
Figure 1-2. 64-Pin QFP Pin Assignments
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA General Description
PTE0/TCLKB
PTD5/IS2
PTD4/IS1
PTD6/IS3
PWM1
PWM2
PWM3
PWM4
PTC6
PWM5
PWM6
Advance Information 33
General Description
PTA2 PTA3 PTA4 PTA5 PTA6 PTA7 PTB0/ATD0 PTB1/ATD1 PTB2/ATD2 PTB3/ATD3 PTB4/ATD4 PTB5/ATD5 PTB6/ATD5 PTB7/ATD7 PTC0/ATD8 VDDAD VSSAD/V REFL VREFH PTC2 PTC3 PTC4 PTC5 PTC6 PTD0/FAULT1 PTD1/FAULT2 PTD2/FAULT3 PTD3/FAULT4 PTD4/IS1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29
PTA1 PTA0 VSSA OSC2 OSC1 CGMXFC VDDA RST IRQ PTF5/TxD PTF4/RxD VSS VDD PTE7/TCH3A PTE6/TCH2A PTE5/TCH1A PTE4/TCH0A PTE3/TCLKA NC PWM6 PWM5 PWMGND PWM4 PWM3 PWM2 PWM1 PTD6/IS3 PTD5/IS2
Note: PTC1, PTE0, PTE1, PTE2, PTF0, PTF1, PTF2, and PTF3 are removed from this package.
Figure 1-3. 56-Pin SDIP Pin Assignments
Advance Information 34
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 General Description MOTOROLA
General Description Pin Assignments
1.5.1 Power Supply Pins (VDD and VSS) VDD and VSS are the power supply and ground pins. The MCU operates from a single power supply. Fast signal transitions on MCU pins place high, short-duration current demands on the power supply. To prevent noise problems, take special care to provide power supply bypassing at the MCU as Figure 1-4 shows. Place the C1 bypass capacitor as close to the MCU as possible. Use a high-frequency-response ceramic capacitor for C1. C2 is an optional bulk current bypass capacitor for use in applications that require the port pins to source high-current levels.
MCU VDD VSS
C1 0.1 F + C2 1-10 F VDD Note: Component values shown represent typical applications.
Figure 1-4. Power Supply Bypassing
1.5.2 Oscillator Pins (OSC1 and OSC2) The OSC1 and OSC2 pins are the connections for the on-chip oscillator circuit. For more detailed information, see Section 8. Clock Generator Module (CGM).
1.5.3 External Reset Pin (RST) A logic 0 on the RST pin forces the MCU to a known startup state. RST is bidirectional, allowing a reset of the entire system. It is driven low when
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA General Description Advance Information 35
General Description
any internal reset source is asserted. See Section 7. System Integration Module (SIM).
1.5.4 External Interrupt Pin (IRQ) IRQ is an asynchronous external interrupt pin. See Section 17. External Interrupt (IRQ).
1.5.5 CGM Power Supply Pins (VDDA and VSSA) VDDA and VSSA are the power supply pins for the analog portion of the clock generator module (CGM). Decoupling of these pins should be per the digital supply. See Section 8. Clock Generator Module (CGM).
1.5.6 External Filter Capacitor Pin (CGMXFC) CGMXFC is an external filter capacitor connection for the CGM. See Section 8. Clock Generator Module (CGM).
1.5.7 Analog Power Supply Pins (VDDA and VSSA) VDDAD and VSSA are the power supply pins for the analog-to-digital converter. Decoupling of these pins should be per the digital supply. See Section 19. Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC).
1.5.8 ADC Voltage Decoupling Capacitor Pin (VREFH) VREFH is the power supply for setting the reference voltage. Connect the VREFH pin to the same voltage potential as VDDAD. See Section 19. Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC).
1.5.9 ADC Voltage Reference Low Pin (VREFL) VREFL is the lower reference supply for the ADC. Connect the VREFL pin to the same voltage potential as VSSAD. See Section 19. Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC).
Advance Information 36
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 General Description MOTOROLA
General Description Pin Assignments
1.5.10 Port A Input/Output (I/O) Pins (PTA7-PTA0) PTA7-PTA0 are general-purpose bidirectional input/output (I/O) port pins. See Section 15. Input/Output (I/O) Ports.
1.5.11 Port B I/O Pins (PTB7/ATD7-PTB0/ATD0) Port B is an 8-bit special function port that shares all eight pins with the analog-to-digital converter (ADC). See Section 19. Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) and Section 15. Input/Output (I/O) Ports.
1.5.12 Port C I/O Pins (PTC6-PTC2 and PTC1/ATD9-PTC0/ATD8) PTC6-PTC2 are general-purpose bidirectional I/O port pins (see Section 15. Input/Output (I/O) Ports). PTC1/ATD9-PTC0/ATD8 are special function port pins that are shared with the analog-to-digital converter (ADC). See Section 19. Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) and Section 15. Input/Output (I/O) Ports.
1.5.13 Port D Input-Only Pins (PTD6/IS3-PTD4/IS1 and PTD3/FAULT4-PTD0/FAULT1) PTD6/IS3-PTD4/IS1 are special function input-only port pins that also serve as current sensing pins for the pulse-width modulator module (PWMMC). PTD3/FAULT4-PTD0/FAULT1 are special function port pins that also serve as fault pins for the PWMMC. See Section 9. Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control (PWMMC) and Section 15. Input/Output (I/O) Ports.
1.5.14 PWM Pins (PWM6-PWM1) PWM6-PWM1 are dedicated pins used for the outputs of the pulse-width modulator module (PWMMC). These are high-current sink pins. See Section 9. Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control (PWMMC) and Section 22. Electrical Specifications.
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA General Description
Advance Information 37
General Description
1.5.15 PWM Ground Pin (PWMGND) PWMGND is the ground pin for the pulse-width modulator module (PWMMC). This dedicated ground pin is used as the ground for the six high-current PWM pins. See Section 9. Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control (PWMMC).
1.5.16 Port E I/O Pins (PTE7/TCH3A-PTE3/TCLKA and PTE2/TCH1B-PTE0/TCLKB) Port E is an 8-bit special function port that shares its pins with the two timer interface modules (TIMA and TIMB). See Section 11. Timer Interface A (TIMA), Section 12. Timer Interface B (TIMB), and Section 15. Input/Output (I/O) Ports.
1.5.17 Port F I/O Pins (PTF5/TxD-PTF4/RxD and PTF3/MISO-PTF0/SPSCK) Port F is a 6-bit special function port that shares two of its pins with the serial communications interface module (SCI) and four of its pins with the serial peripheral interface module (SPI). See Section 13. Serial Peripheral Interface Module (SPI), Section 14. Serial Communications Interface Module (SCI), and Section 15. Input/Output (I/O) Ports.
Advance Information 38
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 General Description MOTOROLA
Advance Information -- MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32
Section 2. Memory Map
2.1 Contents
2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Unimplemented Memory Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Reserved Memory Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 I/O Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Monitor ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
2.2 Introduction
The central processor unit (CPU08) can address 64 Kbytes of memory space. The memory map, shown in Figure 2-1, includes: * * * * 32 Kbytes of FLASH 768 bytes of random-access memory (RAM) 46 bytes of user-defined vectors 240 bytes of monitor read-only memory (ROM)
2.3 Unimplemented Memory Locations
Some addresses are unimplemented. Accessing an unimplemented address can cause an illegal address reset. In the memory map and in the input/output (I/O) register summary, unimplemented addresses are shaded. Some I/O bits are read only; the write function is unimplemented. Writing to a read-only I/O bit has no effect on microcontroller unit (MCU) operation. In register figures, the write function of read-only bits is shaded.
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Memory Map
Advance Information 39
Memory Map
Similarly, some I/O bits are write only; the read function is unimplemented. Reading of write-only I/O bits has no effect on MCU operation. In register figures, the read function of write-only bits is shaded.
2.4 Reserved Memory Locations
Some addresses are reserved. Writing to a reserved address can have unpredictable effects on MCU operation. In the memory map, Figure 2-1, and in the I/O register summary, Figure 2-2, reserved addresses are marked with the word reserved. Some I/O bits are reserved. Writing to a reserved bit can have unpredictable effects on MCU operation. In register figures, reserved bits are marked with the letter R.
2.5 I/O Section
Addresses $0000-$005F, shown in Figure 2-2, contain most of the control, status, and data registers. Additional I/O registers have these addresses: * * * * * * * * * * $FE00, SIM break status register (SBSR) $FE01, SIM reset status register (SRSR) $FE03, SIM break flag control register (SBFCR) $FE07, FLASH control register (FLCR) $FE0C, Break address register high (BRKH) $FE0D, Break address register low (BRKL) $FE0E, Break status and control register (BRKSCR) $FE0F, LVI status and control register (LVISCR) $FF7E, FLASH block protect register (FLBPR) $FFFF, COP control register (COPCTL)
Advance Information 40
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Memory Map MOTOROLA
Memory Map I/O Section
$0000 $005F $0060 $035F $0360 $7FFF $8000 $FDFF $FE00 $FE01 $FE02 $FE03 $FE04 $FE05 $FE06 $FE07 $FE08 $FE09 $FE0A $FE0B $FE0C $FE0D $FE0E $FE0F $FE10 $FEFF $FF00 $FF7D $FF7E $FF7F $FFD1 $FFD2 $FFFF
I/O REGISTERS -- 96 BYTES
RAM -- 768 BYTES
UNIMPLEMENTED -- 31,904 BYTES
FLASH -- 32,256 BYTES SIM BREAK STATUS REGISTER (SBSR) SIM RESET STATUS REGISTER (SRSR) RESERVED SIM BREAK FLAG CONTROL REGISTER (SBFCR) RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED FLASH CONTROL REGISTER (FLCR) UNIMPLEMENTED UNIMPLEMENTED UNIMPLEMENTED SIM BREAK ADDRESS REGISTER HIGH (BRKH) SIM BREAK ADDRESS REGISTER LOW (BRKL) SIM BREAK FLAG CONTROL REGISTER (SBFCR) LVI STATUS AND CONTROL REGISTER (LVISCR) MONITOR ROM -- 240 BYTES
UNIMPLEMENTED -- 126 BYTES FLASH BLOCK PROTECT REGISTER (FLBPR) UNIMPLEMENTED -- 83 BYTES
VECTORS -- 46 BYTES
Figure 2-1. Memory Map
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Memory Map
Advance Information 41
Memory Map
Addr.
Register Name
Bit 7
6 PTA6
5 PTA5
4 PTA4
3 PTA3
2 PTA2
1 PTA1
Bit 0 PTA0
$0000
Read: Port A Data Register PTA7 (PTA) Write: See page 312. Reset: Read: Port B Data Register PTB7 (PTB) Write: See page 314. Reset: Read: Port C Data Register (PTC) Write: See page 316. Reset: Read: Port D Data Register (PTD) Write: See page 318. Reset: 0
Unaffected by reset PTB6 PTB5 PTB4 PTB3 PTB2 PTB1 PTB0
$0001
Unaffected by reset PTC6 PTC5 PTC4 PTC3 PTC2 PTC1 PTC0
$0002
R Unaffected by reset 0 R PTD6 R PTD5 R PTD4 R PTD3 R PTD2 R PTD1 R PTD0 R
$0003
Unaffected by reset DDRA6 0 DDRB6 0 DDRC6 R 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DDRA5 0 DDRB5 0 DDRC5 DDRA4 0 DDRB4 0 DDRC4 DDRA3 0 DDRB3 0 DDRC3 DDRA2 0 DDRB2 0 DDRC2 DDRA1 0 DDRB1 0 DDRC1 DDRA0 0 DDRB0 0 DDRC0
$0004
Read: Data Direction Register A DDRA7 (DDRA) Write: See page 312. Reset: 0 Read: Data Direction Register B DDRB7 (DDRB) Write: See page 314. Reset: 0 Read: Data Direction Register C (DDRC) Write: See page 316. Reset: 0
$0005
$0006
$0007 Read: Port E Data Register PTE7 (PTE) Write: See page 319. Reset: Read: Port F Data Register (PTF) Write: See page 321. Reset: X = Indeterminate 0 R
Unimplemented
PTE6
PTE5
PTE4
PTE3
PTE2
PTE1
PTE0
$0008
Unaffected by reset 0 PTF5 R Unaffected by reset PTF4 PTF3 PTF2 PTF1 PTF0
$0009
U = Unaffected
R
= Reserved
Bold
= Buffered
= Unimplemented
Figure 2-2. Control, Status, and Data Registers Summary (Sheet 1 of 11)
Advance Information 42
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Memory Map MOTOROLA
Memory Map I/O Section
Addr. $000A $000B
Register Name
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
Unimplemented Unimplemented Read: Data Direction Register E DDRE7 (DDRE) Write: See page 320. Reset: 0 Read: Data Direction Register F (DDRF) Write: See page 322. Reset: Read: TIMA Status/Control Register (TASC) Write: See page 214. Reset: 0 R
DDRE6 0 0
DDRE5 0 DDRF5
DDRE4 0 DDRF4 0 0
DDRE3 0 DDRF3 0 0
DDRE2 0 DDRF2 0 PS2
DDRE1 0 DDRF1 0 PS1 0 Bit 9 R 0 Bit 1 R 0 9 1 Bit 1 1 TOV0 0
DDRE0 0 DDRF0 0 PS0 0 Bit 8 R 0 Bit 0 R 0 Bit 8 1 Bit 0 1 CH0MAX 0
$000C
$000D
R 0
TOF TOIE 0 0 0 Bit 14 R 0 Bit 6 R 0 14 1 Bit 6 1 CH0IE 0 = Reserved 1 Bit 13 R 0 Bit 5 R 0 13 1 Bit 5 1 MS0B 0 TSTOP
$000E
TRST 0 Bit 12 R 0 Bit 4 R 0 12 1 Bit 4 1 MS0A 0 Bold
R 0 Bit 11 R 0 Bit 3 R 0 11 1 Bit 3 1 ELS0B 0 = Buffered 0 Bit 10 R 0 Bit 2 R 0 10 1 Bit 2 1 ELS0A 0
$000F
Read: Bit 15 TIMA Counter Register High (TACNTH) Write: R See page 216. Reset: 0 Read: TIMA Counter Register Low (TACNTL) Write: See page 216. Reset: Bit 7 R 0
$0010
$0011
Read: TIMA Counter Modulo Bit 15 Register High (TAMODH) Write: See page 217. Reset: 1 Read: TIMA Counter Modulo Register Low (TAMODL) Write: See page 217. Reset: Bit 7 1
$0012
Read: CH0F TIMA Channel 0 Status/Control 0 $0013 Register (TASC0) Write: See page 218. Reset: 0 U = Unaffected X = Indeterminate R
= Unimplemented
Figure 2-2. Control, Status, and Data Registers Summary (Sheet 2 of 11)
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Memory Map
Advance Information 43
Memory Map
Addr.
Register Name
Bit 7
6 Bit 14
5 Bit 13
4 Bit 12
3 Bit 11
2 Bit 10
1 Bit 9
Bit 0 Bit 8
Read: TIMA Channel 0 Register High Bit 15 $0014 (TACH0H) Write: See page 222. Reset: Read: TIMA Channel 0 Register Low $0015 (TACH0L) Write: See page 222. Reset: Bit 7
Indeterminate after reset Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Indeterminate after reset 0 CH1IE R 0 Bit 14 0 Bit 13 0 Bit 12 0 Bit 11 0 Bit 10 0 Bit 9 0 Bit 8 MS1A ELS1B ELS1A TOV1 CH1MAX
Read: CH1F TIMA Channel 1 Status/Control 0 $0016 Register (TASC1) Write: See page 222. Reset: 0 Read: TIMA Channel 1 Register High Bit 15 $0017 (TACH1H) Write: See page 222. Reset: Read: TIMA Channel 1 Register Low $0018 (TACH1L) Write: See page 222. Reset: Bit 7
Indeterminate after reset Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Indeterminate after reset CH2IE 0 Bit 14 MS2B 0 Bit 13 MS2A 0 Bit 12 ELS2B 0 Bit 11 ELS2A 0 Bit 10 TOV2 0 Bit 9 CH2MAX 0 Bit 8
Read: CH2F TIMA Channel 2 Status/Control 0 $0019 Register (TASC2) Write: See page 218. Reset: 0 Read: TIMA Channel 2 Register High Bit 15 $001A (TACH2H) Write: See page 222. Reset: Read: TIMA Channel 2 Register Low $001B (TACH2L) Write: See page 222. Reset: Bit 7
Indeterminate after reset Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Indeterminate after reset 0 CH3IE R 0 = Reserved 0 0 Bold 0 = Buffered 0 0 0 MS3A ELS3B ELS3A TOV3 CH3MAX
Read: CH3F TIMA Channel 3 Status/Control 0 $001C Register (TASC3) Write: See page 218. Reset: 0 U = Unaffected X = Indeterminate R
= Unimplemented
Figure 2-2. Control, Status, and Data Registers Summary (Sheet 3 of 11)
Advance Information 44
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Memory Map MOTOROLA
Memory Map I/O Section
Addr.
Register Name
Bit 7
6 Bit 14
5 Bit 13
4 Bit 12
3 Bit 11
2 Bit 10
1 Bit 9
Bit 0 Bit 8
Read: TIMA Channel 3 Register High Bit 15 $001D (TACH3H) Write: See page 222. Reset: Read: TIMA Channel 3 Register Low $001E (TACH3L) Write: See page 222. Reset: Bit 7
Indeterminate after reset Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Indeterminate after reset INDEP 0 PWMF 0 IPOL1 0 FINT3 0 FPIN3 0 FMODE3 0 FFLAG3 LVIRST 1 ISENS1 0 IPOL2 0 FINT2 0 FPIN2 LVIPWR 1 ISENS0 0 IPOL3 0 FMODE2 0 FFLAG2 STOPE 0 LDOK 0 PRSC1 0 FINT1 0 FPIN1 COPD 0 PWMEN 0 PRSC0 0 FMODE1 0 FFLAG1
$001F
Read: Configuration Register EDGE BOTNEG TOPNEG (CONFIG) Write: See page 68. Reset: 0 0 0 Read: PWM Control Register 1 (PCTL1) Write: See page 171. Reset: DISX 0 DISY 0 LDFQ0 0 PWMINT 0 0
$0020
$0021
Read: PWM Control Register 2 LDFQ1 (PCTL2) Write: See page 174. Reset: 0
$0022
Read: Fault Control Register FINT4 FMODE4 (FCR) Write: See page 177. Reset: 0 0 Read: FPIN4 Fault Status Register (FSR) Write: See page 179. Reset: U Read: Fault Acknowledge Register (FTACK) Write: See page 180. Reset: Read: PWM Output Control Register (PWMOUT) Write: See page 182. Reset: X = Indeterminate 0 FFLAG4
$0023
0 0 FTACK4
U DT6
0 DT5 FTACK3
U DT4
0 DT3 FTACK2
U DT2
0 DT1 FTACK1
$0024
0 0
0 OUTCTL
0 OUT6 0
0 OUT5 0 Bold
0 OUT4 0 = Buffered
0 OUT3 0
0 OUT2 0
0 OUT1 0
$0025
0 R
0 = Reserved
U = Unaffected
= Unimplemented
Figure 2-2. Control, Status, and Data Registers Summary (Sheet 4 of 11)
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Memory Map
Advance Information 45
Memory Map
Addr.
Register Name Read: PWM Counter Register High (PCNTH) Write: See page 168. Reset: Read: PWM Counter Register Low (PCNTL) Write: See page 168. Reset:
Bit 7 0
6 0
5 0
4 0
3 Bit 11
2 Bit 10
1 Bit 9
Bit 0 Bit 8
$0026
0 Bit 7
0 Bit 6
0 Bit 5
0 Bit 4
0 Bit 3
0 Bit 2
0 Bit 1
0 Bit 0
$0027
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 Bit 11
0 Bit 10 X Bit 2 X Bit 10 0 Bit 2 0 Bit 10 0 Bit 2 0 Bit 10 0
0 Bit 9 X Bit 1 X Bit 9 0 Bit 1 0 Bit 9 0 Bit 1 0 Bit 9 0
0 Bit 8 X Bit 0 X Bit 8 0 Bit 0 0 Bit 8 0 Bit 0 0 Bit 8 0
Read: PWM Counter Modulo Register $0028 High (PMODH) Write: See page 169. Reset: Read: PWM Counter Modulo Register $0029 Low (PMODL) Write: See page 169. Reset:
0 Bit 7 X
0 Bit 6 X Bit 14 0 Bit 6 0 Bit 14 0 Bit 6 0 Bit 14 0 = Reserved
0 Bit 5 X Bit 13 0 Bit 5 0 Bit 13 0 Bit 5 0 Bit 13 0
0 Bit 4 X Bit 12 0 Bit 4 0 Bit 12 0 Bit 4 0 Bit 12 0 Bold
X Bit 3 X Bit 11 0 Bit 3 0 Bit 11 0 Bit 3 0 Bit 11 0 = Buffered
$002A
Read: PWM 1 Value Register High Bit 15 (PVAL1H) Write: See page 170. Reset: 0 Read: PWM 1 Value Register Low (PVAL1L) Write: See page 170. Reset: Bit 7 0
$002B
$002C
Read: PWM 2 Value Register High Bit 15 (PVAL2H) Write: See page 170. Reset: 0 Read: PWM 2 Value Register Low (PVAL2L) Write: See page 170. Reset: Bit 7 0
$002D
$002E
Read: PWM 3 Value Register High Bit 15 (PVAL3H) Write: See page 170. Reset: 0 X = Indeterminate R
U = Unaffected
= Unimplemented
Figure 2-2. Control, Status, and Data Registers Summary (Sheet 5 of 11)
Advance Information 46
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Memory Map MOTOROLA
Memory Map I/O Section
Addr.
Register Name Read: PWM 3 Value Register Low (PVAL3L) Write: See page 170. Reset:
Bit 7 Bit 7 0
6 Bit 6 0 Bit 14 0 Bit 6 0 Bit 14 0 Bit 6 0 Bit 14 0 Bit 6 0 Bit 6 1 Bit 6 1 = Reserved
5 Bit 5 0 Bit 13 0 Bit 5 0 Bit 13 0 Bit 5 0 Bit 13 0 Bit 5 0 Bit 5 1 Bit 5 1
4 Bit 4 0 Bit 12 0 Bit 4 0 Bit 12 0 Bit 4 0 Bit 12 0 Bit 4 0 Bit 4 1 Bit 4 1 Bold
3 Bit 3 0 Bit 11 0 Bit 3 0 Bit 11 0 Bit 3 0 Bit 11 0 Bit 3 0 Bit 3 1 Bit 3 1 = Buffered
2 Bit 2 0 Bit 10 0 Bit 2 0 Bit 10 0 Bit 2 0 Bit 10 0 Bit 2 0 Bit 2 1 Bit 2 1
1 Bit 1 0 Bit 9 0 Bit 1 0 Bit 9 0 Bit 1 0 Bit 9 0 Bit 1 0 Bit 1 1 Bit 1 1
Bit 0 Bit 0 0 Bit 8 0 Bit 0 0 Bit 8 0 Bit 0 0 Bit 8 0 Bit 0 0 Bit 0 1 Bit 0 1
$002F
$0030
Read: PWM 4 Value Register High Bit 15 (PVAL4H) Write: See page 170. Reset: 0 Read: PWM 4 Value Register Low (PVAL4L) Write: See page 170. Reset: Bit 7 0
$0031
$0032
Read: PWM 5 Value Register High Bit 15 (PMVAL5H) Write: See page 170. Reset: 0 Read: PWM 5 Value Register Low (PVAL5L) Write: See page 170. Reset: Bit 7 0
$0033
$0034
Read: PWM 6 Value Register High Bit 15 (PVAL6H) Write: See page 170. Reset: 0 Read: PWM 6 Value Register Low (PMVAL6L) Write: See page 170. Reset: Read: Dead-Time Write-Once Register (DEADTM) Write: See page 176. Reset: Read: PWM Disable Mapping Write-Once Register Write: (DISMAP) See page 161. Reset: X = Indeterminate Bit 7 0 Bit 7 1 Bit 7 1 R
$0035
$0036
$0037
U = Unaffected
= Unimplemented
Figure 2-2. Control, Status, and Data Registers Summary (Sheet 6 of 11)
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Memory Map
Advance Information 47
Memory Map
Addr.
Register Name
Bit 7
6 ENSCI 0 TCIE 0 T8
5 TXINV 0 SCRIE 0 0 R
4 M 0 ILIE 0 0
3 WAKE 0 TE 0 ORIE
2 ILTY 0 RE 0 NEIE 0 NF R 0 0 R 0 R2 T2
1 PEN 0 RWU 0 FEIE 0 FE R 0 BKF R 0 R1 T1
Bit 0 PTY 0 SBK 0 PEIE 0 PE R 0 RPF R 0 R0 T0
$0038
Read: SCI Control Register 1 LOOPS (SCC1) Write: See page 295. Reset: 0 Read: SCI Control Register 2 SCTIE (SCC2) Write: See page 298. Reset: 0 Read: SCI Control Register 3 (SCC3) Write: See page 300. Reset: R8 R U
$0039
$003A
R 0 IDLE R 0 0 R 0 R4 T4 0 OR R 0 0 R 0 R3 T3
U TC R 1 0 R 0 R6 T6
0 SCRF R 0 0 R 0 R5 T5
$003B
Read: SCTE SCI Status Register 1 (SCS1) Write: R See page 302. Reset: 1 Read: SCI Status Register 2 (SCS2) Write: See page 305. Reset: Read: SCI Data Register (SCDR) Write: See page 306. Reset: Read: SCI Baud Rate Register (SCBR) Write: See page 306. Reset: Read: IRQ Status/Control Register (ISCR) Write: See page 336. Reset: 0 R 0 R7 T7
$003C
$003D
Unaffected by reset 0 R 0 0 R 0 0 SCP1 R 0 0 R 0 AIEN 0 = Reserved 0 0 R 0 ADCO 0 0 0 IRQF R 0 ADCH4 1 Bold 0 ADCH3 1 = Buffered ACK1 0 ADCH2 1 0 ADCH1 1 0 ADCH0 1 SCP0 R 0 0 0 IMASK1 MODE1 0 0 0 SCR2 SCR1 SCR0
$003E
$003F
$0040
Read: COCO/ ADC Status and Control Register (ADSCR) Write: IDMAS See page 351. Reset: 0 X = Indeterminate R
U = Unaffected
= Unimplemented
Figure 2-2. Control, Status, and Data Registers Summary (Sheet 7 of 11)
Advance Information 48
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Memory Map MOTOROLA
Memory Map I/O Section
Addr.
Register Name Read: ADC Data Register High Right Justified Mode(ADRH) Write: See page 354. Reset: Read: ADC Data Register Low Right Justified Mode (ADRL) Write: See page 355. Reset:
Bit 7 0 R
6 0 R
5 0 R
4 0 R
3 0 R
2 0 R
1 AD9 R
Bit 0 AD8 R
$0041
Unaffected by reset AD7 R AD6 R AD5 R AD4 R AD3 R AD2 R AD1 R AD0 R
$0042
Unaffected by reset 0 ADIV1 1 R 0 ERRIE R 0 R6 T6 0 R5 T5 R 0 R4 T4 R 1 R3 T3 0 R2 T2 0 R1 T1 0 R0 T0 ADIV0 1 SPMSTR 1 OVRF ADICLK 1 CPOL 0 MODF MODE1 0 CPHA 1 SPTE MODFEN SPR1 SPR0 MODE0 0 SPWOM 0 0 R 0 SPE 0 0 SPTIE 0
$0043
Read: ADC Clock Register ADIV2 (ADCLK) Write: See page 356. Reset: 0 Read: SPI Control Register SPRIE (SPCR) Write: See page 272. Reset: 0 Read: SPRF SPI Status and Control R Register (SPSCR) Write: See page 274. Reset: 0 Read: SPI Data Register (SPDR) Write: See page 277. Reset: R7 T7
$0044
$0045
$0046
Unaffected by reset Unimplemented
$0047 $0050
Unimplemented
$0051
Read: TIMB Status/Control Register (TBSC) Write: See page 238. Reset:
TOF TOIE 0 0 0 Bit 14 R 0 = Reserved 1 Bit 13 R 0 TSTOP
0 TRST 0 Bit 12 R 0 Bold
0 PS2 R 0 Bit 11 R 0 = Buffered 0 Bit 10 R 0 0 Bit 9 R 0 0 Bit 8 R 0 PS1 PS0
$0052
Read: Bit 15 TIMB Counter Register High (TBCNTH) Write: R See page 240. Reset: 0 X = Indeterminate R
U = Unaffected
= Unimplemented
Figure 2-2. Control, Status, and Data Registers Summary (Sheet 8 of 11)
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Memory Map
Advance Information 49
Memory Map
Addr.
Register Name Read: TIMB Counter Register Low (TBCNTL) Write: See page 240. Reset:
Bit 7 Bit 7 R 0
6 Bit 6 R 0 Bit 14 1 Bit 6 1 CH0IE 0 Bit 14
5 Bit 5 R 0 Bit 13 1 Bit 5 1 MS0B 0 Bit 13
4 Bit 4 R 0 Bit 12 1 Bit 4 1 MS0A 0 Bit 12
3 Bit 3 R 0 Bit 11 1 Bit 3 1 ELS0B 0 Bit 11
2 Bit 2 R 0 Bit 10 1 Bit 2 1 ELS0A 0 Bit 10
1 Bit 1 R 0 Bit 9 1 Bit 1 1 TOV0 0 Bit 9
Bit 0 Bit 0 R 0 Bit 8 1 Bit 0 1 CH0MAX 0 Bit 8
$0053
Read: TIMB Counter Modulo Register Bit 15 $0054 High (TBMODH) Write: See page 241. Reset: 1 Read: TIMB Counter Modulo Register $0055 Low (TBMODL) Write: See page 241. Reset: Bit 7 1
Read: CH0F TIMB Channel 0 Status/Control 0 $0056 Register Write: (TBSC0) See page 242. Reset: 0 Read: TIMB Channel 0 Register High Bit 15 $0057 (TBCH0H) Write: See page 246. Reset: Read: TIMB Channel 0 Register Low $0058 (TBCH0L) Write: See page 246. Reset: Bit 7
Indeterminate after reset Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Indeterminate after reset 0 CH1IE R 0 Bit 14 0 Bit 13 0 Bit 12 0 Bit 11 0 Bit 10 0 Bit 9 0 Bit 8 MS1A ELS1B ELS1A TOV1 CH1MAX
Read: CH1F TIMB Channel 1 Status/Control 0 $0059 Register Write: (TBSC1) See page 242. Reset: 0 Read: TIMB Channel 1 Register High Bit 15 $005A (TBCH1H) Write: See page 246. Reset: Read: TIMB Channel 1 Register Low $005B (TBCH1L) Write: See page 246. Reset: U = Unaffected X = Indeterminate Bit 7
Indeterminate after reset Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Indeterminate after reset R = Reserved Bold = Buffered = Unimplemented
Figure 2-2. Control, Status, and Data Registers Summary (Sheet 9 of 11)
Advance Information 50
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Memory Map MOTOROLA
Memory Map I/O Section
Addr.
Register Name
Bit 7
6 PLLF
5 PLLON
4 BCS
3 1 R
2 1 R 1 0 R 0 VRS6 1
1 1 R 1 0 R 0 VRS5 1
Bit 0 1 R 1 0 R 0 VRS4 0
$005C
Read: PLL Control Register PLLIE (PCTL) Write: See page 124. Reset: 0 Read: PLL Bandwidth Control AUTO Register (PBWC) Write: See page 126. Reset: 0 Read: PLL Programming Register MUL7 (PPG) Write: See page 128. Reset: 0
R 0 LOCK ACQ R 0 MUL6 1 0 MUL5 1 0 MUL4 0 XLD 1 0
1 0 R 0 VRS7 0
$005D
$005E
$005F Read: SIM Break Status Register (SBSR) Write: See page 104. Reset: Read: SIM Reset Status Register (SRSR) Write: See page 106. Reset:
Unimplemented
R
R
R
R
R
R
BW 0
R
$FE00
POR R 1
PIN R 0 R
COP R 0 R
ILOP R 0 R
ILAD R 0 R
MENRST R 0 R
LVI R 0 R
0 R 0 R
$FE01
$FE03
Read: SIM Break Flag Control BCFE Register (SBFCR) Write: See page 107. Reset: 0 FLASH Control Register Read: (FLCR) Write: See page 59. Reset: 0
0
0
0 HVEN MASS 0 ERASE 0 PGM 0
$FE08
0
0
0
0
0
$FE0C
Read: Break Address Register High Bit 15 (BRKH) Write: See page 366. Reset: 0 X = Indeterminate R
14 0 = Reserved
13 0
12 0 Bold
11 0 = Buffered
10 0
9 0
Bit 8 0
U = Unaffected
= Unimplemented
Figure 2-2. Control, Status, and Data Registers Summary (Sheet 10 of 11)
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Memory Map
Advance Information 51
Memory Map
Addr.
Register Name Read: Break Address Register Low (BRKL) Write: See page 366. Reset:
Bit 7 Bit 7 0
6 6 0
5 5 0 0
4 4 0 0
3 3 0 0
2 2 0 0
1 1 0 0
Bit 0 Bit 0 0 0
$FE0D
$FE0E
Read: Break Status and Control BRKE Register (BRKSCR) Write: See page 365. Reset: 0 Read: LVIOUT LVI Status and Control Register (LVISCR) Write: R See page 340. Reset: 0
BRKA 0 0 TRPSEL R 0 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
$FE0F
Read: FLASH Block Protect Register BPR7 $FF7E (FLBPR) Write: See page 65. Reset: 0 Read: COP Control Register (COPCTL) Write: See page 328. Reset: X = Indeterminate R
BPR6 0
BPR5 0
BPR4 0
BPR3 0
BPR2 0
BPR1 0
BPR0 0
Low byte of reset vector Clear COP counter Unaffected by reset = Reserved Bold = Buffered = Unimplemented
$FFFF
U = Unaffected
Figure 2-2. Control, Status, and Data Registers Summary (Sheet 11 of 11)
Advance Information 52
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Memory Map MOTOROLA
Memory Map I/O Section
Table 2-1 is a list of vector locations. Table 2-1. Vector Addresses
Address Low $FFD2 $FFD3 $FFD4 $FFD5 $FFD6 $FFD7 $FFD8 $FFD9 $FFDA $FFDB $FFDC $FFDD $FFDE $FFDF Priority $FFE0 $FFE1 $FFE2 $FFE3 $FFE4 $FFE5 $FFE6 $FFE7 $FFE8 $FFE9 $FFEA $FFEB $FFEC $FFED Vector SCI transmit vector (high) SCI transmit vector (low) SCI receive vector (high) SCI receive vector (low) SCI error vector (high) SCI error vector (low) SPI transmit vector (high)(1) SPI transmit vector (low)(1) SPI receive vector (high)(1) SPI receive vector (low)(1) A/D vector (high) A/D vector (low) TIM B overflow vector (high) TIM B overflow vector (low) TIM B channel 1 vector (high) TIM B channel 1 vector (low) TIM B channel 0 vector (high) TIM B channel 0 vector (low) TIM A overflow vector (high) TIM A overflow vector (low) TIM A channel 3 vector (high) TIM A channel 3 vector (low) TIM A channel 2 vector (high) TIM A channel 2 vector (low) TIM A channel 1 vector (high) TIM A channel 1 vector (low) TIM A channel 0 vector (high) TIM A channel 0 vector (low)
1. The SPI module is not available in the 56-pin SDIP package.
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Memory Map
Advance Information 53
Memory Map
Table 2-1. Vector Addresses (Continued)
Address $FFEE $FFEF $FFF0 $FFF1 $FFF2 $FFF3 $FFF4 Priority $FFF5 $FFF6 $FFF7 $FFF8 $FFF9 $FFFA $FFFB $FFFC $FFFD High $FFFE $FFFF Vector PWMMC vector (high) PWMMC vector (low) FAULT 4 (high) FAULT 4 (low) FAULT 3 (high) FAULT 3 (low) FAULT 2 (high) FAULT 2 (low) FAULT 1 (high) FAULT 1 (low) PLL vector (high) PLL vector (low) IRQ vector (high) IRQ vector (low) SWI vector (high) SWI vector (low) Reset vector (high) Reset vector (low)
2.6 Monitor ROM
The 240 bytes at addresses $FE10-$FEFF are reserved ROM addresses that contain the instructions for the monitor functions. See Section 10. Monitor ROM (MON).
Advance Information 54
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Memory Map MOTOROLA
Advance Information -- MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32
Section 3. Random-Access Memory (RAM)
3.1 Contents
3.2 3.3 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
3.2 Introduction
This section describes the 768 bytes of random-access memory (RAM).
3.3 Functional Description
Addresses $0060-$035F are RAM locations. The location of the stack RAM is programmable. The 16-bit stack pointer allows the stack to be anywhere in the 64-Kbyte memory space.
NOTE:
For correct operation, the stack pointer must point only to RAM locations. Within page zero are 160 bytes of RAM. Because the location of the stack RAM is programmable, all page zero RAM locations can be used for input/output (I/O) control and user data or code. When the stack pointer is moved from its reset location at $00FF, direct addressing mode instructions can access efficiently all page zero RAM locations. Page zero RAM, therefore, provides ideal locations for frequently accessed global variables. Before processing an interrupt, the central processor unit (CPU) uses five bytes of the stack to save the contents of the CPU registers.
NOTE:
For M68HC05 and M1468HC05 compatibility, the H register is not stacked.
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Random-Access Memory (RAM)
Advance Information 55
Random-Access Memory (RAM)
During a subroutine call, the CPU uses two bytes of the stack to store the return address. The stack pointer decrements during pushes and increments during pulls.
NOTE:
Be careful when using nested subroutines. The CPU may overwrite data in the RAM during a subroutine or during the interrupt stacking operation.
Advance Information 56
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Random-Access Memory (RAM) MOTOROLA
Advance Information -- MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32
Section 4. FLASH Memory
4.1 Contents
4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8 4.9 4.10 4.11 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 FLASH Control Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 FLASH Page Erase Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 FLASH Mass Erase Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 FLASH Program/Read Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 FLASH Block Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 FLASH Block Protect Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Wait Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Stop Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
4.2 Introduction
This section describes the operation of the embedded FLASH memory. This memory can be read, programmed, and erased from a single external supply. The program and erase operations are enabled through the use of an internal charge pump.
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA FLASH Memory
Advance Information 57
FLASH Memory 4.3 Functional Description
The FLASH memory is an array of 32,256 bytes with an additional 46 bytes of user vectors and one byte of block protection.
NOTE:
An erased bit reads as a logic 1 and a programmed bit reads as a logic 0. Program and erase operations are facilitated through control bits in a memory mapped register. Details for these operations appear later in this section. Memory in the FLASH array is organized into two rows per page. The page size is 128 bytes per page. The minimum erase page size is 128 bytes. Programming is performed on a row basis, 64 bytes at a time. The address ranges for the user memory and vectors are: * * * * $8000-$FDFF, user memory $FF7E, block protect register (FLBPR) $FE08, FLASH control register (FLCR) $FFDC-$FFFF, reserved for user-defined interrupt and reset vectors
Programming tools are available from Motorola. Contact a local Motorola representative for more information.
NOTE:
A security feature prevents viewing of the FLASH contents.(1)
1. No security feature is absolutely secure. However, Motorola's strategy is to make reading or copying the FLASH difficult for unauthorized users.
Advance Information 58
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 FLASH Memory MOTOROLA
FLASH Memory FLASH Control Register
4.4 FLASH Control Register
The FLASH control register (FLCR) controls FLASH program and erase operations.
Address: $FE08 Bit 7 Read: Write: Reset: 0 0 0 0 0 6 0 5 0 4 0 HVEN 0 MASS 0 ERASE 0 PGM 0 3 2 1 Bit 0
= Unimplemented
Figure 4-1. FLASH Control Register (FLCR) HVEN -- High-Voltage Enable Bit This read/write bit enables the charge pump to drive high voltages for program and erase operations in the array. HVEN can only be set if either PGM = 1 or ERASE = 1 and the proper sequence for program or erase is followed. 1 = High voltage enabled to array and charge pump on 0 = High voltage disabled to array and charge pump off MASS -- Mass Erase Control Bit Setting this read/write bit configures the 32-Kbyte FLASH array for mass erase operation. 1 = MASS erase operation selected 0 = MASS erase operation unselected ERASE -- Erase Control Bit This read/write bit configures the memory for erase operation. ERASE is interlocked with the PGM bit such that both bits cannot be equal to 1 or set to 1 at the same time. 1 = Erase operation selected 0 = Erase operation unselected PGM -- Program Control Bit This read/write bit configures the memory for program operation. PGM is interlocked with the ERASE bit such that both bits cannot be equal to 1 or set to 1 at the same time. 1 = Program operation selected 0 = Program operation unselected
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA FLASH Memory
Advance Information 59
FLASH Memory 4.5 FLASH Page Erase Operation
Use this step-by-step procedure to erase a page (128 bytes) of FLASH memory to read as logic 1: 1. Set the ERASE bit, and clear the MASS bit in the FLASH control register. 2. Read the FLASH block protect register. 3. Write any data to any FLASH address within the page address range desired. 4. Wait for a time, tNVS, minimum of 10 s. 5. Set the HVEN bit. 6. Wait for a time, tErase, minimum of 1 ms. 7. Clear the ERASE bit. 8. Wait for a time, tNVH, minimum of 5 s. 9. Clear the HVEN bit. 10. After a time, tRCV (typically 1 s), the memory can be accessed again in read mode.
NOTE:
While these operations must be performed in the order shown, other unrelated operations may occur between the steps.
Advance Information 60
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 FLASH Memory MOTOROLA
FLASH Memory FLASH Mass Erase Operation
4.6 FLASH Mass Erase Operation
Use this step-by-step procedure to erase the entire FLASH memory to read as logic 1: 1. Set both the ERASE bit and the MASS bit in the FLASH control register. 2. Read from the FLASH block protect register. 3. Write any data to any FLASH address(2) within the FLASH memory address range. 4. Wait for a time, tNVS, minimum of 10 s. 5. Set the HVEN bit. 6. Wait for a time, tMErase, minimum of 4 ms. 7. Clear the ERASE bit. 8. Wait for a time, tNVHL, minimum of 100 s. 9. Clear the HVEN bit. 10. After a time, tRCV (minimum of 1 s), the memory can be accessed again in read mode.
NOTE:
Programming and erasing of FLASH locations cannot be performed by code being executed from the FLASH memory. While these operations must be performed in the order shown, other unrelated operations may occur between the steps.
2. In monitor mode, when security sequence fails (see Section 10. Monitor ROM (MON)), write to the FLASH block protect register instead of any FLASH address.
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA FLASH Memory
Advance Information 61
FLASH Memory 4.7 FLASH Program/Read Operation
Programming of the FLASH memory is done on a row basis. A row consists of 64 consecutive bytes starting from addresses $XX00, $XX40, $0080 and $XXC0. Use this step-by-step procedure to program a row of FLASH memory (Figure 4-2 provides a flowchart representation): 1. Set the PGM bit. This configures the memory for program operation and enables the latching of address and data for programming. 2. Read from the FLASH block protect register. 3. Write any data to any FLASH address within the row address range desired. 4. Wait for a time, tNVS, minimum of 10 s. 5. Set the HVEN bit. 6. Wait for a time, tPGS, minimum of 5 s. 7. Write data to the FLASH address to be programmed. 8. Wait for a time, tPROG, minimum of 30 s. 9. Repeat step 7 and 8 until all the bytes within the row are programmed. 10. Clear the PGM bit. 11. Wait for a time, tNVH, minimum of 5 s. 12. Clear the HVEN bit. 13. After a time, tRCV (minimum of 1 s), the memory can be accessed in read mode again. This program sequence is repeated throughout the memory until all data is programmed.
NOTE:
The time between each FLASH address change, or the time between the last FLASH address programmed to clearing of the PGM bit, must not exceed the maximum programming time, tPROG.
Advance Information 62
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 FLASH Memory MOTOROLA
FLASH Memory FLASH Program/Read Operation
ALGORITHM FOR PROGRAMMING A ROW (64 BYTES) OF FLASH MEMORY
1
SET PGM BIT
2
READ THE FLASH BLOCK PROTECT REGISTER
3
WRITE ANY DATA TO ANY FLASH ADDRESS WITHIN THE ROW ADDRESS RANGE DESIRED
4
WAIT FOR A TIME, tNVS
5
SET HVEN BIT
6
WAIT FOR A TIME, tPGS
7
WRITE DATA TO THE FLASH ADDRESS TO BE PROGRAMMED
8
WAIT FOR A TIME, tPROG
COMPLETED PROGRAMMING THIS ROW? NO
YES
10
CLEAR PGM BIT
11
WAIT FOR A TIME, tNVH
Note: The time between each FLASH address change (step 7 to step 7), or the time between the last FLASH address programmed to clearing PGM bit (step 7 to step 10) must not exceed the maximum programming time, tPROG max. This row program algorithm assumes the row/s to be programmed are initially erased.
12 CLEAR HVEN BIT
13
WAIT FOR A TIME, tRCV
END OF PROGRAMMING
Figure 4-2. FLASH Programming Flowchart
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA FLASH Memory Advance Information 63
FLASH Memory
NOTE:
Programming and erasing of FLASH locations cannot be performed by code being executed from the FLASH memory. While these operations must be performed in the order shown, other unrelated operations may occur between the steps. Do not exceed tPROG maximum. See Section 22. Electrical Specifications.
4.8 FLASH Block Protection
Due to the ability of the on-board charge pump to erase and program the FLASH memory in the target application, provision is made for protecting a block of memory from unintentional erase or program operations due to system malfunction. This protection is done by using a FLASH block protect register (FLBPR). The FLBPR determines the range of the FLASH memory which is to be protected. The range of the protected area starts from a location defined by FLBPR and ends at the bottom of the FLASH memory ($FFFF). When the memory is protected, the HVEN bit cannot be set in either ERASE or PROGRAM operations.
NOTE:
In performing a program or erase operation, the FLASH block protect register must be read after setting the PGM or ERASE bit and before asserting the HVEN bit When the FLBPR is programmed with all 0s, the entire memory is protected from being programmed and erased. When all the bits are erased (all 1s), the entire memory is accessible for program and erase. When bits within the FLBPR are programmed, they lock a block of memory, whose address ranges are shown in 4.9 FLASH Block Protect Register. Once the FLBPR is programmed with a value other than $FF, any erase or program of the FLBPR or the protected block of FLASH memory is prohibited. The FLBPR itself can be erased or programmed only with an external voltage, VTST, present on the IRQ pin. This voltage also allows entry from reset into the monitor mode.
Advance Information 64
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 FLASH Memory MOTOROLA
FLASH Memory FLASH Block Protect Register
4.9 FLASH Block Protect Register
The FLASH block protect register (FLBPR) is implemented as a byte within the FLASH memory, and therefore can be written only during a programming sequence of the FLASH memory. The value in this register determines the starting location of the protected range within the FLASH memory.
Address: $FF7E Bit 7 Read: BPR7 Write: Reset: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 BPR6 BPR5 BPR4 BPR3 BPR2 BPR1 BPR0 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
U = Unaffected by reset. Initial value from factory is 1. Write to this register by a programming sequence to the FLASH memory.
Figure 4-3. FLASH Block Protect Register (FLBPR) BPR[7:0] -- FLASH Block Protect Bits These eight bits represent bits [14:7] of a 16-bit memory address. Bit 15 is logic 1 and bits [6:0] are logic 0s. The resultant 16-bit address is used for specifying the start address of the FLASH memory for block protection. The FLASH is protected from this start address to the end of FLASH memory at $FFFF. With this mechanism, the protect start address can be XX00 and XX80 (128 bytes page boundaries) within the FLASH memory.
16-BIT MEMORY ADDRESS START ADDRESS OF FLASH BLOCK PROTECT 1 FLBPR VALUE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Figure 4-4. FLASH Block Protect Start Address
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA FLASH Memory
Advance Information 65
FLASH Memory
Refer to Table 4-1 for examples of the protect start address. Table 4-1. Examples of Protect Start Address
BPR[7:0] $00 $01 (0000 0001) $02 (0000 0010) Start of Address of Protect Range The entire FLASH memory is protected. $8080 (1000 0000 1000 0000) $8100 (1000 0001 0000 0000) and so on... $FE (1111 1110) $FF $FF00 (1111 1111 0000 0000) The entire FLASH memory is not protected.
Note: The end address of the protected range is always $FFFF.
4.10 Wait Mode
Putting the MCU into wait mode while the FLASH is in read mode does not affect the operation of the FLASH memory directly, but there will not be any memory activity since the CPU is inactive. The WAIT instruction should not be executed while performing a program or erase operation on the FLASH. Otherwise, the operation will discontinue, and the FLASH will be on standby mode.
4.11 Stop Mode
Putting the MCU into stop mode while the FLASH is in read mode does not affect the operation of the FLASH memory directly, but there will not be any memory activity since the CPU is inactive. The STOP instruction should not be executed while performing a program or erase operation on the FLASH, otherwise the operation will discontinue, and the FLASH will be on standby mode
NOTE:
Standby mode is the power-saving mode of the FLASH module in which all internal control signals to the FLASH are inactive and the current consumption of the FLASH is at a minimum.
Advance Information 66
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 FLASH Memory MOTOROLA
Advance Information -- MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32
Section 5. Configuration Register (CONFIG)
5.1 Contents
5.2 5.3 5.4 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Configuration Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
5.2 Introduction
This section describes the configuration register (CONFIG). This register contains bits that configure these options: * * * * * * * Resets caused by the low-voltage inhibit (LVI) module Power to the LVI module Computer operating properly (COP) module Top-side pulse-width modulator (PWM) polarity Bottom-side PWM polarity Edge-aligned versus center-aligned PWMs Six independent PWMs versus three complementary PWM pairs
5.3 Functional Description
The configuration register (CONFIG) is used in the initialization of various options. The configuration register can be written once after each reset. All of the configuration register bits are cleared during reset. Since the various options affect the operation of the microcontroller unit (MCU), it is recommended that this register be written immediately after reset. The configuration register is located at $001F and may be read at anytime.
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Configuration Register (CONFIG)
Advance Information 67
Configuration Register (CONFIG)
NOTE:
On a FLASH device, the options are one-time writeable by the user after each reset. The registers are not in the FLASH memory but are special registers containing one-time writeable latches after each reset. Upon a reset, the configuration register defaults to predetermined settings as shown in Figure 5-1. If the LVI module and the LVI reset signal are enabled, a reset occurs when VDD falls to a voltage, VLVRx, and remains at or below that level for at least nine consecutive central processor unit (CPU) cycles. Once an LVI reset occurs, the MCU remains in reset until VDD rises to a voltage, VLVRX.
5.4 Configuration Register
Address: $001F Bit 7 Read: EDGE Write: Reset: 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 BOTNEG TOPNEG INDEP LVIRST LVIPWR STOPE COPD 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
Figure 5-1. Configuration Register (CONFIG) EDGE -- Edge-Align Enable Bit EDGE determines if the motor control PWM will operate in edge-aligned mode or center-aligned mode. See Section 9. Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control (PWMMC). 1 = Edge-aligned mode enabled 0 = Center-aligned mode enabled BOTNEG -- Bottom-Side PWM Polarity Bit BOTNEG determines if the bottom-side PWMs will have positive or negative polarity. See Section 9. Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control (PWMMC). 1 = Negative polarity 0 = Positive polarity
Advance Information 68
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Configuration Register (CONFIG) MOTOROLA
Configuration Register (CONFIG) Configuration Register
TOPNEG -- Top-Side PWM Polarity Bit TOPNEG determines if the top-side PWMs will have positive or negative polarity. See Section 9. Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control (PWMMC). 1 = Negative polarity 0 = Positive polarity INDEP -- Independent Mode Enable Bit INDEP determines if the motor control PWMs will be six independent PWMs or three complementary PWM pairs. See Section 9. Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control (PWMMC). 1 = Six independent PWMs 0 = Three complementary PWM pairs LVIRST -- LVI Reset Enable Bit LVIRST enables the reset signal from the LVI module. See Section 18. Low-Voltage Inhibit (LVI). 1 = LVI module resets enabled 0 = LVI module resets disabled LVIPWR -- LVI Power Enable Bit LVIPWR enables the LVI module. See Section 18. Low-Voltage Inhibit (LVI). 1 = LVI module power enabled 0 = LVI module power disabled STOPE -- Stop Enable Bit Writing a 0 or a 1 to bit 1 has no effect on MCU operation. Bit 1 operates the same as the other bits within this write-once register operate. 1 = STOP mode enabled 0 = STOP mode disabled COPD -- COP Disable Bit COPD disables the COP module. See Section 16. Computer Operating Properly (COP). 1 = COP module disabled 0 = COP module enabled
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Configuration Register (CONFIG)
Advance Information 69
Configuration Register (CONFIG)
Advance Information 70
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Configuration Register (CONFIG) MOTOROLA
Advance Information -- MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32
Section 6. Central Processor Unit (CPU)
6.1 Contents
6.2 6.3 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
6.4 CPU Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 6.4.1 Accumulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 6.4.2 Index Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 6.4.3 Stack Pointer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 6.4.4 Program Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75 6.4.5 Condition Code Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 6.5 Arithmetic/Logic Unit (ALU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 6.6 Low-Power Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 6.6.1 Wait Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78 6.6.2 Stop Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78 6.7 6.8 6.9 CPU During Break Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Instruction Set Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Opcode Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
6.2 Introduction
This section describes the central processor unit (CPU08, version A). The M68HC08 CPU is an enhanced and fully object-code-compatible version of the M68HC05 CPU. The CPU08 Reference Manual, Motorola document order number CPU08RM/AD, contains a description of the CPU instruction set, addressing modes, and architecture.
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Central Processor Unit (CPU)
Advance Information 71
Central Processor Unit (CPU) 6.3 Features
Features of the CPU08 include: * * * * * * * * * * * Fully upward, object-code compatibility with M68HC05 Family 16-bit stack pointer with stack manipulation instructions 16-bit index register with X-register manipulation instructions 8-MHz CPU internal bus frequency 64-Kbyte program/data memory space 16 addressing modes Memory-to-memory data moves without using accumulator Fast 8-bit by 8-bit multiply and 16-bit by 8-bit divide instructions Enhanced binary-coded decimal (BCD) data handling Modular architecture with expandable internal bus definition for extension of addressing range beyond 64 Kbytes Low-power wait mode
6.4 CPU Registers
Figure 6-1 shows the five CPU registers. CPU registers are not part of the memory map.
7 15 H 15 15 X 0 STACK POINTER (SP) 0 PROGRAM COUNTER (PC) 7 0 V 1 1 H I N Z C CONDITION CODE REGISTER (CCR) CARRY/BORROW FLAG ZERO FLAG NEGATIVE FLAG INTERRUPT MASK HALF-CARRY FLAG TWO'S COMPLEMENT OVERFLOW FLAG 0 ACCUMULATOR (A) 0 INDEX REGISTER (H:X)
Figure 6-1. CPU Registers
Advance Information 72 MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Central Processor Unit (CPU) MOTOROLA
Central Processor Unit (CPU) CPU Registers
6.4.1 Accumulator The accumulator is a general-purpose 8-bit register. The CPU uses the accumulator to hold operands and the results of arithmetic/logic operations.
Bit 7 Read: Write: Reset: Unaffected by reset 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
Figure 6-2. Accumulator (A)
6.4.2 Index Register The 16-bit index register allows indexed addressing of a 64-Kbyte memory space. H is the upper byte of the index register, and X is the lower byte. H:X is the concatenated 16-bit index register. In the indexed addressing modes, the CPU uses the contents of the index register to determine the conditional address of the operand.
Bit 15 Read: Write: Reset: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 X X X X X X X X Bit 0
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
X = Indeterminate
Figure 6-3. Index Register (H:X) The index register can serve also as a temporary data storage location.
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Central Processor Unit (CPU)
Advance Information 73
Central Processor Unit (CPU)
6.4.3 Stack Pointer The stack pointer (SP) is a 16-bit register that contains the address of the next location on the stack. During a reset, the stack pointer is preset to $00FF. The reset stack pointer (RSP) instruction sets the least significant byte to $FF and does not affect the most significant byte. The stack pointer decrements as data is pushed onto the stack and increments as data is pulled from the stack. In the stack pointer 8-bit offset and 16-bit offset addressing modes, the stack pointer can function as an index register to access data on the stack. The CPU uses the contents of the stack pointer to determine the conditional address of the operand.
Bit 15 Read: Write: Reset: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Bit 0
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Figure 6-4. Stack Pointer (SP)
NOTE:
The location of the stack is arbitrary and may be relocated anywhere in RAM. Moving the SP out of page zero ($0000-$00FF) frees direct address (page zero) space. For correct operation, the stack pointer must point only to RAM locations.
Advance Information 74
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Central Processor Unit (CPU) MOTOROLA
Central Processor Unit (CPU) CPU Registers
6.4.4 Program Counter The program counter (PC) is a 16-bit register that contains the address of the next instruction or operand to be fetched. Normally, the program counter automatically increments to the next sequential memory location every time an instruction or operand is fetched. Jump, branch, and interrupt operations load the program counter with an address other than that of the next sequential location. During reset, the program counter is loaded with the reset vector address located at $FFFE and $FFFF. The vector address is the address of the first instruction to be executed after exiting the reset state.
Bit 15 Read: Write: Reset: Loaded with vector from $FFFE and $FFFF Bit 0
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Figure 6-5. Program Counter (PC)
6.4.5 Condition Code Register The 8-bit condition code register (CCR) contains the interrupt mask and five flags that indicate the results of the instruction just executed. Bits 6 and 5 are set permanently to logic 1. The functions of the condition code register are described here.
Bit 7 Read: V Write: Reset: X 1 1 X 1 X X X 1 1 H I N Z C 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
X = Indeterminate
Figure 6-6. Condition Code Register (CCR)
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Central Processor Unit (CPU)
Advance Information 75
Central Processor Unit (CPU)
V -- Overflow Flag The CPU sets the overflow flag when a two's complement overflow occurs. The signed branch instructions BGT, BGE, BLE, and BLT use the overflow flag. 1 = Overflow 0 = No overflow H -- Half-Carry Flag The CPU sets the half-carry flag when a carry occurs between accumulator bits 3 and 4 during an ADD or ADC operation. The half-carry flag is required for binary-coded decimal (BCD) arithmetic operations. The decimal adjust A (DAA) instruction uses the states of the H and C flags to determine the appropriate correction factor. 1 = Carry between bits 3 and 4 0 = No carry between bits 3 and 4 I -- Interrupt Mask Bit When the interrupt mask is set, all maskable CPU interrupts are disabled. CPU interrupts are enabled when the interrupt mask is cleared. When a CPU interrupt occurs, the interrupt mask is set automatically after the CPU registers are saved on the stack, but before the interrupt vector is fetched. 1 = Interrupts disabled 0 = Interrupts enabled
NOTE:
To maintain M6805 compatibility, the upper byte of the index register (H) is not stacked automatically. If the interrupt service routine modifies H, then the user must stack and unstack H using the push H onto stack (PSHH) and pull H from stack (PULH) instructions. After the I bit is cleared, the highest-priority interrupt request is serviced first. A return-from-interrupt (RTI) instruction pulls the CPU registers from the stack and restores the interrupt mask from the stack. After any reset, the interrupt mask is set and can be cleared only by the clear interrupt mask software instruction (CLI).
Advance Information 76
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Central Processor Unit (CPU) MOTOROLA
Central Processor Unit (CPU) Arithmetic/Logic Unit (ALU)
N -- Negative Flag The CPU sets the negative flag when an arithmetic operation, logic operation, or data manipulation produces a negative result, setting bit 7 of the result. 1 = Negative result 0 = Non-negative result Z -- Zero Flag The CPU sets the zero flag when an arithmetic operation, logic operation, or data manipulation produces a result of $00. 1 = Zero result 0 = Non-zero result C -- Carry/Borrow Flag The CPU sets the carry/borrow flag when an addition operation produces a carry out of bit 7 of the accumulator or when a subtraction operation requires a borrow. Some instructions -- such as bit test and branch, shift, and rotate -- also clear or set the carry/borrow flag. 1 = Carry out of bit 7 0 = No carry out of bit 7
6.5 Arithmetic/Logic Unit (ALU)
The ALU performs the arithmetic and logic operations defined by the instruction set. Refer to the CPU08 Reference Manual, Motorola document order number CPU08RM/AD, for a description of the instructions and addressing modes and more detail about CPU architecture.
6.6 Low-Power Modes
The WAIT and STOP instructions put the MCU in low power-consumption standby modes.
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Central Processor Unit (CPU)
Advance Information 77
Central Processor Unit (CPU)
6.6.1 Wait Mode The WAIT instruction: * Clears the interrupt mask (I bit) in the condition code register, enabling interrupts. After exit from wait mode by interrupt, the I bit remains clear. After exit by reset, the I bit is set. Disables the CPU clock
*
6.6.2 Stop Mode The STOP instruction: * Clears the interrupt mask (I bit) in the condition code register, enabling external interrupts. After exit from stop mode by external interrupt, the I bit remains clear. After exit by reset, the I bit is set. Disables the CPU clock
*
After exiting stop mode, the CPU clock begins running after the oscillator stabilization delay.
6.7 CPU During Break Interrupts
If a break module is present on the MCU, the CPU starts a break interrupt by: * * Loading the instruction register with the software interrupt (SWI) instruction Loading the program counter with $FFFC:$FFFD or with $FEFC:$FEFD in monitor mode
The break interrupt begins after completion of the CPU instruction in progress. If the break address register match occurs on the last cycle of a CPU instruction, the break interrupt begins immediately. A return-from-interrupt instruction (RTI) in the break routine ends the break interrupt and returns the MCU to normal operation if the break interrupt has been deasserted.
Advance Information 78
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Central Processor Unit (CPU) MOTOROLA
Central Processor Unit (CPU) Instruction Set Summary
6.8 Instruction Set Summary
Table 6-1 provides a summary of the M68HC08 instruction set.. Table 6-1. Instruction Set Summary (Sheet 1 of 8)
Source Form
ADC #opr ADC opr ADC opr ADC opr,X ADC opr,X ADC ,X ADC opr,SP ADC opr,SP ADD #opr ADD opr ADD opr ADD opr,X ADD opr,X ADD ,X ADD opr,SP ADD opr,SP AIS #opr AIX #opr AND #opr AND opr AND opr AND opr,X AND opr,X AND ,X AND opr,SP AND opr,SP ASL opr ASLA ASLX ASL opr,X ASL ,X ASL opr,SP ASR opr ASRA ASRX ASR opr,X ASR opr,X ASR opr,SP BCC rel
Operand
ii dd hh ll ee ff ff ff ee ff ii dd hh ll ee ff ff ff ee ff ii ii ii dd hh ll ee ff ff ff ee ff rr
Address Mode
Opcode
Operation
Description
VH I NZC
Add with Carry
A (A) + (M) + (C)
-
IMM DIR EXT IX2 IX1 IX SP1 SP2 IMM DIR EXT IX2 IX1 IX SP1 SP2
A9 B9 C9 D9 E9 F9 9EE9 9ED9 AB BB CB DB EB FB 9EEB 9EDB A7 AF A4 B4 C4 D4 E4 F4 9EE4 9ED4
2 3 4 4 3 2 4 5 2 3 4 4 3 2 4 5 2 2 2 3 4 4 3 2 4 5 4 1 1 4 3 5 4 1 1 4 3 5 3
Add without Carry
A (A) + (M)
-
Add Immediate Value (Signed) to SP Add Immediate Value (Signed) to H:X
SP (SP) + (16 M) H:X (H:X) + (16 M)
- - - - - - IMM - - - - - - IMM IMM DIR EXT IX2 - IX1 IX SP1 SP2 DIR INH INH IX1 IX SP1 DIR INH INH IX1 IX SP1
Logical AND
A (A) & (M)
0--
Arithmetic Shift Left (Same as LSL)
C b7 b0
0
--
38 dd 48 58 68 ff 78 9E68 ff 37 dd 47 57 67 ff 77 9E67 ff 24
Arithmetic Shift Right
b7 b0
C
--
Branch if Carry Bit Clear
PC (PC) + 2 + rel ? (C) = 0
- - - - - - REL
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Central Processor Unit (CPU)
Advance Information 79
Cycles
Effect on CCR
Central Processor Unit (CPU)
Table 6-1. Instruction Set Summary (Sheet 2 of 8)
Source Form Operand
dd dd dd dd dd dd dd dd rr rr rr rr rr rr rr rr rr rr ii dd hh ll ee ff ff ff ee ff rr rr rr rr rr rr rr
Address Mode
Opcode
Operation
Description
VH I NZC
BCLR n, opr
Clear Bit n in M
Mn 0
DIR DIR DIR DIR - - - - - - DIR DIR DIR DIR - - - - - - REL - - - - - - REL - - - - - - REL
(b0) (b1) (b2) (b3) (b4) (b5) (b6) (b7)
11 13 15 17 19 1B 1D 1F 25 27 90 92 28 29 22 24 2F 2E A5 B5 C5 D5 E5 F5 9EE5 9ED5 93 25 23 91 2C 2B 2D
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 4 4 3 2 4 5 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
BCS rel BEQ rel BGE opr BGT opr BHCC rel BHCS rel BHI rel BHS rel BIH rel BIL rel BIT #opr BIT opr BIT opr BIT opr,X BIT opr,X BIT ,X BIT opr,SP BIT opr,SP BLE opr BLO rel BLS rel BLT opr BMC rel BMI rel BMS rel
Branch if Carry Bit Set (Same as BLO) Branch if Equal Branch if Greater Than or Equal To (Signed Operands) Branch if Greater Than (Signed Operands) Branch if Half Carry Bit Clear Branch if Half Carry Bit Set Branch if Higher Branch if Higher or Same (Same as BCC) Branch if IRQ Pin High Branch if IRQ Pin Low
PC (PC) + 2 + rel ? (C) = 1 PC (PC) + 2 + rel ? (Z) = 1 PC (PC) + 2 + rel ? (N V) = 0
PC (PC) + 2 + rel ? (Z) | (N V) = 0 - - - - - - REL PC (PC) + 2 + rel ? (H) = 0 PC (PC) + 2 + rel ? (H) = 1 PC (PC) + 2 + rel ? (C) | (Z) = 0 PC (PC) + 2 + rel ? (C) = 0 PC (PC) + 2 + rel ? IRQ = 1 PC (PC) + 2 + rel ? IRQ = 0 - - - - - - REL - - - - - - REL - - - - - - REL - - - - - - REL - - - - - - REL - - - - - - REL IMM DIR EXT IX2 - IX1 IX SP1 SP2
Bit Test
(A) & (M)
0--
Branch if Less Than or Equal To (Signed Operands) Branch if Lower (Same as BCS) Branch if Lower or Same Branch if Less Than (Signed Operands) Branch if Interrupt Mask Clear Branch if Minus Branch if Interrupt Mask Set
PC (PC) + 2 + rel ? (Z) | (N V) = 1 - - - - - - REL PC (PC) + 2 + rel ? (C) = 1 PC (PC) + 2 + rel ? (C) | (Z) = 1 PC (PC) + 2 + rel ? (N V) =1 PC (PC) + 2 + rel ? (I) = 0 PC (PC) + 2 + rel ? (N) = 1 PC (PC) + 2 + rel ? (I) = 1 - - - - - - REL - - - - - - REL - - - - - - REL - - - - - - REL - - - - - - REL - - - - - - REL
Advance Information 80
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Central Processor Unit (CPU) MOTOROLA
Cycles
Effect on CCR
Central Processor Unit (CPU) Instruction Set Summary
Table 6-1. Instruction Set Summary (Sheet 3 of 8)
Source Form
BNE rel BPL rel BRA rel
Operand
rr rr rr dd rr dd rr dd rr dd rr dd rr dd rr dd rr dd rr rr dd rr dd rr dd rr dd rr dd rr dd rr dd rr dd rr dd dd dd dd dd dd dd dd rr dd rr ii rr ii rr ff rr rr ff rr
Address Mode
Opcode
Operation
Description
VH I NZC
Branch if Not Equal Branch if Plus Branch Always PC (PC) + 2 + rel ? (Z) = 0 PC (PC) + 2 + rel ? (N) = 0 PC (PC) + 2 + rel
- - - - - - REL - - - - - - REL - - - - - - REL DIR DIR DIR DIR DIR DIR DIR DIR (b0) (b1) (b2) (b3) (b4) (b5) (b6) (b7)
26 2A 20 01 03 05 07 09 0B 0D 0F 21 (b0) (b1) (b2) (b3) (b4) (b5) (b6) (b7) (b0) (b1) (b2) (b3) (b4) (b5) (b6) (b7) 00 02 04 06 08 0A 0C 0E 10 12 14 16 18 1A 1C 1E
3 3 3 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 3 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
BRCLR n,opr,rel Branch if Bit n in M Clear
PC (PC) + 3 + rel ? (Mn) = 0
-----
BRN rel
Branch Never
PC (PC) + 2
- - - - - - REL DIR DIR DIR DIR DIR DIR DIR DIR
BRSET n,opr,rel Branch if Bit n in M Set
PC (PC) + 3 + rel ? (Mn) = 1
-----
BSET n,opr
Set Bit n in M
Mn 1
DIR DIR DIR - - - - - - DIR DIR DIR DIR DIR
BSR rel
Branch to Subroutine
PC (PC) + 2; push (PCL) SP (SP) - 1; push (PCH) SP (SP) - 1 PC (PC) + rel PC (PC) PC (PC) PC (PC) PC (PC) PC (PC) PC (PC) + 3 + rel ? (A) + 3 + rel ? (A) + 3 + rel ? (X) + 3 + rel ? (A) + 2 + rel ? (A) + 4 + rel ? (A) C0 I0 M $00 A $00 X $00 H $00 M $00 M $00 M $00 - (M) - (M) - (M) - (M) - (M) - (M) = $00 = $00 = $00 = $00 = $00 = $00
- - - - - - REL
AD
4
CBEQ opr,rel CBEQA #opr,rel CBEQX #opr,rel Compare and Branch if Equal CBEQ opr,X+,rel CBEQ X+,rel CBEQ opr,SP,rel CLC CLI CLR opr CLRA CLRX CLRH CLR opr,X CLR ,X CLR opr,SP Clear Carry Bit Clear Interrupt Mask
DIR IMM - - - - - - IMM IX1+ IX+ SP1 - - - - - 0 INH - - 0 - - - INH DIR INH INH 0 - - 0 1 - INH IX1 IX SP1
31 41 51 61 71 9E61 98 9A
5 4 4 5 4 6 1 2 3 1 1 1 3 2 4
Clear
3F dd 4F 5F 8C 6F ff 7F 9E6F ff
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Central Processor Unit (CPU)
Advance Information 81
Cycles
Effect on CCR
Central Processor Unit (CPU)
Table 6-1. Instruction Set Summary (Sheet 4 of 8)
Source Form
CMP #opr CMP opr CMP opr CMP opr,X CMP opr,X CMP ,X CMP opr,SP CMP opr,SP COM opr COMA COMX COM opr,X COM ,X COM opr,SP CPHX #opr CPHX opr CPX #opr CPX opr CPX opr CPX ,X CPX opr,X CPX opr,X CPX opr,SP CPX opr,SP DAA
Operand
ii dd hh ll ee ff ff ff ee ff ii ii+1 dd ii dd hh ll ee ff ff ff ee ff dd rr rr rr ff rr rr ff rr ii dd hh ll ee ff ff ff ee ff
Address Mode
Opcode
Operation
Description
VH I NZC
Compare A with M
(A) - (M)
--
IMM DIR EXT IX2 IX1 IX SP1 SP2
A1 B1 C1 D1 E1 F1 9EE1 9ED1
2 3 4 4 3 2 4 5 4 1 1 4 3 5 3 4 2 3 4 4 3 2 4 5 2 5 3 3 5 4 6 4 1 1 4 3 5 7 2 3 4 4 3 2 4 5
Complement (One's Complement)
M A X M M M
(M) = $FF - (M) (A) = $FF - (M) (X) = $FF - (M) (M) = $FF - (M) (M) = $FF - (M) (M) = $FF - (M)
0--
DIR INH INH 1 IX1 IX SP1 IMM DIR IMM DIR EXT IX2 IX1 IX SP1 SP2 INH
33 dd 43 53 63 ff 73 9E63 ff 65 75 A3 B3 C3 D3 E3 F3 9EE3 9ED3 72 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 9E6B
Compare H:X with M
(H:X) - (M:M + 1)
--
Compare X with M
(X) - (M)
--
Decimal Adjust A
(A) 10
U--
DBNZ opr,rel DBNZA rel Decrement and Branch if Not Zero DBNZX rel DBNZ opr,X,rel DBNZ X,rel DBNZ opr,SP,rel DEC opr DECA DECX DEC opr,X DEC ,X DEC opr,SP DIV EOR #opr EOR opr EOR opr EOR opr,X EOR opr,X EOR ,X EOR opr,SP EOR opr,SP
A (A) - 1 or M (M) - 1 or X (X) - 1 DIR PC (PC) + 3 + rel ? (result) 0 INH PC (PC) + 2 + rel ? (result) 0 - - - - - - INH PC (PC) + 2 + rel ? (result) 0 IX1 PC (PC) + 3 + rel ? (result) 0 IX PC (PC) + 2 + rel ? (result) 0 SP1 PC (PC) + 4 + rel ? (result) 0 M (M) - 1 A (A) - 1 X (X) - 1 M (M) - 1 M (M) - 1 M (M) - 1 A (H:A)/(X) H Remainder DIR INH INH - IX1 IX SP1 INH
Decrement
--
3A dd 4A 5A 6A ff 7A 9E6A ff 52 A8 B8 C8 D8 E8 F8 9EE8 9ED8
Divide
----
Exclusive OR M with A
A (A M)
0--
IMM DIR EXT - IX2 IX1 IX SP1 SP2
Advance Information 82
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Central Processor Unit (CPU) MOTOROLA
Cycles
Effect on CCR
Central Processor Unit (CPU) Instruction Set Summary
Table 6-1. Instruction Set Summary (Sheet 5 of 8)
Source Form
INC opr INCA INCX INC opr,X INC ,X INC opr,SP JMP JMP JMP JMP JMP opr opr opr,X opr,X ,X
Operand
dd hh ll ee ff ff dd hh ll ee ff ff ii dd hh ll ee ff ff ff ee ff ii jj dd ii dd hh ll ee ff ff ff ee ff dd dd dd ii dd dd
Address Mode
Opcode
Operation
Description
VH I NZC
M (M) + 1 A (A) + 1 X (X) + 1 M (M) + 1 M (M) + 1 M (M) + 1
Increment
--
DIR INH - INH IX1 IX SP1
3C dd 4C 5C 6C ff 7C 9E6C ff BC CC DC EC FC BD CD DD ED FD A6 B6 C6 D6 E6 F6 9EE6 9ED6 45 55 AE BE CE DE EE FE 9EEE 9EDE
4 1 1 4 3 5 2 3 4 3 2 4 5 6 5 4 2 3 4 4 3 2 4 5 3 4 2 3 4 4 3 2 4 5 4 1 1 4 3 5 4 1 1 4 3 5 5 4 4 4 5
Jump
PC Jump Address
DIR EXT - - - - - - IX2 IX1 IX DIR EXT - - - - - - IX2 IX1 IX IMM DIR EXT IX2 - IX1 IX SP1 SP2 - IMM DIR IMM DIR EXT IX2 - IX1 IX SP1 SP2 DIR INH INH IX1 IX SP1 DIR INH INH IX1 IX SP1
JSR opr JSR opr JSR opr,X JSR opr,X JSR ,X LDA LDA LDA LDA LDA LDA LDA LDA #opr opr opr opr,X opr,X ,X opr,SP opr,SP
Jump to Subroutine
PC (PC) + n (n = 1, 2, or 3) Push (PCL); SP (SP) - 1 Push (PCH); SP (SP) - 1 PC Unconditional Address
Load A from M
A (M)
0--
LDHX #opr LDHX opr LDX LDX LDX LDX LDX LDX LDX LDX #opr opr opr opr,X opr,X ,X opr,SP opr,SP
Load H:X from M
H:X (M:M + 1)
0--
Load X from M
X (M)
0--
LSL opr LSLA LSLX LSL opr,X LSL ,X LSL opr,SP LSR opr LSRA LSRX LSR opr,X LSR ,X LSR opr,SP MOV MOV MOV MOV MUL opr,opr opr,X+ #opr,opr X+,opr
Logical Shift Left (Same as ASL)
C b7 b0
0
--
38 dd 48 58 68 ff 78 9E68 ff 34 dd 44 54 64 ff 74 9E64 ff 4E 5E 6E 7E 42
Logical Shift Right
0 b7 b0
C
--0
Move
(M)Destination (M)Source H:X (H:X) + 1 (IX+D, DIX+) X:A (X) x (A)
0--
DD DIX+ - IMD IX+D
Unsigned multiply
- 0 - - - 0 INH
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Central Processor Unit (CPU)
Advance Information 83
Cycles
Effect on CCR
Central Processor Unit (CPU)
Table 6-1. Instruction Set Summary (Sheet 6 of 8)
Source Form
NEG opr NEGA NEGX NEG opr,X NEG ,X NEG opr,SP NOP NSA ORA #opr ORA opr ORA opr ORA opr,X ORA opr,X ORA ,X ORA opr,SP ORA opr,SP PSHA PSHH PSHX PULA PULH PULX ROL opr ROLA ROLX ROL opr,X ROL ,X ROL opr,SP ROR opr RORA RORX ROR opr,X ROR ,X ROR opr,SP RSP
Operand
ii dd hh ll ee ff ff ff ee ff
Address Mode
Opcode
Operation
Description
VH I NZC
M -(M) = $00 - (M) A -(A) = $00 - (A) X -(X) = $00 - (X) M -(M) = $00 - (M) M -(M) = $00 - (M) None A (A[3:0]:A[7:4])
Negate (Two's Complement)
--
DIR INH INH IX1 IX SP1
30 dd 40 50 60 ff 70 9E60 ff 9D 62 AA BA CA DA EA FA 9EEA 9EDA 87 8B 89 86 8A 88 39 dd 49 59 69 ff 79 9E69 ff 36 dd 46 56 66 ff 76 9E66 ff 9C
4 1 1 4 3 5 1 3 2 3 4 4 3 2 4 5 2 2 2 2 2 2 4 1 1 4 3 5 4 1 1 4 3 5 1
No Operation Nibble Swap A
- - - - - - INH - - - - - - INH IMM DIR EXT - IX2 IX1 IX SP1 SP2
Inclusive OR A and M
A (A) | (M)
0--
Push A onto Stack Push H onto Stack Push X onto Stack Pull A from Stack Pull H from Stack Pull X from Stack
Push (A); SP (SP) - 1 Push (H); SP (SP) - 1 Push (X); SP (SP) - 1 SP (SP + 1); Pull (A) SP (SP + 1); Pull (H) SP (SP + 1); Pull (X)
- - - - - - INH - - - - - - INH - - - - - - INH - - - - - - INH - - - - - - INH - - - - - - INH DIR INH INH IX1 IX SP1 DIR INH INH IX1 IX SP1
Rotate Left through Carry
C b7 b0
--
Rotate Right through Carry
b7 b0
C
--
Reset Stack Pointer
SP $FF SP (SP) + 1; Pull (CCR) SP (SP) + 1; Pull (A) SP (SP) + 1; Pull (X) SP (SP) + 1; Pull (PCH) SP (SP) + 1; Pull (PCL) SP SP + 1; Pull (PCH) SP SP + 1; Pull (PCL)
- - - - - - INH
RTI
Return from Interrupt
INH
80
7
RTS
Return from Subroutine
- - - - - - INH
81
4
Advance Information 84
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Central Processor Unit (CPU) MOTOROLA
Cycles
Effect on CCR
Central Processor Unit (CPU) Instruction Set Summary
Table 6-1. Instruction Set Summary (Sheet 7 of 8)
Source Form
SBC SBC SBC SBC SBC SBC SBC SBC SEC SEI STA opr STA opr STA opr,X STA opr,X STA ,X STA opr,SP STA opr,SP STHX opr STOP STX STX STX STX STX STX STX opr opr opr,X opr,X ,X opr,SP opr,SP #opr opr opr opr,X opr,X ,X opr,SP opr,SP
Operand
ii dd hh ll ee ff ff ff ee ff dd hh ll ee ff ff ff ee ff dd dd hh ll ee ff ff ff ee ff ii dd hh ll ee ff ff ff ee ff
Address Mode
Opcode
Operation
Description
VH I NZC
Subtract with Carry
A (A) - (M) - (C)
--
IMM DIR EXT IX2 IX1 IX SP1 SP2
A2 B2 C2 D2 E2 F2 9EE2 9ED2 99 9B B7 C7 D7 E7 F7 9EE7 9ED7 35 8E BF CF DF EF FF 9EEF 9EDF A0 B0 C0 D0 E0 F0 9EE0 9ED0
2 3 4 4 3 2 4 5 1 2 3 4 4 3 2 4 5 4 1 3 4 4 3 2 4 5 2 3 4 4 3 2 4 5
Set Carry Bit Set Interrupt Mask
C1 I1
- - - - - 1 INH - - 1 - - - INH DIR EXT IX2 - IX1 IX SP1 SP2 - DIR
Store A in M
M (A)
0--
Store H:X in M Enable IRQ Pin; Stop Oscillator
(M:M + 1) (H:X) I 0; Stop Oscillator
0--
- - 0 - - - INH DIR EXT IX2 - IX1 IX SP1 SP2 IMM DIR EXT IX2 IX1 IX SP1 SP2
Store X in M
M (X)
0--
SUB #opr SUB opr SUB opr SUB opr,X SUB opr,X SUB ,X SUB opr,SP SUB opr,SP
Subtract
A (A) - (M)
--
SWI
Software Interrupt
PC (PC) + 1; Push (PCL) SP (SP) - 1; Push (PCH) SP (SP) - 1; Push (X) SP (SP) - 1; Push (A) SP (SP) - 1; Push (CCR) SP (SP) - 1; I 1 PCH Interrupt Vector High Byte PCL Interrupt Vector Low Byte CCR (A) X (A) A (CCR)
- - 1 - - - INH
83
9
TAP TAX TPA
Transfer A to CCR Transfer A to X Transfer CCR to A
INH
84 97 85
2 1 1
- - - - - - INH - - - - - - INH
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Central Processor Unit (CPU)
Advance Information 85
Cycles
Effect on CCR
Central Processor Unit (CPU)
Table 6-1. Instruction Set Summary (Sheet 8 of 8)
Source Form
TST opr TSTA TSTX TST opr,X TST ,X TST opr,SP TSX TXA TXS WAIT A C CCR dd dd rr DD DIR DIX+ ee ff EXT ff H H hh ll I ii IMD IMM INH IX IX+ IX+D IX1 IX1+ IX2 M N
Operand
Address Mode
Opcode
Operation
Description
VH I NZC
Test for Negative or Zero
(A) - $00 or (X) - $00 or (M) - $00
0--
DIR INH - INH IX1 IX SP1
3D dd 4D 5D 6D ff 7D 9E6D ff 95 9F 94 8F
3 1 1 3 2 4 2 1 2 1
Transfer SP to H:X Transfer X to A Transfer H:X to SP Enable Interrupts; Stop Processor
H:X (SP) + 1 A (X) (SP) (H:X) - 1 I bit 0 n opr PC PCH PCL REL rel rr SP1 SP2 SP U V X Z & |
- - - - - - INH - - - - - - INH - - - - - - INH - - 0 - - - INH
Accumulator Carry/borrow bit Condition code register Direct address of operand Direct address of operand and relative offset of branch instruction Direct to direct addressing mode Direct addressing mode Direct to indexed with post increment addressing mode High and low bytes of offset in indexed, 16-bit offset addressing Extended addressing mode Offset byte in indexed, 8-bit offset addressing Half-carry bit Index register high byte High and low bytes of operand address in extended addressing Interrupt mask Immediate operand byte Immediate source to direct destination addressing mode Immediate addressing mode Inherent addressing mode Indexed, no offset addressing mode Indexed, no offset, post increment addressing mode Indexed with post increment to direct addressing mode Indexed, 8-bit offset addressing mode Indexed, 8-bit offset, post increment addressing mode Indexed, 16-bit offset addressing mode Memory location Negative bit
() -( ) #
? :
--
Any bit Operand (one or two bytes) Program counter Program counter high byte Program counter low byte Relative addressing mode Relative program counter offset byte Relative program counter offset byte Stack pointer, 8-bit offset addressing mode Stack pointer 16-bit offset addressing mode Stack pointer Undefined Overflow bit Index register low byte Zero bit Logical AND Logical OR Logical EXCLUSIVE OR Contents of Negation (two's complement) Immediate value Sign extend Loaded with If Concatenated with Set or cleared Not affected
6.9 Opcode Map
See Table 6-2.
Advance Information 86
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Central Processor Unit (CPU) MOTOROLA
Cycles
Effect on CCR
MOTOROLA Central Processor Unit (CPU) 87
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Advance Information
Table 6-2. Opcode Map
Bit Manipulation DIR DIR
MSB LSB
Branch REL 2 3 BRA 2 REL 3 BRN 2 REL 3 BHI 2 REL 3 BLS 2 REL 3 BCC 2 REL 3 BCS 2 REL 3 BNE 2 REL 3 BEQ 2 REL 3 BHCC 2 REL 3 BHCS 2 REL 3 BPL 2 REL 3 BMI 2 REL 3 BMC 2 REL 3 BMS 2 REL 3 BIL 2 REL 3 BIH 2 REL
DIR 3
INH 4
Read-Modify-Write INH IX1 5 1 NEGX 1 INH 4 CBEQX 3 IMM 7 DIV 1 INH 1 COMX 1 INH 1 LSRX 1 INH 4 LDHX 2 DIR 1 RORX 1 INH 1 ASRX 1 INH 1 LSLX 1 INH 1 ROLX 1 INH 1 DECX 1 INH 3 DBNZX 2 INH 1 INCX 1 INH 1 TSTX 1 INH 4 MOV 2 DIX+ 1 CLRX 1 INH 6 4 NEG 2 IX1 5 CBEQ 3 IX1+ 3 NSA 1 INH 4 COM 2 IX1 4 LSR 2 IX1 3 CPHX 3 IMM 4 ROR 2 IX1 4 ASR 2 IX1 4 LSL 2 IX1 4 ROL 2 IX1 4 DEC 2 IX1 5 DBNZ 3 IX1 4 INC 2 IX1 3 TST 2 IX1 4 MOV 3 IMD 3 CLR 2 IX1
SP1 9E6
IX 7
Control INH INH 8 9
IMM A 2 SUB 2 IMM 2 CMP 2 IMM 2 SBC 2 IMM 2 CPX 2 IMM 2 AND 2 IMM 2 BIT 2 IMM 2 LDA 2 IMM 2 AIS 2 IMM 2 EOR 2 IMM 2 ADC 2 IMM 2 ORA 2 IMM 2 ADD 2 IMM
DIR B 3 SUB DIR 3 CMP DIR 3 SBC DIR 3 CPX DIR 3 AND DIR 3 BIT DIR 3 LDA DIR 3 STA DIR 3 EOR DIR 3 ADC DIR 3 ORA DIR 3 ADD DIR 2 JMP DIR 4 JSR DIR 3 LDX DIR 3 STX DIR
MSB LSB
EXT C 4 SUB EXT 4 CMP EXT 4 SBC EXT 4 CPX EXT 4 AND EXT 4 BIT EXT 4 LDA EXT 4 STA EXT 4 EOR EXT 4 ADC EXT 4 ORA EXT 4 ADD EXT 3 JMP EXT 5 JSR EXT 4 LDX EXT 4 STX EXT
Register/Memory IX2 SP2 D 4 SUB 3 IX2 4 CMP 3 IX2 4 SBC 3 IX2 4 CPX 3 IX2 4 AND 3 IX2 4 BIT 3 IX2 4 LDA 3 IX2 4 STA 3 IX2 4 EOR 3 IX2 4 ADC 3 IX2 4 ORA 3 IX2 4 ADD 3 IX2 4 JMP 3 IX2 6 JSR 3 IX2 4 LDX 3 IX2 4 STX 3 IX2 9ED 5 SUB SP2 5 CMP SP2 5 SBC SP2 5 CPX SP2 5 AND SP2 5 BIT SP2 5 LDA SP2 5 STA SP2 5 EOR SP2 5 ADC SP2 5 ORA SP2 5 ADD SP2
IX1 E 3 SUB 2 IX1 3 CMP 2 IX1 3 SBC 2 IX1 3 CPX 2 IX1 3 AND 2 IX1 3 BIT 2 IX1 3 LDA 2 IX1 3 STA 2 IX1 3 EOR 2 IX1 3 ADC 2 IX1 3 ORA 2 IX1 3 ADD 2 IX1 3 JMP 2 IX1 5 JSR 2 IX1 3 LDX 2 IX1 3 STX 2 IX1
SP1 9EE 4 SUB SP1 4 CMP SP1 4 SBC SP1 4 CPX SP1 4 AND SP1 4 BIT SP1 4 LDA SP1 4 STA SP1 4 EOR SP1 4 ADC SP1 4 ORA SP1 4 ADD SP1
IX F 2 SUB IX 2 CMP IX 2 SBC IX 2 CPX IX 2 AND IX 2 BIT IX 2 LDA IX 2 STA IX 2 EOR IX 2 ADC IX 2 ORA IX 2 ADD IX 2 JMP IX 4 JSR IX 2 LDX IX 2 STX IX
0 5 BRSET0 3 DIR 5 BRCLR0 3 DIR 5 BRSET1 3 DIR 5 BRCLR1 3 DIR 5 BRSET2 3 DIR 5 BRCLR2 3 DIR 5 BRSET3 3 DIR 5 BRCLR3 3 DIR 5 BRSET4 3 DIR 5 BRCLR4 3 DIR 5 BRSET5 3 DIR 5 BRCLR5 3 DIR 5 BRSET6 3 DIR 5 BRCLR6 3 DIR 5 BRSET7 3 DIR 5 BRCLR7 3 DIR
1 4 BSET0 2 DIR 4 BCLR0 2 DIR 4 BSET1 2 DIR 4 BCLR1 2 DIR 4 BSET2 2 DIR 4 BCLR2 2 DIR 4 BSET3 2 DIR 4 BCLR3 2 DIR 4 BSET4 2 DIR 4 BCLR4 2 DIR 4 BSET5 2 DIR 4 BCLR5 2 DIR 4 BSET6 2 DIR 4 BCLR6 2 DIR 4 BSET7 2 DIR 4 BCLR7 2 DIR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
1 4 NEGA NEG INH 2 DIR 1 4 5 CBEQ CBEQA 3 DIR 3 IMM 5 MUL 1 INH 1 4 COMA COM INH 2 DIR 1 1 4 LSRA LSR INH 2 DIR 1 3 4 LDHX STHX 2 DIR 3 IMM 1 4 RORA ROR INH 2 DIR 1 1 4 ASRA ASR INH 2 DIR 1 1 4 LSLA LSL INH 2 DIR 1 1 4 ROLA ROL INH 2 DIR 1 1 4 DECA DEC INH 2 DIR 1 3 5 DBNZ DBNZA INH 3 DIR 2 1 4 INCA INC INH 2 DIR 1 1 3 TSTA TST INH 2 DIR 1 5 MOV 3 DD 1 3 CLRA CLR INH 2 DIR 1
3 5 NEG NEG IX 3 SP1 1 4 6 CBEQ CBEQ IX+ 4 SP1 2 2 DAA 1 INH 3 5 COM COM IX 3 SP1 1 3 5 LSR LSR IX 3 SP1 1 4 CPHX 2 DIR 3 5 ROR ROR IX 3 SP1 1 3 5 ASR ASR IX 3 SP1 1 3 5 LSL LSL IX 3 SP1 1 3 5 ROL ROL IX 3 SP1 1 3 5 DEC DEC IX 3 SP1 1 4 6 DBNZ DBNZ IX 4 SP1 2 3 5 INC INC IX 3 SP1 1 2 4 TST TST IX 3 SP1 1 4 MOV 2 IX+D 2 4 CLR CLR IX 3 SP1 1
3 7 BGE RTI 1 INH 2 REL 3 4 BLT RTS 1 INH 2 REL 3 BGT 2 REL 3 9 BLE SWI 1 INH 2 REL 2 2 TXS TAP INH 1 INH 1 2 1 TSX TPA INH 1 INH 1 2 PULA 1 INH 1 2 TAX PSHA INH 1 INH 1 1 2 CLC PULX INH 1 INH 1 1 2 SEC PSHX INH 1 INH 1 2 2 CLI PULH INH 1 INH 1 2 2 SEI PSHH INH 1 INH 1 1 1 RSP CLRH INH 1 INH 1 1 NOP 1 INH 1 STOP * 1 INH 1 1 TXA WAIT INH 1 INH 1
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
4 2 BSR REL 2 2 LDX 2 IMM 2 2 AIX 2 IMM 2
Central Processor Unit (CPU) Opcode Map
5 4 LDX SP2 5 STX 4 SP2
4 3 LDX SP1 1 4 STX 3 SP1 1
Inherent REL Relative Immediate IX Indexed, No Offset Direct IX1 Indexed, 8-Bit Offset Extended IX2 Indexed, 16-Bit Offset Direct-Direct IMD Immediate-Direct Indexed-Direct DIX+ Direct-Indexed *Pre-byte for stack pointer indexed instructions
INH IMM DIR EXT DD IX+D
SP1 Stack Pointer, 8-Bit Offset SP2 Stack Pointer, 16-Bit Offset IX+ Indexed, No Offset with Post Increment IX1+ Indexed, 1-Byte Offset with Post Increment
0
High Byte of Opcode in Hexadecimal
Low Byte of Opcode in Hexadecimal
0
5 Cycles BRSET0 Opcode Mnemonic 3 DIR Number of Bytes / Addressing Mode
Central Processor Unit (CPU)
Advance Information 88
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Central Processor Unit (CPU) MOTOROLA
Advance Information -- MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32
Section 7. System Integration Module (SIM)
7.1 Contents
7.2 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
7.3 SIM Bus Clock Control and Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 7.3.1 Bus Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93 7.3.2 Clock Startup from POR or LVI Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 7.3.3 Clocks in Wait Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 7.4 Reset and System Initialization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 7.4.1 External Pin Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 7.4.2 Active Resets from Internal Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 7.4.2.1 Power-On Reset (POR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 7.4.2.2 Computer Operating Properly (COP) Reset. . . . . . . . . . . 97 7.4.2.3 Illegal Opcode Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 7.4.2.4 Illegal Address Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 7.4.2.5 Forced Monitor Mode Entry Reset (MENRST). . . . . . . . . 98 7.4.2.6 Low-Voltage Inhibit (LVI) Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98 7.5 SIM Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 7.5.1 SIM Counter During Power-On Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 7.5.2 SIM Counter and Reset States. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 7.6 Exception Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 7.6.1 Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 7.6.1.1 Hardware Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 7.6.1.2 Software Interrupt (SWI) Instruction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 7.6.2 Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 7.7 Low-Power Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 7.7.1 Wait Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102 7.7.2 Stop Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA System Integration Module (SIM)
Advance Information 89
System Integration Module (SIM)
7.8 SIM Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104 7.8.1 SIM Break Status Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 7.8.2 SIM Reset Status Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 7.8.3 SIM Break Flag Control Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
7.2 Introduction
This section describes the system integration module (SIM). Together with the central processor unit (CPU), the SIM controls all microcontroller unit (MCU) activities. A block diagram of the SIM is shown in Figure 7-1. The SIM is a system state controller that coordinates CPU and exception timing. The SIM is responsible for: * Bus clock generation and control for CPU and peripherals: - Wait/reset/break entry and recovery - Internal clock control Master reset control, including power-on reset (POR) and computer operating properly (COP) timeout Interrupt control: - Acknowledge timing - Arbitration control timing - Vector address generation CPU enable/disable timing Modular architecture expandable to 128 interrupt sources
* *
* *
Table 7-1 shows the internal signal names used in this section.
Advance Information 90
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 System Integration Module (SIM) MOTOROLA
System Integration Module (SIM) Introduction
MODULE WAIT WAIT CONTROL CPU WAIT (FROM CPU) SIMOSCEN (TO CGM) SIM COUNTER COP CLOCK
CGMXCLK (FROM CGM) CGMOUT (FROM CGM) /2
CLOCK CONTROL
CLOCK GENERATORS
INTERNAL CLOCKS
RESET PIN LOGIC
POR CONTROL RESET PIN CONTROL SIM RESET STATUS REGISTER MASTER RESET CONTROL
LVI (FROM LVI MODULE) ILLEGAL OPCODE (FROM CPU) ILLEGAL ADDRESS (FROM ADDRESS MAP DECODERS) COP (FROM COP MODULE)
RESET
INTERRUPT CONTROL AND PRIORITY DECODE
INTERRUPT SOURCES CPU INTERFACE
Figure 7-1. SIM Block Diagram
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA System Integration Module (SIM)
Advance Information 91
System Integration Module (SIM)
Table 7-1. Signal Name Conventions
Signal Name CGMXCLK CGMVCLK CGMOUT IAB IDB PORRST IRST R/W Description Buffered version of OSC1 from clock generator module (CGM) Phase-locked loop (PLL) circuit output PLL-based or OSC1-based clock output from CGM module (Bus clock = CGMOUT divided by two) Internal address bus Internal data bus Signal from the power-on reset module to the SIM Internal reset signal Read/write signal
7.3 SIM Bus Clock Control and Generation
The bus clock generator provides system clock signals for the CPU and peripherals on the MCU. The system clocks are generated from an incoming clock, CGMOUT, as shown in Figure 7-2. This clock can come from either an external oscillator or from the on-chip phase-locked loop (PLL) circuit. See Section 8. Clock Generator Module (CGM).
OSC1 CLOCK SELECT CIRCUIT /2 A
CGMXCLK CGMOUT
SIM COUNTER /2 BUS CLOCK GENERATORS
CGMVCLK
B S* *When S = 1, CGMOUT = B
PLL
BCS PTC2 MONITOR MODE USER MODE
6,0
&*0
Figure 7-2. CGM Clock Signals
Advance Information 92
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 System Integration Module (SIM) MOTOROLA
System Integration Module (SIM) Reset and System Initialization
7.3.1 Bus Timing In user mode, the internal bus frequency is either the crystal oscillator output (CGMXCLK) divided by four or the PLL output (CGMVCLK) divided by four. See Section 8. Clock Generator Module (CGM).
7.3.2 Clock Startup from POR or LVI Reset When the power-on reset (POR) module or the low-voltage inhibit (LVI) module generates a reset, the clocks to the CPU and peripherals are inactive and held in an inactive phase until after the 4096 CGMXCLK cycle POR timeout has completed. The RST pin is driven low by the SIM during this entire period. The internal bus (IBUS) clocks start upon completion of the timeout.
7.3.3 Clocks in Wait Mode In wait mode, the CPU clocks are inactive. The SIM also produces two sets of clocks for other modules. Refer to the wait mode subsection of each module to see if the module is active or inactive in wait mode. Some modules can be programmed to be active in wait mode.
7.4 Reset and System Initialization
The MCU has these reset sources: * * * * * * Power-on reset module (POR) External reset pin (RST) Computer operating properly (COP) module Low-voltage inhibit (LVI) module Illegal opcode Illegal address
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA System Integration Module (SIM)
Advance Information 93
System Integration Module (SIM)
All of these resets produce the vector $FFFE-FFFF ($FEFE-FEFF in monitor mode) and assert the internal reset signal (IRST). IRST causes all registers to be returned to their default values and all modules to be returned to their reset states. An internal reset clears the SIM counter (see 7.5 SIM Counter), but an external reset does not. Each of the resets sets a corresponding bit in the SIM reset status register (SRSR). See 7.8.2 SIM Reset Status Register.
7.4.1 External Pin Reset Pulling the asynchronous RST pin low halts all processing. The PIN bit of the SIM reset status register (SRSR) is set as long as RST is held low for a minimum of 67 CGMXCLK cycles, assuming that neither the POR nor the LVI was the source of the reset. See Table 7-2 for details. Figure 7-3 shows the relative timing. Table 7-2. PIN Bit Set Timing
Reset Type POR/LVI All others Number of Cycles Required to Set PIN 4163 (4096 + 64 + 3) 67 (64 + 3)
CGMOUT
RST
IAB
PC
VECT H
VECT L
Figure 7-3. External Reset Timing
Advance Information 94
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 System Integration Module (SIM) MOTOROLA
System Integration Module (SIM) Reset and System Initialization
7.4.2 Active Resets from Internal Sources All internal reset sources actively pull the RST pin low for 32 CGMXCLK cycles to allow resetting of external peripherals. The internal reset signal (IRST) continues to be asserted for an additional 32 cycles (see Figure 7-5). An internal reset can be caused by an illegal address, illegal opcode, COP timeout, LVI, or POR. (See Figure 7-4.)
ILLEGAL ADDRESS RST ILLEGAL OPCODE RST COPRST LVI POR
INTERNAL RESET
Figure 7-4. Sources of Internal Reset
NOTE:
For LVI or POR resets, the SIM cycles through 4096 CGMXCLK cycles during which the SIM forces the RST pin low. The internal reset signal then follows the sequence from the falling edge of RST, as shown in Figure 7-5.
IRST
RST
RST PULLED LOW BY MCU 32 CYCLES 32 CYCLES
CGMXCLK
IAB
VECTOR HIGH
Figure 7-5. Internal Reset Timing The COP reset is asynchronous to the bus clock. The active reset feature allows the part to issue a reset to peripherals and other chips within a system built around the MCU.
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA System Integration Module (SIM)
Advance Information 95
System Integration Module (SIM)
7.4.2.1 Power-On Reset (POR) When power is first applied to the MCU, the power-on reset (POR) module generates a pulse to indicate that power-on has occurred. The external reset pin (RST) is held low while the SIM counter counts out 4096 CGMXCLK cycles. Sixty-four CGMXCLK cycles later, the CPU and memories are released from reset to allow the reset vector sequence to occur. At power-on, these events occur: * * * * * * A POR pulse is generated. The internal reset signal is asserted. The SIM enables CGMOUT. Internal clocks to the CPU and modules are held inactive for 4096 CGMXCLK cycles to allow stabilization of the oscillator. The RST pin is driven low during the oscillator stabilization time. The POR bit of the SIM reset status register (SRSR) is set and all other bits in the register are cleared.
OSC1
PORRST 4096 CYCLES CGMXCLK 32 CYCLES 32 CYCLES
CGMOUT
RST
IAB
$FFFE
$FFFF
Figure 7-6. POR Recovery
Advance Information 96
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 System Integration Module (SIM) MOTOROLA
System Integration Module (SIM) Reset and System Initialization
7.4.2.2 Computer Operating Properly (COP) Reset An input to the SIM is reserved for the COP reset signal. The overflow of the COP counter causes an internal reset and sets the COP bit in the SIM reset status register (SRSR). The SIM actively pulls down the RST pin for all internal reset sources. To prevent a COP module timeout, write any value to location $FFFF. Writing to location $FFFF clears the COP counter and bits 12-4 of the SIM counter. The SIM counter output, which occurs at least every 213-24 CGMXCLK cycles, drives the COP counter. The COP should be serviced as soon as possible out of reset to guarantee the maximum amount of time before the first timeout. The COP module is disabled if the RST pin or the IRQ pin is held at VHI while the MCU is in monitor mode. The COP module can be disabled only through combinational logic conditioned with the high voltage signal on the RST or the IRQ pin. This prevents the COP from becoming disabled as a result of external noise. During a break state, VHI on the RST pin disables the COP module. 7.4.2.3 Illegal Opcode Reset The SIM decodes signals from the CPU to detect illegal instructions. An illegal instruction sets the ILOP bit in the SIM reset status register (SRSR) and causes a reset. Because the MC68HC908MR32 has stop mode disabled, execution of the STOP instruction will cause an illegal opcode reset. 7.4.2.4 Illegal Address Reset An opcode fetch from addresses other than FLASH or RAM addresses generates an illegal address reset (unimplemented locations within memory map). The SIM verifies that the CPU is fetching an opcode prior to asserting the ILAD bit in the SIM reset status register (SRSR) and resetting the MCU. A data fetch from an unmapped address does not generate a reset.
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA System Integration Module (SIM)
Advance Information 97
System Integration Module (SIM)
7.4.2.5 Forced Monitor Mode Entry Reset (MENRST) The MENRST module monitors the reset vector fetches and will assert an internal reset if it detects that the reset vectors are erased ($FF). When the MCU comes out of reset, it is forced into monitor mode. 7.4.2.6 Low-Voltage Inhibit (LVI) Reset The low-voltage inhibit (LVI) module asserts its output to the SIM when the VDD voltage falls to the VLVRX voltage and remains at or below that level for at least nine consecutive CPU cycles (see 22.6 DC Electrical Characteristics (VDD = 5.0 Vdc 10%)). The LVI bit in the SIM reset status register (SRSR) is set, and the external reset pin (RST) is held low while the SIM counter counts out 4096 CGMXCLK cycles. Sixty-four CGMXCLK cycles later, the CPU is released from reset to allow the reset vector sequence to occur. The SIM actively pulls down the RST pin for all internal reset sources.
7.5 SIM Counter
The SIM counter is used by the power-on reset (POR) module to allow the oscillator time to stabilize before enabling the internal bus (IBUS) clocks. The SIM counter also serves as a prescaler for the computer operating properly (COP) module. The SIM counter overflow supplies the clock for the COP module. The SIM counter is 13 bits long and is clocked by the falling edge of CGMXCLK.
7.5.1 SIM Counter During Power-On Reset The power-on reset (POR) module detects power applied to the MCU. At power-on, the POR circuit asserts the signal PORRST. Once the SIM is initialized, it enables the clock generation (CGM) module to drive the bus clock state machine.
7.5.2 SIM Counter and Reset States External reset has no effect on the SIM counter. The SIM counter is free-running after all reset states. For counter control and internal reset recovery sequences, see 7.4.2 Active Resets from Internal Sources.
Advance Information 98 MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 System Integration Module (SIM) MOTOROLA
System Integration Module (SIM) Exception Control
7.6 Exception Control
Normal, sequential program execution can be changed in three different ways: 1. Interrupts: a. Maskable hardware CPU interrupts b. Non-maskable software interrupt instruction (SWI) 2. Reset 3. Break interrupts
7.6.1 Interrupts At the beginning of an interrupt, the CPU saves the CPU register contents on the stack and sets the interrupt mask (I bit) to prevent additional interrupts. At the end of an interrupt, the return-from-interrupt (RTI) instruction recovers the CPU register contents from the stack so that normal processing can resume. Figure 7-7 shows interrupt entry timing. Figure 7-9 shows interrupt recovery timing. Interrupts are latched, and arbitration is performed in the SIM at the start of interrupt processing. The arbitration result is a constant that the CPU uses to determine which vector to fetch. Once an interrupt is latched by the SIM, no other interrupt can take precedence, regardless of priority, until the latched interrupt is serviced (or the I bit is cleared). See Figure 7-8.
MODULE INTERRUPT
I BIT START ADDR OPCODE
IAB
DUMMY
SP
SP - 1
SP - 2
SP - 3
SP - 4
VECT H
VECT L
IDB
DUMMY
PC - 1[7:0] PC - 1[15:8]
X
A
CCR
V DATA H
V DATA L
R/W
Figure 7-7. Interrupt Entry
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA System Integration Module (SIM) Advance Information 99
System Integration Module (SIM)
FROM RESET
BREAK SET? I BIT OR SWI INTERRUPT? NO
YES
YES I BIT SET?
NO
INTERRUPT?
YES
NO AS MANY INTERRUPTS AS EXIST ON CHIP STACK CPU REGISTERS SET I BIT LOAD PC WITH INTERRUPT VECTOR
FETCH NEXT INSTRUCTION
SWI INSTRUCTION? NO
YES
RTI INSTRUCTION? NO
YES
UNSTACK CPU REGISTERS
EXECUTE INSTRUCTION
Figure 7-8. Interrupt Processing
Advance Information 100
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 System Integration Module (SIM) MOTOROLA
System Integration Module (SIM) Exception Control
MODULE INTERRUPT
I BIT
IAB
SP - 4
SP - 3
SP - 2
SP - 1
SP
PC
PC + 1
IDB
CCR
A
X
PC - 1[7:0] PC - 1[15:8] OPCODE
OPERAND
R/W
Figure 7-9. Interrupt Recovery 7.6.1.1 Hardware Interrupts A hardware interrupt does not stop the current instruction. Processing of a hardware interrupt begins after completion of the current instruction. When the current instruction is complete, the SIM checks all pending hardware interrupts. If interrupts are not masked (I bit clear in the condition code register), and if the corresponding interrupt enable bit is set, the SIM proceeds with interrupt processing; otherwise, the next instruction is fetched and executed. If more than one interrupt is pending at the end of an instruction execution, the highest priority interrupt is serviced first. Figure 7-10 demonstrates what happens when two interrupts are pending. If an interrupt is pending upon exit from the original interrupt service routine, the pending interrupt is serviced before the load-accumulator-frommemory (LDA) instruction is executed.
CLI LDA#$FF INT1 BACKGROUND ROUTINE
PSHH INT1 INTERRUPT SERVICE ROUTINE PULH RTI
INT2
PSHH INT2 INTERRUPT SERVICE ROUTINE PULH RTI
Figure 7-10. Interrupt Recognition Example
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA System Integration Module (SIM) Advance Information 101
System Integration Module (SIM)
The LDA opcode is prefetched by both the INT1 and INT2 RTI instructions. However, in the case of the INT1 RTI prefetch, this is a redundant operation.
NOTE:
To maintain compatibility with the M6805 Family, the H register is not pushed on the stack during interrupt entry. If the interrupt service routine modifies the H register or uses the indexed addressing mode, software should save the H register and then restore it prior to exiting the routine.
7.6.1.2 Software Interrupt (SWI) Instruction The software interrupt (SWI) instruction is a non-maskable instruction that causes an interrupt regardless of the state of the interrupt mask (I bit) in the condition code register.
7.6.2 Reset All reset sources always have equal and highest priority and cannot be arbitrated.
7.7 Low-Power Mode
Executing the WAIT instruction puts the MCU in a low power-consumption mode for standby situations. The SIM holds the CPU in a non-clocked state. WAIT clears the interrupt mask (I) in the condition code register, allowing interrupts to occur.
7.7.1 Wait Mode In wait mode, the CPU clocks are inactive while the peripheral clocks continue to run. Figure 7-11 shows the timing for wait mode entry. A module that is active during wait mode can wake up the CPU with an interrupt if the interrupt is enabled. Stacking for the interrupt begins one cycle after the WAIT instruction during which the interrupt occurred. Refer to the wait mode subsection of each module to see if the module is active or inactive in wait mode. Some modules can be programmed to be active in wait mode.
Advance Information 102
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 System Integration Module (SIM) MOTOROLA
System Integration Module (SIM) Low-Power Mode
Wait mode can also be exited by a reset. If the COP disable bit, COPD, in the configuration register is logic 0, then the computer operating properly module (COP) is enabled and remains active in wait mode.
IAB
WAIT ADDR
WAIT ADDR + 1
SAME
SAME
IDB
PREVIOUS DATA
NEXT OPCODE
SAME
SAME
R/W Note: Previous data can be operand data or the WAIT opcode, depending on the last instruction.
Figure 7-11. Wait Mode Entry Timing Figure 7-12 and Figure 7-13 show the timing for wait recovery.
IAB
$6E0B
$6E0C
$00FF
$00FE
$00FD
$00FC
IDB
$A6
$A6
$A6
$01
$0B
$6E
EXITSTOPWAIT Note: EXITSTOPWAIT = RST pin OR CPU interrupt
Figure 7-12. Wait Recovery from Interrupt
&<&/(6
IAB $6E0B
32
&<&/(6
RST VCT H RST VCT L
32
IDB
$A6
$A6
$A6
RST
CGMXCLK
Figure 7-13. Wait Recovery from Internal Reset
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA System Integration Module (SIM)
Advance Information 103
System Integration Module (SIM)
7.7.2 Stop Mode In stop mode, the SIM counter is reset and the system clocks are disabled. An interrupt request from a module can cause an exit from stop mode. Stacking for interrupts begins after the selected stop recovery time has elapsed. Reset or break also causes an exit from stop mode. The SIM disables the clock generator module outputs (CGMOUT and CGMXCLK) in stop mode, stopping the CPU and peripherals. Stop recovery time is hard wired at the normal delay of 4096 CGMXCLK cycles. It is important to note that when using the PWM generator, its outputs will stop toggling when stop mode is entered. The PWM module must be disabled before entering stop mode to prevent external inverter failure.
7.8 SIM Registers
This subsection describes the SIM registers.
7.8.1 SIM Break Status Register The SIM break status register (SBSR) contains a flag to indicate that a break caused an exit from wait mode.
Address: $FE00 BIt 7 Read: R Write: Reset: R = Reserved R R R R R 6 5 4 3 2 1 SBSW Note(1) 0 Note 1. Writing a logic 0 clears SBSW. R Bit 0
Figure 7-14. SIM Break Status Register (SBSR)
Advance Information 104
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 System Integration Module (SIM) MOTOROLA
System Integration Module (SIM) SIM Registers
SBSW -- SIM Break Stop/Wait Bit This status bit is useful in applications requiring a return to wait mode after exiting from a break interrupt. Clear SBSW by writing a logic 0 to it. Reset clears SBSW. 1 = Wait mode was exited by break interrupt. 0 = Wait mode was not exited by break interrupt. SBSW can be read within the break state SWI routine. The user can modify the return address on the stack by subtracting one from it. The following code is an example of this. Writing 0 to the SBSW bit clears it.
; This code works if the H register has been pushed onto the stack in the break ; service routine software. This code should be executed at the end of the break ; service routine software. HIBYTE LOBYTE ; BRCLR TST BNE DEC DOLO RETURN DEC PULH RTI SBSW,SBSR, RETURN LOBYTE,SP DOLO HIBYTE,SP LOBYTE,SP EQU EQU 5 6 If not SBSW, do RTI ; See if wait mode was exited by break. ; ;If RETURNLO is not zero, ;then just decrement low byte. ;Else deal with high byte, too. ;Point to WAIT opcode. ;Restore H register.
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA System Integration Module (SIM)
Advance Information 105
System Integration Module (SIM)
7.8.2 SIM Reset Status Register The SIM reset status register (SRSR) contains six flags that show the source of the last reset. Clear the SIM reset status register by reading it. A power-on reset sets the POR bit and clears all other bits in the register.
Address: $FE01 BIt 7 Read: Write: Reset: POR R 1 R 6 PIN R 0 = Reserved 5 COP R 0 4 ILOP R 0 3 ILAD R 0 2 MENRST R 0 1 LVI R 0 Bit 0 0 R 0
Figure 7-15. SIM Reset Status Register (SRSR) POR -- Power-On Reset Bit 1 = Last reset caused by POR circuit 0 = Read of SRSR PIN -- External Reset Bit 1 = Last reset caused by external reset pin (RST) 0 = POR or read of SRSR COP -- Computer Operating Properly Reset Bit 1 = Last reset caused by COP counter 0 = POR or read of SRSR ILOP -- Illegal Opcode Reset Bit 1 = Last reset caused by an illegal opcode 0 = POR or read of SRSR ILAD -- Illegal Address Reset Bit (opcode fetches only) 1 = Last reset caused by an opcode fetch from an illegal address 0 = POR or read of SRSR MENRST -- Forced Monitor Mode Entry Reset Bit 1 = Last reset caused by the MENRST circuit 0 = POR or read of SRSR
Advance Information 106
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 System Integration Module (SIM) MOTOROLA
System Integration Module (SIM) SIM Registers
LVI -- Low-Voltage Inhibit Reset Bit 1 = Last reset caused by the LVI circuit 0 = POR or read of SRSR
7.8.3 SIM Break Flag Control Register The SIM break control register (SBFCR) contains a bit that enables software to clear status bits while the MCU is in a break state.
Address: $FE03 BIt 7 Read: BCFE Write: Reset: 0 R = Reserved R R R R R R R 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
Figure 7-16. SIM Break Flag Control Register (SBFCR) BCFE -- Break Clear Flag Enable Bit This read/write bit enables software to clear status bits by accessing status registers while the MCU is in a break state. To clear status bits during the break state, the BCFE bit must be set. 1 = Status bits clearable during break 0 = Status bits not clearable during break
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA System Integration Module (SIM)
Advance Information 107
System Integration Module (SIM)
Advance Information 108
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 System Integration Module (SIM) MOTOROLA
Advance Information -- MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32
Section 8. Clock Generator Module (CGM)
8.1 Contents
8.2 8.3 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
8.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 8.4.1 Crystal Oscillator Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 8.4.2 Phase-Locked Loop Circuit (PLL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 8.4.2.1 PLL Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 8.4.2.2 Acquisition and Tracking Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 8.4.2.3 Manual and Automatic PLL Bandwidth Modes . . . . . . . 115 8.4.2.4 Programming the PLL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 8.4.2.5 Special Programming Exceptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 8.4.3 Base Clock Selector Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 8.4.4 CGM External Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 8.5 I/O Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 8.5.1 Crystal Amplifier Input Pin (OSC1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121 8.5.2 Crystal Amplifier Output Pin (OSC2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 8.5.3 External Filter Capacitor Pin (CGMXFC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 8.5.4 PLL Analog Power Pin (VDDA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 8.5.5 Oscillator Enable Signal (SIMOSCEN). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 8.5.6 Crystal Output Frequency Signal (CGMXCLK) . . . . . . . . .122 8.5.7 CGM Base Clock Output (CGMOUT). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 8.5.8 CGM CPU Interrupt (CGMINT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 8.6 CGM Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 8.6.1 PLL Control Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 8.6.2 PLL Bandwidth Control Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 8.6.3 PLL Programming Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 8.7 8.8 Interrupts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Wait Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Clock Generator Module (CGM)
Advance Information 109
Clock Generator Module (CGM)
8.9 Acquisition/Lock Time Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 8.9.1 Acquisition/Lock Time Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 8.9.2 Parametric Influences on Reaction Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132 8.9.3 Choosing a Filter Capacitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 8.9.4 Reaction Time Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
8.2 Introduction
This section describes the clock generator module (CGM, version A). The CGM generates the crystal clock signal, CGMXCLK, which operates at the frequency of the crystal. The CGM also generates the base clock signal, CGMOUT, from which the system integration module (SIM) derives the system clocks. CGMOUT is based on either the crystal clock divided by two or the phase-locked loop (PLL) clock, CGMVCLK, divided by two. The PLL is a frequency generator designed for use with crystals or ceramic resonators. The PLL can generate an 8-MHz bus frequency without using a 32-MHz external clock.
8.3 Features
Features of the CGM include: * * * * * PLL with output frequency in integer multiples of the crystal reference Programmable hardware voltage-controlled oscillator (VCO) for low-jitter operation Automatic bandwidth control mode for low-jitter operation Automatic frequency lock detector Central processor unit (CPU) interrupt on entry or exit from locked condition
Advance Information 110
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Clock Generator Module (CGM) MOTOROLA
Clock Generator Module (CGM) Functional Description
8.4 Functional Description
The CGM consists of three major submodules: 1. Crystal oscillator circuit -- The crystal oscillator circuit generates the constant crystal frequency clock, CGMXCLK. 2. Phase-locked loop (PLL) -- The PLL generates the programmable VCO frequency clock, CGMVCLK. 3. Base clock selector circuit -- This software-controlled circuit selects either CGMXCLK divided by two or the VCO clock, CGMVCLK, divided by two as the base clock, CGMOUT. The SIM derives the system clocks from CGMOUT. Figure 8-1 shows the structure of the CGM.
8.4.1 Crystal Oscillator Circuit The crystal oscillator circuit consists of an inverting amplifier and an external crystal. The OSC1 pin is the input to the amplifier and the OSC2 pin is the output. The SIMOSCEN signal from the system integration module (SIM) enables the crystal oscillator circuit. The CGMXCLK signal is the output of the crystal oscillator circuit and runs at a rate equal to the crystal frequency. CGMXCLK is then buffered to produce CGMRCLK, the PLL reference clock. CGMXCLK can be used by other modules which require precise timing for operation. The duty cycle of CGMXCLK is not guaranteed to be 50 percent and depends on external factors, including the crystal and related external components. An externally generated clock also can feed the OSC1 pin of the crystal oscillator circuit. Connect the external clock to the OSC1 pin and let the OSC2 pin float.
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Clock Generator Module (CGM)
Advance Information 111
Clock Generator Module (CGM)
CRYSTAL OSCILLATOR OSC2 CGMXCLK OSC1 CLOCK SELECT CIRCUIT A B S* CGMOUT TO SIM TO SIM
/2
SIMOSCEN CGMRDV CGMRCLK BCS
*WHEN S = 1, CGMOUT = B
VDDA
CGMXFC
VSS VRS[7:4]
USER MODE PTC2 MONITOR MODE
PHASE DETECTOR
LOOP FILTER PLL ANALOG
VOLTAGE CONTROLLED OSCILLATOR
LOCK DETECTOR
BANDWIDTH CONTROL
INTERRUPT CONTROL
CGMINT
LOCK
AUTO
ACQ
PLLIE
PLLF
MUL[7:4]
CGMVDV
FREQUENCY DIVIDER
CGMVCLK
Figure 8-1. CGM Block Diagram
Advance Information 112
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Clock Generator Module (CGM) MOTOROLA
Clock Generator Module (CGM) Functional Description
Addr.
Register Name Read: PLL Control Register (PCTL) Write: See page 124. Reset:
Bit 7 PLLIE
6 PLLF
5 PLLON
4 BCS
3 1 R
2 1 R 1 0 R 0 VRS6 1
1 1 R 1 0 R 0 VRS5 1
Bit 0 1 R 1 0 R 0 VRS4 0
$005C
R 0 0 LOCK ACQ R 0 MUL6 1 = Reserved 0 MUL5 1 0 MUL4 0 XLD 1 0
1 0 R 0 VRS7 0
$005D
Read: PLL Bandwidth Control Register AUTO (PBWC) Write: See page 126. Reset: 0 Read: PLL Programming Register (PPG) Write: See page 128. Reset: MUL7 0 R
$005E
Figure 8-2. CGM I/O Register Summary 8.4.2 Phase-Locked Loop Circuit (PLL) The PLL is a frequency generator that can operate in either acquisition mode or tracking mode, depending on the accuracy of the output frequency. The PLL can change between acquisition and tracking modes either automatically or manually. 8.4.2.1 PLL Circuits The PLL consists of these circuits: * * * * * Voltage-controlled oscillator (VCO) Modulo VCO frequency divider Phase detector Loop filter Lock detector
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Clock Generator Module (CGM)
Advance Information 113
Clock Generator Module (CGM)
The operating range of the VCO is programmable for a wide range of frequencies and for maximum immunity to external noise, including supply and CGMXFC noise. The VCO frequency is bound to a range from roughly one-half to twice the center-of-range frequency, fVRS. Modulating the voltage on the CGMXFC pin changes the frequency within this range. By design, fVRS is equal to the nominal center-of-range frequency, fNOM, (4.9152 MHz) times a linear factor, L or (L) fNOM. CGMRCLK is the PLL reference clock, a buffered version of CGMXCLK. CGMRCLK runs at a frequency, fRCLK, and is fed to the PLL through a buffer. The buffer output is the final reference clock, CGMRDV, running at a frequency, fRDV = fRCLK. The VCO's output clock, CGMVCLK, running at a frequency, fVCLK, is fed back through a programmable modulo divider. The modulo divider reduces the VCO clock by a factor, N. The divider's output is the VCO feedback clock, CGMVDV, running at a frequency, fVDV = fVCLK/N. (See 8.4.2.4 Programming the PLL for more information.) The phase detector then compares the VCO feedback clock, CGMVDV, with the final reference clock, CGMRDV. A correction pulse is generated based on the phase difference between the two signals. The loop filter then slightly alters the dc voltage on the external capacitor connected to CGMXFC based on the width and direction of the correction pulse. The filter can make fast or slow corrections depending on its mode, described in 8.4.2.2 Acquisition and Tracking Modes. The value of the external capacitor and the reference frequency determines the speed of the corrections and the stability of the PLL. The lock detector compares the frequencies of the VCO feedback clock, CGMVDV, and the final reference clock, CGMRDV. Therefore, the speed of the lock detector is directly proportional to the final reference frequency, fRDV. The circuit determines the mode of the PLL and the lock condition based on this comparison.
Advance Information 114
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Clock Generator Module (CGM) MOTOROLA
Clock Generator Module (CGM) Functional Description
8.4.2.2 Acquisition and Tracking Modes The PLL filter is manually or automatically configurable into one of two operating modes: 1. Acquisition mode -- In acquisition mode, the filter can make large frequency corrections to the VCO. This mode is used at PLL startup or when the PLL has suffered a severe noise hit and the VCO frequency is far off the desired frequency. When in acquisition mode, the ACQ bit is clear in the PLL bandwidth control register. See 8.6.2 PLL Bandwidth Control Register. 2. Tracking mode -- In tracking mode, the filter makes only small corrections to the frequency of the VCO. PLL jitter is much lower in tracking mode, but the response to noise is also slower. The PLL enters tracking mode when the VCO frequency is nearly correct, such as when the PLL is selected as the base clock source. See 8.4.3 Base Clock Selector Circuit. The PLL is automatically in tracking mode when not in acquisition mode or when the ACQ bit is set. 8.4.2.3 Manual and Automatic PLL Bandwidth Modes The PLL can change the bandwidth or operational mode of the loop filter manually or automatically. In automatic bandwidth control mode (AUTO = 1), the lock detector automatically switches between acquisition and tracking modes. Automatic bandwidth control mode also is used to determine when the VCO clock, CGMVCLK, is safe to use as the source for the base clock, CGMOUT. See 8.6.2 PLL Bandwidth Control Register. If PLL interrupts are enabled, the software can wait for a PLL interrupt request and then check the LOCK bit. If interrupts are disabled, software can poll the LOCK bit continuously (during PLL startup, usually) or at periodic intervals. In either case, when the LOCK bit is set, the VCO clock is safe to use as the source for the base clock. See 8.4.3 Base Clock Selector Circuit. If the VCO is selected as the source for the base clock and the LOCK bit is clear, the PLL has suffered a severe noise hit and the software must take appropriate action, depending on the application. See 8.7 Interrupts for information and precautions on using interrupts.
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Clock Generator Module (CGM)
Advance Information 115
Clock Generator Module (CGM)
These conditions apply when the PLL is in automatic bandwidth control mode: * The ACQ bit (see 8.6.2 PLL Bandwidth Control Register) is a read-only indicator of the mode of the filter. For more information, see 8.4.2.2 Acquisition and Tracking Modes. The ACQ bit is set when the VCO frequency is within a certain tolerance, TRK, and is cleared when the VCO frequency is out of a certain tolerance, UNT. For more information, see 8.9 Acquisition/Lock Time Specifications. The LOCK bit is a read-only indicator of the locked state of the PLL. The LOCK bit is set when the VCO frequency is within a certain tolerance, Lock, and is cleared when the VCO frequency is out of a certain tolerance, UNL. For more information, see 8.9 Acquisition/Lock Time Specifications. CPU interrupts can occur if enabled (PLLIE = 1) when the PLL's lock condition changes, toggling the LOCK bit. For more information, see 8.6.1 PLL Control Register.
*
* *
*
The PLL also may operate in manual mode (AUTO = 0). Manual mode is used by systems that do not require an indicator of the lock condition for proper operation. Such systems typically operate well below fBUSMAX and require fast startup. These conditions apply when in manual mode: * ACQ is a writable control bit that controls the mode of the filter. Before turning on the PLL in manual mode, the ACQ bit must be clear. Before entering tracking mode (ACQ = 1), software must wait a given time, tACQ (see 8.9 Acquisition/Lock Time Specifications), after turning on the PLL by setting PLLON in the PLL control register (PCTL). Software must wait a given time, tAL, after entering tracking mode before selecting the PLL as the clock source to CGMOUT (BCS = 1). The LOCK bit is disabled. CPU interrupts from the CGM are disabled.
*
*
* *
Advance Information 116
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Clock Generator Module (CGM) MOTOROLA
Clock Generator Module (CGM) Functional Description
8.4.2.4 Programming the PLL Use this 9-step procedure to program the PLL. Table 8-1 lists the variables used and their meaning. Table 8-1. Variable Definitions
Variable fBUSDES fVCLKDES fRCLK fVCLK fBUS fNOM fVRS Definition Desired bus clock frequency Desired VCO clock frequency Chosen reference crystal frequency Calculated VCO clock frequency Calculated bus clock frequency Nominal VCO center frequency Shifted FCO center frequency
1. Choose the desired bus frequency, fBUSDES. Example: fBUSDES = 8 MHz 2. Calculate the desired VCO frequency, fVCLKDES. fVCLKDES = 4 x fBUSDES Example: fVCLKDES = 4 x 8 MHz = 32 MHz 3. Using a reference frequency, fRCLK, equal to the crystal frequency, calculate the VCO frequency multiplier, N. Round the result to the nearest integer. N= Example: N = fVCLKDES fRCLK
32 MHz = 8 MHz 4 MHz
4. Calculate the VCO frequency, fVCLK. fVCLK = N x fRCLK Example: fVCLK = 8 x 4 MHz = 32 MHz
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Clock Generator Module (CGM)
Advance Information 117
Clock Generator Module (CGM)
5. Calculate the bus frequency, fBUS, and compare fBUS with fBUSDES. fBUS = Example: N = fVCLK 4
32 MHz = 8 MHz 4 MHz
6. If the calculated fBUS is not within the tolerance limits of the application, select another fBUSDES or another fRCLK. 7. Using the value 4.9152 MHz for fNOM, calculate the VCO linear range multiplier, L. The linear range multiplier controls the frequency range of the PLL. L = round
fVCLK fNOM

Example: L =
32 MHz = 7 MHz 4.9152 MHz
8. Calculate the VCO center-of-range frequency, fVRS. The center-or-range frequency is the midpoint between the minimum and maximum frequencies attainable by the PLL. fVRS = L x fNOM Example: fVRS = 7 x 4.9152 MHz = 34.4 MHz For proper operation,
CAUTION:
Exceeding the recommended maximum bus frequency or VCO frequency can crash the MCU. 9. Program the PLL registers accordingly: a. In the upper four bits of the PLL programming register (PPG), program the binary equivalent of N. b. In the lower four bits of the PLL programming register (PPG), program the binary equivalent of L.
Advance Information 118
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Clock Generator Module (CGM) MOTOROLA
Clock Generator Module (CGM) Functional Description
8.4.2.5 Special Programming Exceptions The programming method described in 8.4.2.4 Programming the PLL does not account for possible exceptions. A value of 0 for N or L is meaningless when used in the equations given. To account for these exceptions: * * A 0 value for N is interpreted exactly the same as a value of 1. A 0 value for L disables the PLL and prevents its selection as the source for the base clock. See 8.4.3 Base Clock Selector Circuit.
8.4.3 Base Clock Selector Circuit This circuit is used to select either the crystal clock, CGMXCLK, or the VCO clock, CGMVCLK, as the source of the base clock, CGMOUT. The two input clocks go through a transition control circuit that waits up to three CGMXCLK cycles and three CGMVCLK cycles to change from one clock source to the other. During this time, CGMOUT is held in stasis. The output of the transition control circuit is then divided by two to correct the duty cycle. Therefore, the bus clock frequency, which is one-half of the base clock frequency, is one-fourth the frequency of the selected clock (CGMXCLK or CGMVCLK). The BCS bit in the PLL control register (PCTL) selects which clock drives CGMOUT. The VCO clock cannot be selected as the base clock source if the PLL is not turned on. The PLL cannot be turned off if the VCO clock is selected. The PLL cannot be turned on or off simultaneously with the selection or deselection of the VCO clock. The VCO clock also cannot be selected as the base clock source if the factor L is programmed to a 0. This value would set up a condition inconsistent with the operation of the PLL, so that the PLL would be disabled and the crystal clock would be forced as the source of the base clock.
8.4.4 CGM External Connections In its typical configuration, the CGM requires seven external components. Five of these are for the crystal oscillator and two are for the PLL.
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Clock Generator Module (CGM)
Advance Information 119
Clock Generator Module (CGM)
The crystal oscillator is normally connected in a Pierce oscillator configuration, as shown in Figure 8-3. Figure 8-3 shows only the logical representation of the internal components and may not represent actual circuitry.
SIMOSCEN
CGMXCLK
OSC1
OSC2
VSS
CGMXFC C)
VDDA VDD C%<3
R 6* R%
X1
C1
C2
*R S can be 0 (shorted) when used with higher-frequency crystals. Refer to manufacturer's data.
Figure 8-3. CGM External Connections The oscillator configuration uses five components: 1. Crystal, X1 2. Fixed capacitor, C1 3. Tuning capacitor, C2 (can also be a fixed capacitor) 4. Feedback resistor, RB 5. Series resistor, RS (optional) The series resistor (RS) is included in the diagram to follow strict Pierce oscillator guidelines and may not be required for all ranges of operation, especially with high-frequency crystals. Refer to the crystal manufacturer's data for more information.
Advance Information 120
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Clock Generator Module (CGM) MOTOROLA
Clock Generator Module (CGM) I/O Signals
Figure 8-3 also shows the external components for the PLL: * * Bypass capacitor, CBYP Filter capacitor, CF
NOTE:
Routing should be done with great care to minimize signal cross talk and noise. (See 8.9 Acquisition/Lock Time Specifications for routing information and more information on the filter capacitor's value and its effects on PLL performance.)
8.5 I/O Signals
This section describes the CGM input/output (I/O) signals.
8.5.1 Crystal Amplifier Input Pin (OSC1) The OSC1 pin is an input to the crystal oscillator amplifier.
8.5.2 Crystal Amplifier Output Pin (OSC2) The OSC2 pin is the output of the crystal oscillator inverting amplifier.
8.5.3 External Filter Capacitor Pin (CGMXFC) The CGMXFC pin is required by the loop filter to filter out phase corrections. A small external capacitor is connected to this pin.
NOTE:
To prevent noise problems, CF should be placed as close to the CGMXFC pin as possible, with minimum routing distances and no routing of other signals across the CF connection.
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Clock Generator Module (CGM)
Advance Information 121
Clock Generator Module (CGM)
8.5.4 PLL Analog Power Pin (VDDA) VDDA is a power pin used by the analog portions of the PLL. Connect the VDDA pin to the same voltage potential as the VDD pin.
NOTE:
Route VDDA carefully for maximum noise immunity and place bypass capacitors as close as possible to the package.
8.5.5 Oscillator Enable Signal (SIMOSCEN) The SIMOSCEN signal comes from the system integration module (SIM) and enables the oscillator and PLL.
8.5.6 Crystal Output Frequency Signal (CGMXCLK) CGMXCLK is the crystal oscillator output signal. It runs at the full speed of the crystal (fXCLK) and comes directly from the crystal oscillator circuit. Figure 8-3 shows only the logical relation of CGMXCLK to OSC1 and OSC2 and may not represent the actual circuitry. The duty cycle of CGMXCLK is unknown and may depend on the crystal and other external factors. Also, the frequency and amplitude of CGMXCLK can be unstable at startup.
8.5.7 CGM Base Clock Output (CGMOUT) CGMOUT is the clock output of the CGM. This signal goes to the SIM, which generates the MCU clocks. CGMOUT is a 50 percent duty cycle clock running at twice the bus frequency. CGMOUT is software programmable to be either the oscillator output, CGMXCLK, divided by two or the VCO clock, CGMVCLK, divided by two.
8.5.8 CGM CPU Interrupt (CGMINT) CGMINT is the interrupt signal generated by the PLL lock detector.
Advance Information 122
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Clock Generator Module (CGM) MOTOROLA
Clock Generator Module (CGM) CGM Registers
8.6 CGM Registers
These registers control and monitor operation of the CGM: * * * PLL control register (PCTL) See 8.6.1 PLL Control Register. PLL bandwidth control register (PBWC) See 8.6.2 PLL Bandwidth Control Register. PLL programming register (PPG) See 8.6.3 PLL Programming Register.
Figure 8-4 is a summary of the CGM registers.
Addr.
Register Name Read: PLL Control Register (PCTL) Write: See page 124. Reset:
Bit 7 PLLIE 0
6 PLLF R 0 LOCK R 0 MUL6 1 = Reserved
5 PLLON 1 ACQ 0 MUL5 1
4 BCS 0 XLD 0 MUL4 0
3 1 R 1 0 R 0 VRS7 0
2 1 R 1 0 R 0 VRS6 1
1 1 R 1 0 R 0 VRS5 1
Bit 0 1 R 1 0 R 0 VRS4 0
$005C
$005D
Read: PLL Bandwidth Control Register AUTO (PBWC) Write: See page 126. Reset: 0 Read: PLL Programming Register (PPG) Write: See page 128. Reset: MUL7 0 R
$005E
Notes: 1. When AUTO = 0, PLLIE is forced to logic 0 and is read-only. 2. When AUTO = 0, PLLF and LOCK read as logic 0. 3. When AUTO = 1, ACQ is read-only. 4. When PLLON = 0 or VRS[7:4] = $0, BCS is forced to logic 0 and is read-only. 5. When PLLON = 1, the PLL programming register is read-only. 6. When BCS = 1, PLLON is forced set and is read-only.
Figure 8-4. CGM I/O Register Summary
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Clock Generator Module (CGM)
Advance Information 123
Clock Generator Module (CGM)
8.6.1 PLL Control Register The PLL control register (PCTL) contains the interrupt enable and flag bits, the on/off switch, and the base clock selector bit.
Address: $005C Bit 7 Read: PLLIE Write: Reset: 0 R R 0 = Reserved 1 0 6 PLLF PLLON BCS R 1 R 1 R 1 R 1 5 4 3 1 2 1 1 1 Bit 0 1
Figure 8-5. PLL Control Register (PCTL) PLLIE -- PLL Interrupt Enable Bit This read/write bit enables the PLL to generate an interrupt request when the LOCK bit toggles, setting the PLL flag, PLLF. When the AUTO bit in the PLL bandwidth control register (PBWC) is clear, PLLIE cannot be written and reads as logic 0. Reset clears the PLLIE bit. 1 = PLL interrupts enabled 0 = PLL interrupts disabled PLLF -- PLL Interrupt Flag This read-only bit is set whenever the LOCK bit toggles. PLLF generates an interrupt request if the PLLIE bit also is set. PLLF always reads as logic 0 when the AUTO bit in the PLL bandwidth control register (PBWC) is clear. Clear the PLLF bit by reading the PLL control register. Reset clears the PLLF bit. 1 = Change in lock condition 0 = No change in lock condition
NOTE:
Do not inadvertently clear the PLLF bit. Any read or read-modify-write operation on the PLL control register clears the PLLF bit.
Advance Information 124
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Clock Generator Module (CGM) MOTOROLA
Clock Generator Module (CGM) CGM Registers
PLLON -- PLL On Bit This read/write bit activates the PLL and enables the VCO clock, CGMVCLK. PLLON cannot be cleared if the VCO clock is driving the base clock, CGMOUT (BCS = 1). See 8.4.3 Base Clock Selector Circuit. Reset sets this bit so that the loop can stabilize as the MCU is powering up. 1 = PLL on 0 = PLL off BCS -- Base Clock Select Bit This read/write bit selects either the crystal oscillator output, CGMXCLK, or the VCO clock, CGMVCLK, as the source of the CGM output, CGMOUT. CGMOUT frequency is one-half the frequency of the selected clock. BCS cannot be set while the PLLON bit is clear. After toggling BCS, it may take up to three CGMXCLK and three CGMVCLK cycles to complete the transition from one source clock to the other. During the transition, CGMOUT is held in stasis. See 8.4.3 Base Clock Selector Circuit. Reset clears the BCS bit. 1 = CGMVCLK divided by two drives CGMOUT 0 = CGMXCLK divided by two drives CGMOUT
NOTE:
PLLON and BCS have built-in protection that prevents the base clock selector circuit from selecting the VCO clock as the source of the base clock if the PLL is off. Therefore, PLLON cannot be cleared when BCS is set, and BCS cannot be set when PLLON is clear. If the PLL is off (PLLON = 0), selecting CGMVCLK requires two writes to the PLL control register. See 8.4.3 Base Clock Selector Circuit. PCTL[3:0] -- Unimplemented Bits These bits provide no function and always read as logic 1s.
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Clock Generator Module (CGM)
Advance Information 125
Clock Generator Module (CGM)
8.6.2 PLL Bandwidth Control Register The PLL bandwidth control register (PBWC): * * * * Selects automatic or manual (software-controlled) bandwidth control mode Indicates when the PLL is locked In automatic bandwidth control mode, indicates when the PLL is in acquisition or tracking mode In manual operation, forces the PLL into acquisition or tracking mode
Address: $005D Bit 7 Read: AUTO Write: Reset: 0 R R 0 = Reserved 0 0 6 LOCK ACQ XLD R 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 5 4 3 0 2 0 1 0 Bit 0 0
Figure 8-6. PLL Bandwidth Control Register (PBWC) AUTO -- Automatic Bandwidth Control Bit This read/write bit selects automatic or manual bandwidth control. When initializing the PLL for manual operation (AUTO = 0), clear the ACQ bit before turning on the PLL. Reset clears the AUTO bit. 1 = Automatic bandwidth control 0 = Manual bandwidth control LOCK -- Lock Indicator Bit When the AUTO bit is set, LOCK is a read-only bit that becomes set when the VCO clock, CGMVCLK, is locked (running at the programmed frequency). When the AUTO bit is clear, LOCK reads as logic 0 and has no meaning. Reset clears the LOCK bit. 1 = VCO frequency correct or locked 0 = VCO frequency incorrect or unlocked
Advance Information 126
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Clock Generator Module (CGM) MOTOROLA
Clock Generator Module (CGM) CGM Registers
ACQ -- Acquisition Mode Bit When the AUTO bit is set, ACQ is a read-only bit that indicates whether the PLL is in acquisition mode or tracking mode. When the AUTO bit is clear, ACQ is a read/write bit that controls whether the PLL is in acquisition or tracking mode. In automatic bandwidth control mode (AUTO = 1), the last-written value from manual operation is stored in a temporary location and is recovered when manual operation resumes. Reset clears this bit, enabling acquisition mode. 1 = Tracking mode 0 = Acquisition mode XLD -- Crystal Loss Detect Bit When the VCO output, CGMVCLK, is driving CGMOUT, this read/write bit can indicate whether the crystal reference frequency is active or not. To check the status of the crystal reference, follow these steps: 1. Write a logic 1 to XLD. 2. Wait N x 4 cycles. (N is the VCO frequency multiplier.) 3. Read XLD. The crystal loss detect function works only when the BCS bit is set, selecting CGMVCLK to drive CGMOUT. When BCS is clear, XLD always reads as logic 0. 1 = Crystal reference is not active. 0 = Crystal reference is active. PBWC[3:0] -- Reserved for Test These bits enable test functions not available in user mode. To ensure software portability from development systems to user applications, software should write 0s to PBWC[3:0] whenever writing to PBWC.
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Clock Generator Module (CGM)
Advance Information 127
Clock Generator Module (CGM)
8.6.3 PLL Programming Register The PLL programming register (PPG) contains the programming information for the modulo feedback divider and the programming information for the hardware configuration of the VCO.
Address: $005E Bit 7 Read: MUL7 Write: Reset: 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 MUL6 MUL5 MUL4 VRS7 VRS6 VRS5 VRS4 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
Figure 8-7. PLL Programming Register (PPG) MUL[7:4] -- Multiplier Select Bits These read/write bits control the modulo feedback divider that selects the VCO frequency multiplier, N. See 8.4.2.1 PLL Circuits and 8.4.2.4 Programming the PLL. A value of $0 in the multiplier select bits configures the modulo feedback divider the same as a value of $1. Reset initializes these bits to $6 to give a default multiply value of 6. Table 8-2. VCO Frequency Multiplier (N) Selection
MUL7:MUL6:MUL5:MUL4 0000 0001 0010 0011 VCO Frequency Multiplier (N) 1 1 2 3
1101 1110 1111
13 14 15
NOTE:
The multiplier select bits have built-in protection that prevents them from being written when the PLL is on (PLLON = 1).
Advance Information 128
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Clock Generator Module (CGM) MOTOROLA
Clock Generator Module (CGM) Interrupts
VRS[7:4] -- VCO Range Select Bits These read/write bits control the hardware center-of-range linear multiplier L, which controls the hardware center-of-range frequency fVRS. See 8.4.2.1 PLL Circuits, 8.4.2.4 Programming the PLL and 8.6.1 PLL Control Register. VRS[7:4] cannot be written when the PLLON bit in the PLL control register (PCTL) is set. See 8.4.2.5 Special Programming Exceptions. A value of $0 in the VCO range select bits disables the PLL and clears the BCS bit in the PCTL. See 8.4.3 Base Clock Selector Circuit and 8.4.2.5 Special Programming Exceptions for more information. Reset initializes the bits to $6 to give a default range multiply value of 6.
NOTE:
The VCO range select bits have built-in protection that prevents them from being written when the PLL is on (PLLON = 1) and prevents selection of the VCO clock as the source of the base clock (BCS = 1) if the VCO range select bits are all clear. The VCO range select bits must be programmed correctly. Incorrect programming may result in failure of the PLL to achieve lock.
8.7 Interrupts
When the AUTO bit is set in the PLL bandwidth control register (PBWC), the PLL can generate a CPU interrupt request every time the LOCK bit changes state. The PLLIE bit in the PLL control register (PCTL) enables CPU interrupts from the PLL. PLLF, the interrupt flag in the PCTL, becomes set whether interrupts are enabled or not. When the AUTO bit is clear, CPU interrupts from the PLL are disabled and PLLF reads as logic 0. Software should read the LOCK bit after a PLL interrupt request to see if the request was due to an entry into lock or an exit from lock. When the PLL enters lock, the VCO clock, CGMVCLK, divided by two can be selected as the CGMOUT source by setting BCS in the PCTL. When the PLL exits lock, the VCO clock frequency is corrupt, and appropriate precautions should be taken. If the application is not frequency-sensitive, interrupts should be disabled to prevent PLL interrupt service routines from impeding software performance or from exceeding stack limitations.
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Clock Generator Module (CGM) Advance Information 129
Clock Generator Module (CGM)
NOTE:
Software can select the CGMVCLK divided by two as the CGMOUT source even if the PLL is not locked (LOCK = 0). Therefore, software should make sure the PLL is locked before setting the BCS bit.
8.8 Wait Mode
The WAIT instruction puts the MCU in low power-consumption standby mode. The WAIT instruction does not affect the CGM. Before entering wait mode, software can disengage and turn off the PLL by clearing the BCS and PLLON bits in the PLL control register (PCTL). Less power-sensitive applications can disengage the PLL without turning it off. Applications that require the PLL to wake the MCU from wait mode also can deselect the PLL output without turning off the PLL.
8.9 Acquisition/Lock Time Specifications
The acquisition and lock times of the PLL are, in many applications, the most critical PLL design parameters. Proper design and use of the PLL ensures the highest stability and lowest acquisition/lock times.
8.9.1 Acquisition/Lock Time Definitions Typical control systems refer to the acquisition time or lock time as the reaction time, within specified tolerances, of the system to a step input. In a PLL, the step input occurs when the PLL is turned on or when it suffers a noise hit. The tolerance is usually specified as a percent of the step input or when the output settles to the desired value plus or minus a percent of the frequency change. Therefore, the reaction time is constant in this definition, regardless of the size of the step input. For example, consider a system with a 5 percent acquisition time tolerance. If a command instructs the system to change from 0 Hz to 1 MHz, the acquisition time is the time taken for the frequency to reach 1 MHz 50 kHz. Fifty kHz = 5% of the 1-MHz step input. If the system is operating at 1 MHz and suffers a -100-kHz noise hit, the acquisition time is the time taken to return from 900 kHz to 1 MHz 5 kHz. Five kHz = 5% of the 100-kHz step input.
Advance Information 130
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Clock Generator Module (CGM) MOTOROLA
Clock Generator Module (CGM) Acquisition/Lock Time Specifications
Other systems refer to acquisition and lock times as the time the system takes to reduce the error between the actual output and the desired output to within specified tolerances. Therefore, the acquisition or lock time varies according to the original error in the output. Minor errors may not even be registered. Typical PLL applications prefer to use this definition because the system requires the output frequency to be within a certain tolerance of the desired frequency regardless of the size of the initial error. The discrepancy in these definitions makes it difficult to specify an acquisition or lock time for a typical PLL. Therefore, the definitions for acquisition and lock times for this module are: * Acquisition time, tACQ, is the time the PLL takes to reduce the error between the actual output frequency and the desired output frequency to less than the tracking mode entry tolerance, TRK. Acquisition time is based on an initial frequency error, (fDES - fORIG)/fDES, of not more than 100 percent. In automatic bandwidth control mode (see 8.4.2.3 Manual and Automatic PLL Bandwidth Modes), acquisition time expires when the ACQ bit becomes set in the PLL bandwidth control register (PBWC). Lock time, tLock, is the time the PLL takes to reduce the error between the actual output frequency and the desired output frequency to less than the lock mode entry tolerance, Lock. Lock time is based on an initial frequency error, (fDES - fORIG)/fDES, of not more than 100 percent. In automatic bandwidth control mode, lock time expires when the LOCK bit becomes set in the PLL bandwidth control register (PBWC). See 8.4.2.3 Manual and Automatic PLL Bandwidth Modes.
*
Obviously, the acquisition and lock times can vary according to how large the frequency error is and may be shorter or longer in many cases.
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Clock Generator Module (CGM)
Advance Information 131
Clock Generator Module (CGM)
8.9.2 Parametric Influences on Reaction Time Acquisition and lock times are designed to be as short as possible while still providing the highest possible stability. These reaction times are not constant, however. Many factors directly and indirectly affect the acquisition time. The most critical parameter which affects the reaction times of the PLL is the reference frequency, fRDV. This frequency is the input to the phase detector and controls how often the PLL makes corrections. For stability, the corrections must be small compared to the desired frequency, so several corrections are required to reduce the frequency error. Therefore, the slower the reference the longer it takes to make these corrections. This parameter is also under user control via the choice of crystal frequency, fXCLK. Another critical parameter is the external filter capacitor. The PLL modifies the voltage on the VCO by adding or subtracting charge from this capacitor. Therefore, the rate at which the voltage changes for a given frequency error (thus change in charge) is proportional to the capacitor size. The size of the capacitor also is related to the stability of the PLL. If the capacitor is too small, the PLL cannot make small enough adjustments to the voltage and the system cannot lock. If the capacitor is too large, the PLL may not be able to adjust the voltage in a reasonable time. See 8.9.3 Choosing a Filter Capacitor. Also important is the operating voltage potential applied to VDDA. The power supply potential alters the characteristics of the PLL. A fixed value is best. Variable supplies, such as batteries, are acceptable if they vary within a known range at very slow speeds. Noise on the power supply is not acceptable, because it causes small frequency errors which continually change the acquisition time of the PLL. Temperature and processing also can affect acquisition time because the electrical characteristics of the PLL change. The part operates as specified as long as these influences stay within the specified limits. External factors, however, can cause drastic changes in the operation of the PLL. These factors include noise injected into the PLL through the filter capacitor filter, capacitor leakage, stray impedances on the circuit board, and even humidity or circuit board contamination.
Advance Information 132
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Clock Generator Module (CGM) MOTOROLA
Clock Generator Module (CGM) Acquisition/Lock Time Specifications
8.9.3 Choosing a Filter Capacitor As described in 8.9.2 Parametric Influences on Reaction Time, the external filter capacitor, CF, is critical to the stability and reaction time of the PLL. The PLL is also dependent on reference frequency and supply voltage. The value of the capacitor must, therefore, be chosen with supply potential and reference frequency in mind. For proper operation, the external filter capacitor must be chosen according to this equation: V DDA C F = C FACT -------------- f RDV For acceptable values of CFACT, see 8.9 Acquisition/Lock Time Specifications. For the value of VDDA, choose the voltage potential at which the MCU is operating. If the power supply is variable, choose a value near the middle of the range of possible supply values. This equation does not always yield a commonly available capacitor size, so round to the nearest available size. If the value is between two different sizes, choose the higher value for better stability. Choosing the lower size may seem attractive for acquisition time improvement, but the PLL can become unstable. Also, always choose a capacitor with a tight tolerance (20 percent or better) and low dissipation.
8.9.4 Reaction Time Calculation The actual acquisition and lock times can be calculated using the equations here. These equations yield nominal values under these conditions: * * * * Correct selection of filter capacitor, CF, see 8.9.3 Choosing a Filter Capacitor Room temperature operation Negligible external leakage on CGMXFC Negligible noise
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Clock Generator Module (CGM)
Advance Information 133
Clock Generator Module (CGM)
The K factor in the equations is derived from internal PLL parameters. KACQ is the K factor when the PLL is configured in acquisition mode, and KTRK is the K factor when the PLL is configured in tracking mode. See 8.4.2.2 Acquisition and Tracking Modes. V DDA 8 tACQ = -------------- -------------- - f RDV K ACQ V DDA 4 t AL = -------------- -------------- f RDV K TRK tLock = t ACQ + t AL
NOTE:
The inverse proportionality between the lock time and the reference frequency. In automatic bandwidth control mode, the acquisition and lock times are quantized into units based on the reference frequency. See 8.4.2.3 Manual and Automatic PLL Bandwidth Modes A certain number of clock cycles, QACQ, is required to ascertain that the PLL is within the tracking mode entry tolerance, TRK, before exiting acquisition mode. A certain number of clock cycles, nTRK, is required to ascertain that the PLL is within the lock mode entry tolerance, Lock. Therefore, the acquisition time, tACQ, is an integer multiple of nACQ/fRDV, and the acquisition to lock time, tAL, is an integer multiple of nTRK/fRDV. Also, since the average frequency over the entire measurement period must be within the specified tolerance, the total time usually is longer than tLock as calculated in the previous example. In manual mode, it is usually necessary to wait considerably longer than tLock before selecting the PLL clock (see 8.4.3 Base Clock Selector Circuit) because the factors described in 8.9.2 Parametric Influences on Reaction Time may slow the lock time considerably.
Advance Information 134
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Clock Generator Module (CGM) MOTOROLA
Advance Information -- MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32
Section 9. Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control (PWMMC)
9.1 Contents
9.2 9.3 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
9.4 Timebase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 9.4.1 Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141 9.4.2 Prescaler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 9.5 PWM Generators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 9.5.1 Load Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 9.5.2 PWM Data Overflow and Underflow Conditions. . . . . . . . .147 9.6 Output Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 9.6.1 Selecting Six Independent PWMs or Three Complementary PWM Pairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147 9.6.2 Dead-Time Insertion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 9.6.3 Top/Bottom Correction with Motor Phase Current Polarity Sensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 9.6.4 Output Polarity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 9.6.5 PWM Output Port Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 9.7 Fault Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 9.7.1 Fault Condition Input Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 9.7.1.1 Fault Pin Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161 9.7.1.2 Automatic Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 9.7.1.3 Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164 9.7.2 Software Output Disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 9.7.3 Output Port Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 9.8 9.9 Initialization and the PWMEN Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 PWM Operation in Wait Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control (PWMMC)
Advance Information 135
Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control
9.10 Control Logic Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168 9.10.1 PWM Counter Registers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 9.10.2 PWM Counter Modulo Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 9.10.3 PWMx Value Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 9.10.4 PWM Control Register 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 9.10.5 PWM Control Register 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 9.10.6 Dead-Time Write-Once Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 9.10.7 PWM Disable Mapping Write-Once Register . . . . . . . . . . . 176 9.10.8 Fault Control Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 9.10.9 Fault Status Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 9.10.10 Fault Acknowledge Register. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 9.10.11 PWM Output Control Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 9.11 PWM Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
9.2 Introduction
This section describes the pulse-width modulator for motor control (PWMMC, version A). The MC68HC908MR24 PWM module can generate three complementary PWM pairs or six independent PWM signals. These PWM signals can be center-aligned or edge-aligned. A block diagram of the PWM module is shown in Figure 9-1. A12-bit timer PWM counter is common to all six channels. PWM resolution is one clock period for edge-aligned operation and two clock periods for center-aligned operation. The clock period is dependent on the internal operating frequency (fOP) and a programmable prescaler. The highest resolution for edge-aligned operation is 125 ns (fOP = 8 MHz). The highest resolution for center-aligned operation is 250 ns (fOP = 8 MHz). When generating complementary PWM signals, the module features automatic dead-time insertion to the PWM output pairs and transparent toggling of PWM data based upon sensed motor phase current polarity. A summary of the PWM registers is shown in Figure 9-2.
Advance Information 136
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control (PWMMC) MOTOROLA
Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control (PWMMC) Features
9.3 Features
Features of the PWMMC include: * * * * * * * Three complementary PWM pairs or six independent PWM signals Edge-aligned PWM signals or center-aligned PWM signals PWM signal polarity control 20-mA current sink capability on PWM pins Manual PWM output control through software Programmable fault protection Complementary mode featuring: - Dead-time insertion - Separate top/bottom pulse width correction via current sensing or programmable software bits
8 CPU BUS
PWM1 PIN PWM CHANNELS 1 AND 2 OUTPUT CONTROL FAULT PROTECTION PWM2 PIN
CONTROL LOGIC BLOCK
PWM3 PIN PWM4 PIN
PWM CHANNELS 3 AND 4
PWM5 PIN PWM CHANNELS 5 AND 6 PWM6 PIN FAULT INTERRUPT PINS
12
4
TIMEBASE 3 COIL CURRENT POLARITY PINS
Figure 9-1. PWM Module Block Diagram
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control (PWMMC)
Advance Information 137
Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control
Addr.
Register Name Read: PWM Control Register 1 (PCTL1) Write: See page 171. Reset:
Bit 7 DISX 0
6 DISY 0 LDFQ0 0
5 PWMINT 0 0
4 PWMF 0 IPOL1
3 ISENS1 0 IPOL2 0 FINT2 0 FPIN2
2 ISENS0 0 IPOL3 0 FMODE2 0 FFLAG2
1 LDOK 0 PRSC1 0 FINT1 0 FPIN1
Bit 0 PWMEN 0 PRSC0 0 FMODE1 0 FFLAG1
$0020
$0021
Read: PWM Control Register 2 LDFQ1 (PCTL2) Write: See page 174. Reset: 0
0 FINT3 0 FPIN3
0 FMODE3 0 FFLAG3
$0022
Read: Fault Control Register FINT4 FMODE4 (FCR) Write: See page 177. Reset: 0 0 Read: FPIN4 Fault Status Register (FSR) Write: See page 179. Reset: U Read: Fault Acknowledge Register (FTACK) Write: See page 180. Reset: Read: PWM Output Control Register (PWMOUT) Write: See page 182. Reset: Read: PWM Counter Register High (PCNTH) Write: See page 168. Reset: Read: PWM Counter Register Low (PCNTL) Write: See page 168. Reset: 0 FFLAG4
$0023
0 0 FTACK4
U DT6
0 DT5 FTACK3
U DT4
0 DT3 FTACK2
U DT2
0 DT1 FTACK1
$0024
0 0
0 OUTCTL
0 OUT6 0 0
0 OUT5 0 0
0 OUT4 0 Bit 11
0 OUT3 0 Bit 10
0 OUT2 0 Bit 9
0 OUT1 0 Bit 8
$0025
0 0
0 0
$0026
0 Bit 7
0 Bit 6
0 Bit 5
0 Bit 4
0 Bit 3
0 Bit 2
0 Bit 1
0 Bit 0
$0027
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 Bit 11
0 Bit 10 X
0 Bit 9 X
0 Bit 8 X
Read: PWM Counter Modulo Register $0028 High (PMODH) Write: See page 169. Reset:
0 R
0 = Reserved
0
0 Bold
X = Buffered
X = Indeterminate
Figure 9-2. Register Summary (Sheet 1 of 3)
Advance Information 138 MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control (PWMMC) MOTOROLA
Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control (PWMMC) Features
Addr.
Register Name
Bit 7 Bit 7 X
6 Bit 6 X Bit 14 0 Bit 6 0 Bit 14 0 Bit 6 0 Bit 14 0 Bit 6 0 Bit 14 0 Bit 6 0 = Reserved
5 Bit 5 X Bit 13 0 Bit 5 0 Bit 13 0 Bit 5 0 Bit 13 0 Bit 5 0 Bit 13 0 Bit 5 0
4 Bit 4 X Bit 12 0 Bit 4 0 Bit 12 0 Bit 4 0 Bit 12 0 Bit 4 0 Bit 12 0 Bit 4 0 Bold
3 Bit 3 X Bit 11 0 Bit 3 0 Bit 11 0 Bit 3 0 Bit 11 0 Bit 3 0 Bit 11 0 Bit 3 0 = Buffered
2 Bit 2 X Bit 10 0 Bit 2 0 Bit 10 0 Bit 2 0 Bit 10 0 Bit 2 0 Bit 10 0 Bit 2 0
1 Bit 1 X Bit 9 0 Bit 1 0 Bit 9 0 Bit 1 0 Bit 9 0 Bit 1 0 Bit 9 0 Bit 1 0
Bit 0 Bit 0 X Bit 8 0 Bit 0 0 Bit 8 0 Bit 0 0 Bit 8 0 Bit 0 0 Bit 8 0 Bit 0 0
Read: PWM Counter Modulo Register $0029 Low (PMODL) Write: See page 169. Reset:
$002A
Read: PWM 1 Value Register High Bit 15 (PVAL1H) Write: See page 170. Reset: 0 Read: PWM 1 Value Register Low (PVAL1L) Write: See page 170. Reset: Bit 7 0
$002B
$002C
Read: PWM 2 Value Register High Bit 15 (PVAL2H) Write: See page 170. Reset: 0 Read: PWM 2 Value Register Low (PVAL2L) Write: See page 170. Reset: Bit 7 0
$002D
$002E
Read: PWM 3 Value Register High Bit 15 (PVAL3H) Write: See page 170. Reset: 0 Read: PWM 3 Value Register Low (PVAL3L) Write: See page 170. Reset: Bit 7 0
$002F
$0030
Read: PWM 4 Value Register High Bit 15 (PVAL4H) Write: See page 170. Reset: 0 Read: PWM 4 Value Register Low (PVAL4L) Write: See page 170. Reset: Bit 7 0 R
$0031
X = Indeterminate
Figure 9-2. Register Summary (Sheet 2 of 3)
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control (PWMMC) Advance Information 139
Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control
Addr.
Register Name
Bit 7
6 Bit 14 0 Bit 6 0 Bit 14 0 Bit 6 0 Bit 6 1 Bit 6 1 = Reserved
5 Bit 13 0 Bit 5 0 Bit 13 0 Bit 5 0 Bit 5 1 Bit 5 1
4 Bit 12 0 Bit 4 0 Bit 12 0 Bit 4 0 Bit 4 1 Bit 4 1 Bold
3 Bit 11 0 Bit 3 0 Bit 11 0 Bit 3 0 Bit 3 1 Bit 3 1 = Buffered
2 Bit 10 0 Bit 2 0 Bit 10 0 Bit 2 0 Bit 2 1 Bit 2 1
1 Bit 9 0 Bit 1 0 Bit 9 0 Bit 1 0 Bit 1 1 Bit 1 1
Bit 0 Bit 8 0 Bit 0 0 Bit 8 0 Bit 0 0 Bit 0 1 Bit 0 1
$0032
Read: PWM 5 Value Register High Bit 15 (PVAL5H) Write: See page 170. Reset: 0 Read: PWM 5 Value Register Low (PVAL5L) Write: See page 170. Reset: Bit 7 0
$0033
$0034
Read: PWM 6 Value Register High Bit 15 (PVAL6H) Write: See page 170. Reset: 0 Read: PWM 6 Value Register Low (PMVAL6L) Write: See page 170. Reset: Read: Dead-Time Write-Once Register (DEADTM) Write: See page 176. Reset: Read: PWM Disable Mapping Write-Once Register Write: (DISMAP) See page 176. Reset: Bit 7 0 Bit 7 1 Bit 7 1 R
$0035
$0036
$0037
X = Indeterminate
Figure 9-2. Register Summary (Sheet 3 of 3)
Advance Information 140
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control (PWMMC) MOTOROLA
Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control (PWMMC) Timebase
9.4 Timebase
This section provides a discussion of the timebase.
9.4.1 Resolution In center-aligned mode, a 12-bit up/down counter is used to create the PWM period. Therefore, the PWM resolution in center-aligned mode is two clocks (highest resolution is 250 ns @ fOP = 8 MHz) as shown in Figure 9-3. The up/down counter uses the value in the timer modulus register to determine its maximum count. The PWM period will equal: [(timer modulus) x (PWM clock period) x 2].
UP/DOWN COUNTER MODULUS = 4
PERIOD = 8 X (PWM CLOCK PERIOD)
PWM = 0
PWM = 1
PWM = 2
PWM = 3
PWM = 4
Figure 9-3. Center-Aligned PWM (Positive Polarity)
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control (PWMMC)
Advance Information 141
Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control
For edge-aligned mode, a 12-bit up-only counter is used to create the PWM period. Therefore, the PWM resolution in edge-aligned mode is one clock (highest resolution is125 ns @ fOP = 8 MHz) as shown in Figure 9-4. Again, the timer modulus register is used to determine the maximum count. The PWM period will equal: (timer modulus) x (PWM clock period) Center-aligned operation versus edge-aligned operation is determined by the option EDGE. See 5.3 Functional Description.
UP-ONLY COUNTER MODULUS = 4
PERIOD = 4 X (PWM CLOCK PERIOD) PWM = 0
PWM = 1
PWM = 2
PWM = 3
PWM = 4
Figure 9-4. Edge-Aligned PWM (Positive Polarity)
Advance Information 142
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control (PWMMC) MOTOROLA
Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control (PWMMC) PWM Generators
9.4.2 Prescaler To permit lower PWM frequencies, a prescaler is provided which will divide the PWM clock frequency by 1, 2, 4, or 8. Table 9-1 shows how setting the prescaler bits in PWM control register 2 affects the PWM clock frequency. This prescaler is buffered and will not be used by the PWM generator until the LDOK bit is set and a new PWM reload cycle begins. Table 9-1. PWM Prescaler
Prescaler Bits PRSC1 and PRSC0 00 01 10 11 PWM Clock Frequency fOP fOP/2 fOP/4 fOP/8
9.5 PWM Generators
Pulse-width modulator (PWM) generators are discussed in this subsection.
9.5.1 Load Operation To help avoid erroneous pulse widths and PWM periods, the modulus, prescaler, and PWM value registers are buffered. New PWM values, counter modulus values, and prescalers can be loaded from their buffers into the PWM module every one, two, four, or eight PWM cycles. LDFQ1 and LDFQ0 in PWM control register 2 are used to control this reload frequency, as shown in Table 9-2. When a reload cycle arrives, regardless of whether an actual reload occurs (as determined by the LDOK bit), the PWM reload flag bit in PWM control register 1 will be set. If the PWMINT bit in PWM control register 1 is set, a CPU interrupt request will be generated when PWMF is set. Software can use this interrupt to calculate new PWM parameters in real time for the PWM module.
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control (PWMMC)
Advance Information 143
Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control
Table 9-2. PWM Reload Frequency
Reload Frequency Bits LDFQ1 and LDFQ0 00 01 10 11 PWM Reload Frequency Every PWM cycle Every 2 PWM cycles Every 4 PWM cycles Every 8 PWM cycles
For ease of software, the LDFQx bits are buffered. When the LDFQx bits are changed, the reload frequency will not change until the previous reload cycle is completed. See Figure 9-5.
NOTE:
When reading the LDFQx bits, the value is the buffered value (for example, not necessarily the value being acted upon).
RELOAD
RELOAD
RELOAD
RELOAD RELOAD RELOADRELOAD CHANGE RELOAD FREQUENCY TO EVERY CYCLE
CHANGE RELOAD FREQUENCY TO EVERY 4 CYCLES
Figure 9-5. Reload Frequency Change PWMINT enables CPU interrupt requests as shown in Figure 9-6. When this bit is set, CPU interrupt requests are generated when the PWMF bit is set. When the PWMINT bit is clear, PWM interrupt requests are inhibited. PWM reloads will still occur at the reload rate, but no interrupt requests will be generated.
READ PWMF AS 1, WRITE PWMF AS 0 OR RESET RESET PWMF D LATCH CPU INTERRUPT REQUEST
VDD
PWM RELOAD
CK
PWMINT
Figure 9-6. PWM Interrupt Requests
Advance Information 144 MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control (PWMMC) MOTOROLA
Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control (PWMMC) PWM Generators
To prevent a partial reload of PWM parameters from occurring while the software is still calculating them, an interlock bit controlled from software is provided. This bit informs the PWM module that all the PWM parameters have been calculated, and it is "okay" to use them. A new modulus, prescaler, and/or PWM value cannot be loaded into the PWM module until the LDOK bit in PWM control register 1 is set. When the LDOK bit is set, these new values are loaded into a second set of registers and used by the PWM generator at the beginning of the next PWM reload cycle as shown in Figure 9-7, Figure 9-8, Figure 9-9, and Figure 9-10. After these values are loaded, the LDOK bit is cleared.
NOTE:
When the PWM module is enabled (via the PWMEN bit), a load will occur if the LDOK bit is set. Even if it is not set, an interrupt will occur if the PWMINT bit is set. To prevent this, the software should clear the PWMINT bit before enabling the PWM module.
LDFQ1:LDFQ0 = 00 (RELOAD EVERY CYCLE) UP/DOWN COUNTER
LDOK = 1 MODULUS = 3 PWM VALUE = 1 PWMF SET PWM
LDOK = 0 MODULUS = 3 PWM VALUE = 2 PWMF SET
LDOK = 1 MODULUS = 3 PWM VALUE = 2 PWMF SET
LDOK = 0 MODULUS = 3 PWM VALUE = 1 PWMF SET
Figure 9-7. Center-Aligned PWM Value Loading
LDFQ1:LDFQ0 = 00 (RELOAD EVERY CYCLE)
UP/DOWN COUNTER
LDOK = 1 MODULUS = 2 PWM VALUE = 1 PWMF SET PWM
LDOK = 1 MODULUS = 3 PWM VALUE = 1 PWMF SET
LDOK = 1 LDOK = 1 LDOK = 0 MODULUS = 2 MODULUS = 1 MODULUS = 2 PWMVALUE = 1 PWM VALUE = 1 PWM VALUE = 1 PWMF SET PWMF SET PWMF SET
Figure 9-8. Center-Aligned Loading of Modulus
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control (PWMMC) Advance Information 145
Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control
LDFQ1:LDFQ0 = 00 (RELOAD EVERY CYCLE)
UP-ONLY COUNTER
LDOK = 1 LDOK = 1 LDOK = 0 LDOK = 0 LDOK = 0 MODULUS = 3 MODULUS = 3 MODULUS = 3 MODULUS = 3 MODULUS = 3 PWM VALUE = 1 PWM VALUE = 2 PWM VALUE = 2 PWM VALUE = 1 PWM VALUE = 1 PWMF SET PWMF SET PWMF SET PWMF SET PWMF SET PWM
Figure 9-9. Edge-Aligned PWM Value Loading
LDFQ1:LDFQ0 = 00 (RELOAD EVERY CYCLE)
UP-ONLY COUNTER
LDOK = 1 MODULUS = 3 PWM VALUE = 2 PWMF SET
LDOK = 1 MODULUS = 4 PWM VALUE = 2 PWMF SET
LDOK = 1 MODULUS = 2 PWM VALUE = 2 PWMF SET
LDOK = 0 MODULUS = 1 PWM VALUE = 2 PWMF SET
PWM
Figure 9-10. Edge-Aligned Modulus Loading
Advance Information 146
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control (PWMMC) MOTOROLA
Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control (PWMMC) Output Control
9.5.2 PWM Data Overflow and Underflow Conditions The PWM value registers are 16-bit registers. Although the counter is only 12 bits, the user may write a 16-bit signed value to a PWM value register. As shown in Figure 9-3 and Figure 9-4, if the PWM value is less than or equal to zero, the PWM will be inactive for the entire period. Conversely, if the PWM value is greater than or equal to the timer modulus, the PWM will be active for the entire period. Refer to Table 9-3.
NOTE:
The terms "active" and "inactive" refer to the asserted and negated states of the PWM signals and should not be confused with the high-impedance state of the PWM pins. Table 9-3. PWM Data Overflow and Underflow Conditions
PWMVALxH:PWMVALxL $0000-$0FFF $1000-$7FFF $8000-$FFFF Condition Normal Overflow Underflow PWM Value Used Per register contents $FFF $000
9.6 Output Control
This subsection discusses output control.
9.6.1 Selecting Six Independent PWMs or Three Complementary PWM Pairs The PWM outputs can be configured as six independent PWM channels or three complementary channel pairs. The option INDEP determines which mode is used (see 5.3 Functional Description). If complementary operation is chosen, the PWM pins are paired as shown in Figure 9-11. Operation of one pair is then determined by one PWM value register. This type of operation is meant for use in motor drive circuits such as the one in Figure 9-12.
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control (PWMMC)
Advance Information 147
Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control
PWM1 PIN PWM VALUE REGISTER PWMS 1 AND 2 PWM2 PIN OUTPUT CONTROL POLARITY & DEAD-TIME INSERTION
PWM3 PIN PWM4 PIN
PWM VALUE REGISTER
PWMS 3 AND 4
PWM5 PIN PWM VALUE REGISTER PWMS 5 AND 6 PWM6 PIN
Figure 9-11. Complementary Pairing
PWM 1
PWM 3
PWM 5
AC INPUTS PWM 2 PWM 4 PWM 6
TO MOTOR
Figure 9-12. Typical AC Motor Drive
Advance Information 148
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control (PWMMC) MOTOROLA
Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control (PWMMC) Output Control
When complementary operation is used, two additional features are provided: * * Dead-time insertion Separate top/bottom pulse width correction to correct for distortions caused by the motor drive characteristics
If independent operation is chosen, each PWM has its own PWM value register.
9.6.2 Dead-Time Insertion As shown in Figure 9-12, in complementary mode, each PWM pair can be used to drive top-side/bottom-side transistors. When controlling dc-to-ac inverters such as this, the top and bottom PWMs in one pair should never be active at the same time. In Figure 9-12, if PWM1 and PWM2 were on at the same time, large currents would flow through the two transistors as they discharge the bus capacitor. The IGBTs could be weakened or destroyed. Simply forcing the two PWMs to be inversions of each other is not always sufficient. Since a time delay is associated with turning off the transistors in the motor drive, there must be a dead-time between the deactivation of one PWM and the activation of the other. A dead-time can be specified in the dead-time write-once register. This 8-bit value specifies the number of CPU clock cycles to use for the dead-time. The dead-time is not affected by changes in the PWM period caused by the prescaler. Dead-time insertion is achieved by feeding the top PWM outputs of the PWM generator into dead-time generators, as shown in Figure 9-13. Current sensing determines which PWM value of a PWM generator pair to use for the top PWM in the next PWM cycle. See 9.6.3 Top/Bottom Correction with Motor Phase Current Polarity Sensing. When output control is enabled, the odd OUT bits, rather than the PWM generator outputs, are fed into the dead-time generators. See 9.6.5 PWM Output Port Control.
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control (PWMMC)
Advance Information 149
Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control
OUTPUT CONTROL (OUTCTL) OUTCTL OUT5 OUT3 OUT1
OUT2 OUT4 OUT6
DEAD-TIME
PWMPAIR12 (TOP)
TOP/BOTTOM GENERATION
MUX PWM (TOP) PREDT (TOP) OUTX SELECT PWMGEN<1:6> CURRENT SENSING DEAD-TIME POSTDT (TOP)
TOP (PWM1) BOTTOM (PWM2) POLARITY/OUTPUT DRIVE
PWM1
PWM2
PWM GENERATOR
6
PREDT (TOP) OUTX SELECT
DEAD-TIME POSTDT (TOP)
BOTTOM (PWM4)
FAULT
PWM (TOP)
DEAD-TIME
PWMPAIR34 (TOP)
TOP/BOTTOM GENERATION
MUX
TOP (PWM3)
PWM3
PWM4
DEAD-TIME
PWMPAIR56 (TOP)
TOP/BOTTOM GENERATION
MUX PWM (TOP) PREDT (TOP) OUTX SELECT DEAD-TIME POSTDT (TOP)
TOP (PWM5) BOTTOM (PWM6)
PWM5
PWM6
Figure 9-13. Dead-Time Generators Whenever an input to a dead-time generator transitions, a dead-time is inserted (for example, both PWMs in the pair are forced to their inactive state). The bottom PWM signal is generated from the top PWM and the dead-time. In the case of output control enabled, the odd OUTx bits control the top PWMs, the even OUTx bits control the bottom PWMs with respect to the odd OUTx bits (see Table 9-6). Figure 9-14 shows the effects of the dead-time insertion. As seen in Figure 9-14, some pulse width distortion occurs when the dead-time is inserted. The active pulse widths are reduced. For example, in Figure 9-14, when the PWM value register is equal to two, the ideal waveform (with no dead-time) has pulse widths equal to four. However, the actual pulse widths shrink to two after a dead-time of two was inserted. In this example, with the prescaler set to divide by one and center-aligned operation selected, this distortion can be compensated for by adding or subtracting half the dead-time value to or from the PWM
Advance Information 150 MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control (PWMMC) MOTOROLA
Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control (PWMMC) Output Control
register value. This correction is further described in 9.6.3 Top/Bottom Correction with Motor Phase Current Polarity Sensing. Further examples of dead-time insertion are shown in Figure 9-15 and Figure 9-16. Figure 9-15 shows the effects of dead-time insertion at the duty cycle boundaries (near 0 percent and 100 percent duty cycles). Figure 9-16 shows the effects of dead-time insertion on pulse widths smaller than the dead-time.
UP/DOWN COUNTER MODULUS = 4 PWM VALUE = 2 PWM VALUE = 2 PWM VALUE = 3
PWM1 W/ NO DEAD-TIME PWM2 W/ NO DEAD-TIME PWM1 W/ DEAD-TIME = 2 PWM2 W/ DEAD-TIME = 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Figure 9-14. Effects of Dead-Time Insertion
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control (PWMMC)
Advance Information 151
Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control
UP/DOWN COUNTER MODULUS = 3
PWM VALUE = 1
PWM VALUE = 1
PWM VALUE = 3
PWM VALUE = 3
PWM1 W/ NO DEAD-TIME PWM2 W/ NO DEAD-TIME
PWM1 W/ DEAD-TIME = 2 PWM2 W/ DEAD-TIME = 2
2
2
2
2
Figure 9-15. Dead-Time at Duty Cycle Boundaries
UP/DOWN COUNTER MOUDULUS = 3
PWM VALUE = 2 PWM1 W/ NO DEAD-TIME PWM2 W/ NO DEAD-TIME PWM1 W/ DEAD-TIME = 3 PWM2 W/ DEAD-TIME = 3
PWM VALUE = 3
PWM VALUE = 2
PWM VALUE = 1
3
3
3
3
3
3
Figure 9-16. Dead-Time and Small Pulse Widths
Advance Information 152
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control (PWMMC) MOTOROLA
Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control (PWMMC) Output Control
9.6.3 Top/Bottom Correction with Motor Phase Current Polarity Sensing Ideally, when complementary pairs are used, the PWM pairs are inversions of each other, as shown in Figure 9-17. When PWM1 is active, PWM2 is inactive, and vice versa. In this case, the motor terminal voltage is never allowed to float and is strictly controlled by the PWM waveforms. However, when dead-time is inserted, the motor voltage is allowed to float momentarily during the dead-time interval, creating a distortion in the motor current waveform. This distortion is aggravated by dissimilar turn-on and turn-off delays of each of the transistors. For a typical motor drive inverter as shown in Figure 9-12, for a given top/bottom transistor pair, only one of the transistors will be effective in controlling the output voltage at any given time depending on the direction of the motor current for that pair. To achieve distortion correction, one of two different correction factors must be added to the desired PWM value, depending on whether the top or bottom transistor is controlling the output voltage. Therefore, the software is responsible for calculating both compensated PWM values and placing them in an odd/even PWM register pair. By supplying the PWM module with information regarding which transistor (top or bottom) is controlling the output voltage at any given time (for instance, the current polarity for that motor phase), the PWM module selects either the odd or even numbered PWM value register to be used by the PWM generator. Current sensing or programmable software bits are then used to determine which PWM value to use. If the current sensed at the motor for that PWM pair is positive (voltage on current pin ISx is low) or bit IPOLx in PWM control register 2 is low, the top PWM value is used for the PWM pair. Likewise, if the current sensed at the motor for that PWM pair is negative (voltage on current pin ISx is high) or bit IPOLx in PWM control register 2 is high, the bottom PWM value is used. See Table 9-4.
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control (PWMMC)
Advance Information 153
Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control
UP/DOWN COUNTER MODULUS = 4
PWM1 PWM VALUE = 1 PWM2
PWM3 PWM VALUE = 2 PWM4
PWM5 PWM VALUE = 3 PWM6
Figure 9-17. Ideal Complementary Operation (Dead-Time = 0)
NOTE:
This text assumes the user will provide current sense circuitry which causes the voltage at the corresponding input pin to be low for positive current and high for negative current. See Figure 9-18 for current convention. In addition, it assumes the top PWMs are PWMs 1, 3, and 5 while the bottom PWMs are PWMs 2, 4, and 6. Table 9-4. Current Sense Pins
Current Sense Pin or Bit IS1 or IPOL1 IS1 or IPOL1 IS2 or IPOL2 IS2 or IPOL2 IS3 or IPOL3 IS3 or IPOL3 Voltage on Current Sense Pin or IPOLx Bit Logic 0 Logic 1 Logic 0 Logic 1 Logic 0 Logic 1 PWM Value Register Used PWM value register 1 PWM value register 2 PWM value register 3 PWM value register 4 PWM value register 5 PWM value register 6 PWMs Affected PWMs 1 and 2 PWMs 1 and 2 PWMs 3 and 4 PWMs 3 and 4 PWMs 5 and 6 PWMs 5 and 6
Advance Information 154
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control (PWMMC) MOTOROLA
Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control (PWMMC) Output Control
I+
I-
Figure 9-18. Current Convention To allow for correction based on different current sensing methods or correction controlled by software, the ISENS1 and ISENS0 bits in PWM control register 1 are provided to choose the correction method. These bits provide correction according to Table 9-5. Table 9-5. Correction Methods
Current Correction Bits ISENS1 and ISENS0 00 01 10 Correction Method Bits IPOL1, IPOL2, and IPOL3 used for correction Current sensing on pins IS1, IS2, and IS3 occurs during the dead-time. Current sensing on pins IS1, IS2, and IS3 occurs at the half cycle in center-aligned mode and at the end of the cycle in edge-aligned mode.
11
If correction is to be done in software or is not necessary, setting ISENS1:ISENS0 = 00 or = 01 causes the correction to be based on bits IPOL1, IPOL2, and IPOL3 in PWM control register 2. If correction is not required, the user can initialize the IPOLx bits and then only load one PWM value register per PWM pair. To allow the user to use a current sense scheme based upon sensed phase voltage during dead-time, setting ISENS1:ISENS0 = 10 causes the polarity of the Ix pin to be latched when both the top and bottom PWMs are off (for example, during the dead-time). At the 0 percent and 100 percent duty cycle boundaries, there is no dead-time so no new current value is sensed.
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control (PWMMC) Advance Information 155
Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control
To accommodate other current sensing schemes, setting ISENS1:ISENS0 = 11 causes the polarity of the current sense pin to be latched half-way into the PWM cycle in center-aligned mode and at the end of the cycle in edge-aligned mode. Therefore, even at 0 percent and 100 percent duty cycle, the current is sensed. Distortion correction is only available in complementary mode. At the beginning of the PWM period, the PWM uses this latched current value or polarity bit to decide whether the top PWM value or bottom PWM value is used. Figure 9-19 shows an example of top/bottom correction for PWMs 1 and 2.
NOTE:
The IPOLx bits and the values latched on the ISx pins are buffered so that only one PWM register is used per PWM cycle. If the IPOLx bits or the current sense values change during a PWM period, this new value will not be used until the next PWM period. The ISENSx bits are NOT buffered; therefore, changing the current sensing method could affect the present PWM cycle.
PWM VALUE REG. 1 = 1
PWM VALUE REG. 2 = 2
IS1 POSITIVE PWM = 1 PWM1
IS1 POSITIVE PWM = 1
IS1 NEGATIVE PWM = 2
IS1 NEGATIVE PWM = 2
PWM2
Figure 9-19. Top/Bottom Correction for PWMs 1 and 2 When the PWM is first enabled by setting PWMEN, PWM value registers 1, 3, and 5 will be used if the ISENSx bits are configured for current sensing correction. This is because no current will have previously been sensed.
Advance Information 156
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control (PWMMC) MOTOROLA
Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control (PWMMC) Output Control
9.6.4 Output Polarity The output polarity of the PWMs is determined by two options: TOPNEG and BOTNEG. The top polarity option, TOPNEG, controls the polarity of PWMs 1, 3, and 5. The bottom polarity option, BOTNEG, controls the polarity of PWMs 2, 4, and 6. Positive polarity means that when the PWM is active, the PWM output is high. Conversely, negative polarity means that when the PWM is active, PWM output is low. See Figure 9-20.
NOTE:
Both bits are found in the CONFIG register, which is a write-once register. This reduces the chances of the software inadvertently changing the polarity of the PWM signals and possibly damaging the motor drive hardware.
CENTER-ALIGNED POSITIVE POLARITY UP/DOWN COUNTER MODULUS = 4 EDGE-ALIGNED POSITIVE POLARITY UP-ONLY COUNTER MODULUS = 4
PWM <= 0 PWM <= 0 PWM = 1 PWM = 1 PWM = 2 PWM = 2 PWM = 3 PWM = 3 PWM >= 4 PWM >= 4
CENTER-ALIGNED NEGATIVE POLARITY
EDGE-ALIGNED NEGATIVE POLARITY UP-ONLY COUNTER MODULUS = 4
UP/DOWN COUNTER MODULUS = 4 PWM <= 0 PWM <= 0 PWM = 1 PWM = 2 PWM = 3 PWM >= 4 PWM = 1 PWM = 2 PWM = 3 PWM >= 4
Figure 9-20. PWM Polarity
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control (PWMMC) Advance Information 157
Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control
9.6.5 PWM Output Port Control Conditions may arise in which the PWM pins need to be individually controlled. This is made possible by the PWM output control register (PWMOUT) shown in Figure 9-21.
Address: $0025 Bit 7 Read: Write: Reset: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 OUTCTL OUT6 OUT5 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
= Unimplemented
Figure 9-21. PWM Output Control Register (PWMOUT) If the OUTCTL bit is set, the PWM pins can be controlled by the OUTx bits. These bits behave according to Table 9-6. Table 9-6. OUTx Bits
OUTx Bit OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 OUT5 OUT6 Complementary Mode 1 -- PWM1 is active. 0 -- PWM1 is inactive. 1 -- PWM2 is complement of PWM 1. 0 -- PWM2 is inactive. 1 -- PWM3 is active. 0 -- PWM3 is inactive. 1 -- PWM4 is complement of PWM 3. 0 -- PWM4 is inactive. 1 -- PWM5 is active. 0 -- PWM5 is inactive. 1 -- PWM 6 is complement of PWM 5. 0 -- PWM6 is inactive. Independent Mode 1 -- PWM1 is active. 0 -- PWM1 is inactive. 1 -- PWM2 is active. 0 -- PWM2 is inactive. 1 -- PWM3 is active. 0 -- PWM3 is inactive. 1 -- PWM4 is active. 0 -- PWM4 is inactive. 1 -- PWM5 is active. 0 -- PWM5 is inactive. 1 -- PWM6 is active. 0 -- PWM6 is inactive.
When OUTCTL is set, the polarity options TOPPOL and BOTPOL will still affect the outputs. In addition, if complementary operation is in use, the PWM pairs will not be allowed to be active simultaneously, and dead-time will still not be violated. When OUTCTL is set and
Advance Information 158 MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control (PWMMC) MOTOROLA
Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control (PWMMC) Output Control
complementary operation is in use, the odd OUTx bits are inputs to the dead-time generators as shown in Figure 9-14. Dead-time is inserted whenever the odd OUTx bit toggles as shown in Figure 9-22. Although dead-time is not inserted when the even OUTx bits change, there will be no dead-time violation as shown in Figure 9-23. Setting the OUTCTL bit does not disable the PWM generator and current sensing circuitry. They continue to run, but are no longer controlling the output pins. In addition, OUTCTL will control the PWM pins even when PWMEN = 0. When OUTCTL is cleared, the outputs of the PWM generator become the inputs to the dead-time and output circuitry at the beginning of the next PWM cycle.
NOTE:
To avoid an unexpected dead-time occurrence, it is recommended that the OUTx bits be cleared prior to entering and prior to exiting individual PWM output control mode.
UP/DOWN COUNTER MODULUS = 4 DEAD-TIME = 2 PWM VALUE = 3 OUTCTL OUT1 OUT2
PWM1
PWM2 PWM1/PWM2 DEAD-TIME 2 2 2 DEAD-TIME INSERTED DUE TO CLEARING OF OUT1 BIT
DEAD-TIME INSERTED AS PART OF DEAD-TIME INSERTED DUE NORMAL PWM OPERATION AS TO SETTING OF OUT1 BIT CONTROLLED BY CURRENT SENSING AND PWM GENERATOR
Figure 9-22. Dead-Time Insertion During OUTCTL = 1
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control (PWMMC)
Advance Information 159
Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control
UP/DOWN COUNTER MODULUS = 4 DEAD-TIME = 2 PWM VALUE = 3
OUTCTL
OUT1 OUT2
PWM1
PWM2 PWM1/PWM2 DEAD-TIME 2 2 DEAD-TIME INSERTED BECAUSE WHEN OUTCTL WAS SET, THE STATE OF OUT1 WAS SUCH THAT PWM1 WAS DIRECTED TO TOGGLE 2 2 NO DEAD-TIME INSERTED BECAUSE OUT1 IS NOT TOGGLING
DEAD-TIME INSERTED BECAUSE OUT1 TOGGLES, DIRECTING PWM1 TO TOGGLE
Figure 9-23. Dead-Time Insertion During OUTCTL = 1
9.7 Fault Protection
Conditions may arise in the external drive circuitry which require that the PWM signals become inactive immediately, such as an overcurrent fault condition. Furthermore, it may be desirable to selectively disable PWM(s) solely with software. One or more PWM pins can be disabled (forced to their inactive state) by applying a logic high to any of the four external fault pins or by writing a logic high to either of the disable bits (DISX and DISY in PWM control register 1). Figure 9-25 shows the structure of the PWM disabling scheme. While the PWM pins are disabled, they are forced to their inactive state. The PWM generator continues to run -- only the output pins are disabled. To allow for different motor configurations and the controlling of more than one motor, the PWM disabling function is organized as two banks, bank X and bank Y. Bank information combines with information from the disable mapping register to allow selective PWM disabling. Fault
Advance Information 160 MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control (PWMMC) MOTOROLA
Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control (PWMMC) Fault Protection
pin 1, fault pin 2, and PWM disable bit X constitute the disabling function of bank X. Fault pin 3, fault pin 4, and PWM disable bit Y constitute the disabling function of bank Y. Figure 9-24 and Figure 9-26 show the disable mapping write-once register and the decoding scheme of the bank which selectively disables PWM(s). When all bits of the disable mapping register are set, any disable condition will disable all PWMs. A fault can also generate a CPU interrupt. Each fault pin has its own interrupt vector.
Address: $0037 Bit 7 Read: Bit 7 Write: Reset: 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
Figure 9-24. PWM Disable Mapping Write-Once Register (DISMAP)
9.7.1 Fault Condition Input Pins A logic high level on a fault pin disables the respective PWM(s) determined by the bank and the disable mapping register. Each fault pin incorporates a filter to assist in rejecting spurious faults. All of the external fault pins are software-configurable to re-enable the PWMs either with the fault pin (automatic mode) or with software (manual mode). Each fault pin has an associated FMODE bit to control the PWM re-enabling method. Automatic mode is selected by setting the FMODEx bit in the fault control register. Manual mode is selected when FMODEx is clear. 9.7.1.1 Fault Pin Filter Each fault pin incorporates a filter to assist in determining a genuine fault condition. After a fault pin has been logic low for one CPU cycle, a rising edge (logic high) will be synchronously sampled once per CPU cycle for two cycles. If both samples are detected logic high, the corresponding FPIN bit and FFLAG bit will be set. The FPIN bit will remain set until the corresponding fault pin is logic low and synchronously sampled once in the following CPU cycle.
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control (PWMMC)
Advance Information 161
Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control
CYCLE START
DISX
SOFTWARE X DISABLE S R BANK X DISABLE Q
FMODE2 LOGIC HIGH FOR FAULT TWO SAMPLE FILTER ONE SHOT FPIN2 S R CLEAR BY WRITING 1 TO FTACK4 Q FFLAG2 AUTO MODE
FAULT PIN 2 DISABLE S R MANUAL MODE Q
FAULT PIN2
INTERRUPT REQUEST FINT2
The example is of fault pin 2 with DISX. Fault pin 4 with DISY is logically similar and affects BANK Y disable. Note: In manual mode (FMODE = 0), faults 2 and 4 may be cleared only if a logic level low at the input of the fault pin is present.
CYCLE START
FMODE1 FPIN1 LOGIC HIGH FOR FAULT
)$8/7 3,1
FAULT PIN 1 DISABLE AUTO MODE S R MANUAL MODE Q BANK X DISABLE
TWO SAMPLE FILTER
ONE SHOT
S R
Q FFLAG1
CLEAR BY WRITING 1 TO FTACK1 FINT1 INTERRUPT REQUEST
The example is of fault pin 1. Fault pin 3 is logically similar and affects BANK Y disable. Note: In manual mode (FMODE = 0), faults 1 and 3 may be cleared regardless of the logic level at the input of the fault pin.
Figure 9-25. PWM Disabling Scheme
Advance Information 162
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control (PWMMC) MOTOROLA
Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control (PWMMC) Fault Protection
BIT 7 DISABLE PWM PIN 1 BIT 6 BIT 5 DISABLE PWM PIN 2
BANK X DISABLE BANK Y DISABLE
BIT 4 BIT 3
DISABLE PWM PIN 3
DISABLE PWM PIN 4
BIT 2 BIT 1 BIT 0 DISABLE PWM PIN 6 DISABLE PWM PIN 5
Figure 9-26. PWM Disabling Decode Scheme 9.7.1.2 Automatic Mode In automatic mode, the PWM(s) are disabled immediately once a filtered fault condition is detected (logic high). The PWM(s) remain disabled until the filtered fault condition is cleared (logic low) and a new PWM cycle begins as shown in Figure 9-27. Clearing the corresponding FFLAGx event bit will not enable the PWMs in automatic mode.
FILTERED FAULT PIN
PWM(S) ENABLED
PWM(S) DISABLED (INACTIVE)
PWM(S) ENABLED
Figure 9-27. PWM Disabling in Automatic Mode
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control (PWMMC) Advance Information 163
Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control
The filtered fault pin's logic state is reflected in the respective FPINx bit. Any write to this bit is overwritten by the pin state. The FFLAGx event bit is set with each rising edge of the respective fault pin after filtering has been applied. To clear the FFLAGx bit, the user must write a 1 to the corresponding FTACKx bit. If the FINTx bit is set, a fault condition resulting in setting the corresponding FFLAG bit will also latch a CPU interrupt request. The interrupt request latch is not cleared until one of these actions occurs: * * * The FFLAGx bit is cleared by writing a 1 to the corresponding FTACKx bit. The FINTx bit is cleared. This will not clear the FFLAGx bit. A reset automatically clears all four interrupt latches.
If prior to a vector fetch, the interrupt request latch is cleared by one of the actions listed, a CPU interrupt will no longer be requested. A vector fetch does not alter the state of the PWMs, the FFLAGx event flag, or FINTx.
NOTE:
If the FFLAGx or FINTx bits are not cleared during the interrupt service routine, the interrupt request latch will not be cleared.
9.7.1.3 Manual Mode In manual mode, the PWM(s) are disabled immediately once a filtered fault condition is detected (logic high). The PWM(s) remain disabled until software clears the corresponding FFLAGx event bit and a new PWM cycle begins. In manual mode, the fault pins are grouped in pairs, each pair sharing common functionality. A fault condition on pins 1 and 3 may be cleared, allowing the PWM(s) to enable at the start of a PWM cycle regardless of the logic level at the fault pin. See Figure 9-28. A fault condition on pins 2 and 4 can only be cleared, allowing the PWM(s) to enable, if a logic low level at the fault pin is present at the start of a PWM cycle. See Figure 9-29. The function of the fault control and event bits is the same as in automatic mode except that the PWMs are not re-enabled until the FFLAGx event bit is cleared by writing to the FTACKx bit and the filtered fault condition is cleared (logic low).
Advance Information 164
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control (PWMMC) MOTOROLA
Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control (PWMMC) Fault Protection
FILTERED FAULT PIN 1 OR 3
PWM(S) ENABLED
PWM(S) DISABLED
PWM(S) ENABLED
FFLAGX CLEARED
Figure 9-28. PWM Disabling in Manual Mode (Example 1)
FILTERED FAULT PIN 2 OR 4
PWM(S) ENABLED
PWM(S) DISABLED
PWM(S) ENABLED
FFLAGX CLEARED
Figure 9-29. PWM Disabling in Manual Mode (Example 2)
9.7.2 Software Output Disable Setting PWM disable bit DISX or DISY in PWM control register 1 immediately disables the corresponding PWM pins as determined by the bank and disable mapping register. The PWM pin(s) remain disabled until the PWM disable bit is cleared and a new PWM cycle begins as shown in Figure 9-30. Setting a PWM disable bit does not latch a CPU interrupt request, and there are no event flags associated with the PWM disable bits.
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control (PWMMC)
Advance Information 165
Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control
9.7.3 Output Port Control When operating the PWMs using the OUTx bits (OUTCTL = 1), fault protection applies as described in this section. Due to the absence of periodic PWM cycles, fault conditions are cleared upon each CPU cycle and the PWM outputs are re-enabled, provided all fault clearing conditions are satisfied.
DISABLE BIT
PWM(S) ENABLED
PWM(S) DISABLED
PWM(S) ENABLED
Figure 9-30. PWM Software Disable
9.8 Initialization and the PWMEN Bit
For proper operation, all registers should be initialized and the LDOK bit should be set before enabling the PWM via the PWMEN bit. When the PWMEN bit is first set, a reload will occur immediately, setting the PWMF flag and generating an interrupt if PWMINT is set. In addition, in complementary mode, PWM value registers 1, 3, and 5 will be used for the first PWM cycle if current sensing is selected.
NOTE:
If the LDOK bit is not set when PWMEN is set after a RESET, the prescaler and PWM values will be 0, but the modulus will be unknown. If the LDOK bit is not set after the PWMEN bit has been cleared then set (without a RESET), the modulus value that was last loaded will be used. If the dead-time register (DEADTM) is changed after PWMEN or OUTCTL is set, an improper dead-time insertion could occur. However, the dead-time can never be shorter than the specified value. Because of the equals-comparator architecture of this PWM, the modulus = 0 case is considered illegal. Therefore, the modulus register
Advance Information 166
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control (PWMMC) MOTOROLA
Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control (PWMMC) Initialization and the PWMEN Bit
is not reset, and a modulus value of 0 will result in waveforms inconsistent with the other modulus waveforms. See 9.10.2 PWM Counter Modulo Registers. When PWMEN is set, the PWM pins change from high impedance to outputs. At this time, assuming no fault condition is present, the PWM pins will drive according to the PWM values, polarity, and dead-time. See the timing diagram in Figure 9-31.
CPU CLOCK
PWMEN DRIVE ACCORDING TO PWM VALUE, POLARITY, AND DEAD-TIME PWM PINS HI-Z IF OUTCTL = 0 HI-Z IF OUTCTL = 0
Figure 9-31. PWMEN and PWM Pins When the PWMEN bit is cleared, this will occur: * * * PWM pins will be three-stated unless OUTCTL = 1. PWM counter is cleared and will not be clocked. Internally, the PWM generator will force its outputs to 0 to avoid glitches when the PWMEN is set again.
When PWMEN is cleared, these features remain active: * * * All fault circuitry Manual PWM pin control via the PWMOUT register Dead-time insertion when PWM pins change via the PWMOUT register
NOTE:
The PWMF flag and pending CPU interrupts are NOT cleared when PWMEN = 0.
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control (PWMMC)
Advance Information 167
Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control 9.9 PWM Operation in Wait Mode
When the microcontroller is put in low-power wait mode via the WAIT instruction, all clocks to the PWM module will continue to run. If an interrupt is issued from the PWM module (via a reload or a fault), the microcontroller will exit wait mode. Clearing the PWMEN bit before entering wait mode will reduce power consumption in wait mode because the counter, prescaler divider, and LDFQ divider will no longer be clocked. In addition, power will be reduced because the PWMs will no longer toggle.
9.10 Control Logic Block
This subsection provides a description of the control logic block.
9.10.1 PWM Counter Registers The PWM counter registers (PCNTH and PCNTL) display the 12-bit up/down or up-only counter. When the high byte of the counter is read, the lower byte is latched. PCNTL will hold this latched value until it is read. See Figure 9-32 and Figure 9-33.
Address: $0026 Bit 7 Read: Write: Reset: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 6 0 5 0 4 0 3 Bit 11 2 Bit 10 1 Bit 9 Bit 0 Bit 8
= Unimplemented
Figure 9-32. PWM Counter Register High (PCNTH)
Address: $0027 Bit 7 Read: Write: Reset: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 7 6 Bit 6 5 Bit 5 4 Bit 4 3 Bit 3 2 Bit 2 1 Bit 1 Bit 0 Bit 0
= Unimplemented
Figure 9-33. PWM Counter Register Low (PCNTL)
Advance Information 168 MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control (PWMMC) MOTOROLA
Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control (PWMMC) Control Logic Block
9.10.2 PWM Counter Modulo Registers The PWM counter modulus registers (PMODH and PMODL) hold a 12-bit unsigned number that determines the maximum count for the up/down or up-only counter. In center-aligned mode, the PWM period will be twice the modulus (assuming no prescaler). In edge-aligned mode, the PWM period will equal the modulus. See Figure 9-34 and Figure 9-35.
Address: $0028 Bit 7 Read: Write: Reset: 0 0 0 0 0 6 0 5 0 4 0 Bit 11 X Bit 10 X Bit 9 X Bit 8 X 3 2 1 Bit 0
= Unimplemented
X = Indeterminate
Figure 9-34. PWM Counter Modulo Register High (PMODH)
Address: $0029 Bit 7 Read: Write: Reset: Bit 7 X Bit 6 X Bit 5 X Bit 4 X Bit 3 X Bit 2 X Bit 1 X Bit 0 X 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
X = Indeterminate
Figure 9-35. PWM Counter Modulo Register Low (PMODL) To avoid erroneous PWM periods, this value is buffered and will not be used by the PWM generator until the LDOK bit has been set and the next PWM load cycle begins.
NOTE:
When reading this register, the value read is the buffer (not necessarily the value the PWM generator is currently using). Because of the equals-comparator architecture of this PWM, the modulus = 0 case is considered illegal. Therefore, the modulus register is not reset, and a modulus value of 0 will result in waveforms inconsistent with the other modulus waveforms. If a modulus of 0 is loaded, the counter will continually count down from $FFF. This operation will not be tested or guaranteed (the user should consider it illegal). However, the dead-time constraints and fault conditions will still be guaranteed.
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control (PWMMC)
Advance Information 169
Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control
9.10.3 PWMx Value Registers Each of the six PWMs has a 16-bit PWM value register.
Bit 7 Read: Bit 15 Write: Reset: 0 Bold 0 = Buffered 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
Figure 9-36. PWMx Value Registers High (PVALxH)
Bit 7 Read: Bit 7 Write: Reset: 0 Bold 0 = Buffered 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
Figure 9-37. PWMx Value Registers Low (PVALxL) The 16-bit signed value stored in this register determines the duty cycle of the PWM. The duty cycle is defined as: (PWM value/modulus) x 100. Writing a number less than or equal to 0 causes the PWM to be off for the entire PWM period. Writing a number greater than or equal to the 12-bit modulus causes the PWM to be on for the entire PWM period. If the complementary mode is selected, the PWM pairs share PWM value registers. To avoid erroneous PWM pulses, this value is buffered and will not be used by the PWM generator until the LDOK bit has been set and the next PWM load cycle begins.
NOTE:
When reading these registers, the value read is the buffer (not necessarily the value the PWM generator is currently using).
Advance Information 170
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control (PWMMC) MOTOROLA
Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control (PWMMC) Control Logic Block
9.10.4 PWM Control Register 1 PWM control register 1 (PCTL1) controls PWM enabling/disabling, the loading of new modulus, prescaler, PWM values, and the PWM correction method. In addition, this register contains the software disable bits to force the PWM outputs to their inactive states (according to the disable mapping register).
Address: $0020 Bit 7 Read: DISX Write: Reset: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DISY PWMINT PWMF ISENS1 ISENS0 LDOK PWMEN 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
Figure 9-38. PWM Control Register 1 (PCTL1) DISX -- Software Disable Bit for Bank X Bit This read/write bit allows the user to disable one or more PWM pins in bank X. The pins that are disabled are determined by the disable mapping write-once register. 1 = Disable PWM pins in bank X. 0 = Re-enable PWM pins at beginning of next PWM cycle. DISY -- Software Disable Bit for Bank Y Bit This read/write bit allows the user to disable one or more PWM pins in bank Y. The pins that are disabled are determined by the disable mapping write-once register. 1 = Disable PWM pins in bank Y. 0 = Re-enable PWM pins at beginning of next PWM cycle. PWMINT -- PWM Interrupt Enable Bit This read/write bit allows the user to enable and disable PWM CPU interrupts. If set, a CPU interrupt will be pending when the PWMF flag is set. 1 = Enable PWM CPU interrupts. 0 = Disable PWM CPU interrupts.
NOTE:
When PWMINT is cleared, pending CPU interrupts are inhibited.
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control (PWMMC)
Advance Information 171
Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control
PWMF -- PWM Reload Flag This read/write bit is set at the beginning of every reload cycle regardless of the state of the LDOK bit. This bit is cleared by reading PWM control register 1 with the PWMF flag set, then writing a logic 0 to PWMF. If another reload occurs before the clearing sequence is complete, then writing logic 0 to PWMF has no effect. 1 = New reload cycle began. 0 = New reload cycle has not begun.
NOTE:
When PWMF is cleared, pending PWM CPU interrupts are cleared (not including fault interrupts). ISENS1 and ISENS0 -- Current Sense Correction Bits These read/write bits select the top/bottom correction scheme as shown in Table 9-7. Table 9-7. Correction Methods
Current Correction Bits ISENS1 and ISENS0 00 01 10 Correction Method Bits IPOL1, IPOL2, and IPOL3 are used for correction. Current sensing on pins IS1, IS2, and IS3 occurs during the dead-time. Current sensing on pins IS1, IS2, and IS3 occurs at the half cycle in center-aligned mode and at the end of the cycle in edge-aligned mode.
11
1. The polarity of the ISx pin is latched when both the top and bottom PWMs are off. At the 0% and 100% duty cycle boundaries, there is no dead-time, so no new current value is sensed. 2. Current is sensed even with 0% and 100% duty cycle.
NOTE:
The ISENSx bits are not buffered. Changing the current sensing method can affect the present PWM cycle. LDOK-- Load OK Bit This read/write bit loads the prescaler bits of the PMCTL2 register and the entire PMMODH/L and PWMVALH/L registers into a set of buffers. The buffered prescaler divisor, PWM counter modulus value, and PWM pulse will take effect at the next PWM load. Set LDOK by reading it when it is logic 0 and then writing a logic 1 to it. LDOK is
Advance Information 172
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control (PWMMC) MOTOROLA
Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control (PWMMC) Control Logic Block
automatically cleared after the new values are loaded or can be manually cleared before a reload by writing a 0 to it. Reset clears LDOK. 1 = Load prescaler, modulus, and PWM values. 0 = Do not load new modulus, prescaler, and PWM values.
NOTE:
The user should initialize the PWM registers and set the LDOK bit before enabling the PWM. A PWM CPU interrupt request can still be generated when LDOK is 0. PWMEN -- PWM Module Enable Bit This read/write bit enables and disables the PWM generator and the PWM pins. When PWMEN is clear, the PWM generator is disabled and the PWM pins are in the high-impedance state (unless OUTCTL = 1). When the PWMEN bit is set, the PWM generator and PWM pins are activated. For more information, see 9.8 Initialization and the PWMEN Bit. 1 = PWM generator and PWM pins enabled 0 = PWM generator and PWM pins disabled
9.10.5 PWM Control Register 2 PWM control register 2 (PCTL2) controls the PWM load frequency, the PWM correction method, and the PWM counter prescaler. For ease of software and to avoid erroneous PWM periods, some of these register bits are buffered. The PWM generator will not use the prescaler value until the LDOK bit has been set, and a new PWM cycle is starting. The correction bits are used at the beginning of each PWM cycle (if the ISENSx bits are configured for software correction). The load frequency bits are not used until the current load cycle is complete. See Figure 9-39.
NOTE:
The user should initialize this register before enabling the PWM.
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control (PWMMC)
Advance Information 173
Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control
Address:
$0021 Bit 7 6 LDFQ0 0 0 5 0 LDFQ1 IPOL1 0 Bold IPOL2 0 = Buffered IPOL3 0 PRSC1 0 PRSC0 0 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
Read: Write: Reset: 0
= Unimplemented
Figure 9-39. PWM Control Register 2 (PCTL2) LDFQ1 and LDFQ0 -- PWM Load Frequency Bits These buffered read/write bits select the PWM CPU load frequency according to Table 9-8.
NOTE:
When reading these bits, the value read is the buffer value (not necessarily the value the PWM generator is currently using). The LDFQx bits take effect when the current load cycle is complete regardless of the state of the load okay bit, LDOK. Table 9-8. PWM Reload Frequency
Reload Frequency Bits LDFQ1 and LDFQ0 00 01 10 11 PWM Reload Frequency Every PWM cycle Every 2 PWM cycles Every 4 PWM cycles Every 8 PWM cycles
NOTE:
Reading the LPFQx bit reads the buffered values and not necessarily the values currently in effect. IPOL1 -- Top/Bottom Correction Bit for PWM Pair 1 (PWMs 1 and 2) This buffered read/write bit selects which PWM value register is used if top/bottom correction is to be achieved without current sensing. 1 = Use PWM value register 2. 0 = Use PWM value register 1.
NOTE:
When reading this bit, the value read is the buffer value (not necessarily the value the output control block is currently using).
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control (PWMMC) MOTOROLA
Advance Information 174
Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control (PWMMC) Control Logic Block
The IPOLx bits take effect at the beginning of the next load cycle, regardless of the state of the load okay bit, LDOK. IPOL2 -- Top/Bottom Correction Bit for PWM Pair 2 (PWMs 3 and 4) This buffered read/write bit selects which PWM value register is used if top/bottom correction is to be achieved without current sensing. 1 = Use PWM value register 4. 0 = Use PWM value register 3.
NOTE:
When reading this bit, the value read is the buffer value (not necessarily the value the output control block is currently using). IPOL3 -- Top/Bottom Correction Bit for PWM Pair 3 (PWMs 5 and 6) This buffered read/write bit selects which PWM value register is used if top/bottom correction is to be achieved without current sensing. 1 = Use PWM value register 6. 0 = Use PWM value register 5.
NOTE:
When reading this bit, the value read is the buffer value (not necessarily the value the output control block is currently using). PRSC1 and PRSC0 -- PWM Prescaler Bits These buffered read/write bits allow the PWM clock frequency to be modified as shown in Table 9-9.
NOTE:
When reading these bits, the value read is the buffer value (not necessarily the value the PWM generator is currently using). Table 9-9. PWM Prescaler
Prescaler Bits PRSC1 and PRSC0 00 01 10 11 PWM Clock Frequency fOP fOP/2 fOP/4 fOP/8
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control (PWMMC)
Advance Information 175
Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control
9.10.6 Dead-Time Write-Once Register The dead-time write-once register (DEADTM) holds an 8-bit value which specifies the number of CPU clock cycles to use for the dead-time when complementary PWM mode is selected. After this register is written for the first time, it cannot be rewritten unless a reset occurs. Dead-time is not affected by changes to the prescaler value.
Address: $0036 Bit 7 Read: Bit 7 Write: Reset: 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
Figure 9-40. Dead-Time Write-Once Register (DEADTM)
9.10.7 PWM Disable Mapping Write-Once Register The PWM disable mapping write-once register (DISMAP) holds an 8-bit value which determines which PWM pins will be disabled if an external fault or software disable occurs. For a further description of disable mapping, see 9.7 Fault Protection. After this register is written for the first time, it cannot be rewritten unless a reset occurs.
Address: $0037 Bit 7 Read: Bit 7 Write: Reset: 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
Figure 9-41. PWM Disable Mapping Write-Once Register (DISMAP)
Advance Information 176
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control (PWMMC) MOTOROLA
Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control (PWMMC) Control Logic Block
9.10.8 Fault Control Register The fault control register (FCR) controls the fault-protection circuitry.
Address: $0022 Bit 7 Read: FINT4 Write: Reset: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 FMODE4 FINT3 FMODE3 FINT2 FMODE2 FINT1 FMODE1 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
Figure 9-42. Fault Control Register (FCR) FINT4 -- Fault 4 Interrupt Enable Bit This read/write bit allows the CPU interrupt caused by faults on fault pin 4 to be enabled. The fault protection circuitry is independent of this bit and will always be active. If a fault is detected, the PWM pins will still be disabled according to the disable mapping register. 1 = Fault pin 4 will cause CPU interrupts. 0 = Fault pin 4 will not cause CPU interrupts. FMODE4 --Fault Mode Selection for Fault Pin 4 Bit (automatic versus manual mode) This read/write bit allows the user to select between automatic and manual mode faults. For further descriptions of each mode, see 9.7 Fault Protection. 1 = Automatic mode 0 = Manual mode FINT3 -- Fault 3 Interrupt Enable Bit This read/write bit allows the CPU interrupt caused by faults on fault pin 3 to be enabled. The fault protection circuitry is independent of this bit and will always be active. If a fault is detected, the PWM pins will still be disabled according to the disable mapping register. 1 = Fault pin 3 will cause CPU interrupts. 0 = Fault pin 3 will not cause CPU interrupts.
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control (PWMMC)
Advance Information 177
Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control
FMODE3 --Fault Mode Selection for Fault Pin 3 Bit (automatic versus manual mode) This read/write bit allows the user to select between automatic and manual mode faults. For further descriptions of each mode, see 9.7 Fault Protection. 1 = Automatic mode 0 = Manual mode FINT2 -- Fault 2 Interrupt Enable Bit This read/write bit allows the CPU interrupt caused by faults on fault pin 2 to be enabled. The fault protection circuitry is independent of this bit and will always be active. If a fault is detected, the PWM pins will still be disabled according to the disable mapping register. 1 = Fault pin 2 will cause CPU interrupts. 0 = Fault pin 2 will not cause CPU interrupts. FMODE2 --Fault Mode Selection for Fault Pin 2 Bit (automatic versus manual mode) This read/write bit allows the user to select between automatic and manual mode faults. For further descriptions of each mode, see 9.7 Fault Protection. 1 = Automatic mode 0 = Manual mode FINT1 -- Fault 1 Interrupt Enable Bit This read/write bit allows the CPU interrupt caused by faults on fault pin 1 to be enabled. The fault protection circuitry is independent of this bit and will always be active. If a fault is detected, the PWM pins will still be disabled according to the disable mapping register. 1 = Fault pin 1 will cause CPU interrupts. 0 = Fault pin 1 will not cause CPU interrupts. FMODE1 --Fault Mode Selection for Fault Pin 1 Bit (automatic versus manual mode) This read/write bit allows the user to select between automatic and manual mode faults. For further descriptions of each mode, see 9.7 Fault Protection. 1 = Automatic mode 0 = Manual mode
Advance Information 178
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control (PWMMC) MOTOROLA
Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control (PWMMC) Control Logic Block
9.10.9 Fault Status Register The fault status register (FSR) is a read-only register that indicates the current fault status.
Address: $0023 Bit 7 Read: Write: Reset: U 0 U 0 U = Unaffected U 0 U 0 FPIN4 6 FFLAG4 5 FPIN3 4 FFLAG3 3 FPIN2 2 FFLAG2 1 FPIN1 Bit 0 FFLAG1
= Unimplemented
Figure 9-43. Fault Status Register (FSR) FPIN4 -- State of Fault Pin 4 Bit This read-only bit allows the user to read the current state of fault pin 4. 1 = Fault pin 4 is at logic 1. 0 = Fault pin 4 is at logic 0. FFLAG4 -- Fault Event Flag 4 The FFLAG4 event bit is set within two CPU cycles after a rising edge on fault pin 4. To clear the FFLAG4 bit, the user must write a 1 to the FTACK4 bit in the fault acknowledge register. 1 = A fault has occurred on fault pin 4. 0 = No new fault on fault pin 4 FPIN3 -- State of Fault Pin 3 Bit This read-only bit allows the user to read the current state of fault pin 3. 1 = Fault pin 3 is at logic 1. 0 = Fault pin 3 is at logic 0. FFLAG3 -- Fault Event Flag 3 The FFLAG3 event bit is set within two CPU cycles after a rising edge on fault pin 3. To clear the FFLAG3 bit, the user must write a 1 to the FTACK3 bit in the fault acknowledge register. 1 = A fault has occurred on fault pin 3. 0 = No new fault on fault pin 3.
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control (PWMMC)
Advance Information 179
Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control
FPIN2 -- State of Fault Pin 2 Bit This read-only bit allows the user to read the current state of fault pin 2. 1 = Fault pin 2 is at logic 1. 0 = Fault pin 2 is at logic 0. FFLAG2 -- Fault Event Flag 2 The FFLAG2 event bit is set within two CPU cycles after a rising edge on fault pin 2. To clear the FFLAG2 bit, the user must write a 1 to the FTACK2 bit in the fault acknowledge register. 1 = A fault has occurred on fault pin 2. 0 = No new fault on fault pin 2 FPIN1 -- State of Fault Pin 1 Bit This read-only bit allows the user to read the current state of fault pin 1. 1 = Fault pin 1 is at logic 1. 0 = Fault pin 1 is at logic 0. FFLAG1 -- Fault Event Flag 1 The FFLAG1 event bit is set within two CPU cycles after a rising edge on fault pin 1. To clear the FFLAG1 bit, the user must write a 1 to the FTACK1 bit in the fault acknowledge register. 1 = A fault has occurred on fault pin 1. 0 = No new fault on fault pin 1.
9.10.10 Fault Acknowledge Register The fault acknowledge register (FTACK) is used to acknowledge and clear the FFLAGs. In addition, it is used to monitor the current sensing bits to test proper operation.
Address: $0024 Bit 7 Read: Write: Reset: 0 0 6 0 FTACK4 0 0 5 DT6 4 DT5 FTACK3 0 0 3 DT4 2 DT3 FTACK2 0 0 1 DT2 Bit 0 DT1 FTACK1 0
= Unimplemented
Figure 9-44. Fault Acknowledge Register (FTACK)
Advance Information 180 MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control (PWMMC) MOTOROLA
Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control (PWMMC) Control Logic Block
FTACK4 -- Fault Acknowledge 4 Bit The FTACK4 bit is used to acknowledge and clear FFLAG4. This bit will always read 0. Writing a 1 to this bit will clear FFLAG4. Writing a 0 will have no effect. FTACK3 -- Fault Acknowledge 3 Bit The FTACK3 bit is used to acknowledge and clear FFLAG3. This bit will always read 0. Writing a 1 to this bit will clear FFLAG3. Writing a 0 will have no effect. FTACK2 -- Fault Acknowledge 2 Bit The FTACK2 bit is used to acknowledge and clear FFLAG2. This bit will always read 0. Writing a 1 to this bit will clear FFLAG2. Writing a 0 will have no effect. FTACK1 -- Fault Acknowledge 1 Bit The FTACK1 bit is used to acknowledge and clear FFLAG1. This bit will always read 0. Writing a 1 to this bit will clear FFLAG1. Writing a 0 will have no effect. DT6 -- Dead-Time 6 Bit Current sensing pin IS3 is monitored immediately before dead-time ends due to the assertion of PWM6. DT5 -- Dead-Time 5 Bit Current sensing pin IS3 is monitored immediately before dead-time ends due to the assertion of PWM5. DT4 -- Dead-Time 4 Bit Current sensing pin IS2 is monitored immediately before dead-time ends due to the assertion of PWM4. DT3 -- Dead-Time 3 Bit Current sensing pin IS2 is monitored immediately before dead-time ends due to the assertion of PWM3. DT2 -- Dead-Time 2 Bit Current sensing pin IS1 is monitored immediately before dead-time ends due to the assertion of PWM2. DT1 -- Dead-Time 1 Bit Current sensing pin IS1 is monitored immediately before dead-time ends due to the assertion of PWM1.
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control (PWMMC) Advance Information 181
Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control
9.10.11 PWM Output Control Register The PWM output control register (PWMOUT) is used to manually control the PWM pins.
Address: $0025 Bit 7 Read: Write: Reset: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 OUTCTL OUT6 OUT5 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
= Unimplemented
Figure 9-45. PWM Output Control Register (PWMOUT) OUTCTL-- Output Control Enable Bit This read/write bit allows the user to manually control the PWM pins. When set, the PWM generator is no longer the input to the dead-time and output circuitry. The OUTx bits determine the state of the PWM pins. Setting the OUTCTL bit does not disable the PWM generator. The generator continues to run, but is no longer the input to the PWM dead-time and output circuitry. When OUTCTL is cleared, the outputs of the PWM generator immediately become the inputs to the dead-time and output circuitry. 1 = PWM outputs controlled manually 0 = PWM outputs determined by PWM generator OUT6-OUT1-- PWM Pin Output Control Bits These read/write bits control the PWM pins according to Table 9-10.
Advance Information 182
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control (PWMMC) MOTOROLA
Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control (PWMMC) PWM Glossary
Table 9-10. OUTx Bits
OUTx Bit OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 OUT5 OUT6 Complementary Mode 1 -- PWM1 is active. 0 -- PWM1 is inactive. 1 -- PWM2 is complement of PWM 1. 0 -- PWM2 is inactive. 1 -- PWM3 is active. 0 -- PWM3 is inactive. 1 -- PWM4 is complement of PWM 3. 0 -- PWM4 is inactive. 1 -- PWM5 is active. 0 -- PWM5 is inactive. 1 -- PWM 6 is complement of PWM 5. 0 -- PWM6 is inactive. Independent Mode 1 -- PWM1 is active. 0 -- PWM1 is inactive. 1 -- PWM2 is active. 0 -- PWM2 is inactive. 1 -- PWM3 is active. 0 -- PWM3 is inactive. 1 -- PWM4 is active. 0 -- PWM4 is inactive. 1 -- PWM5 is active. 0 -- PWM5 is inactive. 1 -- PWM6 is active. 0 -- PWM6 is inactive.
9.11 PWM Glossary
CPU cycle -- One internal bus cycle (1/fOP) PWM clock cycle (or period) -- One tick of the PWM counter (1/fOP with no prescaler). See Figure 9-46. PWM cycle (or period) * Center-aligned mode: The time it takes the PWM counter to count up and count down (modulus * 2/fOP assuming no prescaler). See Figure 9-46. Edge-aligned mode: The time it takes the PWM counter to count up (modulus/fOP). See Figure 9-46.
*
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control (PWMMC)
Advance Information 183
Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control
Center-Aligned Mode
PWM CLOCK CYCLE PWM CYCLE (OR PERIOD)
Edge-Aligned Mode
PWM CLOCK CYCLE
PWM CYCLE (OR PERIOD)
Figure 9-46. PWM Clock Cycle and PWM Cycle Definitions
PWM Load Frequency -- Frequency at which new PWM parameters get loaded into the PWM. See Figure 9-47.
LDFQ1:LDFQ0 = 01 -- Reload Every Two Cycles
PWM LOAD CYCLE (1/PWM LOAD FREQUENCY) RELOAD NEW MODULUS, PRESCALER, & PWM VALUES IF LDOK = 1 RELOAD NEW MODULUS, PRESCALER, & PWM VALUES IF LDOK = 1
Figure 9-47. PWM Load Cycle/Frequency Definition
Advance Information 184
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Pulse-Width Modulator for Motor Control (PWMMC) MOTOROLA
Advance Information -- MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32
Section 10. Monitor ROM (MON)
10.1 Contents
10.2 10.3 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
10.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 10.4.1 Entering Monitor Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188 10.4.1.1 Normal Monitor Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 10.4.1.2 Forced Monitor Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 10.4.2 Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 10.4.3 Echoing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 10.4.4 Break Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 10.4.5 Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192 10.4.6 Baud Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196 10.5 Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
10.2 Introduction
This section describes the monitor read-only memory (ROM). The monitor ROM (MON) allows complete testing of the microcontroller unit (MCU) through a single-wire interface with a host computer. Monitor mode entry can be achieved without the use of VTST as long as vector addresses $FFFE and $FFFF are blank, thus reducing the hardware requirements for in-circuit programming.
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Monitor ROM (MON)
Advance Information 185
Monitor ROM (MON) 10.3 Features
Features of the monitor ROM include: * * * * * * Normal user-mode pin functionality One pin dedicated to serial communication between monitor ROM and host computer Standard mark/space non-return-to-zero (NRZ) communication with host computer 4800 baud-28.8 Kbaud communication with host computer Execution of code in random-access memory (RAM) or ROM FLASH programming
10.4 Functional Description
The monitor ROM receives and executes commands from a host computer. Figure 10-1 shows a sample circuit used to enter monitor mode and communicate with a host computer via a standard RS-232 interface. Simple monitor commands can access any memory address. In monitor mode, the MCU can execute host-computer code in RAM while all MCU pins retain normal operating mode functions. All communication between the host computer and the MCU is through the PTA0 pin. A level-shifting and multiplexing interface is required between PTA0 and the host computer. PTA0 is used in a wired-OR configuration and requires a pullup resistor.
Advance Information 186
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Monitor ROM (MON) MOTOROLA
Monitor ROM (MON) Functional Description
VDD 10 k S1 RST 0.1 F MC68HC908MR16/ MC68HC908MR32
VHI 10 k VDDA 1 10 F + 3 4 10 F + 18 0.1 F 17 + 10 F VDD VREFH VREFH 0.1 F 0.02 F 5 6 16 15 20 pF X1 4.9152 MHz 10 M OSC2 VDD 1 2 6 4 VDD MC74HC125 14 3 5 VDD VDD 0.1 F 20 pF VREFL VSSAD VSSA PWMGND VSS OSC1 CGMXFC MC145407 20 + 10 F 0.1 F VDDAD VDDAD IRQ VDDA
2
19
DB-25 2 3 7
7
VDD 10 k PTA0 PTA7 PTC2 VDD 10 k S2 B PTC3 PTC4
10 k A B S3 VDD 10 k A
S2 Position A -- Bus clock = CGMXCLK / 4 or CGMVCLK / 4 S2 Position B -- Bus clock = CGMXCLK / 2 S3 Position A -- Parallel communication S3 Position B -- Serial communication
Figure 10-1. Monitor Mode Circuit
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Monitor ROM (MON) Advance Information 187
Monitor ROM (MON)
10.4.1 Entering Monitor Mode There are two methods for entering monitor: * * The first is the traditional M68HC08 method where VDD + VHI is applied to IRQ1 and the mode pins are configured appropriately. A second method, intended for in-circuit programming applications, will force entry into monitor mode without requiring high voltage on the IRQ1 pin when the reset vector locations of the FLASH are erased ($FF).
NOTE:
For both methods, holding the PTC2 pin low when entering monitor mode causes a bypass of a divide-by-two stage at the oscillator. The CGMOUT frequency is equal to the CGMXCLK frequency, and the OSC1 input directly generates internal bus clocks. In this case, the OSC1 signal must have a 50 percent duty cycle at maximum bus frequency. is a summary of the differences between user mode and monitor mode. Table 10-1. Mode Differences
Functions Modes COP User Monitor Enabled Disabled(1) Rest Vector High $FFFE $FEFE Reset Vector Low $FFFF $FEFF Break Vector High $FFFC $FEFC Break Vector Low $FFFD $FEFD SWI Vector High $FFFC $FEFC SWI Vector Low $FFFD $FEFD
1. If the high voltage (VDD + VHI) is removed from the IRQ1 pin or the RST pin, the SIM asserts its COP enable output. The COP is a mask option enabled or disabled by the COPD bit in the configuration register.
10.4.1.1 Normal Monitor Mode Table 10-2 shows the pin conditions for entering monitor mode.
Advance Information 188
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Monitor ROM (MON) MOTOROLA
MOTOROLA Monitor ROM (MON) 189
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Advance Information
Table 10-2. Monitor Mode Signal Requirements and Options
For Serial IRQ RESET (S1) $FFFE /$FFFF PLL PTC3 PTC4 PTC2 External CGMOUT (S2) Clock(1) Bus Frequency COP Communication(2) Baud PTA7 PTA0 (S3) Rate(3) (4) X 1 VDD or VTST X 0 0 9600 Comment
X
GND
X
X
X
X
X
X
0
0
Disabled
No operation until reset goes high PTC3 and PTC2 voltages only required if IRQ = VTST; PTC2 determines frequency divider PTC3 and PTC2 voltages only required if IRQ = VTST; PTC2 determines frequency divider External frequency always divided by 4 Enters user mode -- will encounter an illegal address reset
VTST
X
OFF
1
0
0
4.9152 MHz
4.9152 MHz
2.4576 MHz
Disabled
X
1
DNA
1 VDD or VTST
0
9600
VTST
X
OFF
1
0
1
9.8304 MHz
4.9152 MHz
2.4576 MHz
Disabled
X
1
DNA
VDD
VDD
$FFFF Blank
OFF
X
X
X
9.8304 MHz
4.9152 MHz
2.4576 MHz
1 Disabled X
0 1
9600 DNA
VDD or GND VDD or GND
VTST
$FFFF Blank
OFF
X
X
X
X
--
--
Enabled
X
X
--
Monitor ROM (MON) Functional Description
VDD or VTST
Non-$FF OFF Programmed
X
X
X
X
--
--
Enabled
X
X
--
Enters user mode
1. External clock is derived by a 32.768 kHz crystal or a 4.9152/9.8304 MHz off-chip oscillator. 2. DNA = does not apply, X = don't care 3. PAT0 = 1 if serial communication; PTA0 = X if parallel communication 4. PTA7 = 0 serial, PTA7 = 1 parallel communication for security code entry
Monitor ROM (MON)
Enter monitor mode by either: * * Executing a software interrupt instruction (SWI) or Applying a logic 0 and then a logic 1 to the RST pin
Once out of reset, the MCU waits for the host to send eight security bytes. After receiving the security bytes, the MCU sends a break signal (10 consecutive logic 0s) to the host computer, indicating that it is ready to receive a command. The break signal also provides a timing reference to allow the host to determine the necessary baud rate. Monitor mode uses alternate vectors for reset and SWI. The alternate vectors are in the $FE page instead of the $FF page and allow code execution from the internal monitor firmware instead of user code. The computer operating properly (COP) module is disabled in monitor mode as long as VHI is applied to either the IRQ pin or the RST pin. (See Section 7. System Integration Module (SIM) for more information on modes of operation.) 10.4.1.2 Forced Monitor Mode If the voltage applied to the IRQ1 is less than VDD + VHI the MCU will come out of reset in user mode. The MENRST module is monitoring the reset vector fetches and will assert an internal reset if it detects that the reset vectors are erased ($FF). When the MCU comes out of reset, it is forced into monitor mode without requiring high voltage on the IRQ1 pin. The COP module is disabled in forced monitor mode. Any reset other than a POR reset will automatically force the MCU to come back to the forced monitor mode.
Advance Information 190
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Monitor ROM (MON) MOTOROLA
Monitor ROM (MON) Functional Description
10.4.2 Data Format Communication with the monitor ROM is in standard non-return-to-zero (NRZ) mark/space data format. (See Figure 10-2 and Figure 10-3.)
START BIT
BIT 0
BIT 1
BIT 2
BIT 3
BIT 4
BIT 5
BIT 6
BIT 7
STOP BIT
NEXT START BIT
Figure 10-2. Monitor Data Format
$A5 BREAK
START BIT START BIT
BIT 0 BIT 0
BIT 1 BIT 1
BIT 2 BIT 2
BIT 3 BIT 3
BIT 4 BIT 4
BIT 5 BIT 5
BIT 6 BIT 6
BIT 7 BIT 7
STOP BIT STOP BIT
NEXT START BIT NEXT START BIT
Figure 10-3. Sample Monitor Waveforms The data transmit and receive rate can be anywhere from 4800 baud to 28.8 Kbaud. Transmit and receive baud rates must be identical.
10.4.3 Echoing As shown in Figure 10-4, the monitor ROM immediately echoes each received byte back to the PTA0 pin for error checking.
SENT TO MONITOR READ ECHO READ ADDR. HIGH ADDR. HIGH ADDR. LOW ADDR. LOW DATA
RESULT
Figure 10-4. Read Transaction Any result of a command appears after the echo of the last byte of the command.
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Monitor ROM (MON)
Advance Information 191
Monitor ROM (MON)
10.4.4 Break Signal A start bit followed by nine low bits is a break signal. See Figure 10-5. When the monitor receives a break signal, it drives the PTA0 pin high for the duration of two bits before echoing the break signal.
MISSING STOP BIT 2--STOP-BIT DELAY BEFORE ZERO ECHO
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Figure 10-5. Break Transaction 10.4.5 Commands The monitor ROM uses these commands (see Table 10-3-Table 10-8): * * * * * * READ, read memory WRITE, write memory IREAD, indexed read IWRITE, indexed write READSP, read stack pointer RUN, run user program
Advance Information 192
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Monitor ROM (MON) MOTOROLA
Monitor ROM (MON) Functional Description
Table 10-3. READ (Read Memory) Command
Description Operand Data returned Opcode Command sequence
SENT TO MONITOR READ READ ADDR. HIGH ADDR. HIGH ADDR. LOW ADDR. LOW DATA
Read byte from memory Specifies 2-byte address in high byte:low byte order Returns contents of specified address $4A
ECHO
RESULT
Table 10-4. WRITE (Write Memory) Command
Description Operand Data returned Opcode Command sequence
SENT TO MONITOR WRITE WRITE ADDR. HIGH ADDR. HIGH ADDR. LOW ADDR. LOW DATA DATA
Write byte to memory Specifies 2-byte address in high byte:low byte order; low byte followed by data byte None $49
ECHO
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Monitor ROM (MON)
Advance Information 193
Monitor ROM (MON)
Table 10-5. IREAD (Indexed Read) Command
Description Operand Data returned Opcode Command sequence
SENT TO MONITOR IREAD IREAD DATA DATA
Read next 2 bytes in memory from last address accessed Specifies 2-byte address in high byte:low byte order Returns contents of next two addresses $1A
ECHO
RESULT
Table 10-6. IWRITE (Indexed Write) Command
Description Operand Data returned Opcode Command sequence
SENT TO MONITOR IWRITE IWRITE DATA DATA
Write to last address accessed + 1 Specifies single data byte None $19
ECHO
NOTE:
A sequence of IREAD or IWRITE commands can sequentially access a block of memory over the full 64-Kbyte memory map.
Advance Information 194
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Monitor ROM (MON) MOTOROLA
Monitor ROM (MON) Functional Description
Table 10-7. READSP (Read Stack Pointer) Command
Description Operand Data returned Opcode Command sequence
SENT TO MONITOR READSP READSP SP HIGH SP LOW
Reads stack pointer None Returns stack pointer in high byte:low byte order $0C
ECHO
RESULT
Table 10-8. RUN (Run User Program) Command
Description Operand Data returned Opcode Command sequence
SENT TO MONITOR RUN RUN
Executes RTI instruction None None $28
ECHO
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Monitor ROM (MON)
Advance Information 195
Monitor ROM (MON)
10.4.6 Baud Rate With a 4.9152-MHz crystal and the PTC2 pin at logic 1 during reset, data is transferred between the monitor and host at 4800 baud. If the PTC2 pin is at logic 0 during reset, the monitor baud rate is 9600. See Table 10-9. Table 10-9. Monitor Baud Rate Selection
VCO Frequency Multiplier (N) 1 Monitor baud rate 4800 2 9600 3 14,400 4 19,200 5 24,000 6 28,800
10.5 Security
A security feature discourages unauthorized reading of FLASH locations while in monitor mode. The host can bypass the security feature at monitor mode entry by sending eight security bytes that match the bytes at locations $FFF6-$FFFD. Locations $FFF6-$FFFD contain user-defined data.
NOTE:
Do not leave locations $FFF6-$FFFD blank. For security reasons, program locations $FFF6-$FFFD even if they are not used for vectors. During monitor mode entry, the MCU waits after the power-on reset for the host to send the eight security bytes on pin PTA0. If the received bytes match those at locations $FFF6-$FFFD, the host bypasses the security feature and can read all FLASH locations and execute code from FLASH. Security remains bypassed until a power-on reset occurs. If the reset was not a power-on reset, security remains bypassed and security code entry is not required. (See Figure 10-6.) Upon power-on reset, if the received bytes of the security code do not match the data at locations $FFF6-$FFFD, the host fails to bypass the security feature. The MCU remains in monitor mode, but reading a FLASH location returns an invalid value and trying to execute code from FLASH causes an illegal address reset. After receiving the eight security bytes from the host, the MCU transmits a break character, signifying that it is ready to receive a command.
NOTE:
The MCU does not transmit a break character until after the host sends the eight security bytes.
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Monitor ROM (MON) MOTOROLA
Advance Information 196
Monitor ROM (MON) Security
V'' 4096 + 32 CGMXCLK CYCLES
567
24 BUS CYCLES PA7 COMMAND 1 BYTE 2 ECHO BYTE 8 ECHO 2 BREAK 3 1 COMMAND ECHO 256 BUS CYCLES (MINIMUM) BYTE 1 BYTE 2 BYTE 8 1
FROM HOST
PA0 1 FROM MCU BYTE 1 ECHO
IPU@T)A A2A@puAqr yh A!AivAvr !A2A9hh Ar Aqryh A!AivAvr "A2AXhvA AivAvr Air s rAr qvtAr Ai r
3
Figure 10-6. Monitor Mode Entry Timing To determine whether the security code entered is correct, check to see if bit 6 of RAM address $60 is set. If it is, then the correct security code has been entered and FLASH can be accessed. If the security sequence fails, the device can be reset (via power-pin reset only) and brought up in monitor mode to attempt another entry. After failing the security sequence, the FLASH mode can also be bulk erased by executing an erase routine that was downloaded into internal RAM. The bulk erase operation clears the security code locations so that all eight security bytes become $FF.
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Monitor ROM (MON)
Advance Information 197
Monitor ROM (MON)
Advance Information 198
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Monitor ROM (MON) MOTOROLA
Advance Information -- MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32
Section 11. Timer Interface A (TIMA)
11.1 Contents
11.2 11.3 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
11.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 11.4.1 TIMA Counter Prescaler. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 11.4.2 Input Capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 11.4.3 Output Compare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205 11.4.3.1 Unbuffered Output Compare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 11.4.3.2 Buffered Output Compare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206 11.4.4 Pulse-Width Modulation (PWM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 11.4.4.1 Unbuffered PWM Signal Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 11.4.4.2 Buffered PWM Signal Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 11.4.4.3 PWM Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 11.5 11.6 Interrupts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Wait Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
11.7 I/O Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 11.7.1 TIMA Clock Pin (PTE3/TCLKA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 11.7.2 TIMA Channel I/O Pins (PTE4/TCH0A-PTE7/TCH3A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 11.8 I/O Registers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 11.8.1 TIMA Status and Control Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 11.8.2 TIMA Counter Registers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 11.8.3 TIMA Counter Modulo Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 11.8.4 TIMA Channel Status and Control Registers . . . . . . . . . . . 217 11.8.5 TIMA Channel Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Timer Interface A (TIMA)
Advance Information 199
Timer Interface A (TIMA) 11.2 Introduction
This section describes the timer interface module A (TIMA). The TIMA is a 4-channel timer that provides: * * * Timing reference with input capture Output compare Pulse-width modulator functions
Figure 11-1 is a block diagram of the TIMA.
11.3 Features
Features of the TIMA include: * Four input capture/output compare channels: - Rising-edge, falling-edge, or any-edge input capture trigger - Set, clear, or toggle output compare action Buffered and unbuffered pulse-width modulator (PWM) signal generation Programmable TIMA clock input: - 7-frequency internal bus clock prescaler selection - External TIMA clock input (4-MHz maximum frequency) * * * Free-running or modulo up-count operation Toggle any channel pin on overflow TIMA counter stop and reset bits
* *
Advance Information 200
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Timer Interface A (TIMA) MOTOROLA
Timer Interface A (TIMA) Features
PTE3/TCLKA INTERNAL BUS CLOCK TSTOP TRST 16-BIT COUNTER
TCLK PRESCALER SELECT PRESCALER
PS2
PS1
PS0
TOF TOIE
INTERRUPT LOGIC
16-BIT COMPARATOR TMODH:TMODL CHANNEL 0 16-BIT COMPARATOR TCH0H:TCH0L 16-BIT LATCH MS0A CHANNEL 1 16-BIT COMPARATOR TCH1H:TCH1L 16-BIT LATCH MS1A CHANNEL 2 16-BIT COMPARATOR TCH2H:TCH2L 16-BIT LATCH MS2A CHANNEL 3 16-BIT COMPARATOR TCH3H:TCH3L 16-BIT LATCH MS3A CH3IE CH3F ELS3B ELS3A MS2B CH2IE TOV3 CH3MAX CH2F ELS2B ELS2A CH1IE TOV2 CH2MAX CH1F ELS1B ELS1A MS0B CH0IE TOV1 CH1MAX CH0F ELS0B ELS0A TOV0 CH0MAX
PTE4 LOGIC INTERRUPT LOGIC
PTE4/TCH0A
PTE5 LOGIC INTERRUPT LOGIC
PTE5/TCH1A
PTE6 LOGIC INTERRUPT LOGIC
PTE6/TCH2A
PTE7 LOGIC INTERRUPT LOGIC
PTE7/TCH3A
Figure 11-1. TIMA Block Diagram
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Timer Interface A (TIMA)
Advance Information 201
Timer Interface A (TIMA)
Addr.
Register Name Read: TIMA Status/Control Register (TASC) Write: See page 214. Reset:
Bit 7 TOF
6 TOIE
5 TSTOP
4 0 TRST
3 0
2 PS2
1 PS1 0 Bit 9 R 0 Bit 1 R 0 9 1 1 1 TOV0 0 9
Bit 0 PS0 0 Bit 8 R 0 Bit 0 R 0 Bit 8 1 Bit 0 1 CH0MAX 0 Bit 8
$000E
0 0 0 Bit 14 R 0 Bit 6 R 0 14 1 6 1 CH0IE 0 14 1 Bit 13 R 0 Bit 5 R 0 13 1 5 1 MS0B 0 13
R 0 Bit 11 R 0 Bit 3 R 0 11 1 3 1 ELS0B 0 11 0 Bit 10 R 0 Bit 2 R 0 10 1 2 1 ELS0A 0 10
0 Bit 12 R 0 Bit 4 R 0 12 1 4 1 MS0A 0 12
$000F
Read: Bit 15 TIMA Counter Register High (TACNTH) Write: R See page 216. Reset: 0 Read: TIMA Counter Register Low (TACNTL) Write: See page 216. Reset: Bit 7 R 0
$0010
$0011
Read: TIMA Counter Modulo Bit 15 Register High (TAMODH) Write: See page 217. Reset: 1 Read: TIMA Counter Modulo Register Low (TAMODL) Write: See page 217. Reset: Bit 7 1
$0012
Read: CH0F TIMA Channel 0 Status/Control 0 $0013 Register (TASC0) Write: See page 218. Reset: 0 Read: TIMA Channel 0 Register High Bit 15 $0014 (TACH0H) Write: See page 222. Reset: Read: TIMA Channel 0 Register Low $0015 (TACH0L) Write: See page 222. Reset: Bit 7
Indeterminate after reset 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
Indeterminate after reset 0 CH1IE R 0 = Reserved 0 0 0 0 0 0 MS1A ELS1B ELS1A TOV1 CH1MAX
Read: CH1F TIMA Channel 1 Status/Control $0016 Register (TASC1) Write: 0 See page 218. Reset: 0 R
Figure 11-2. TIM I/O Register Summary
Advance Information 202 MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Timer Interface A (TIMA) MOTOROLA
Timer Interface A (TIMA) Features
Addr.
Register Name
Bit 7
6 14
5 13
4 12
3 11
2 10
1 9
Bit 0 Bit 8
Read: TIMA Channel 1 Register High Bit 15 $0017 (TACH1H) Write: See page 222. Reset: Read: TIMA Channel 1 Register Low $0018 (TACH1L) Write: See page 222. Reset: Bit 7
Indeterminate after reset 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
Indeterminate after reset CH2IE 0 14 MS2B 0 13 MS2A 0 12 ELS2B 0 11 ELS2A 0 10 TOV2 0 9 CH2MAX 0 Bit 8
Read: CH2F TIMA Channel 2 Status/Control $0019 Register (TASC2) Write: 0 See page 218. Reset: 0 Read: TIMA Channel 2 Register High Bit 15 $001A (TACH2H) Write: See page 222. Reset: Read: TIMA Channel 2 Register Low $001B (TACH2L) Write: See page 222. Reset: Bit 7
Indeterminate after reset 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
Indeterminate after reset 0 CH3IE R 0 14 0 13 0 12 0 11 0 10 0 9 0 Bit 8 MS3A ELS3B ELS3A TOV3 CH3MAX
Read: CH3F TIMA Channel 3 Status/Control $001C Register (TASC3) Write: 0 See page 218. Reset: 0 Read: TIMA Channel 3 Register High Bit 15 $001D (TACH3H) Write: See page 222. Reset: Read: TIMA Channel 3 Register Low $001E (TACH3L) Write: See page 222. Reset: Bit 7
Indeterminate after reset 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
Indeterminate after reset R = Reserved
Figure 11-2. TIM I/O Register Summary (Continued)
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Timer Interface A (TIMA)
Advance Information 203
Timer Interface A (TIMA) 11.4 Functional Description
Figure 11-1 shows the TIMA structure. The central component of the TIMA is the 16-bit TIMA counter that can operate as a free-running counter or a modulo up-counter. The TIMA counter provides the timing reference for the input capture and output compare functions. The TIMA counter modulo registers, TAMODH-TAMODL, control the modulo value of the TIMA counter. Software can read the TIMA counter value at any time without affecting the counting sequence. The four TIMA channels are programmable independently as input capture or output compare channels.
11.4.1 TIMA Counter Prescaler The TIMA clock source can be one of the seven prescaler outputs or the TIMA clock pin, PTE3/TCLKA. The prescaler generates seven clock rates from the internal bus clock. The prescaler select bits, PS[2:0], in the TIMA status and control register select the TIMA clock source.
11.4.2 Input Capture An input capture function has three basic parts: 1. Edge select logic 2. Input capture latch 3. 16-bit counter Two 8-bit registers, which make up the 16-bit input capture register, are used to latch the value of the free-running counter after the corresponding input capture edge detector senses a defined transition. The polarity of the active edge is programmable. The level transition which triggers the counter transfer is defined by the corresponding input edge bits (ELSxB and ELSxA in TASC0-TASC3 control registers with x referring to the active channel number). When an active edge occurs on the pin of an input capture channel, the TIMA latches the contents of the TIMA counter into the TIMA channel registers, TACHxH-TACHxL. Input captures can generate TIMA CPU interrupt requests. Software can determine that an input capture event has occurred by enabling input capture interrupts or by polling the status flag bit.
Advance Information 204 MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Timer Interface A (TIMA) MOTOROLA
Timer Interface A (TIMA) Functional Description
The free-running counter contents are transferred to the TIMA channel status and control register (TACHxH-TACHxL, see 11.8.5 TIMA Channel Registers) on each proper signal transition regardless of whether the TIMA channel flag (CH0F-CH3F in TASC0-TASC3 registers) is set or clear. When the status flag is set, a CPU interrupt is generated if enabled. The value of the count latched or "captured" is the time of the event. Because this value is stored in the input capture register two bus cycles after the actual event occurs, user software can respond to this event at a later time and determine the actual time of the event. However, this must be done prior to another input capture on the same pin; otherwise, the previous time value will be lost. By recording the times for successive edges on an incoming signal, software can determine the period and/or pulse width of the signal. To measure a period, two successive edges of the same polarity are captured. To measure a pulse width, two alternate polarity edges are captured. Software should track the overflows at the 16-bit module counter to extend its range. Another use for the input capture function is to establish a time reference. In this case, an input capture function is used in conjunction with an output compare function. For example, to activate an output signal a specified number of clock cycles after detecting an input event (edge), use the input capture function to record the time at which the edge occurred. A number corresponding to the desired delay is added to this captured value and stored to an output compare register (see 11.8.5 TIMA Channel Registers). Because both input captures and output compares are referenced to the same 16-bit modulo counter, the delay can be controlled to the resolution of the counter independent of software latencies. Reset does not affect the contents of the input capture channel registers.
11.4.3 Output Compare With the output compare function, the TIMA can generate a periodic pulse with a programmable polarity, duration, and frequency. When the counter reaches the value in the registers of an output compare channel, the TIMA can set, clear, or toggle the channel pin. Output compares can generate TIMA CPU interrupt requests.
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Timer Interface A (TIMA)
Advance Information 205
Timer Interface A (TIMA)
11.4.3.1 Unbuffered Output Compare Any output compare channel can generate unbuffered output compare pulses as described in 11.4.3 Output Compare. The pulses are unbuffered because changing the output compare value requires writing the new value over the old value currently in the TIMA channel registers. An unsynchronized write to the TIMA channel registers to change an output compare value could cause incorrect operation for up to two counter overflow periods. For example, writing a new value before the counter reaches the old value but after the counter reaches the new value prevents any compare during that counter overflow period. Also, using a TIMA overflow interrupt routine to write a new, smaller output compare value may cause the compare to be missed. The TIMA may pass the new value before it is written. Use this method to synchronize unbuffered changes in the output compare value on channel x: * When changing to a smaller value, enable channel x output compare interrupts and write the new value in the output compare interrupt routine. The output compare interrupt occurs at the end of the current output compare pulse. The interrupt routine has until the end of the counter overflow period to write the new value. When changing to a larger output compare value, enable TIMA overflow interrupts and write the new value in the TIMA overflow interrupt routine. The TIMA overflow interrupt occurs at the end of the current counter overflow period. Writing a larger value in an output compare interrupt routine (at the end of the current pulse) could cause two output compares to occur in the same counter overflow period.
*
11.4.3.2 Buffered Output Compare Channels 0 and 1 can be linked to form a buffered output compare channel whose output appears on the PTE4/TCH0A pin. The TIMA channel registers of the linked pair alternately control the output. Setting the MS0B bit in TIMA channel 0 status and control register (TASC0) links channel 0 and channel 1. The output compare value in the TIMA channel 0 registers initially controls the output on the PTE4/TCH0A pin. Writing to the TIMA channel 1 registers enables the
Advance Information 206 MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Timer Interface A (TIMA) MOTOROLA
Timer Interface A (TIMA) Functional Description
TIMA channel 1 registers to synchronously control the output after the TIMA overflows. At each subsequent overflow, the TIMA channel registers (0 or 1) that control the output are the ones written to last. TASC0 controls and monitors the buffered output compare function, and TIMA channel 1 status and control register (TASC1) is unused. While the MS0B bit is set, the channel 1 pin, PTE5/TCH1A, is available as a general-purpose I/O pin. Channels 2 and 3 can be linked to form a buffered output compare channel whose output appears on the PTE6/TCH2A pin. The TIMA channel registers of the linked pair alternately control the output. Setting the MS2B bit in TIMA channel 2 status and control register (TASC2) links channel 2 and channel 3. The output compare value in the TIMA channel 2 registers initially controls the output on the PTE6/TCH2A pin. Writing to the TIMA channel 3 registers enables the TIMA channel 3 registers to synchronously control the output after the TIMA overflows. At each subsequent overflow, the TIMA channel registers (2 or 3) that control the output are the ones written to last. TASC2 controls and monitors the buffered output compare function, and TIMA channel 3 status and control register (TASC3) is unused. While the MS2B bit is set, the channel 3 pin, PTE7/TCH3A, is available as a general-purpose I/O pin.
NOTE:
In buffered output compare operation, do not write new output compare values to the currently active channel registers. User software should track the currently active channel to prevent writing a new value to the active channel. Writing to the active channel registers is the same as generating unbuffered output compares.
11.4.4 Pulse-Width Modulation (PWM) By using the toggle-on-overflow feature with an output compare channel, the TIMA can generate a PWM signal. The value in the TIMA counter modulo registers determines the period of the PWM signal. The channel pin toggles when the counter reaches the value in the TIMA counter modulo registers. The time between overflows is the period of the PWM signal.
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Timer Interface A (TIMA)
Advance Information 207
Timer Interface A (TIMA)
As Figure 11-3 shows, the output compare value in the TIMA channel registers determines the pulse width of the PWM signal. The time between overflow and output compare is the pulse width. Program the TIMA to clear the channel pin on output compare if the state of the PWM pulse is logic 1. Program the TIMA to set the pin if the state of the PWM pulse is logic 0.
OVERFLOW PERIOD
OVERFLOW
OVERFLOW
PULSE WIDTH PTEx/TCHx
OUTPUT COMPARE
OUTPUT COMPARE
OUTPUT COMPARE
Figure 11-3. PWM Period and Pulse Width The value in the TIMA counter modulo registers and the selected prescaler output determines the frequency of the PWM output. The frequency of an 8-bit PWM signal is variable in 256 increments. Writing $00FF (255) to the TIMA counter modulo registers produces a PWM period of 256 times the internal bus clock period if the prescaler select value is $000 (see 11.8.1 TIMA Status and Control Register). The value in the TIMA channel registers determines the pulse width of the PWM output. The pulse width of an 8-bit PWM signal is variable in 256 increments. Writing $0080 (128) to the TIMA channel registers produces a duty cycle of 128/256 or 50 percent.
Advance Information 208
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Timer Interface A (TIMA) MOTOROLA
Timer Interface A (TIMA) Functional Description
11.4.4.1 Unbuffered PWM Signal Generation Any output compare channel can generate unbuffered PWM pulses as described in 11.4.4 Pulse-Width Modulation (PWM). The pulses are unbuffered because changing the pulse width requires writing the new pulse width value over the value currently in the TIMA channel registers. An unsynchronized write to the TIMA channel registers to change a pulse width value could cause incorrect operation for up to two PWM periods. For example, writing a new value before the counter reaches the old value but after the counter reaches the new value prevents any compare during that PWM period. Also, using a TIMA overflow interrupt routine to write a new, smaller pulse width value may cause the compare to be missed. The TIMA may pass the new value before it is written to the TIMA channel registers. Use this method to synchronize unbuffered changes in the PWM pulse width on channel x: * When changing to a shorter pulse width, enable channel x output compare interrupts and write the new value in the output compare interrupt routine. The output compare interrupt occurs at the end of the current pulse. The interrupt routine has until the end of the PWM period to write the new value. When changing to a longer pulse width, enable TIMA overflow interrupts and write the new value in the TIMA overflow interrupt routine. The TIMA overflow interrupt occurs at the end of the current PWM period. Writing a larger value in an output compare interrupt routine (at the end of the current pulse) could cause two output compares to occur in the same PWM period.
*
NOTE:
In PWM signal generation, do not program the PWM channel to toggle on output compare. Toggling on output compare prevents reliable 0 percent duty cycle generation and removes the ability of the channel to self-correct in the event of software error or noise. Toggling on output compare also can cause incorrect PWM signal generation when changing the PWM pulse width to a new, much larger value.
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Timer Interface A (TIMA)
Advance Information 209
Timer Interface A (TIMA)
11.4.4.2 Buffered PWM Signal Generation Channels 0 and 1 can be linked to form a buffered PWM channel whose output appears on the PTE4/TCH0A pin. The TIMA channel registers of the linked pair alternately control the pulse width of the output. Setting the MS0B bit in TIMA channel 0 status and control register (TASC0) links channel 0 and channel 1. The TIMA channel 0 registers initially control the pulse width on the PTE4/TCH0A pin. Writing to the TIMA channel 1 registers enables the TIMA channel 1 registers to synchronously control the pulse width at the beginning of the next PWM period. At each subsequent overflow, the TIMA channel registers (0 or 1) that control the pulse width are the ones written to last. TASC0 controls and monitors the buffered PWM function, and TIMA channel 1 status and control register (TASC1) is unused. While the MS0B bit is set, the channel 1 pin, PTE5/TCH1A, is available as a general-purpose I/O pin. Channels 2 and 3 can be linked to form a buffered PWM channel whose output appears on the PTE6/TCH2A pin. The TIMA channel registers of the linked pair alternately control the pulse width of the output. Setting the MS2B bit in TIMA channel 2 status and control register (TASC2) links channel 2 and channel 3. The TIMA channel 2 registers initially control the pulse width on the PTE6/TCH2A pin. Writing to the TIMA channel 3 registers enables the TIMA channel 3 registers to synchronously control the pulse width at the beginning of the next PWM period. At each subsequent overflow, the TIMA channel registers (2 or 3) that control the pulse width are written to last. TASC2 controls and monitors the buffered PWM function, and TIMA channel 3 status and control register (TASC3) is unused. While the MS2B bit is set, the channel 3 pin, PTE7/TCH3A, is available as a general-purpose I/O pin.
NOTE:
In buffered PWM signal generation, do not write new pulse width values to the currently active channel registers. User software should track the currently active channel to prevent writing a new value to the active channel. Writing to the active channel registers is the same as generating unbuffered PWM signals.
Advance Information 210
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Timer Interface A (TIMA) MOTOROLA
Timer Interface A (TIMA) Functional Description
11.4.4.3 PWM Initialization To ensure correct operation when generating unbuffered or buffered PWM signals, use this initialization procedure: 1. In the TIMA status and control register (TASC): a. Stop the TIMA counter by setting the TIMA stop bit, TSTOP. b. Reset the TIMA counter and prescaler by setting the TIMA reset bit, TRST. 2. In the TIMA counter modulo registers (TAMODH-TAMODL), write the value for the required PWM period. 3. In the TIMA channel x registers (TACHxH-TACHxL), write the value for the required pulse width. 4. In TIMA channel x status and control register (TSCx): a. Write 0:1 (for unbuffered output compare or PWM signals) or 1:0 (for buffered output compare or PWM signals) to the mode select bits, MSxB-MSxA. (See Table 11-2.) b. Write 1 to the toggle-on-overflow bit, TOVx. c. Write 1:0 (to clear output on compare) or 1:1 (to set output on compare) to the edge/level select bits, ELSxB-ELSxA. The output action on compare must force the output to the complement of the pulse width level. (See Table 11-2.)
NOTE:
In PWM signal generation, do not program the PWM channel to toggle on output compare. Toggling on output compare prevents reliable 0 percent duty cycle generation and removes the ability of the channel to self-correct in the event of software error or noise. Toggling on output compare can also cause incorrect PWM signal generation when changing the PWM pulse width to a new, much larger value. 5. In the TIMA status control register (TASC), clear the TIMA stop bit, TSTOP. Setting MS0B links channels 0 and 1 and configures them for buffered PWM operation. The TIMA channel 0 registers (TACH0H-TACH0L) initially control the buffered PWM output. TIMA status control register 0 (TASC0) controls and monitors the PWM signal from the linked channels. MS0B takes priority over MS0A.
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Timer Interface A (TIMA)
Advance Information 211
Timer Interface A (TIMA)
Setting MS2B links channels 2 and 3 and configures them for buffered PWM operation. The TIMA channel 2 registers (TACH2H-TACH2L) initially control the buffered PWM output. TIMA status control register 2 (TASC2) controls and monitors the PWM signal from the linked channels. MS2B takes priority over MS2A. Clearing the toggle-on-overflow bit, TOVx, inhibits output toggles on TIMA overflows. Subsequent output compares try to force the output to a state it is already in and have no effect. The result is a 0 percent duty cycle output. Setting the channel x maximum duty cycle bit (CHxMAX) and setting the TOVx bit generates a 100 percent duty cycle output. (See 11.8.4 TIMA Channel Status and Control Registers.)
11.5 Interrupts
These TIMA sources can generate interrupt requests: * TIMA overflow flag (TOF) -- The timer overflow flag (TOF) bit is set when the TIMA counter reads the modulo value programmed in the TIMA counter modulo registers. The TIMA overflow interrupt enable bit, TOIE, enables TIMA overflow interrupt requests. TOF and TOIE are in the TIMA status and control registers. TIMA channel flags (CH3F-CH0F) -- The CHxF bit is set when an input capture or output compare occurs on channel x. Channel x TIMA CPU interrupt requests are controlled by the channel x interrupt enable bit, CHxIE.
*
11.6 Wait Mode
The WAIT instruction puts the MCU in low power-consumption standby mode. The TIMA remains active after the execution of a WAIT instruction. In wait mode, the TIMA registers are not accessible by the CPU. Any enabled CPU interrupt request from the TIMA can bring the MCU out of wait mode.
Advance Information 212
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Timer Interface A (TIMA) MOTOROLA
Timer Interface A (TIMA) I/O Signals
If TIMA functions are not required during wait mode, reduce power consumption by stopping the TIMA before executing the WAIT instruction.
11.7 I/O Signals
Port E shares five of its pins with the TIMA: * * PTE3/TCLKA is an external clock input to the TIMA prescaler. The four TIMA channel I/O pins are PTE4/TCH0A, PTE5/TCH1A, PTE6/TCH2A, and PTE7/TCH3A.
11.7.1 TIMA Clock Pin (PTE3/TCLKA) PTE3/TCLKA is an external clock input that can be the clock source for the TIMA counter instead of the prescaled internal bus clock. Select the PTE3/TCLKA input by writing logic 1s to the three prescaler select bits, PS[2:0]. See 11.8.1 TIMA Status and Control Register. The minimum TCLK pulse width, TCLKLMIN or TCLKHMIN, is: 1 ------------------------------------ + t SU bus frequency The maximum TCLK frequency is the least: 4 MHz or bus frequency / 2. PTE3/TCLKA is available as a general-purpose I/O pin or ADC channel when not used as the TIMA clock input. When the PTE3/TCLKA pin is the TIMA clock input, it is an input regardless of the state of the DDRE3 bit in data direction register E.
11.7.2 TIMA Channel I/O Pins (PTE4/TCH0A-PTE7/TCH3A) Each channel I/O pin is programmable independently as an input capture pin or an output compare pin. PTE2/TCH0 and PTE4/TCH2 can be configured as buffered output compare or buffered PWM pins.
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Timer Interface A (TIMA)
Advance Information 213
Timer Interface A (TIMA) 11.8 I/O Registers
These input/output (I/O) registers control and monitor TIMA operation: * * * * * TIMA status and control register (TASC) TIMA control registers (TACNTH-TACNTL) TIMA counter modulo registers (TAMODH-TAMODL) TIMA channel status and control registers (TASC0, TASC1, TASC2, and TASC3) TIMA channel registers (TACH0H-TACH0L, TACH1H-TACH1L, TACH2H-TACH2L, and TACH3H-TACH3L)
11.8.1 TIMA Status and Control Register The TIMA status and control register: * * * * * Enables TIMA overflow interrupts Flags TIMA overflows Stops the TIMA counter Resets the TIMA counter Prescales the TIMA counter clock
Address: $000E Bit 7 Read: Write: Reset: TOF TOIE 0 0 R 0 = Reserved 1 TSTOP TRST 0 R 0 0 0 0 6 5 4 0 3 0 PS2 PS1 PS0 2 1 Bit 0
Figure 11-4. TIMA Status and Control Register (TASC) TOF -- TIMA Overflow Flag This read/write flag is set when the TIMA counter reaches the modulo value programmed in the TIMA counter modulo registers. Clear TOF by reading the TIMA status and control register when TOF is set and then writing a logic 0 to TOF. If another TIMA overflow occurs before the clearing sequence is complete, then writing logic 0 to TOF has no effect. Therefore, a TOF interrupt request cannot be lost due to
Advance Information 214 MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Timer Interface A (TIMA) MOTOROLA
Timer Interface A (TIMA) I/O Registers
inadvertent clearing of TOF. Reset clears the TOF bit. Writing a logic 1 to TOF has no effect. 1 = TIMA counter has reached modulo value. 0 = TIMA counter has not reached modulo value. TOIE -- TIMA Overflow Interrupt Enable Bit This read/write bit enables TIMA overflow interrupts when the TOF bit becomes set. Reset clears the TOIE bit. 1 = TIMA overflow interrupts enabled 0 = TIMA overflow interrupts disabled TSTOP -- TIMA Stop Bit This read/write bit stops the TIMA counter. Counting resumes when TSTOP is cleared. Reset sets the TSTOP bit, stopping the TIMA counter until software clears the TSTOP bit. 1 = TIMA counter stopped 0 = TIMA counter active
NOTE:
Do not set the TSTOP bit before entering wait mode if the TIMA is required to exit wait mode. Also when the TSTOP bit is set and the timer is configured for input capture operation, input captures are inhibited until the TSTOP bit is cleared. TRST -- TIMA Reset Bit Setting this write-only bit resets the TIMA counter and the TIMA prescaler. Setting TRST has no effect on any other registers. Counting resumes from $0000. TRST is cleared automatically after the TIMA counter is reset and always reads as logic 0. Reset clears the TRST bit. 1 = Prescaler and TIMA counter cleared 0 = No effect
NOTE:
Setting the TSTOP and TRST bits simultaneously stops the TIMA counter at a value of $0000. PS[2:0] -- Prescaler Select Bits These read/write bits select either the PTD6/ATD14/TCLK pin or one of the seven prescaler outputs as the input to the TIMA counter as Table 11-1 shows. Reset clears the PS[2:0] bits.
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Timer Interface A (TIMA)
Advance Information 215
Timer Interface A (TIMA)
Table 11-1. Prescaler Selection
PS[2:0] 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111 TIMA Clock Source Internal bus clock /1 Internal bus clock / 2 Internal bus clock / 4 Internal bus clock / 8 Internal bus clock / 16 Internal bus clock / 32 Internal bus clock / 64 PTE3/TCLKA
11.8.2 TIMA Counter Registers The two read-only TIMA counter registers contain the high and low bytes of the value in the TIMA counter. Reading the high byte (TACNTH) latches the contents of the low byte (TACNTL) into a buffer. Subsequent reads of TACNTH do not affect the latched TACNTL value until TACNTL is read. Reset clears the TIMA counter registers. Setting the TIMA reset bit (TRST) also clears the TIMA counter registers.
NOTE:
If TACNTH is read during a break interrupt, be sure to unlatch TACNTL by reading TACNTL before exiting the break interrupt. Otherwise, TACNTL retains the value latched during the break.
Register Name and Address: TACNTH -- $000F Bit 7 Read: Write: Reset: Bit 15 R 0 6 Bit 14 R 0 5 Bit 13 R 0 4 Bit 12 R 0 3 Bit 11 R 0 2 Bit 10 R 0 1 Bit 9 R 0 Bit 0 Bit 8 R 0
Register Name and Address: TACNTL -- $0010 Bit 7 Read: Write: Reset: Bit 7 R 0 R 6 Bit 6 R 0 = Reserved 5 Bit 5 R 0 4 Bit 4 R 0 3 Bit 3 R 0 2 Bit 2 R 0 1 Bit 1 R 0 Bit 0 Bit 0 R 0
Figure 11-5. TIMA Counter Registers (TACNTH and TACNTL)
Advance Information 216
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Timer Interface A (TIMA) MOTOROLA
Timer Interface A (TIMA) I/O Registers
11.8.3 TIMA Counter Modulo Registers The read/write TIMA modulo registers contain the modulo value for the TIMA counter. When the TIMA counter reaches the modulo value, the overflow flag (TOF) becomes set, and the TIMA counter resumes counting from $0000 at the next timer clock. Writing to the high byte (TAMODH) inhibits the TOF bit and overflow interrupts until the low byte (TAMODL) is written. Reset sets the TIMA counter modulo registers.
Register Name and Address: TAMODH -- $0011 Bit 7 Read: Bit 15 Write: Reset: 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
Register Name and Address: TAMODL -- $0012 Bit 7 Read: Bit 7 Write: Reset: 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
Figure 11-6. TIMA Counter Modulo Registers (TAMODH and TAMODL)
NOTE:
Reset the TIMA counter before writing to the TIMA counter modulo registers.
11.8.4 TIMA Channel Status and Control Registers Each of the TIMA channel status and control registers: * * * * * Flags input captures and output compares Enables input capture and output compare interrupts Selects input capture, output compare, or PWM operation Selects high, low, or toggling output on output compare Selects rising edge, falling edge, or any edge as the active input capture trigger
Advance Information 217
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Timer Interface A (TIMA)
Timer Interface A (TIMA)
* * * Selects output toggling on TIMA overflow Selects 0 percent and 100 percent PWM duty cycle Selects buffered or unbuffered output compare/PWM operation
Register Name and Address: TASC0 -- $0013 Bit 7 Read: Write: Reset: CH0F CH0IE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 MS0B MS0A ELS0B ELS0A TOV0 CH0MAX 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
Register Name and Address: TASC1 -- $0016 Bit 7 Read: Write: Reset: CH1F CH1IE 0 0 0 R 0 0 0 0 0 0 6 5 0 MS1A ELS1B ELS1A TOV1 CH1MAX 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
Register Name and Address: TASC2 -- $0019 Bit 7 Read: Write: Reset: CH2F CH2IE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 MS2B MS2A ELS2B ELS2A TOV2 CH2MAX 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
Register Name and Address: TASC3 -- $001C Bit 7 Read: Write: Reset: CH3F CH3IE 0 0 R 0 = Reserved R 0 0 0 0 0 0 6 5 0 MS3A ELS3B ELS3A TOV3 CH3MAX 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
Figure 11-7. TIMA Channel Status and Control Registers (TASC0-TASC3)
Advance Information 218
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Timer Interface A (TIMA) MOTOROLA
Timer Interface A (TIMA) I/O Registers
CHxF -- Channel x Flag Bit When channel x is an input capture channel, this read/write bit is set when an active edge occurs on the channel x pin. When channel x is an output compare channel, CHxF is set when the value in the TIMA counter registers matches the value in the TIMA channel x registers. When CHxIE = 1, clear CHxF by reading TIMA channel x status and control register with CHxF set, and then writing a logic 0 to CHxF. If another interrupt request occurs before the clearing sequence is complete, then writing logic 0 to CHxF has no effect. Therefore, an interrupt request cannot be lost due to inadvertent clearing of CHxF. Reset clears the CHxF bit. Writing a logic 1 to CHxF has no effect. 1 = Input capture or output compare on channel x 0 = No input capture or output compare on channel x CHxIE -- Channel x Interrupt Enable Bit This read/write bit enables TIMA CPU interrupts on channel x. Reset clears the CHxIE bit. 1 = Channel x CPU interrupt requests enabled 0 = Channel x CPU interrupt requests disabled MSxB -- Mode Select Bit B This read/write bit selects buffered output compare/PWM operation. MSxB exists only in the TIMA channel 0 and TIMA channel 2 status and control registers. Setting MS0B disables the channel 1 status and control register and reverts TCH1A pin to general-purpose I/O. Setting MS2B disables the channel 3 status and control register and reverts TCH3A pin to general-purpose I/O. Reset clears the MSxB bit. 1 = Buffered output compare/PWM operation enabled 0 = Buffered output compare/PWM operation disabled MSxA -- Mode Select Bit A When ELSxB:A 00, this read/write bit selects either input capture operation or unbuffered output compare/PWM operation. See Table 11-2. 1 = Unbuffered output compare/PWM operation 0 = Input capture operation
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Timer Interface A (TIMA)
Advance Information 219
Timer Interface A (TIMA)
When ELSxB:A = 00, this read/write bit selects the initial output level of the TCHxA pin once PWM, input capture, or output compare operation is enabled. See Table 11-2. Reset clears the MSxA bit. 1 = Initial output level low 0 = Initial output level high
NOTE:
Before changing a channel function by writing to the MSxB or MSxA bit, set the TSTOP and TRST bits in the TIMA status and control register (TASC). ELSxB and ELSxA -- Edge/Level Select Bits When channel x is an input capture channel, these read/write bits control the active edge-sensing logic on channel x. When channel x is an output compare channel, ELSxB and ELSxA control the channel x output behavior when an output compare occurs. When ELSxB and ELSxA are both clear, channel x is not connected to port E, and pin PTEx/TCHxA is available as a general-purpose I/O pin. However, channel x is at a state determined by these bits and becomes transparent to the respective pin when PWM, input capture, or output compare mode is enabled. Table 11-2 shows how ELSxB and ELSxA work. Reset clears the ELSxB and ELSxA bits. Table 11-2. Mode, Edge, and Level Selection
MSxB:MSxA X0 X1 00 00 00 01 01 01 1X 1X 1X
ELSxB:ELSxA 00
Mode Output preset
Configuration Pin under port control; initialize timer output level high Pin under port control; initialize timer output level low Capture on rising edge only
00 01 10 11 01 10 11 01 10 11 Output compare or PWM Input capture
Capture on falling edge only Capture on rising or falling edge Toggle output on compare Clear output on compare Set output on compare Toggle output on compare Clear output on compare Set output on compare MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0
Buffered output compare or buffered PWM
Advance Information 220
Timer Interface A (TIMA)
MOTOROLA
Timer Interface A (TIMA) I/O Registers
NOTE:
Before enabling a TIMA channel register for input capture operation, make sure that the PTEx/TACHx pin is stable for at least two bus clocks. TOVx -- Toggle-On-Overflow Bit When channel x is an output compare channel, this read/write bit controls the behavior of the channel x output when the TIMA counter overflows. When channel x is an input capture channel, TOVx has no effect. Reset clears the TOVx bit. 1 = Channel x pin toggles on TIMA counter overflow. 0 = Channel x pin does not toggle on TIMA counter overflow.
NOTE:
When TOVx is set, a TIMA counter overflow takes precedence over a channel x output compare if both occur at the same time. CHxMAX -- Channel x Maximum Duty Cycle Bit When the TOVx is at logic 1 and clear output on compare is selected, setting the CHxMAX bit forces the duty cycle of buffered and unbuffered PWM signals to 100 percent. As Figure 11-8 shows, CHxMAX bit takes effect in the cycle after it is set or cleared. The output stays at 100 percent duty cycle level until the cycle after CHxMAX is cleared.
NOTE:
The PWM 0 percent duty cycle is defined as output low all of the time.To generate the 0 percent duty cycle select clear output on compare and then clear the TOVx bit (CHxMAX = 0). The PWM 100 percent duty cycle is defined as output high all of the time. To generate the 100 percent duty cycle, use the CHxMAX bit in the TSCx register.
OVERFLOW OVERFLOW OVERFLOW OVERFLOW OVERFLOW
PERIOD
PTEx/TCHx
OUTPUT COMPARE CHxMAX
OUTPUT COMPARE
OUTPUT COMPARE
OUTPUT COMPARE
TOVx
Figure 11-8. CHxMAX Latency
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Timer Interface A (TIMA) Advance Information 221
Timer Interface A (TIMA)
11.8.5 TIMA Channel Registers These read/write registers contain the captured TIMA counter value of the input capture function or the output compare value of the output compare function. The state of the TIMA channel registers after reset is unknown. In input capture mode (MSxB:MSxA = 0:0), reading the high byte of the TIMA channel x registers (TACHxH) inhibits input captures until the low byte (TACHxL) is read. In output compare mode (MSxB:MSxA 0:0), writing to the high byte of the TIMA channel x registers (TACHxH) inhibits output compares until the low byte (TACHxL) is written.
Register Name and Address: TACH0H -- $0014 Bit 7 Read: Bit 15 Write: Reset: Indeterminate after reset Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
Register Name and Address: TACH0L -- $0015 Bit 7 Read: Bit 7 Write: Reset: Indeterminate after reset Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
Register Name and Address: TACH1H -- $0017 Bit 7 Read: Bit 15 Write: Reset: Indeterminate after reset Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
Figure 11-9. TIMA Channel Registers (TACH0H/L-TACH3H/L)
Advance Information 222
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Timer Interface A (TIMA) MOTOROLA
Timer Interface A (TIMA) I/O Registers
Register Name and Address: TACH1L -- $0018 Bit 7 Read: Bit 7 Write: Reset: Indeterminate after reset Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
Register Name and Address: TACH2H -- $001A Bit 7 Read: Bit 15 Write: Reset: Indeterminate after reset Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
Register Name and Address: TACH2L -- $001B Bit 7 Read: Bit 7 Write: Reset: Indeterminate after reset Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
Register Name and Address: TACH3H -- $001D Bit 7 Read: Bit 15 Write: Reset: Indeterminate after reset Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
Register Name and Address: TACH3L -- $001E Bit 7 Read: Bit 7 Write: Reset: Indeterminate after reset Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
Figure 11-9. TIMA Channel Registers (TACH0H/L-TACH3H/L) (Continued)
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Timer Interface A (TIMA)
Advance Information 223
Timer Interface A (TIMA)
Advance Information 224
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Timer Interface A (TIMA) MOTOROLA
Advance Information -- MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32
Section 12. Timer Interface B (TIMB)
12.1 Contents
12.2 12.3 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
12.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 12.4.1 TIMB Counter Prescaler. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 12.4.2 Input Capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 12.4.3 Output Compare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230 12.4.3.1 Unbuffered Output Compare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 12.4.3.2 Buffered Output Compare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231 12.4.4 Pulse-Width Modulation (PWM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 12.4.4.1 Unbuffered PWM Signal Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 12.4.4.2 Buffered PWM Signal Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 12.4.4.3 PWM Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 12.5 12.6 Interrupts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Wait Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
12.7 I/O Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 12.7.1 TIMB Clock Pin (PTD4/ATD12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 12.7.2 TIMB Channel I/O Pins (PTE1/TCH0B-PTE2/TCH1B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 12.8 I/O Registers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 12.8.1 TIMB Status and Control Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 12.8.2 TIMB Counter Registers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 12.8.3 TIMB Counter Modulo Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 12.8.4 TIMB Channel Status and Control Registers . . . . . . . . . . . 242 12.8.5 TIMB Channel Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Timer Interface B (TIMB)
Advance Information 225
Timer Interface B (TIMB) 12.2 Introduction
This section describes the timer interface module B (TIMB). The TIMB is a 2-channel timer that provides: * * * Timing reference with input capture Output compare Pulse-width modulation functions
Figure 12-1 is a block diagram of the TIMB.
NOTE:
The TIMB module is not available in the 56-pin shrink dual in-line package (SDIP).
12.3 Features
Features of the TIMB include: * Two input capture/output compare channels: - Rising-edge, falling-edge, or any-edge input capture trigger - Set, clear, or toggle output compare action Buffered and unbuffered pulse-width modulation (PWM) signal generation Programmable TIMB clock input: - 7-frequency internal bus clock prescaler selection - External TIMB clock input (4-MHz maximum frequency) Free-running or modulo up-count operation Toggle any channel pin on overflow TIMB counter stop and reset bits
* *
* * *
12.4 Functional Description
Figure 12-1 shows the TIMB structure. The central component of the TIMB is the 16-bit TIMB counter that can operate as a free-running counter or a modulo up-counter. The TIMB counter provides the timing reference for the input capture and output compare functions. The TIMB counter modulo registers, TBMODH-TBMODL, control the modulo value of the TIMB counter. Software can read the TIMB counter value at any time without affecting the counting sequence.
Advance Information 226 MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Timer Interface B (TIMB) MOTOROLA
Timer Interface B (TIMB) Functional Description
PTE0/TCLKB INTERNAL BUS CLOCK TSTOP TRST 16-BIT COUNTER
TCLK PRESCALER SELECT PRESCALER
PS2
PS1
PS0
TOF TOIE
INTERRUPT LOGIC
16-BIT COMPARATOR TMODH:TMODL CHANNEL 0 16-BIT COMPARATOR TCH0H:TCH0L 16-BIT LATCH MS0A CHANNEL 1 16-BIT COMPARATOR TCH1H:TCH1L 16-BIT LATCH MS1A CH1IE CH1F ELS1B ELS1A MS0B CH0IE TOV1 CH1MAX CH0F ELS0B ELS0A TOV0 CH0MAX
PTE1 LOGIC INTERRUPT LOGIC
PTE1/TCH0B
PTE2 LOGIC INTERRUPT LOGIC
PTE2/TCH1B
Figure 12-1. TIMB Block Diagram The two TIMB channels are programmable independently as input capture or output compare channels.
NOTE:
The TIMB module is not available in the 56-pin SDIP.
12.4.1 TIMB Counter Prescaler The TIMB clock source can be one of the seven prescaler outputs or the TIMB clock pin, PTD4/ATD12. The prescaler generates seven clock rates from the internal bus clock. The prescaler select bits, PS[2:0], in the TIMB status and control register select the TIMB clock source.
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Timer Interface B (TIMB)
Advance Information 227
Timer Interface B (TIMB)
Addr. $0051
Register Name TIMB Status/Control Register Read: (TBSC) Write: See page 238. Reset:
Bit 7 TOF 0 0
6 TOIE 0 Bit 14 R 0 Bit 6 R 0 Bit 14 1 Bit 6 1 CH0IE 0 Bit 14
5 TSTOP 1 Bit 13 R 0 Bit 5 R 0 Bit 13 1 Bit 5 1 MS0B 0 Bit 13
4 0 TRST 0 Bit 12 R 0 Bit 4 R 0 Bit 12 1 Bit 4 1 MS0A 0 Bit 12
3 0 R 0 Bit 11 R 0 Bit 3 R 0 Bit 11 1 Bit 3 1 ELS0B 0 Bit 11
2 PS2 0 Bit 10 R 0 Bit 2 R 0 Bit 10 1 Bit 2 1 ELS0A 0 Bit 10
1 PS1 0 Bit 9 R 0 Bit 1 R 0 Bit 9 1 Bit 1 1 TOV0 0 Bit 9
Bit 0 PS0 0 Bit 8 R 0 Bit 0 R 0 Bit 8 1 Bit 0 1 CH0MAX 0 Bit 8
$0052
TIMB Counter Register High Read: Bit 15 R (TBCNTH) Write: See page 240. Reset: 0 TIMB Counter Register Low Read: (TBCNTL) Write: See page 240. Reset: Bit 7 R 0
$0053
TIMB Counter Modulo Register Read: Bit 15 $0054 High (TBMODH) Write: See page 241. Reset: 1 TIMB Counter Modulo Register Read: $0055 Low (TBMODL) Write: See page 241. Reset: Bit 7 1
TIMB Channel 0 Status/Control Read: CH0F $0056 Register Write: 0 (TBSC0) See page 242. Reset: 0 TIMB Channel 0 Register High Read: Bit 15 $0057 (TBCH0H) Write: See page 246. Reset: TIMB Channel 0 Register Low Read: $0058 (TBCH0L) Write: See page 246. Reset: Bit 7
Indeterminate after reset Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Indeterminate after reset CH1IE 0 Bit 14 0 R 0 Bit 13 MS1A 0 Bit 12 ELS1B 0 Bit 11 ELS1A 0 Bit 10 TOV1 0 Bit 9 CH1MAX 0 Bit 8
TIMB Channel 1 Status/Control Read: CH1F $0059 Register Write: 0 (TBSC1) See page 242. Reset: 0 TIMB Channel 1 Register High Read: Bit 15 $005A (TBCH1H) Write: See page 246. Reset: TIMB Channel 1 Register Low Read: $005B (TBCH1L) Write: See page 246. Reset: Bit 7
Indeterminate after reset Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Indeterminate after reset R = Reserved
Figure 12-2. TIMB I/O Register Summary
Advance Information 228
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Timer Interface B (TIMB) MOTOROLA
Timer Interface B (TIMB) Functional Description
12.4.2 Input Capture An input capture function has three basic parts: 1. Edge select logic 2. Input capture latch 3. 16-bit counter Two 8-bit registers, which make up the 16-bit input capture register, are used to latch the value of the free-running counter after the corresponding input capture edge detector senses a defined transition. The polarity of the active edge is programmable. The level transition which triggers the counter transfer is defined by the corresponding input edge bits (ELSxB and ELSxA in TBSC0-TBSC1 control registers with x referring to the active channel number). When an active edge occurs on the pin of an input capture channel, the TIMB latches the contents of the TIMB counter into the TIMB channel registers, TCHxH-TCHxL. Input captures can generate TIMB CPU interrupt requests. Software can determine that an input capture event has occurred by enabling input capture interrupts or by polling the status flag bit. The free-running counter contents are transferred to the TIMB channel status and control register (TBCHxH-TBCHxL, see 12.8.5 TIMB Channel Registers) on each proper signal transition regardless of whether the TIMB channel flag (CH0F-CH1F in TBSC0-TBSC1 registers) is set or clear. When the status flag is set, a CPU interrupt is generated if enabled. The value of the count latched or "captured" is the time of the event. Because this value is stored in the input capture register two bus cycles after the actual event occurs, user software can respond to this event at a later time and determine the actual time of the event. However, this must be done prior to another input capture on the same pin; otherwise, the previous time value will be lost. By recording the times for successive edges on an incoming signal, software can determine the period and/or pulse width of the signal. To measure a period, two successive edges of the same polarity are captured. To measure a pulse width, two alternate polarity edges are captured. Software should track the overflows at the 16-bit module counter to extend its range.
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Timer Interface B (TIMB)
Advance Information 229
Timer Interface B (TIMB)
Another use for the input capture function is to establish a time reference. In this case, an input capture function is used in conjunction with an output compare function. For example, to activate an output signal a specified number of clock cycles after detecting an input event (edge), use the input capture function to record the time at which the edge occurred. A number corresponding to the desired delay is added to this captured value and stored to an output compare register (see 12.8.5 TIMB Channel Registers). Because both input captures and output compares are referenced to the same 16-bit modulo counter, the delay can be controlled to the resolution of the counter independent of software latencies. Reset does not affect the contents of the input capture channel register (TBCHxH-TBCHxL).
12.4.3 Output Compare With the output compare function, the TIMB can generate a periodic pulse with a programmable polarity, duration, and frequency. When the counter reaches the value in the registers of an output compare channel, the TIMB can set, clear, or toggle the channel pin. Output compares can generate TIMB CPU interrupt requests. 12.4.3.1 Unbuffered Output Compare Any output compare channel can generate unbuffered output compare pulses as described in 12.4.3 Output Compare. The pulses are unbuffered because changing the output compare value requires writing the new value over the old value currently in the TIMB channel registers. An unsynchronized write to the TIMB channel registers to change an output compare value could cause incorrect operation for up to two counter overflow periods. For example, writing a new value before the counter reaches the old value but after the counter reaches the new value prevents any compare during that counter overflow period. Also, using a TIMB overflow interrupt routine to write a new, smaller output compare value may cause the compare to be missed. The TIMB may pass the new value before it is written.
Advance Information 230
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Timer Interface B (TIMB) MOTOROLA
Timer Interface B (TIMB) Functional Description
Use this method to synchronize unbuffered changes in the output compare value on channel x: * When changing to a smaller value, enable channel x output compare interrupts and write the new value in the output compare interrupt routine. The output compare interrupt occurs at the end of the current output compare pulse. The interrupt routine has until the end of the counter overflow period to write the new value. When changing to a larger output compare value, enable TIMB overflow interrupts and write the new value in the TIMB overflow interrupt routine. The TIMB overflow interrupt occurs at the end of the current counter overflow period. Writing a larger value in an output compare interrupt routine (at the end of the current pulse) could cause two output compares to occur in the same counter overflow period.
*
12.4.3.2 Buffered Output Compare Channels 0 and 1 can be linked to form a buffered output compare channel whose output appears on the PTE1/TCH0B pin. The TIMB channel registers of the linked pair alternately control the output. Setting the MS0B bit in TIMB channel 0 status and control register (TBSC0) links channel 0 and channel 1. The output compare value in the TIMB channel 0 registers initially controls the output on the PTE1/TCH0B pin. Writing to the TIMB channel 1 registers enables the TIMB channel 1 registers to synchronously control the output after the TIMB overflows. At each subsequent overflow, the TIMB channel registers (0 or 1) that control the output are the ones written to last. TSC0 controls and monitors the buffered output compare function, and TIMB channel 1 status and control register (TBSC1) is unused. While the MS0B bit is set, the channel 1 pin, PTE2/TCH1B, is available as a general-purpose I/O pin.
NOTE:
In buffered output compare operation, do not write new output compare values to the currently active channel registers. User software should track the currently active channel to prevent writing a new value to the active channel. Writing to the active channel registers is the same as generating unbuffered output compares.
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Timer Interface B (TIMB)
Advance Information 231
Timer Interface B (TIMB)
12.4.4 Pulse-Width Modulation (PWM) By using the toggle-on-overflow feature with an output compare channel, the TIMB can generate a PWM signal. The value in the TIMB counter modulo registers determines the period of the PWM signal. The channel pin toggles when the counter reaches the value in the TIMB counter modulo registers. The time between overflows is the period of the PWM signal. As Figure 12-3 shows, the output compare value in the TIMB channel registers determines the pulse width of the PWM signal. The time between overflow and output compare is the pulse width. Program the TIMB to clear the channel pin on output compare if the state of the PWM pulse is logic 1. Program the TIMB to set the pin if the state of the PWM pulse is logic 0.
OVERFLOW PERIOD
OVERFLOW
OVERFLOW
PULSE WIDTH PTEx/TCHx
OUTPUT COMPARE
OUTPUT COMPARE
OUTPUT COMPARE
Figure 12-3. PWM Period and Pulse Width The value in the TIMB counter modulo registers and the selected prescaler output determines the frequency of the PWM output. The frequency of an 8-bit PWM signal is variable in 256 increments. Writing $00FF (255) to the TIMB counter modulo registers produces a PWM period of 256 times the internal bus clock period if the prescaler select value is $000 (see 12.8.1 TIMB Status and Control Register). The value in the TIMB channel registers determines the pulse width of the PWM output. The pulse width of an 8-bit PWM signal is variable in 256 increments. Writing $0080 (128) to the TIMB channel registers produces a duty cycle of 128/256 or 50 percent.
Advance Information 232 MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Timer Interface B (TIMB) MOTOROLA
Timer Interface B (TIMB) Functional Description
12.4.4.1 Unbuffered PWM Signal Generation Any output compare channel can generate unbuffered PWM pulses as described in 12.4.4 Pulse-Width Modulation (PWM). The pulses are unbuffered because changing the pulse width requires writing the new pulse width value over the value currently in the TIMB channel registers. An unsynchronized write to the TIMB channel registers to change a pulse width value could cause incorrect operation for up to two PWM periods. For example, writing a new value before the counter reaches the old value but after the counter reaches the new value prevents any compare during that PWM period. Also, using a TIMB overflow interrupt routine to write a new, smaller pulse width value may cause the compare to be missed. The TIMB may pass the new value before it is written to the TIMB channel registers. Use this method to synchronize unbuffered changes in the PWM pulse width on channel x: * When changing to a shorter pulse width, enable channel x output compare interrupts and write the new value in the output compare interrupt routine. The output compare interrupt occurs at the end of the current pulse. The interrupt routine has until the end of the PWM period to write the new value. When changing to a longer pulse width, enable TIMB overflow interrupts and write the new value in the TIMB overflow interrupt routine. The TIMB overflow interrupt occurs at the end of the current PWM period. Writing a larger value in an output compare interrupt routine (at the end of the current pulse) could cause two output compares to occur in the same PWM period.
*
NOTE:
In PWM signal generation, do not program the PWM channel to toggle on output compare. Toggling on output compare prevents reliable 0 percent duty cycle generation and removes the ability of the channel to self-correct in the event of software error or noise. Toggling on output compare also can cause incorrect PWM signal generation when changing the PWM pulse width to a new, much larger value.
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Timer Interface B (TIMB)
Advance Information 233
Timer Interface B (TIMB)
12.4.4.2 Buffered PWM Signal Generation Channels 0 and 1 can be linked to form a buffered PWM channel whose output appears on the PTE1/TCH0B pin. The TIMB channel registers of the linked pair alternately control the pulse width of the output. Setting the MS0B bit in TIMB channel 0 status and control register (TBSC0) links channel 0 and channel 1. The TIMB channel 0 registers initially control the pulse width on the PTE1/TCH0B pin. Writing to the TIMB channel 1 registers enables the TIMB channel 1 registers to synchronously control the pulse width at the beginning of the next PWM period. At each subsequent overflow, the TIMB channel registers (0 or 1) that control the pulse width are the ones written to last. TBSC0 controls and monitors the buffered PWM function, and TIMB channel 1 status and control register (TBSC1) is unused. While the MS0B bit is set, the channel 1 pin, PTE2/TCH1B, is available as a general-purpose I/O pin.
NOTE:
In buffered PWM signal generation, do not write new pulse width values to the currently active channel registers. User software should track the currently active channel to prevent writing a new value to the active channel. Writing to the active channel registers is the same as generating unbuffered PWM signals.
12.4.4.3 PWM Initialization To ensure correct operation when generating unbuffered or buffered PWM signals, use this initialization procedure: 1. In the TIMB status and control register (TBSC): a. Stop the TIMB counter by setting the TIMB stop bit, TSTOP. b. Reset the TIMB counter and prescaler by setting the TIMB reset bit, TRST. 2. In the TIMB counter modulo registers (TBMODH-TBMODL), write the value for the required PWM period. 3. In the TIMB channel x registers (TBCHxH-TBCHxL), write the value for the required pulse width.
Advance Information 234
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Timer Interface B (TIMB) MOTOROLA
Timer Interface B (TIMB) Functional Description
4. In TIMB channel x status and control register (TBSCx): a. Write 0:1 (for unbuffered output compare or PWM signals) or 1:0 (for buffered output compare or PWM signals) to the mode select bits, MSxB-MSxA. (See Table 12-2.) b. Write 1 to the toggle-on-overflow bit, TOVx. c. Write 1:0 (to clear output on compare) or 1:1 (to set output on compare) to the edge/level select bits, ELSxB-ELSxA. The output action on compare must force the output to the complement of the pulse width level. (See Table 12-2.)
NOTE:
In PWM signal generation, do not program the PWM channel to toggle on output compare. Toggling on output compare prevents reliable 0 percent duty cycle generation and removes the ability of the channel to self-correct in the event of software error or noise. Toggling on output compare can also cause incorrect PWM signal generation when changing the PWM pulse width to a new, much larger value. 5. In the TIMB status control register (TBSC), clear the TIMB stop bit, TSTOP. Setting MS0B links channels 0 and 1 and configures them for buffered PWM operation. The TIMB channel 0 registers (TBCH0H-TBCH0L) initially control the buffered PWM output. TIMB status control register 0 (TBSC0) controls and monitors the PWM signal from the linked channels. MS0B takes priority over MS0A. Clearing the toggle-on-overflow bit, TOVx, inhibits output toggles on TIMB overflows. Subsequent output compares try to force the output to a state it is already in and have no effect. The result is a 0 percent duty cycle output. Setting the channel x maximum duty cycle bit (CHxMAX) and setting the TOVx bit generates a 100 percent duty cycle output. (See 12.8.4 TIMB Channel Status and Control Registers.)
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Timer Interface B (TIMB)
Advance Information 235
Timer Interface B (TIMB) 12.5 Interrupts
These TIMB sources can generate interrupt requests: * TIMB overflow flag (TOF) -- The timer overflow flag (TOF) bit is set when the TIMB counter reaches the modulo value programmed in the TIMB counter modulo registers. The TIMB overflow interrupt enable bit, TOIE, enables TIMB overflow interrupt requests. TOF and TOIE are in the TIMB status and control registers. TIMB channel flags (CH1F-CH0F) -- The CHxF bit is set when an input capture or output compare occurs on channel x. Channel x TIMB CPU interrupt requests are controlled by the channel x interrupt enable bit, CHxIE.
*
12.6 Wait Mode
The WAIT instruction puts the MCU in low-power standby mode. The TIMB remains active after the execution of a WAIT instruction. In wait mode, the TIMB registers are not accessible by the CPU. Any enabled CPU interrupt request from the TIMB can bring the MCU out of wait mode. If TIMB functions are not required during wait mode, reduce power consumption by stopping the TIMB before executing the WAIT instruction.
12.7 I/O Signals
Port E shares three of its pins with the TIMB: * * PTD4/ATD12 is an external clock input to the TIMB prescaler. The two TIMB channel I/O pins are PTE1/TCH0B and PTE2/TCH1B.
Advance Information 236
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Timer Interface B (TIMB) MOTOROLA
Timer Interface B (TIMB) I/O Registers
12.7.1 TIMB Clock Pin (PTD4/ATD12) PTD4/ATD12 is an external clock input that can be the clock source for the TIMB counter instead of the prescaled internal bus clock. Select the PTD4/ATD12 input by writing logic 1s to the three prescaler select bits, PS[2:0]. See 12.8.1 TIMB Status and Control Register. The minimum TCLK pulse width, TCLKLMIN or TCLKHMIN, is: 1 ------------------------------------ + t SU bus frequency The maximum TCLK frequency is the least: 4 MHz or bus frequency / 2. PTD4/ATD12 is available as a general-purpose I/O pin or ADC channel when not used as the TIMB clock input. When the PTD4/ATD12 pin is the TIMB clock input, it is an input regardless of the state of the DDRE0 bit in data direction register E.
12.7.2 TIMB Channel I/O Pins (PTE1/TCH0B-PTE2/TCH1B) Each channel I/O pin is programmable independently as an input capture pin or an output compare pin. PTE1/TCH0B and PTE2/TCH1B can be configured as buffered output compare or buffered PWM pins.
12.8 I/O Registers
These input/output (I/O) registers control and monitor TIMB operation: * * * * * TIMB status and control register (TBSC) TIMB control registers (TBCNTH-TBCNTL) TIMB counter modulo registers (TBMODH-TBMODL) TIMB channel status and control registers (TBSC0 and TBSC1) TIMB channel registers (TBCH0H-TBCH0L and TBCH1H-TBCH1L)
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Timer Interface B (TIMB)
Advance Information 237
Timer Interface B (TIMB)
12.8.1 TIMB Status and Control Register The TIMB status and control register: * * * * *
Address:
Enables TIMB overflow interrupts Flags TIMB overflows Stops the TIMB counter Resets the TIMB counter Prescales the TIMB counter clock
$0051 Bit 7 6 TOIE 5 TSTOP TRST 0 = Reserved 1 0 R 0 0 0 0 4 0 3 0 PS2 PS1 PS0 2 1 Bit 0
Read: Write: Reset:
TOF 0 0 R
Figure 12-4. TIMB Status and Control Register (TBSC) TOF -- TIMB Overflow Flag This read/write flag is set when the TIMB counter reaches the modulo value programmed in the TIMB counter modulo registers. Clear TOF by reading the TIMB status and control register when TOF is set and then writing a logic 0 to TOF. If another TIMB overflow occurs before the clearing sequence is complete, then writing logic 0 to TOF has no effect. Therefore, a TOF interrupt request cannot be lost due to inadvertent clearing of TOF. Reset clears the TOF bit. Writing a logic 1 to TOF has no effect. 1 = TIMB counter has reached modulo value. 0 = TIMB counter has not reached modulo value. TOIE -- TIMB Overflow Interrupt Enable Bit This read/write bit enables TIMB overflow interrupts when the TOF bit becomes set. Reset clears the TOIE bit. 1 = TIMB overflow interrupts enabled 0 = TIMB overflow interrupts disabled
Advance Information 238
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Timer Interface B (TIMB) MOTOROLA
Timer Interface B (TIMB) I/O Registers
TSTOP -- TIMB Stop Bit This read/write bit stops the TIMB counter. Counting resumes when TSTOP is cleared. Reset sets the TSTOP bit, stopping the TIMB counter until software clears the TSTOP bit. 1 = TIMB counter stopped 0 = TIMB counter active
NOTE:
Do not set the TSTOP bit before entering wait mode if the TIMB is required to exit wait mode. Also, when the TSTOP bit is set and the timer is configured for input capture operation, input captures are inhibited until TSTOP is cleared. TRST -- TIMB Reset Bit Setting this write-only bit resets the TIMB counter and the TIMB prescaler. Setting TRST has no effect on any other registers. Counting resumes from $0000. TRST is cleared automatically after the TIMB counter is reset and always reads as logic 0. Reset clears the TRST bit. 1 = Prescaler and TIMB counter cleared 0 = No effect
NOTE:
Setting the TSTOP and TRST bits simultaneously stops the TIMB counter at a value of $0000. PS[2:0] -- Prescaler Select Bits These read/write bits select either the PTD4/ATD12 pin or one of the seven prescaler outputs as the input to the TIMB counter as Table 12-1 shows. Reset clears the PS[2:0] bits. Table 12-1. Prescaler Selection
PS[2:0] 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111 TIMB Clock Source Internal bus clock /1 Internal bus clock / 2 Internal bus clock / 4 Internal bus clock / 8 Internal bus clock / 16 Internal bus clock / 32 Internal bus clock / 64 PTE0/TCLKB Advance Information 239
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Timer Interface B (TIMB)
Timer Interface B (TIMB)
12.8.2 TIMB Counter Registers The two read-only TIMB counter registers contain the high and low bytes of the value in the TIMB counter. Reading the high byte (TBCNTH) latches the contents of the low byte (TBCNTL) into a buffer. Subsequent reads of TBCNTH do not affect the latched TBCNTL value until TBCNTL is read. Reset clears the TIMB counter registers. Setting the TIMB reset bit (TRST) also clears the TIMB counter registers.
NOTE:
If TBCNTH is read during a break interrupt, be sure to unlatch TBCNTL by reading TBCNTL before exiting the break interrupt. Otherwise, TBCNTL retains the value latched during the break.
Register Name and Address: TBCNTH -- $0052 Bit 7 Read: Write: Reset: Bit 15 R 0 6 Bit 14 R 0 5 Bit 13 R 0 4 Bit 12 R 0 3 Bit 11 R 0 2 Bit 10 R 0 1 Bit 9 R 0 Bit 0 Bit 8 R 0
Register Name and Address: TBCNTL -- $0053 Bit 7 Read: Write: Reset: Bit 7 R 0 R 6 Bit 6 R 0 = Reserved 5 Bit 5 R 0 4 Bit 4 R 0 3 Bit 3 R 0 2 Bit 2 R 0 1 Bit 1 R 0 Bit 0 Bit 0 R 0
Figure 12-5. TIMB Counter Registers (TBCNTH and TBCNTL)
Advance Information 240
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Timer Interface B (TIMB) MOTOROLA
Timer Interface B (TIMB) I/O Registers
12.8.3 TIMB Counter Modulo Registers The read/write TIMB modulo registers contain the modulo value for the TIMB counter. When the TIMB counter reaches the modulo value, the overflow flag (TOF) becomes set, and the TIMB counter resumes counting from $0000 at the next timer clock. Writing to the high byte (TBMODH) inhibits the TOF bit and overflow interrupts until the low byte (TBMODL) is written. Reset sets the TIMB counter modulo registers.
Register Name and Address: TBMODH -- $0054 Bit 7 Read: Bit 15 Write: Reset: 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
Register Name and Address: TBMODL -- $0055 Bit 7 Read: Bit 7 Write: Reset: 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
Figure 12-6. TIMB Counter Modulo Registers (TBMODH and TBMODL)
NOTE:
Reset the TIMB counter before writing to the TIMB counter modulo registers.
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Timer Interface B (TIMB)
Advance Information 241
Timer Interface B (TIMB)
12.8.4 TIMB Channel Status and Control Registers Each of the TIMB channel status and control registers: * * * * * * * * Flags input captures and output compares Enables input capture and output compare interrupts Selects input capture, output compare, or PWM operation Selects high, low, or toggling output on output compare Selects rising edge, falling edge, or any edge as the active input capture trigger Selects output toggling on TIMB overflow Selects 0 percent and 100 percent PWM duty cycle Selects buffered or unbuffered output compare/PWM operation
Register Name and Address: TBSC0 -- $0056 Bit 7 Read: Write: Reset: CH0F CH0IE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 MS0B MS0A ELS0B ELS0A TOV0 CH0MAX 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
Register Name and Address: TBSC1 -- $0059 Bit 7 Read: Write: Reset: CH1F CH1IE 0 0 R 0 = Reserved R 0 0 0 0 0 0 6 5 0 MS1A ELS1B ELS1A TOV1 CH1MAX 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
Figure 12-7. TIMB Channel Status and Control Registers (TBSC0-TBSC1)
Advance Information 242
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Timer Interface B (TIMB) MOTOROLA
Timer Interface B (TIMB) I/O Registers
CHxF -- Channel x Flag When channel x is an input capture channel, this read/write bit is set when an active edge occurs on the channel x pin. When channel x is an output compare channel, CHxF is set when the value in the TIMB counter registers matches the value in the TIMB channel x registers. When CHxIE = 1, clear CHxF by reading TIMB channel x status and control register with CHxF set, and then writing a logic 0 to CHxF. If another interrupt request occurs before the clearing sequence is complete, then writing logic 0 to CHxF has no effect. Therefore, an interrupt request cannot be lost due to inadvertent clearing of CHxF. Reset clears the CHxF bit. Writing a logic 1 to CHxF has no effect. 1 = Input capture or output compare on channel x 0 = No input capture or output compare on channel x CHxIE -- Channel x Interrupt Enable Bit This read/write bit enables TIMB CPU interrupts on channel x. Reset clears the CHxIE bit. 1 = Channel x CPU interrupt requests enabled 0 = Channel x CPU interrupt requests disabled MSxB -- Mode Select Bit B This read/write bit selects buffered output compare/PWM operation. MSxB exists only in the TIMB channel 0. Setting MS0B disables the channel 1 status and control register and reverts TCH1B to general-purpose I/O. Reset clears the MSxB bit. 1 = Buffered output compare/PWM operation enabled 0 = Buffered output compare/PWM operation disabled MSxA -- Mode Select Bit A When ELSxB:A 00, this read/write bit selects either input capture operation or unbuffered output compare/PWM operation. See Table 12-2. 1 = Unbuffered output compare/PWM operation 0 = Input capture operation
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Timer Interface B (TIMB)
Advance Information 243
Timer Interface B (TIMB)
When ELSxB:A = 00, this read/write bit selects the initial output level of the TCHx pin once PWM, input capture, or output compare operation is enabled. See Table 12-2. Reset clears the MSxA bit. 1 = Initial output level low 0 = Initial output level high
NOTE:
Before changing a channel function by writing to the MSxB or MSxA bit, set the TSTOP and TRST bits in the TIMB status and control register (TBSC). ELSxB and ELSxA -- Edge/Level Select Bits When channel x is an input capture channel, these read/write bits control the active edge-sensing logic on channel x. When channel x is an output compare channel, ELSxB and ELSxA control the channel x output behavior when an output compare occurs. When ELSxB and ELSxA are both clear, channel x is not connected to port E, and pin PTEx/TCHxB is available as a general-purpose I/O pin. However, channel x is at a state determined by these bits and becomes transparent to the respective pin when PWM, input capture, or output compare mode is enabled. Table 12-2 shows how ELSxB and ELSxA work. Reset clears the ELSxB and ELSxA bits.
NOTE:
Before enabling a TIMB channel register for input capture operation, make sure that the PTEx/TBCHx pin is stable for at least two bus clocks. TOVx -- Toggle-On-Overflow Bit When channel x is an output compare channel, this read/write bit controls the behavior of the channel x output when the TIMB counter overflows. When channel x is an input capture channel, TOVx has no effect. Reset clears the TOVx bit. 1 = Channel x pin toggles on TIMB counter overflow. 0 = Channel x pin does not toggle on TIMB counter overflow.
Advance Information 244
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Timer Interface B (TIMB) MOTOROLA
Timer Interface B (TIMB) I/O Registers
Table 12-2. Mode, Edge, and Level Selection
MSxB:MSxA X0 X1 00 00 00 01 01 01 1X 1X 1X ELSxB:ELSxA 00 Output preset 00 01 10 11 01 10 11 01 10 11 Input capture Pin under port control; initialize timer output level low Capture on rising edge only Capture on falling edge only Capture on rising or falling edge Toggle output on compare Output compare Clear output on compare or PWM Set output on compare Buffered output compare or buffered PWM Toggle output on compare Clear output on compare Set output on compare Mode Configuration Pin under port control; initialize timer output level high
NOTE:
When TOVx is set, a TIMB counter overflow takes precedence over a channel x output compare if both occur at the same time. CHxMAX -- Channel x Maximum Duty Cycle Bit When the TOVx is at logic 1 and clear output on compare is selected, setting the CHxMAX bit forces the duty cycle of buffered and unbuffered PWM signals to 100 percent. As Figure 12-8 shows, CHxMAX bit takes effect in the cycle after it is set or cleared. The output stays at 100 percent duty cycle level until the cycle after CHxMAX is cleared.
NOTE:
The PWM 0 percent duty cycle is defined as output low all of the time.To generate the 0 percent duty cycle select clear output on compare and then clear the TOVx bit (CHxMAX = 0). The PWM 100 percent duty cycle is defined as output high all of the time. To generate the 100 percent duty cycle, use the CHxMAX bit in the TSCx register.
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Timer Interface B (TIMB)
Advance Information 245
Timer Interface B (TIMB)
OVERFLOW
OVERFLOW
OVERFLOW
OVERFLOW
OVERFLOW
PERIOD
PTEx/TCHx
OUTPUT COMPARE CHxMAX
OUTPUT COMPARE
OUTPUT COMPARE
OUTPUT COMPARE
TOVx
Figure 12-8. CHxMAX Latency
12.8.5 TIMB Channel Registers These read/write registers contain the captured TIMB counter value of the input capture function or the output compare value of the output compare function. The state of the TIMB channel registers after reset is unknown. In input capture mode (MSxB-MSxA = 0:0), reading the high byte of the TIMB channel x registers (TBCHxH) inhibits input captures until the low byte (TBCHxL) is read. In output compare mode (MSxB-MSxA 0:0), writing to the high byte of the TIMB channel x registers (TBCHxH) inhibits output compares until the low byte (TBCHxL) is written.
Register Name and Address: TBCH0H -- $0057 Bit 7 Read: Bit 15 Write: Reset: Indeterminate after reset Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
Figure 12-9. TIMB Channel Registers (TBCH0H/L-TBCH1H/L) (Sheet 1 of 2)
Advance Information 246
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Timer Interface B (TIMB) MOTOROLA
Timer Interface B (TIMB) I/O Registers
Register Name and Address: TBCH0L -- $0058 Bit 7 Read: Bit 7 Write: Reset: Indeterminate after reset Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
Register Name and Address: TBCH1H -- $005A Bit 7 Read: Bit 15 Write: Reset: Indeterminate after reset Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
Register Name and Address: TBCH1L -- $005B Bit 7 Read: Bit 7 Write: Reset: Indeterminate after reset Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
Figure 12-9. TIMB Channel Registers (TBCH0H/L-TBCH1H/L) (Sheet 2 of 2)
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Timer Interface B (TIMB)
Advance Information 247
Timer Interface B (TIMB)
Advance Information 248
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Timer Interface B (TIMB) MOTOROLA
Advance Information -- MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32
Section 13. Serial Peripheral Interface Module (SPI)
13.1 Contents
13.2 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 13.3 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 13.4 Pin Name Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 13.5 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 13.5.1 Master Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 13.5.2 Slave Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 13.6 Transmission Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 13.6.1 Clock Phase and Polarity Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255 13.6.2 Transmission Format When CPHA = 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 13.6.3 Transmission Format When CPHA = 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 13.6.4 Transmission Initiation Latency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 13.7 Error Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 13.7.1 Overflow Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 13.7.2 Mode Fault Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262 13.8 Interrupts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 13.9 Resetting the SPI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 13.10 Queuing Transmission Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 13.11 Low-Power Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 13.12 I/O Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 13.12.1 MISO (Master In/Slave Out) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 13.12.2 MOSI (Master Out/Slave In) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 13.12.3 SPSCK (Serial Clock). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 13.12.4 SS (Slave Select) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 13.12.5 VSS (Clock Ground) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 13.13 I/O Registers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 13.13.1 SPI Control Register. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 13.13.2 SPI Status and Control Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 13.13.3 SPI Data Register. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Serial Peripheral Interface Module (SPI) Advance Information 249
Serial Peripheral Interface Module (SPI) 13.2 Introduction
The serial peripheral interface (SPI) module allows full-duplex, synchronous, serial communications with peripheral devices.
13.3 Features
Features of the SPI module include: * * * * * * * Full-duplex operation Master and slave modes Double-buffered operation with separate transmit and receive registers Four master mode frequencies (maximum = bus frequency / 2) Maximum slave mode frequency = bus frequency Serial clock with programmable polarity and phase Two separately enabled interrupts with central processor unit (CPU) service: - SPRF (SPI receiver full) - SPTE (SPI transmitter empty) Mode fault error flag with CPU interrupt capability Overflow error flag with CPU interrupt capability Programmable wired-OR mode I2C (inter-integrated circuit) compatibility
* * * *
13.4 Pin Name Conventions
The generic names of the SPI input/output (I/O) pins are: * * * * SS, slave select SPSCK, SPI serial clock MOSI, master out/slave in MISO, master in/slave out
Advance Information 250
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Serial Peripheral Interface Module (SPI) MOTOROLA
Serial Peripheral Interface Module (SPI) Functional Description
SPI pins are shared by parallel I/O ports or have alternate functions. The full name of an SPI pin reflects the name of the shared port pin or the name of an alternate pin function. The generic pin names appear in the text that follows. Table 13-1 shows the full names of the SPI I/O pins. Table 13-1. Pin Name Conventions
Generic Pin Names: Full Pin Names: MISO PTF3/MISO MOSI PTF2/MOSI SPSCK PTF0/SPSCK SS PTF1/SS
13.5 Functional Description
Figure 13-1 shows the structure of the SPI module and Figure 13-2 shows the locations and contents of the SPI I/O registers. The SPI module allows full-duplex, synchronous, serial communication between the microcontroller unit (MCU) and peripheral devices, including other MCUs. Software can poll the SPI status flags or SPI operation can be interrupt-driven. All SPI interrupts can be serviced by the CPU.
13.5.1 Master Mode The SPI operates in master mode when the SPI master bit, SPMSTR, is set.
NOTE:
Configure the SPI modules as master or slave before enabling them. Enable the master SPI before enabling the slave SPI. Disable the slave SPI before disabling the master SPI. See 13.13.1 SPI Control Register. Only a master SPI module can initiate transmissions. Software begins the transmission from a master SPI module by writing to the SPI data register. If the shift register is empty, the byte immediately transfers to the shift register, setting the SPI transmitter empty bit, SPTE. The byte begins shifting out on the MOSI pin under the control of the serial clock. See Figure 13-3.
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Serial Peripheral Interface Module (SPI)
Advance Information 251
Serial Peripheral Interface Module (SPI)
INTERNAL BUS
TRANSMIT DATA REGISTER CGMOUT / 2 (FROM SIM) 7 /2 CLOCK DIVIDER /8 / 32 / 128 CLOCK SELECT RECEIVE DATA REGISTER PIN CONTROL LOGIC SPSCK CLOCK LOGIC M S SS SPR1 SPR0 6
SHIFT REGISTER 5 4 3 2 1 0 MISO
MOSI
SPMSTR
SPE
SPMSTR
CPHA
CPOL
TRANSMITTER CPU INTERRUPT REQUEST SPI CONTROL RECEIVER/ERROR CPU INTERRUPT REQUEST
SPWOM MODFEN ERRIE SPTIE SPRIE SPE
SPRF SPTE OVRF MODF
Figure 13-1. SPI Module Block Diagram
Advance Information 252
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Serial Peripheral Interface Module (SPI) MOTOROLA
Serial Peripheral Interface Module (SPI) Functional Description
Addr.
Register Name
Bit 7
6 R 0 ERRIE
5 SPMSTR 1 OVRF R
4 CPOL 0 MODF R 0 R4 T4
3 CPHA 1 SPTE
2 SPWOM 0 MODFEN
1 SPE 0 SPR1 0 R1 T1
Bit 0 SPTIE 0 SPR0 0 R0 T0
$0044
Read: SPI Control Register SPRIE (SPCR) Write: See page 272. Reset: 0 Read: SPI Status and Control Register (SPSCR) Write: See page 274. Reset: Read: SPI Data Register (SPDR) Write: See page 277. Reset: SPRF R 0 R7 T7
$0045
R 1 R3 T3 0 R2 T2
0 R6 T6
0 R5 T5
$0046
Unaffected by reset R = Reserved
Figure 13-2. SPI I/O Register Summary
MASTER MCU MISO MOSI SPSCK BAUD RATE GENERATOR SS MISO MOSI SPSCK SS
SLAVE MCU
SHIFT REGISTER
SHIFT REGISTER
V''
Figure 13-3. Full-Duplex Master-Slave Connections The SPR1 and SPR0 bits control the baud rate generator and determine the speed of the shift register. See 13.13.2 SPI Status and Control Register. Through the SPSCK pin, the baud-rate generator of the master also controls the shift register of the slave peripheral. As the byte shifts out on the MOSI pin of the master, another byte shifts in from the slave on the master's MISO pin. The transmission ends when the receiver full bit, SPRF, becomes set. At the same time that SPRF becomes set, the byte from the slave transfers to the receive data
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Serial Peripheral Interface Module (SPI)
Advance Information 253
Serial Peripheral Interface Module (SPI)
register. In normal operation, SPRF signals the end of a transmission. Software clears SPRF by reading the SPI status and control register with SPRF set and then reading the SPI data register. Writing to the SPI data register clears the SPTE bit.
13.5.2 Slave Mode The SPI operates in slave mode when the SPMSTR bit is clear. In slave mode the SPSCK pin is the input for the serial clock from the master MCU. Before a data transmission occurs, the SS pin of the slave SPI must be at logic 0. SS must remain low until the transmission is complete. See 13.7.2 Mode Fault Error. In a slave SPI module, data enters the shift register under the control of the serial clock from the master SPI module. After a byte enters the shift register of a slave SPI, it transfers to the receive data register, and the SPRF bit is set. To prevent an overflow condition, slave software then must read the receive data register before another full byte enters the shift register. The maximum frequency of the SPSCK for an SPI configured as a slave is the bus clock speed (which is twice as fast as the fastest master SPSCK clock that can be generated). The frequency of the SPSCK for an SPI configured as a slave does not have to correspond to any SPI baud rate. The baud rate only controls the speed of the SPSCK generated by an SPI configured as a master. Therefore, the frequency of the SPSCK for an SPI configured as a slave can be any frequency less than or equal to the bus speed. When the master SPI starts a transmission, the data in the slave shift register begins shifting out on the MISO pin. The slave can load its shift register with a new byte for the next transmission by writing to its transmit data register. The slave must write to its transmit data register at least one bus cycle before the master starts the next transmission. Otherwise, the byte already in the slave shift register shifts out on the MISO pin. Data written to the slave shift register during a transmission remains in a buffer until the end of the transmission. When the clock phase bit (CPHA) is set, the first edge of SPSCK starts a transmission. When CPHA is clear, the falling edge of SS starts a transmission. See 13.6 Transmission Formats.
Advance Information 254
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Serial Peripheral Interface Module (SPI) MOTOROLA
Serial Peripheral Interface Module (SPI) Transmission Formats
NOTE:
If the write to the data register is late, the SPI transmits the data already in the shift register from the previous transmission. SPSCK must be in the proper idle state before the slave is enabled to prevent SPSCK from appearing as a clock edge.
13.6 Transmission Formats
During an SPI transmission, data is simultaneously transmitted (shifted out serially) and received (shifted in serially). A serial clock synchronizes shifting and sampling on the two serial data lines. A slave select line allows selection of an individual slave SPI device; slave devices that are not selected do not interfere with SPI bus activities. On a master SPI device, the slave select line can optionally be used to indicate multiple-master bus contention.
13.6.1 Clock Phase and Polarity Controls Software can select any of four combinations of serial clock (SPSCK) phase and polarity using two bits in the SPI control register (SPCR). The clock polarity is specified by the CPOL control bit, which selects an active high or low clock and has no significant effect on the transmission format. The clock phase (CPHA) control bit selects one of two fundamentally different transmission formats. The clock phase and polarity should be identical for the master SPI device and the communicating slave device. In some cases, the phase and polarity are changed between transmissions to allow a master device to communicate with peripheral slaves having different requirements.
NOTE:
Before writing to the CPOL bit or the CPHA bit, disable the SPI by clearing the SPI enable bit (SPE).
13.6.2 Transmission Format When CPHA = 0 Figure 13-4 shows an SPI transmission in which CPHA is logic 0. The figure should not be used as a replacement for data sheet parametric information.Two waveforms are shown for SPSCK: one for CPOL = 0
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Serial Peripheral Interface Module (SPI)
Advance Information 255
Serial Peripheral Interface Module (SPI)
and another for CPOL = 1. The diagram may be interpreted as a master or slave timing diagram since the serial clock (SPSCK), master in/slave out (MISO), and master out/slave in (MOSI) pins are directly connected between the master and the slave. The MISO signal is the output from the slave, and the MOSI signal is the output from the master. The SS line is the slave select input to the slave. The slave SPI drives its MISO output only when its slave select input (SS) is at logic 0, so that only the selected slave drives to the master. The SS pin of the master is not shown but is assumed to be inactive. The SS pin of the master must be high or must be reconfigured as general-purpose I/O not affecting the SPI. (See 13.7.2 Mode Fault Error.) When CPHA = 0, the first SPSCK edge is the MSB capture strobe. Therefore, the slave must begin driving its data before the first SPSCK edge, and a falling edge on the SS pin is used to start the slave data transmission. The slave's SS pin must be toggled back to high and then low again between each byte transmitted as shown in Figure 13-5.
SPSCK CYCLE # FOR REFERENCE SPSCK, CPOL = 0 SPSCK, CPOL = 1 MOSI FROM MASTER MISO FROM SLAVE
TT,
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
MSB MSB
BIT 6 BIT 6
BIT 5 BIT 5
BIT 4 BIT 4
BIT 3 BIT 3
BIT 2 BIT 2
BIT 1 BIT 1
LSB LSB
TO SLAVE
CAPTURE STROBE
Figure 13-4. Transmission Format (CPHA = 0)
MISO/MOSI MASTER SS SLAVE SS CPHA = 0 SLAVE SS CPHA = 1
BYTE 1
BYTE 2
BYTE 3
Figure 13-5. CPHA/SS Timing
Advance Information 256
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Serial Peripheral Interface Module (SPI) MOTOROLA
Serial Peripheral Interface Module (SPI) Transmission Formats
When CPHA = 0 for a slave, the falling edge of SS indicates the beginning of the transmission. This causes the SPI to leave its idle state and begin driving the MISO pin with the MSB of its data. Once the transmission begins, no new data is allowed into the shift register from the transmit data register. Therefore, the SPI data register of the slave must be loaded with transmit data before the falling edge of SS. Any data written after the falling edge is stored in the transmit data register and transferred to the shift register after the current transmission.
13.6.3 Transmission Format When CPHA = 1 Figure 13-6 shows an SPI transmission in which CPHA is logic 1. The figure should not be used as a replacement for data sheet parametric information. Two waveforms are shown for SPSCK: one for CPOL = 0 and another for CPOL = 1. The diagram may be interpreted as a master or slave timing diagram since the serial clock (SPSCK), master in/slave out (MISO), and master out/slave in (MOSI) pins are directly connected between the master and the slave. The MISO signal is the output from the slave, and the MOSI signal is the output from the master. The SS line is the slave select input to the slave. The slave SPI drives its MISO output only when its slave select input (SS) is at logic 0, so that only the selected slave drives to the master. The SS pin of the master is not shown but is assumed to be inactive. The SS pin of the master must be high or must be reconfigured as general-purpose I/O not affecting the SPI. See 13.7.2 Mode Fault Error. When CPHA = 1, the master begins driving its MOSI pin on the first SPSCK edge. Therefore, the slave uses
SPSCK CYCLE # FOR REFERENCE SPSCK, CPOL = 0 SPSCK, CPOL = 1 MOSI FROM MASTER MISO FROM SLAVE SS, TO SLAVE CAPTURE STROBE MSB MSB BIT 6 BIT 6 BIT 5 BIT 5 BIT 4 BIT 4 BIT 3 BIT 3 BIT 2 BIT 2 BIT 1 BIT 1 LSB LSB
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Figure 13-6. Transmission Format (CPHA = 1)
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Serial Peripheral Interface Module (SPI) Advance Information 257
Serial Peripheral Interface Module (SPI)
the first SPSCK edge as a start transmission signal. The SS pin can remain low between transmissions. This format may be preferable in systems having only one master and only one slave driving the MISO data line. When CPHA = 1 for a slave, the first edge of the SPSCK indicates the beginning of the transmission. This causes the SPI to leave its idle state and begin driving the MISO pin with the MSB of its data. Once the transmission begins, no new data is allowed into the shift register from the transmit data register. Therefore, the SPI data register of the slave must be loaded with transmit data before the first edge of SPSCK. Any data written after the first edge is stored in the transmit data register and transferred to the shift register after the current transmission.
13.6.4 Transmission Initiation Latency When the SPI is configured as a master (SPMSTR = 1), writing to the SPDR starts a transmission. CPHA has no effect on the delay to the start of the transmission, but it does affect the initial state of the SPSCK signal. When CPHA = 0, the SPSCK signal remains inactive for the first half of the first SPSCK cycle. When CPHA = 1, the first SPSCK cycle begins with an edge on the SPSCK line from its inactive to its active level. The SPI clock rate (selected by SPR1:SPR0) affects the delay from the write to SPDR and the start of the SPI transmission. See Figure 13-7 The internal SPI clock in the master is a free-running derivative of the internal MCU clock. To conserve power, it is enabled only when both the SPE and SPMSTR bits are set. SPSCK edges occur halfway through the low time of the internal MCU clock. Since the SPI clock is free-running, it is uncertain where the write to the SPDR occurs relative to the slower SPSCK. This uncertainty causes the variation in the initiation delay shown in Figure 13-7. This delay is no longer than a single SPI bit time. That is, the maximum delay is two MCU bus cycles for DIV2, eight MCU bus cycles for DIV8, 32 MCU bus cycles for DIV32, and 128 MCU bus cycles for DIV128.
Advance Information 258
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Serial Peripheral Interface Module (SPI) MOTOROLA
Serial Peripheral Interface Module (SPI) Transmission Formats
WRITE TO SPDR BUS CLOCK MOSI SPSCK CPHA = 1 SPSCK CPHA = 0 SPSCK CYCLE NUMBER
INITIATION DELAY
MSB
BIT 6
BIT 5
1
2
3
INITIATION DELAY FROM WRITE SPDR TO TRANSFER BEGIN
WRITE TO SPDR BUS CLOCK EARLIEST LATEST WRITE TO SPDR BUS CLOCK SPSCK = INTERNAL CLOCK / 8; 8 POSSIBLE START POINTS SPSCK = INTERNAL CLOCK / 2; 2 POSSIBLE START POINTS
EARLIEST WRITE TO SPDR BUS CLOCK
LATEST
EARLIEST WRITE TO SPDR BUS CLOCK
SPSCK = INTERNAL CLOCK / 32; 32 POSSIBLE START POINTS
LATEST
EARLIEST
SPSCK = INTERNAL CLOCK / 128; 128 POSSIBLE START POINTS
LATEST
Figure 13-7. Transmission Start Delay (Master)
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Serial Peripheral Interface Module (SPI)
Advance Information 259
Serial Peripheral Interface Module (SPI) 13.7 Error Conditions
These flags signal SPI error conditions: * Overflow (OVRF) -- Failing to read the SPI data register before the next full byte enters the shift register sets the OVRF bit. The new byte does not transfer to the receive data register, and the unread byte still can be read. OVRF is in the SPI status and control register. Mode fault error (MODF) -- The MODF bit indicates that the voltage on the slave select pin (SS) is inconsistent with the mode of the SPI. MODF is in the SPI status and control register.
*
13.7.1 Overflow Error The overflow flag (OVRF) becomes set if the receive data register still has unread data from a previous transmission when the capture strobe of bit 1 of the next transmission occurs. If an overflow occurs, all data received after the overflow and before the OVRF bit is cleared does not transfer to the receive data register and does not set the SPI receiver full bit (SPRF). The unread data that transferred to the receive data register before the overflow occurred can still be read. Therefore, an overflow error always indicates the loss of data. Clear the overflow flag by reading the SPI status and control register and then reading the SPI data register. OVRF generates a receiver/error CPU interrupt request if the error interrupt enable bit (ERRIE) is also set. MODF and OVRF can generate a receiver/error CPU interrupt request. See Figure 13-10. It is not possible to enable MODF or OVRF individually to generate a receiver/error CPU interrupt request. However, leaving MODFEN low prevents MODF from being set.
Advance Information 260
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Serial Peripheral Interface Module (SPI) MOTOROLA
Serial Peripheral Interface Module (SPI) Error Conditions
If the CPU SPRF interrupt is enabled and the OVRF interrupt is not, watch for an overflow condition. Figure 13-8 shows how it is possible to miss an overflow. The first part of Figure 13-8 shows how it is possible to read the SPSCR and SPDR to clear the SPRF without problems. However, as illustrated by the second transmission example, the OVRF bit can be set in between the time that SPSCR and SPDR are read.
BYTE 1 1 SPRF BYTE 2 4 BYTE 3 6 BYTE 4 8
OVRF READ SPSCR READ SPDR 1 2 3 4 2 5
3
7U@A AT@UTATQSAA7DU 8QVAS@69TATQT8SAXDUCATQSAA7DUAT@U 6I9APWSAA7DUA8G@6S 8QVAS@69TA7U@A ADIATQ9S 8G@6SDIBATQSAA7DU 7U@A!AT@UTATQSAA7DU
7 5 6 7 8
8QVAS@69TATQT8SAXDUCATQSAA7DUAT@U 6I9APWSAA7DUA8G@6S 7U@A"AT@UTAPWSAA7DUA7U@A"ADTAGPTU 8QVAS@69TA7U@A!ADIATQ9SA8G@6SDIBATQSAA7DU 7VUAIPUAPWSAA7DU 7U@A#AA6DGTAUPAT@UATQSAA7DUA7@86VT@ PWSAA7DUADTAIPUA8G@6S@9A7U@A#ADTAGPTU
Figure 13-8. Missed Read of Overflow Condition In this case, an overflow can easily be missed. Since no more SPRF interrupts can be generated until this OVRF is serviced, it is not obvious that bytes are being lost as more transmissions are completed. To prevent this, either enable the OVRF interrupt or do another read of the SPSCR following the read of the SPDR. This ensures that the OVRF was not set before the SPRF was cleared and that future transmissions can set the SPRF bit. Figure 13-9 illustrates this process. Generally, to avoid this second SPSCR read, enable the OVRF interrupt to the CPU by setting the ERRIE bit.
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Serial Peripheral Interface Module (SPI)
Advance Information 261
Serial Peripheral Interface Module (SPI)
BYTE 1 SPI RECEIVE COMPLETE SPRF OVRF READ SPSCR READ SPDR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 2 3 4 1
BYTE 2 5
BYTE 3 7
BYTE 4 11
6 8 8 9
9 10
12 13
14
BYTE 1 SETS SPRF BIT. CPU READS SPSCR WITH SPRF BIT SET AND OVRF BIT CLEAR. CPU READS BYTE 1 IN SPDR, CLEARING SPRF BIT. CPU READS SPSCR AGAIN TO CHECK OVRF BIT. BYTE 2 SETS SPRF BIT. CPU READS SPSCR WITH SPRF BIT SET AND OVRF BIT CLEAR. BYTE 3 SETS OVRF BIT. BYTE 3 IS LOST.
CPU READS BYTE 2 IN SPDR, CLEARING SPRF BIT. CPU READS SPSCR AGAIN TO CHECK OVRF BIT.
10 CPU READS BYTE 2 SPDR, CLEARING OVRF BIT. 11 BYTE 4 SETS SPRF BIT. 12 CPU READS SPSCR. 13 CPU READS BYTE 4 IN SPDR, CLEARING SPRF BIT. 14 CPU READS SPSCR AGAIN TO CHECK OVRF BIT.
Figure 13-9. Clearing SPRF When OVRF Interrupt Is Not Enabled
13.7.2 Mode Fault Error Setting the SPMSTR bit selects master mode and configures the SPSCK and MOSI pins as outputs and the MISO pin as an input. Clearing SPMSTR selects slave mode and configures the SPSCK and MOSI pins as inputs and the MISO pin as an output. The mode fault bit, MODF, becomes set any time the state of the slave select pin, SS, is inconsistent with the mode selected by SPMSTR. To prevent SPI pin contention and damage to the MCU, a mode fault error occurs if: * * The SS pin of a slave SPI goes high during a transmission. The SS pin of a master SPI goes low at any time.
For the MODF flag to be set, the mode fault error enable bit (MODFEN) must be set. Clearing the MODFEN bit does not clear the MODF flag but does prevent MODF from being set again after MODF is cleared.
Advance Information 262
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Serial Peripheral Interface Module (SPI) MOTOROLA
Serial Peripheral Interface Module (SPI) Error Conditions
MODF generates a receiver/error CPU interrupt request if the error interrupt enable bit (ERRIE) is also set. The SPRF, MODF, and OVRF interrupts share the same CPU interrupt vector. MODF and OVRF can generate a receiver/error CPU interrupt request. See Figure 13-10. It is not possible to enable MODF or OVRF individually to generate a receiver/error CPU interrupt request. However, leaving MODFEN low prevents MODF from being set. In a master SPI with the mode fault enable bit (MODFEN) set, the mode fault flag (MODF) is set if SS goes to logic 0. A mode fault in a master SPI causes these events to occur: * * * * * If ERRIE = 1, the SPI generates an SPI receiver/error CPU interrupt request. The SPE bit is cleared. The SPTE bit is set. The SPI state counter is cleared. The data direction register of the shared I/O port regains control of port drivers.
NOTE:
To prevent bus contention with another master SPI after a mode fault error, clear all SPI bits of the data direction register of the shared I/O port before enabling the SPI. When configured as a slave (SPMSTR = 0), the MODF flag is set if SS goes high during a transmission. When CPHA = 0, a transmission begins when SS goes low and ends once the incoming SPSCK goes back to its idle level following the shift of the eighth data bit. When CPHA = 1, the transmission begins when the SPSCK leaves its idle level and SS is already low. The transmission continues until the SPSCK returns to its idle level following the shift of the last data bit. See 13.6 Transmission Formats.
NOTE:
Setting the MODF flag does not clear the SPMSTR bit. Reading SPMSTR when MODF = 1 will indicate a mode fault error occurred in either master mode or slave mode. When CPHA = 0, a MODF occurs if a slave is selected (SS is at logic 0) and later unselected (SS is at logic 1) even if no SPSCK is sent to that slave. This happens because SS at logic 0 indicates the start of the transmission (MISO driven out with the value of MSB) for CPHA = 0.
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Serial Peripheral Interface Module (SPI)
Advance Information 263
Serial Peripheral Interface Module (SPI)
When CPHA = 1, a slave can be selected and then later unselected with no transmission occurring. Therefore, MODF does not occur since a transmission was never begun. In a slave SPI (MSTR = 0), the MODF bit generates an SPI receiver/error CPU interrupt request if the ERRIE bit is set. The MODF bit does not clear the SPE bit or reset the SPI in any way. Software can abort the SPI transmission by clearing the SPE bit of the slave.
NOTE:
A logic 1 voltage on the SS pin of a slave SPI puts the MISO pin in a high impedance state. Also, the slave SPI ignores all incoming SPSCK clocks, even if it was already in the middle of a transmission. To clear the MODF flag, read the SPSCR with the MODF bit set and then write to the SPCR register. This entire clearing procedure must occur with no MODF condition existing or else the flag is not cleared.
13.8 Interrupts
Four SPI status flags can be enabled to generate CPU interrupt requests as shown in Table 13-2. Table 13-2. SPI Interrupts
Flag Request
SPTE transmitter empty SPI transmitter CPU interrupt request (SPTIE = 1, SPE = 1) SPRF receiver full OVRF overflow MODF mode fault SPI receiver CPU interrupt request (SPRIE = 1) SPI receiver/error interrupt request (ERRIE = 1) SPI receiver/error interrupt request (ERRIE = 1)
The SPI transmitter interrupt enable bit (SPTIE) enables the SPTE flag to generate transmitter CPU interrupt requests, provided that the SPI is enabled (SPE = 1). The SPI receiver interrupt enable bit (SPRIE) enables the SPRF bit to generate receiver CPU interrupt requests, provided that the SPI is enabled (SPE = 1). (See Figure 13-10.)
Advance Information 264
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Serial Peripheral Interface Module (SPI) MOTOROLA
Serial Peripheral Interface Module (SPI) Interrupts
SPTE
SPTIE
SPE SPI TRANSMITTER CPU INTERRUPT REQUEST
SPRIE
SPRF
SPI RECEIVER/ERROR ERRIE MODF OVRF CPU INTERRUPT REQUEST
Figure 13-10. SPI Interrupt Request Generation The error interrupt enable bit (ERRIE) enables both the MODF and OVRF bits to generate a receiver/error CPU interrupt request. The mode fault enable bit (MODFEN) can prevent the MODF flag from being set so that only the OVRF bit is enabled by the ERRIE bit to generate receiver/error CPU interrupt requests. These sources in the SPI status and control register can generate CPU interrupt requests: * SPI receiver full bit (SPRF) -- The SPRF bit becomes set every time a byte transfers from the shift register to the receive data register. If the SPI receiver interrupt enable bit, SPRIE, is also set, SPRF can generate either an SPI receiver/error or CPU interrupt. SPI transmitter empty (SPTE) -- The SPTE bit becomes set every time a byte transfers from the transmit data register to the shift register. If the SPI transmit interrupt enable bit, SPTIE, is also set, SPTE can generate either an SPTE or CPU interrupt request.
*
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Serial Peripheral Interface Module (SPI)
Advance Information 265
Serial Peripheral Interface Module (SPI) 13.9 Resetting the SPI
Any system reset completely resets the SPI. Partial resets occur whenever the SPI enable bit (SPE) is low. Whenever SPE is low: * * * * * The SPTE flag is set. Any transmission currently in progress is aborted. The shift register is cleared. The SPI state counter is cleared, making it ready for a new complete transmission. All the SPI port logic is defaulted back to being general-purpose I/O.
These items are reset only by a system reset: * * * All control bits in the SPCR All control bits in the SPSCR (MODFEN, ERRIE, SPR1, and SPR0) The status flags SPRF, OVRF, and MODF
By not resetting the control bits when SPE is low, the user can clear SPE between transmissions without having to set all control bits again when SPE is set back high for the next transmission. By not resetting the SPRF, OVRF, and MODF flags, the user can still service these interrupts after the SPI has been disabled. The user can disable the SPI by writing 0 to the SPE bit. The SPI can also be disabled by a mode fault occurring in an SPI that was configured as a master with the MODFEN bit set.
13.10 Queuing Transmission Data
The double-buffered transmit data register allows a data byte to be queued and transmitted. For an SPI configured as a master, a queued data byte is transmitted immediately after the previous transmission has completed. The SPI transmitter empty flag (SPTE) indicates when the transmit data buffer is ready to accept new data. Write to the transmit data register only when the SPTE bit is high. Figure 13-11 shows the timing associated with doing back-to-back transmissions with the SPI (SPSCK has CPHA:CPOL = 1:0).
Advance Information 266 MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Serial Peripheral Interface Module (SPI) MOTOROLA
Serial Peripheral Interface Module (SPI) Queuing Transmission Data
WRITE TO SPDR SPTE SPSCK CPHA:CPOL = 1:0 MOSI
1 2
3 5
8 10
MSBBIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT LSBMSBBIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT LSBMSBBIT BIT BIT 654321 654321 654 BYTE 1 BYTE 2 BYTE 3 4 6 7 7 CPU READS SPDR, CLEARING SPRF BIT. 8 CPU WRITES BYTE 3 TO SPDR, QUEUEING BYTE 3 AND CLEARING SPTE BIT. 9 SECOND INCOMING BYTE TRANSFERS FROM SHIFT REGISTER TO RECEIVE DATA REGISTER, SETTING SPRF BIT. 10 BYTE 3 TRANSFERS FROM TRANSMIT DATA REGISTER TO SHIFT REGISTER, SETTING SPTE BIT. 11 CPU READS SPSCR WITH SPRF BIT SET. 12 CPU READS SPDR, CLEARING SPRF BIT. 9 11 12
SPRF READ SPSCR READ SPDR 1 CPU WRITES BYTE 1 TO SPDR, CLEARING SPTE BIT. 2 BYTE 1 TRANSFERS FROM TRANSMIT DATA REGISTER TO SHIFT REGISTER, SETTING SPTE BIT. 3 CPU WRITES BYTE 2 TO SPDR, QUEUEING BYTE 2 AND CLEARING SPTE BIT. 4 FIRST INCOMING BYTE TRANSFERS FROM SHIFT REGISTER TO RECEIVE DATA REGISTER, SETTING SPRF BIT. 5 BYTE 2 TRANSFERS FROM TRANSMIT DATA REGISTER TO SHIFT REGISTER, SETTING SPTE BIT. 6 CPU READS SPSCR WITH SPRF BIT SET.
Figure 13-11. SPRF/SPTE CPU Interrupt Timing For a slave, the transmit data buffer allows back-to-back transmissions without the slave precisely timing its writes between transmissions as in a system with a single data buffer. Also, if no new data is written to the data buffer, the last value contained in the shift register is the next data word to be transmitted. For an idle master or idle slave that has no data loaded into its transmit buffer, the SPTE is set again no more than two bus cycles after the transmit buffer empties into the shift register. This allows the user to queue up a 16-bit value to send. For an already active slave, the load of the shift register cannot occur until the transmission is completed. This implies that a back-to-back write to the transmit data register is not possible. The SPTE indicates when the next write can occur.
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Serial Peripheral Interface Module (SPI)
Advance Information 267
Serial Peripheral Interface Module (SPI) 13.11 Low-Power Mode
The WAIT instruction puts the MCU in a low power-consumption standby mode. The SPI module remains active after the execution of a WAIT instruction. In wait mode the SPI module registers are not accessible by the CPU. Any enabled CPU interrupt request from the SPI module can bring the MCU out of wait mode. If SPI module functions are not required during wait mode, reduce power consumption by disabling the SPI module before executing the WAIT instruction. To exit wait mode when an overflow condition occurs, enable the OVRF bit to generate CPU interrupt requests by setting the error interrupt enable bit (ERRIE). See 13.8 Interrupts. Since the SPTE bit cannot be cleared during a break with the BCFE bit cleared, a write to the transmit data register in break mode does not initiate a transmission nor is this data transferred into the shift register. Therefore, a write to the SPDR in break mode with the BCFE bit cleared has no effect.
13.12 I/O Signals
The SPI module has five I/O pins and shares four of them with a parallel I/O port. The pins are: * * * * MISO -- Data received MOSI -- Data transmitted SPSCK -- Serial clock SS -- Slave select
The SPI has limited inter-integrated circuit (I2C) capability (requiring software support) as a master in a single-master environment. To communicate with I2C peripherals, MOSI becomes an open-drain output when the SPWOM bit in the SPI control register is set. In I2C communication, the MOSI and MISO pins are connected to a bidirectional pin from the I2C peripheral and through a pullup resistor to VDD.
Advance Information 268 MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Serial Peripheral Interface Module (SPI) MOTOROLA
Serial Peripheral Interface Module (SPI) I/O Signals
13.12.1 MISO (Master In/Slave Out) MISO is one of the two SPI module pins that transmits serial data. In full duplex operation, the MISO pin of the master SPI module is connected to the MISO pin of the slave SPI module. The master SPI simultaneously receives data on its MISO pin and transmits data from its MOSI pin. Slave output data on the MISO pin is enabled only when the SPI is configured as a slave. The SPI is configured as a slave when its SPMSTR bit is logic 0 and its SS pin is at logic 0. To support a multiple-slave system, a logic 1 on the SS pin puts the MISO pin in a high-impedance state. When enabled, the SPI controls data direction of the MISO pin regardless of the state of the data direction register of the shared I/O port.
13.12.2 MOSI (Master Out/Slave In) MOSI is one of the two SPI module pins that transmits serial data. In full-duplex operation, the MOSI pin of the master SPI module is connected to the MOSI pin of the slave SPI module. The master SPI simultaneously transmits data from its MOSI pin and receives data on its MISO pin. When enabled, the SPI controls data direction of the MOSI pin regardless of the state of the data direction register of the shared I/O port.
13.12.3 SPSCK (Serial Clock) The serial clock synchronizes data transmission between master and slave devices. In a master MCU, the SPSCK pin is the clock output. In a slave MCU, the SPSCK pin is the clock input. In full-duplex operation, the master and slave MCUs exchange a byte of data in eight serial clock cycles. When enabled, the SPI controls data direction of the SPSCK pin regardless of the state of the data direction register of the shared I/O port.
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Serial Peripheral Interface Module (SPI)
Advance Information 269
Serial Peripheral Interface Module (SPI)
13.12.4 SS (Slave Select) The SS pin has various functions depending on the current state of the SPI. For an SPI configured as a slave, the SS is used to select a slave. For CPHA = 0, the SS is used to define the start of a transmission. See 13.6 Transmission Formats. Since it is used to indicate the start of a transmission, the SS must be toggled high and low between each byte transmitted for the CPHA = 0 format. However, it can remain low between transmissions for the CPHA = 1 format. See Figure 13-12.
MISO/MOSI MASTER TT SLAVE TT CPHA = 0 SLAVE TT CPHA = 1
BYTE 1
BYTE 2
BYTE 3
Figure 13-12. CPHA/SS Timing When an SPI is configured as a slave, the SS pin is always configured as an input. It cannot be used as a general-purpose I/O regardless of the state of the MODFEN control bit. However, the MODFEN bit can still prevent the state of the SS from creating a MODF error. See 13.13.2 SPI Status and Control Register.
NOTE:
A logic 1 voltage on the SS pin of a slave SPI puts the MISO pin in a high-impedance state. The slave SPI ignores all incoming SPSCK clocks, even if it was already in the middle of a transmission. When an SPI is configured as a master, the SS input can be used in conjunction with the MODF flag to prevent multiple masters from driving MOSI and SPSCK. (See 13.7.2 Mode Fault Error.) For the state of the SS pin to set the MODF flag, the MODFEN bit in the SPSCK register must be set. If the MODFEN bit is low for an SPI master, the SS pin can be used as a general-purpose I/O under the control of the data direction register of the shared I/O port. With MODFEN high, it is an input-only pin to the SPI regardless of the state of the data direction register of the shared I/O port.
Advance Information 270
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Serial Peripheral Interface Module (SPI) MOTOROLA
Serial Peripheral Interface Module (SPI) I/O Registers
The CPU can always read the state of the SS pin by configuring the appropriate pin as an input and reading the port data register. See Table 13-3. Table 13-3. SPI Configuration
SPE 0 1 1 1 SPMSTR X(1) 0 1 1 MODFEN X X 0 1 SPI Configuration Not enabled Slave Master without MODF Master with MODF State of SS Logic General-purpose I/O; SS ignored by SPI Input-only to SPI General-purpose I/O; SS ignored by SPI Input-only to SPI
1. X = don't care
13.12.5 VSS (Clock Ground) VSS is the ground return for the serial clock pin, SPSCK, and the ground for the port output buffers. To reduce the ground return path loop and minimize radio frequency (RF) emissions, connect the ground pin of the slave to the VSS pin of the master.
13.13 I/O Registers
Three registers control and monitor SPI operation: * * * SPI control register, SPCR SPI status and control register, SPSCR SPI data register, SPDR
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Serial Peripheral Interface Module (SPI)
Advance Information 271
Serial Peripheral Interface Module (SPI)
13.13.1 SPI Control Register The SPI control register (SPCR): * * * * * * Enables SPI module interrupt requests Selects CPU interrupt requests or DMA service requests Configures the SPI module as master or slave Selects serial clock polarity and phase Configures the SPSCK, MOSI, and MISO pins as open-drain outputs Enables the SPI module
Address: $0044 Bit 7 Read: SPRIE Write: Reset: 0 R 0 = Reserved 1 0 1 0 0 0 R SPMSTR CPOL CPHA SPWOM SPE SPTIE 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
Figure 13-13. SPI Control Register (SPCR) SPRIE -- SPI Receiver Interrupt Enable Bit This read/write bit enables CPU interrupt requests generated by the SPRF bit. The SPRF bit is set when a byte transfers from the shift register to the receive data register. Reset clears the SPRIE bit. 1 = SPRF CPU interrupt requests enabled 0 = SPRF CPU interrupt requests disabled SPMSTR -- SPI Master Bit This read/write bit selects master mode operation or slave mode operation. Reset sets the SPMSTR bit. 1 = Master mode 0 = Slave mode
Advance Information 272
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Serial Peripheral Interface Module (SPI) MOTOROLA
Serial Peripheral Interface Module (SPI) I/O Registers
CPOL -- Clock Polarity Bit This read/write bit determines the logic state of the SPSCK pin between transmissions. See Figure 13-4 and Figure 13-6. To transmit data between SPI modules, the SPI modules must have identical CPOL values. Reset clears the CPOL bit. CPHA -- Clock Phase Bit This read/write bit controls the timing relationship between the serial clock and SPI data. See Figure 13-4 and Figure 13-6. To transmit data between SPI modules, the SPI modules must have identical CPHA bits. When CPHA = 0, the SS pin of the slave SPI module must be set to logic 1 between bytes. See Figure 13-12. Reset sets the CPHA bit. When CPHA = 0 for a slave, the falling edge of SS indicates the beginning of the transmission. This causes the SPI to leave its idle state and begin driving the MISO pin with the MSB of its data, once the transmission begins, no new data is allowed into the shift register from the data register. Therefore, the slave data register must be loaded with the desired transmit data before the falling edge of SS. Any data written after the falling edge is stored in the data register and transferred to the shift register at the current transmission. When CPHA = 1 for a slave, the first edge of the SPSCK indicates the beginning of the transmission. The same applies when SS is high for a slave. The MISO pin is held in a high-impedance state, and the incoming SPSCK is ignored. In certain cases, it may also cause the MODF flag to be set. See 13.7.2 Mode Fault Error. A logic 1 on the SS pin does not in any way affect the state of the SPI state machine. SPWOM -- SPI Wired-OR Mode Bit This read/write bit disables the pullup devices on pins SPSCK, MOSI, and MISO so that those pins become open-drain outputs. 1 = Wired-OR SPSCK, MOSI, and MISO pins 0 = Normal push-pull SPSCK, MOSI, and MISO pins SPE -- SPI Enable Bit This read/write bit enables the SPI module. Clearing SPE causes a partial reset of the SPI. See 13.9 Resetting the SPI. Reset clears the SPE bit. 1 = SPI module enabled 0 = SPI module disabled
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Serial Peripheral Interface Module (SPI)
Advance Information 273
Serial Peripheral Interface Module (SPI)
SPTIE-- SPI Transmit Interrupt Enable Bit This read/write bit enables CPU interrupt requests generated by the SPTE bit. SPTE is set when a byte transfers from the transmit data register to the shift register. Reset clears the SPTIE bit. 1 = SPTE CPU interrupt requests enabled 0 = SPTE CPU interrupt requests disabled
13.13.2 SPI Status and Control Register The SPI status and control register (SPSCR) contains flags to signal these conditions: * * * * Receive data register full Failure to clear SPRF bit before next byte is received (overflow error) Inconsistent logic level on SS pin (mode fault error) Transmit data register empty
The SPI status and control register also contains bits that perform these functions: * * * Enable error interrupts Enable mode fault error detection Select master SPI baud rate
Address: $0045 Bit 7 Read: Write: Reset: SPRF ERRIE R 0 R 0 = Reserved R 0 R 0 R 1 0 0 0 6 5 OVRF 4 MODF 3 SPTE MODFEN SPR1 SPR0 2 1 Bit 0
Figure 13-14. SPI Status and Control Register (SPSCR) SPRF -- SPI Receiver Full Bit This clearable, read-only flag is set each time a byte transfers from the shift register to the receive data register. SPRF generates a CPU interrupt request if the SPRIE bit in the SPI control register is set also.
Advance Information 274 MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Serial Peripheral Interface Module (SPI) MOTOROLA
Serial Peripheral Interface Module (SPI) I/O Registers
During an SPRF CPU interrupt (DMAS = 0), the CPU clears SPRF by reading the SPI status and control register with SPRF set and then reading the SPI data register. Reset clears the SPRF bit. 1 = Receive data register full 0 = Receive data register not full ERRIE -- Error interrupt Enable Bit This read/write bit enables the MODF and OVRF bits to generate CPU interrupt requests. Reset clears the ERRIE bit. 1 = MODF and OVRF can generate CPU interrupt requests. 0 = MODF and OVRF cannot generate CPU interrupt requests. OVRF -- Overflow Bit This clearable, read-only flag is set if software does not read the byte in the receive data register before the next full byte enters the shift register. In an overflow condition, the byte already in the receive data register is unaffected, and the byte that shifted in last is lost. Clear the OVRF bit by reading the SPI status and control register with OVRF set and then reading the receive data register. Reset clears the OVRF bit. 1 = Overflow 0 = No overflow MODF -- Mode Fault Bit This clearable, read-only flag is set in a slave SPI if the SS pin goes high during a transmission with the MODFEN bit set. In a master SPI, the MODF flag is set if the SS pin goes low at any time with the MODFEN bit set. Clear the MODF bit by reading the SPI status and control register (SPSCR) with MODF set and then writing to the SPI control register (SPCR). Reset clears the MODF bit. 1 = SS pin at inappropriate logic level 0 = SS pin at appropriate logic level SPTE -- SPI Transmitter Empty Bit This clearable, read-only flag is set each time the transmit data register transfers a byte into the shift register. SPTE generates an SPTE CPU interrupt request or an SPTE DMA service request if the SPTIE bit in the SPI control register is set also.
NOTE:
Do not write to the SPI data register unless the SPTE bit is high.
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Serial Peripheral Interface Module (SPI)
Advance Information 275
Serial Peripheral Interface Module (SPI)
For an idle master of idle slave that has no data loaded into its transmit buffer, the SPTE will be set again within two bus cycles since the transmit buffer empties into the shift register. This allows the user to queue up a 16-bit value to send. For an already active slave, the load of the shift register cannot occur until the transmission is completed. This implies that a back-to-back write to the transmit data register is not possible. The SPTE indicates when the next write can occur. Reset sets the SPTE bit. 1 = Transmit data register empty 0 = Transmit data register not empty MODFEN -- Mode Fault Enable Bit This read/write bit, when set to 1, allows the MODF flag to be set. If the MODF flag is set, clearing the MODFEN does not clear the MODF flag. If the SPI is enabled as a master and the MODFEN bit is low, then the SS pin is available as a general-purpose I/O. If the MODFEN bit is set, then this pin is not available as a general-purpose I/O. When the SPI is enabled as a slave, the SS pin is not available as a general-purpose I/O regardless of the value of MODFEN. See 13.12.4 SS (Slave Select). If the MODFEN bit is low, the level of the SS pin does not affect the operation of an enabled SPI configured as a master. For an enabled SPI configured as a slave, having MODFEN low only prevents the MODF flag from being set. It does not affect any other part of SPI operation. See 13.7.2 Mode Fault Error. SPR1 and SPR0 -- SPI Baud Rate Select Bits In master mode, these read/write bits select one of four baud rates as shown in Table 13-4. SPR1 and SPR0 have no effect in slave mode. Reset clears SPR1 and SPR0. Table 13-4. SPI Master Baud Rate Selection
SPR1:SPR0 00 01 10 11 Baud Rate Divisor (BD) 2 8 32 128
Advance Information 276
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Serial Peripheral Interface Module (SPI) MOTOROLA
Serial Peripheral Interface Module (SPI) I/O Registers
Use this formula to calculate the SPI baud rate: CGMOUT Baud rate = ------------------------2 x BD where: CGMOUT = base clock output of the clock generator module (CGM) BD = baud rate divisor
13.13.3 SPI Data Register The SPI data register consists of the read-only receive data register and the write-only transmit data register. Writing to the SPI data register writes data into the transmit data register. Reading the SPI data register reads data from the receive data register. The transmit data and receive data registers are separate registers that can contain different values. See Figure 13-1.
Address: $0046 Bit 7 Read: Write: Reset: R7 T7 6 R6 T6 5 R5 T5 4 R4 T4 3 R3 T3 2 R2 T2 1 R1 T1 Bit 0 R0 T0
Indeterminate after reset
Figure 13-15. SPI Data Register (SPDR) R7:R0/T7:T0 -- Receive/Transmit Data Bits
NOTE:
Do not use read-modify-write instructions on the SPI data register since the register read is not the same as the register written.
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Serial Peripheral Interface Module (SPI)
Advance Information 277
Serial Peripheral Interface Module (SPI)
Advance Information 278
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Serial Peripheral Interface Module (SPI) MOTOROLA
Advance Information -- MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32
Section 14. Serial Communications Interface Module (SCI)
14.1 Contents
14.2 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 14.3 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 14.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 14.4.1 Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 14.4.2 Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283 14.4.2.1 Character Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 14.4.2.2 Character Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 14.4.2.3 Break Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 14.4.2.4 Idle Characters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 14.4.2.5 Inversion of Transmitted Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286 14.4.2.6 Transmitter Interrupts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 14.4.3 Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 14.4.3.1 Character Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 14.4.3.2 Character Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 14.4.3.3 Data Sampling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 14.4.3.4 Framing Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 14.4.3.5 Receiver Wakeup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 14.4.3.6 Receiver Interrupts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 14.4.3.7 Error Interrupts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 14.5 Wait Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 14.6 SCI During Break Module Interrupts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 14.7 I/O Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 14.7.1 PTE2/TxD (Transmit Data). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 14.7.2 PTE1/RxD (Receive Data) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 14.8 I/O Registers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 14.8.1 SCI Control Register 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 14.8.2 SCI Control Register 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 14.8.3 SCI Control Register 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 14.8.4 SCI Status Register 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 14.8.5 SCI Status Register 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 14.8.6 SCI Data Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 14.8.7 SCI Baud Rate Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Serial Communications Interface Module (SCI) Advance Information 279
Serial Communications Interface Module (SCI) 14.2 Introduction
This section describes the serial communications interface module (SCI, version D), which allows high-speed asynchronous communications with peripheral devices and other microcontroller units (MCUs).
14.3 Features
Features of the SCI module include: * * * * * * * * * Full-duplex operation Standard mark/space non-return-to-zero (NRZ) format 32 programmable baud rates Programmable 8-bit or 9-bit character length Separately enabled transmitter and receiver Separate receiver and transmitter CPU interrupt requests Separate receiver and transmitter Programmable transmitter output polarity Two receiver wakeup methods: - Idle line wakeup - Address mark wakeup Interrupt-driven operation with eight interrupt flags: - Transmitter empty - Transmission complete - Receiver full - Idle receiver input - Receiver overrun - Noise error - Framing error - Parity error Receiver framing error detection Hardware parity checking 1/16 bit-time noise detection
*
* * *
Advance Information 280
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Serial Communications Interface Module (SCI) MOTOROLA
Serial Communications Interface Module (SCI) Functional Description
14.4 Functional Description
Figure 14-1 shows the structure of the SCI module. The SCI allows full-duplex, asynchronous, NRZ serial communication among the MCU and remote devices, including other MCUs. The transmitter and receiver of the SCI operate independently, although they use the same baud rate generator. During normal operation, the CPU monitors the status of the SCI, writes the data to be transmitted, and processes received data.
INTERNAL BUS
TRANSMITTER INTERRUPT CONTROL
SCI DATA REGISTER RECEIVE SHIFT REGISTER
SCI DATA REGISTER RECEIVER INTERRUPT CONTROL ERROR INTERRUPT CONTROL TRANSMIT SHIFT REGISTER TXINV
PTE1/RxD
PTE2/TxD
SCTIE TCIE SCRIE ILIE TE RE RWU SBK SCTE TC SCRF IDLE OR NF FE PE LOOPS LOOPS WAKEUP CONTROL RECEIVE CONTROL BKF RPF BAUD RATE GENERATOR FLAG CONTROL M WAKE ILTY f23 /4 PRESCALER PEN PTY DATA SELECTION CONTROL ENSCI
R8 T8
ORIE NEIE FEIE PEIE
TRANSMIT CONTROL
ENSCI
/ 16
Figure 14-1. SCI Module Block Diagram
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Serial Communications Interface Module (SCI)
Advance Information 281
Serial Communications Interface Module (SCI)
Addr.
Register Name SCI Control Register 1 (SCC1) See page 295. Read:
Bit 7 LOOPS Write: Reset: Read: SCTIE Write: Reset: Read: Write: Reset: 0 R8 0
6 ENSCI 0 TCIE 0 T8
5 TXINV 0 SCRIE 0 0 R
4 M 0 ILIE 0 0
3 WAKE 0 TE 0 ORIE
2 ILTY 0 RE 0 NEIE 0 NF R 0 0 R 0 R2 T2
1 PEN 0 RWU 0 FEIE 0 FE R 0 BKF R 0 R1 T1
Bit 0 PTY 0 SBK 0 PEIE 0 PE R 0 RPF R 0 R0 T0
$0038
$0039
SCI Control Register 2 (SCC2) See page 298.
$003A
SCI Control Register 3 (SCC3) See page 300.
R U U TC R 1 0 R 0 R6 T6
R 0 IDLE R 0 0 R 0 R4 T4 0 OR R 0 0 R 0 R3 T3
0 SCRF R 0 0 R 0 R5 T5
$003B
SCI Status Register 1 (SCS1) See page 302.
Read: SCTE Write: Reset: Read: Write: Reset: Read: Write: Reset: Read: Write: Reset: 0 R 0 R R 1 0 R 0 R7 T7
$003C
SCI Status Register 2 (SCS2) See page 305.
$003D
SCI Data Register (SCDR) See page 306.
Unaffected by reset 0 SCP1 R 0 = Reserved 0 0 SCP0 R 0 0 0 0 0 SCR2 SCR1 SCR0
$003E
SCI Baud Rate Register (SCBR) See page 306.
U = Unaffected
Figure 14-2. SCI I/O Register Summary
Advance Information 282
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Serial Communications Interface Module (SCI) MOTOROLA
Serial Communications Interface Module (SCI) Functional Description
14.4.1 Data Format The SCI uses the standard non-return-to-zero mark/space data format illustrated in Figure 14-3.
8-BIT DATA FORMAT BIT M IN SCC1 CLEAR START BIT POSSIBLE PARITY BIT BIT 6 BIT 7 STOP BIT POSSIBLE PARITY BIT BIT 6 BIT 7 BIT 8 STOP BIT
BIT 0
BIT 1
BIT 2
BIT 3
BIT 4
BIT 5
NEXT START BIT
9-BIT DATA FORMAT BIT M IN SCC1 SET START BIT BIT 0 BIT 1 BIT 2 BIT 3 BIT 4 BIT 5
NEXT START BIT
Figure 14-3. SCI Data Formats 14.4.2 Transmitter Figure 14-4 shows the structure of the SCI transmitter. 14.4.2.1 Character Length The transmitter can accommodate either 8-bit or 9-bit data. The state of the M bit in SCI control register 1 (SCC1) determines character length. When transmitting 9-bit data, bit T8 in SCI control register 3 (SCC3) is the ninth bit (bit 8). 14.4.2.2 Character Transmission During an SCI transmission, the transmit shift register shifts a character out to the PTE2/TxD pin. The SCI data register (SCDR) is the write-only buffer between the internal data bus and the transmit shift register. To initiate an SCI transmission: 1. Enable the SCI by writing a logic 1 to the enable SCI bit (ENSCI) in SCI control register 1 (SCC1). 2. Enable the transmitter by writing a logic 1 to the transmitter enable bit (TE) in SCI control register 2 (SCC2). 3. Clear the SCI transmitter empty bit by first reading SCI status register 1 (SCS1) and then writing to the SCDR. 4. Repeat step 3 for each subsequent transmission.
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Serial Communications Interface Module (SCI) Advance Information 283
Serial Communications Interface Module (SCI)
INTERNAL BUS
/4
PRESCALER
BAUD DIVIDER
/ 16
SCI DATA REGISTER
3 2
SCP1 SCP0 SCR1 SCR2 TRANSMITTER CPU INTERRUPT REQUEST SCR0 STOP
f
H
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
START L
11-BIT TRANSMIT SHIFT REGISTER
QU@!U9
TXINV
M PEN PTY PARITY GENERATION LOAD FROM SCDR
MSB
SHIFT ENABLE
PREAMBLE ALL 1s
T8
TRANSMITTER CONTROL LOGIC
SCTE SCTE SCTIE TC TCIE
LOOPS SCTIE TC TCIE ENSCI TE
Figure 14-4. SCI Transmitter At the start of a transmission, transmitter control logic automatically loads the transmit shift register with a preamble of logic 1s. After the preamble shifts out, control logic transfers the SCDR data into the transmit shift register. A logic 0 start bit automatically goes into the least significant bit (LSB) position of the transmit shift register. A logic 1 stop bit goes into the most significant bit (MSB) position. The SCI transmitter empty bit, SCTE, in SCS1 becomes set when the SCDR transfers a byte to the transmit shift register. The SCTE bit indicates that the SCDR can accept new data from the internal data bus. If the SCI transmit interrupt enable bit, SCTIE, in SCC2 is also set, the SCTE bit generates a transmitter CPU interrupt request.
Advance Information 284 MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Serial Communications Interface Module (SCI) MOTOROLA
BREAK ALL 0s SBK
Serial Communications Interface Module (SCI) Functional Description
When the transmit shift register is not transmitting a character, the PTE2/TxD pin goes to the idle condition, logic 1. If at any time software clears the ENSCI bit in SCI control register 1 (SCC1), the transmitter and receiver relinquish control of the port E pins. 14.4.2.3 Break Characters Writing a logic 1 to the send break bit, SBK, in SCC2 loads the transmit shift register with a break character. A break character contains all logic 0s and has no start, stop, or parity bit. Break character length depends on the M bit in SCC1. As long as SBK is at logic 1, transmitter logic continuously loads break characters into the transmit shift register. After software clears the SBK bit, the shift register finishes transmitting the last break character and then transmits at least one logic 1. The automatic logic 1 at the end of a break character guarantees the recognition of the start bit of the next character. The SCI recognizes a break character when a start bit is followed by eight or nine logic 0 data bits and a logic 0 where the stop bit should be. Receiving a break character has these effects on SCI registers: * * * * * * Sets the framing error bit (FE) in SCS1 Sets the SCI receiver full bit (SCRF) in SCS1 Clears the SCI data register (SCDR) Clears the R8 bit in SCC3 Sets the break flag bit (BKF) in SCS2 May set the overrun (OR), noise flag (NF), parity error (PE), or reception-in-progress flag (RPF) bits
14.4.2.4 Idle Characters An idle character contains all logic 1s and has no start, stop, or parity bit. Idle character length depends on the M bit in SCC1. The preamble is a synchronizing idle character that begins every transmission. If the TE bit is cleared during a transmission, the PTE2/TxD pin becomes idle after completion of the transmission in progress. Clearing and then setting the TE bit during a transmission queues an idle character to be sent after the character currently being transmitted.
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Serial Communications Interface Module (SCI) Advance Information 285
Serial Communications Interface Module (SCI)
NOTE:
When queueing an idle character, return the TE bit to logic 1 before the stop bit of the current character shifts out to the PTE2/TxD pin. Setting TE after the stop bit appears on PTE2/TxD causes data previously written to the SCDR to be lost. A good time to toggle the TE bit is when the SCTE bit becomes set and just before writing the next byte to the SCDR. 14.4.2.5 Inversion of Transmitted Output The transmit inversion bit (TXINV) in SCI control register 1 (SCC1) reverses the polarity of transmitted data. All transmitted values, including idle, break, start, and stop bits, are inverted when TXINV is at logic 1. See 14.8.1 SCI Control Register 1. 14.4.2.6 Transmitter Interrupts These conditions can generate CPU interrupt requests from the SCI transmitter: * SCI transmitter empty (SCTE) -- The SCTE bit in SCS1 indicates that the SCDR has transferred a character to the transmit shift register. SCTE can generate a transmitter CPU interrupt request. Setting the SCI transmit interrupt enable bit, SCTIE, in SCC2 enables the SCTE bit to generate transmitter CPU interrupt requests. Transmission complete (TC) -- The TC bit in SCS1 indicates that the transmit shift register and the SCDR are empty and that no break or idle character has been generated. The transmission complete interrupt enable bit, TCIE, in SCC2 enables the TC bit to generate transmitter CPU interrupt requests.
*
14.4.3 Receiver Figure 14-5 shows the structure of the SCI receiver. 14.4.3.1 Character Length The receiver can accommodate either 8-bit or 9-bit data. The state of the M bit in SCI control register 1 (SCC1) determines character length.
Advance Information 286 MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Serial Communications Interface Module (SCI) MOTOROLA
Serial Communications Interface Module (SCI) Functional Description
When receiving 9-bit data, bit R8 in SCI control register 2 (SCC2) is the ninth bit (bit 8). When receiving 8-bit data, bit R8 is a copy of the eighth bit (bit 7).
INTERNAL BUS
SCR1 SCP1 SCP0 /4 f23 PTE1/Rx BAUD PRESCALER DIVIDER SCR2 SCR0 START 0 L RWU /A16 DATA RECOVERY ALL 0s ALL 1s MSB SCI DATA REGISTER
STOP
11-BIT RECEIVE SHIFT REGISTER 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
H
BKF ERROR CPU INTERRUPT REQUEST RPF
CPU INTERRUPT REQUEST
M WAKE ILTY PEN PTY WAKEUP LOGIC PARITY CHECKING IDLE ILIE SCRF SCRIE
SCRF IDLE
R8
ILIE
SCRIE
OR ORIE NF NEIE FE FEIE PE PEIE
OR ORIE NF NEIE FE FEIE PE PEIE
Figure 14-5. SCI Receiver Block Diagram
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Serial Communications Interface Module (SCI)
Advance Information 287
Serial Communications Interface Module (SCI)
14.4.3.2 Character Reception During an SCI reception, the receive shift register shifts characters in from the PTE1/RxD pin. The SCI data register (SCDR) is the read-only buffer between the internal data bus and the receive shift register. After a complete character shifts into the receive shift register, the data portion of the character transfers to the SCDR. The SCI receiver full bit, SCRF, in SCI status register 1 (SCS1) becomes set, indicating that the received byte can be read. If the SCI receive interrupt enable bit, SCRIE, in SCC2 is also set, the SCRF bit generates a receiver CPU interrupt request. 14.4.3.3 Data Sampling The receiver samples the PTE1/RxD pin at the RT clock rate. The RT clock is an internal signal with a frequency 16 times the baud rate. To adjust for baud rate mismatch, the RT clock is resynchronized at these times (see Figure 14-6): * * After every start bit After the receiver detects a data bit change from logic 1 to logic 0 (after the majority of data bit samples at RT8, RT9, and RT10 return a valid logic 1 and the majority of the next RT8, RT9, and RT10 samples return a valid logic 0)
START BIT PTE1/RxD
LSB
SAMPLES
START BIT QUALIFICATION
START BIT VERIFICATION
DATA SAMPLING
RT CLOCK RT10 RT11 RT12 RT13 RT14 RT15 RT CLOCK STATE RT CLOCK RESET RT1 RT1 RT1 RT1 RT1 RT1 RT1 RT1 RT1 RT2 RT3 RT4 RT5 RT6 RT7 RT8 RT9 RT16 RT1 RT2 RT3 RT4
Figure 14-6. Receiver Data Sampling
Advance Information 288
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Serial Communications Interface Module (SCI) MOTOROLA
Serial Communications Interface Module (SCI) Functional Description
To locate the start bit, data recovery logic does an asynchronous search for a logic 0 preceded by three logic 1s. When the falling edge of a possible start bit occurs, the RT clock begins to count to 16. To verify the start bit and to detect noise, data recovery logic takes samples at RT3, RT5, and RT7. Table 14-1 summarizes the results of the start bit verification samples. Table 14-1. Start Bit Verification
RT3, RT5, and RT7 Samples 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111 Start Bit Verification Yes Yes Yes No Yes No No No Noise Flag 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0
If start bit verification is not successful, the RT clock is reset and a new search for a start bit begins. To determine the value of a data bit and to detect noise, recovery logic takes samples at RT8, RT9, and RT10. Table 14-2 summarizes the results of the data bit samples. Table 14-2. Data Bit Recovery
RT8, RT9, and RT10 Samples 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111 Data Bit Determination 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 Noise Flag 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Serial Communications Interface Module (SCI)
Advance Information 289
Serial Communications Interface Module (SCI)
NOTE:
The RT8, RT9, and RT10 samples do not affect start bit verification. If any or all of the RT8, RT9, and RT10 start bit samples are logic 1s following a successful start bit verification, the noise flag (NF) is set and the receiver assumes that the bit is a start bit. To verify a stop bit and to detect noise, recovery logic takes samples at RT8, RT9, and RT10. Table 14-3 summarizes the results of the stop bit samples. Table 14-3. Stop Bit Recovery
RT8, RT9, and RT10 Samples 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111 Framing Error Flag 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 Noise Flag 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0
14.4.3.4 Framing Errors If the data recovery logic does not detect a logic 1 where the stop bit should be in an incoming character, it sets the framing error bit, FE, in SCS1. The FE flag is set at the same time that the SCRF bit is set. A break character that has no stop bit also sets the FE bit. 14.4.3.5 Receiver Wakeup So that the MCU can ignore transmissions intended only for other receivers in multiple-receiver systems, the receiver can be put into a standby state. Setting the receiver wakeup bit, RWU, in SCC2 puts the receiver into a standby state during which receiver interrupts are disabled.
Advance Information 290
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Serial Communications Interface Module (SCI) MOTOROLA
Serial Communications Interface Module (SCI) Functional Description
Depending on the state of the WAKE bit in SCC1, either of two conditions on the PTE1/RxD pin can bring the receiver out of the standby state: * Address mark -- An address mark is a logic 1 in the most significant bit position of a received character. When the WAKE bit is set, an address mark wakes the receiver from the standby state by clearing the RWU bit. The address mark also sets the SCI receiver full bit, SCRF. Software can then compare the character containing the address mark to the user-defined address of the receiver. If they are the same, the receiver remains awake and processes the characters that follow. If they are not the same, software can set the RWU bit and put the receiver back into the standby state. Idle input line condition -- When the WAKE bit is clear, an idle character on the PTE1/RxD pin wakes the receiver from the standby state by clearing the RWU bit. The idle character that wakes the receiver does not set the receiver idle bit, IDLE, or the SCI receiver full bit, SCRF. The idle line type bit, ILTY, determines whether the receiver begins counting logic 1s as idle character bits after the start bit or after the stop bit.
*
NOTE:
Clearing the WAKE bit after the PTE1/RxD pin has been idle can cause the receiver to wake up immediately.
14.4.3.6 Receiver Interrupts These sources can generate CPU interrupt requests from the SCI receiver: * SCI receiver full (SCRF) -- The SCRF bit in SCS1 indicates that the receive shift register has transferred a character to the SCDR. SCRF can generate a receiver CPU interrupt request. Setting the SCI receive interrupt enable bit, SCRIE, in SCC2 enables the SCRF bit to generate receiver CPU interrupts. Idle input (IDLE) -- The IDLE bit in SCS1 indicates that 10 or 11 consecutive logic 1s shifted in from the PTE1/RxD pin. The idle line interrupt enable bit, ILIE, in SCC2 enables the IDLE bit to generate CPU interrupt requests.
*
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Serial Communications Interface Module (SCI)
Advance Information 291
Serial Communications Interface Module (SCI)
14.4.3.7 Error Interrupts These receiver error flags in SCS1 can generate CPU interrupt requests: * Receiver overrun (OR) -- The OR bit indicates that the receive shift register shifted in a new character before the previous character was read from the SCDR. The previous character remains in the SCDR, and the new character is lost. The overrun interrupt enable bit, ORIE, in SCC3 enables OR to generate SCI error CPU interrupt requests. Noise flag (NF) -- The NF bit is set when the SCI detects noise on incoming data or break characters, including start, data, and stop bits. The noise error interrupt enable bit, NEIE, in SCC3 enables NF to generate SCI error CPU interrupt requests. Framing error (FE) -- The FE bit in SCS1 is set when a logic 0 occurs where the receiver expects a stop bit. The framing error interrupt enable bit, FEIE, in SCC3 enables FE to generate SCI error CPU interrupt requests. Parity error (PE) -- The PE bit in SCS1 is set when the SCI detects a parity error in incoming data. The parity error interrupt enable bit, PEIE, in SCC3 enables PE to generate SCI error CPU interrupt requests.
*
*
*
14.5 Wait Mode
The WAIT and STOP instructions put the MCU in low powerconsumption standby modes. The SCI module remains active after the execution of a WAIT instruction. In wait mode the SCI module registers are not accessible by the CPU. Any enabled CPU interrupt request from the SCI module can bring the MCU out of wait mode. If SCI module functions are not required during wait mode, reduce power consumption by disabling the module before executing the WAIT instruction.
Advance Information 292
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Serial Communications Interface Module (SCI) MOTOROLA
Serial Communications Interface Module (SCI) SCI During Break Module Interrupts
14.6 SCI During Break Module Interrupts
The system integration module (SIM) controls whether status bits in other modules can be cleared during interrupts generated by the break module. The BCFE bit in the SIM break flag control register (SBFCR) enables software to clear status bits during the break state. To allow software to clear status bits during a break interrupt, write a logic 1 to the BCFE bit. If a status bit is cleared during the break state, it remains cleared when the MCU exits the break state. To protect status bits during the break state, write a logic 0 to the BCFE bit. With BCFE at logic 0 (its default state), software can read and write I/O registers during the break state without affecting status bits. Some status bits have a 2-step read/write clearing procedure. If software does the first step on such a bit before the break, the bit cannot change during the break state as long as BCFE is at logic 0. After the break, doing the second step clears the status bit.
14.7 I/O Signals
Port F shares two of its pins with the SCI module. The two SCI input/output (I/O) pins are: * * PTE2/TxD -- Transmit data PTE1/RxD -- Receive data
14.7.1 PTE2/TxD (Transmit Data) The PTE2/TxD pin is the serial data output from the SCI transmitter. The SCI shares the PTE2/TxD pin with port E. When the SCI is enabled, the PTE2/TxD pin is an output regardless of the state of the DDRF5 bit in data direction register F (DDRF).
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Serial Communications Interface Module (SCI)
Advance Information 293
Serial Communications Interface Module (SCI)
14.7.2 PTE1/RxD (Receive Data) The PTE1/RxD pin is the serial data input to the SCI receiver. The SCI shares the PTE1/RxD pin with port E. When the SCI is enabled, the PTE1/RxD pin is an input regardless of the state of the DDRF4 bit in data direction register F (DDRF).
14.8 I/O Registers
These I/O registers control and monitor SCI operation: * * * * * * * SCI control register 1 (SCC1) SCI control register 2 (SCC2) SCI control register 3 (SCC3) SCI status register 1 (SCS1) SCI status register 2 (SCS2) SCI data register (SCDR) SCI baud rate register (SCBR)
14.8.1 SCI Control Register 1 SCI control register 1 (SCC1): * * * * * * * * Enables loop-mode operation Enables the SCI Controls output polarity Controls character length Controls SCI wakeup method Controls idle character detection Enables parity function Controls parity type
Advance Information 294
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Serial Communications Interface Module (SCI) MOTOROLA
Serial Communications Interface Module (SCI) I/O Registers
Address: $0038 Bit 7 Read: LOOPS Write: Reset: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ENSCI TXINV M WAKE ILTY PEN PTY 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
Figure 14-7. SCI Control Register 1 (SCC1) LOOPS -- Loop Mode Select Bit This read/write bit enables loop mode operation. In loop mode the PTE6/RxD pin is disconnected from the SCI, and the transmitter output goes into the receiver input. Both the transmitter and the receiver must be enabled to use loop mode. Reset clears the LOOPS bit. 1 = Loop mode enabled 0 = Normal operation enabled ENSCI -- Enable SCI Bit This read/write bit enables the SCI and the SCI baud rate generator. Clearing ENSCI sets the SCTE and TC bits in SCI status register 1 and disables transmitter interrupts. Reset clears the ENSCI bit. 1 = SCI enabled 0 = SCI disabled TXINV -- Transmit Inversion Bit This read/write bit reverses the polarity of transmitted data. Reset clears the TXINV bit. 1 = Transmitter output inverted 0 = Transmitter output not inverted
NOTE:
Setting the TXINV bit inverts all transmitted values, including idle, break, start, and stop bits. M -- Mode (Character Length) Bit This read/write bit determines whether SCI characters are eight or nine bits long. See Table 14-4. The ninth bit can serve as an extra stop bit, as a receiver wakeup signal, or as a parity bit. Reset clears the M bit. 1 = 9-bit SCI characters 0 = 8-bit SCI characters
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Serial Communications Interface Module (SCI)
Advance Information 295
Serial Communications Interface Module (SCI)
WAKE -- Wakeup Condition Bit This read/write bit determines which condition wakes up the SCI: a logic 1 (address mark) in the most significant bit (MSB) position of a received character or an idle condition on the PTE6/RxD pin. Reset clears the WAKE bit. 1 = Address mark wakeup 0 = Idle line wakeup ILTY -- Idle Line Type Bit This read/write bit determines when the SCI starts counting logic 1s as idle character bits. The counting begins either after the start bit or after the stop bit. If the count begins after the start bit, then a string of logic 1s preceding the stop bit may cause false recognition of an idle character. Beginning the count after the stop bit avoids false idle character recognition, but requires properly synchronized transmissions. Reset clears the ILTY bit. 1 = Idle character bit count begins after stop bit. 0 = Idle character bit count begins after start bit. PEN -- Parity Enable Bit This read/write bit enables the SCI parity function. See Table 14-4. When enabled, the parity function inserts a parity bit in the most significant bit position. See Figure 14-3. Reset clears the PEN bit. 1 = Parity function enabled 0 = Parity function disabled PTY -- Parity Bit This read/write bit determines whether the SCI generates and checks for odd parity or even parity. See Table 14-4. Reset clears the PTY bit. 1 = Odd parity 0 = Even parity
NOTE:
Changing the PTY bit in the middle of a transmission or reception can generate a parity error.
Advance Information 296
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Serial Communications Interface Module (SCI) MOTOROLA
Serial Communications Interface Module (SCI) I/O Registers
Table 14-4. Character Format Selection
Control Bits M 0 1 0 0 1 1 PEN:PTY 0X 0X 10 11 10 11 Start Bits 1 1 1 1 1 1 Data Bits 8 9 7 7 8 8 Character Format Parity None None Even Odd Even Odd Stop Bits 1 1 1 1 1 1 Character Length 10 bits 11 bits 10 bits 10 bits 11 bits 11 bits
14.8.2 SCI Control Register 2 SCI control register 2 (SCC2): * Enables these CPU interrupt requests: - Enables the SCTE bit to generate transmitter CPU interrupt requests - Enables the TC bit to generate transmitter CPU interrupt requests - Enables the SCRF bit to generate receiver CPU interrupt requests - Enables the IDLE bit to generate receiver CPU interrupt requests Enables the transmitter Enables the receiver Enables SCI wakeup Transmits SCI break characters
* * * *
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Serial Communications Interface Module (SCI)
Advance Information 297
Serial Communications Interface Module (SCI)
Address: $0039 Bit 7 Read: SCTIE Write: Reset: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TCIE SCRIE ILIE TE RE RWU SBK 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
Figure 14-8. SCI Control Register 2 (SCC2) SCTIE -- SCI Transmit Interrupt Enable Bit This read/write bit enables the SCTE bit to generate SCI transmitter CPU interrupt requests. Setting the SCTIE bit in SCC3 enables SCTE CPU interrupt requests. Reset clears the SCTIE bit. 1 = SCTE enabled to generate CPU interrupt 0 = SCTE not enabled to generate CPU interrupt TCIE -- Transmission Complete Interrupt Enable Bit This read/write bit enables the TC bit to generate SCI transmitter CPU interrupt requests. Reset clears the TCIE bit. 1 = TC enabled to generate CPU interrupt requests 0 = TC not enabled to generate CPU interrupt requests SCRIE -- SCI Receive Interrupt Enable Bit This read/write bit enables the SCRF bit to generate SCI receiver CPU interrupt requests. Setting the SCRIE bit in SCC3 enables the SCRF bit to generate CPU interrupt requests. Reset clears the SCRIE bit. 1 = SCRF enabled to generate CPU interrupt 0 = SCRF not enabled to generate CPU interrupt ILIE -- Idle Line Interrupt Enable Bit This read/write bit enables the IDLE bit to generate SCI receiver CPU interrupt requests. Reset clears the ILIE bit. 1 = IDLE enabled to generate CPU interrupt requests 0 = IDLE not enabled to generate CPU interrupt requests TE -- Transmitter Enable Bit Setting this read/write bit begins the transmission by sending a preamble of 10 or 11 logic 1s from the transmit shift register to the PTE2/TxD pin. If software clears the TE bit, the transmitter completes any transmission in progress before the PTE2/TxD returns to the idle
Advance Information 298 MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Serial Communications Interface Module (SCI) MOTOROLA
Serial Communications Interface Module (SCI) I/O Registers
condition (logic 1). Clearing and then setting TE during a transmission queues an idle character to be sent after the character currently being transmitted. Reset clears the TE bit. 1 = Transmitter enabled 0 = Transmitter disabled
NOTE:
Writing to the TE bit is not allowed when the enable SCI bit (ENSCI) is clear. ENSCI is in SCI control register 1. RE -- Receiver Enable Bit Setting this read/write bit enables the receiver. Clearing the RE bit disables the receiver but does not affect receiver interrupt flag bits. Reset clears the RE bit. 1 = Receiver enabled 0 = Receiver disabled
NOTE:
Writing to the RE bit is not allowed when the enable SCI bit (ENSCI) is clear. ENSCI is in SCI control register 1. RWU -- Receiver Wakeup Bit This read/write bit puts the receiver in a standby state during which receiver interrupts are disabled. The WAKE bit in SCC1 determines whether an idle input or an address mark brings the receiver out of the standby state and clears the RWU bit. Reset clears the RWU bit. 1 = Standby state 0 = Normal operation SBK -- Send Break Bit Setting and then clearing this read/write bit transmits a break character followed by a logic 1. The logic 1 after the break character guarantees recognition of a valid start bit. If SBK remains set, the transmitter continuously transmits break characters with no logic 1s between them. Reset clears the SBK bit. 1 = Transmit break characters 0 = No break characters being transmitted
NOTE:
Do not toggle the SBK bit immediately after setting the SCTE bit. Toggling SBK too early causes the SCI to send a break character instead of a preamble.
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Serial Communications Interface Module (SCI)
Advance Information 299
Serial Communications Interface Module (SCI)
14.8.3 SCI Control Register 3 SCI control register 3 (SCC3): * * * * Stores the ninth SCI data bit received and the ninth SCI data bit to be transmitted Enables SCI receiver full (SCRF) Enables SCI transmitter empty (SCTE) Enables the following interrupts: - Receiver overrun interrupts - Noise error interrupts - Framing error interrupts - Parity error interrupts
Address: $003A Bit 7 Read: Write: Reset: R8 T8 R U R U = Reserved R 0 R 0 0 U = Unaffected 0 0 0 6 5 0 4 0 ORIE NEIE FEIE PEIE 3 2 1 Bit 0
Figure 14-9. SCI Control Register 3 (SCC3) R8 -- Received Bit 8 When the SCI is receiving 9-bit characters, R8 is the read-only ninth bit (bit 8) of the received character. R8 is received at the same time that the SCDR receives the other eight bits. When the SCI is receiving 8-bit characters, R8 is a copy of the eighth bit (bit 7). Reset has no effect on the R8 bit. T8 -- Transmitted Bit 8 When the SCI is transmitting 9-bit characters, T8 is the read/write ninth bit (bit 8) of the transmitted character. T8 is loaded into the transmit shift register at the same time that the SCDR is loaded into the transmit shift register. Reset has no effect on the T8 bit.
Advance Information 300
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Serial Communications Interface Module (SCI) MOTOROLA
Serial Communications Interface Module (SCI) I/O Registers
ORIE -- Receiver Overrun Interrupt Enable Bit This read/write bit enables SCI error CPU interrupt requests generated by the receiver overrun bit, OR. 1 = SCI error CPU interrupt requests from OR bit enabled 0 = SCI error CPU interrupt requests from OR bit disabled NEIE -- Receiver Noise Error Interrupt Enable Bit This read/write bit enables SCI error CPU interrupt requests generated by the noise error bit, NE. Reset clears NEIE. 1 = SCI error CPU interrupt requests from NE bit enabled 0 = SCI error CPU interrupt requests from NE bit disabled FEIE -- Receiver Framing Error Interrupt Enable Bit This read/write bit enables SCI error CPU interrupt requests generated by the framing error bit, FE. Reset clears FEIE. 1 = SCI error CPU interrupt requests from FE bit enabled 0 = SCI error CPU interrupt requests from FE bit disabled PEIE -- Receiver Parity Error Interrupt Enable Bit This read/write bit enables SCI receiver CPU interrupt requests generated by the parity error bit, PE. See 14.8.4 SCI Status Register 1. Reset clears PEIE. 1 = SCI error CPU interrupt requests from PE bit enabled 0 = SCI error CPU interrupt requests from PE bit disabled
14.8.4 SCI Status Register 1 SCI status register 1 (SCS1) contains flags to signal these conditions: * * * * * * * * Transfer of SCDR data to transmit shift register complete Transmission complete Transfer of receive shift register data to SCDR complete Receiver input idle Receiver overrun Noisy data Framing error Parity error
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Serial Communications Interface Module (SCI)
Advance Information 301
Serial Communications Interface Module (SCI)
Address: $003B Bit 7 Read: Write: Reset: SCTE R 1 R 6 TC R 1 = Reserved 5 SCRF R 0 4 IDLE R 0 3 OR R 0 2 NF R 0 1 FE R 0 Bit 0 PE R 0
Figure 14-10. SCI Status Register 1 (SCS1) SCTE -- SCI Transmitter Empty Bit This clearable, read-only bit is set when the SCDR transfers a character to the transmit shift register. SCTE can generate an SCI transmitter CPU interrupt request. When the SCTIE bit in SCC2 is set, SCTE generates an SCI transmitter CPU interrupt request. In normal operation, clear the SCTE bit by reading SCS1 with SCTE set and then writing to SCDR. Reset sets the SCTE bit. 1 = SCDR data transferred to transmit shift register 0 = SCDR data not transferred to transmit shift register TC -- Transmission Complete Bit This read-only bit is set when the SCTE bit is set and no data, preamble, or break character is being transmitted. TC generates an SCI transmitter CPU interrupt request if the TCIE bit in SCC2 is also set. TC is cleared automatically when data, preamble, or break is queued and ready to be sent. There may be up to 1.5 transmitter clocks of latency between queueing data, preamble, and break and the transmission actually starting. Reset sets the TC bit. 1 = No transmission in progress 0 = Transmission in progress SCRF -- SCI Receiver Full Bit This clearable, read-only bit is set when the data in the receive shift register transfers to the SCI data register. SCRF can generate an SCI receiver CPU interrupt request. When the SCRIE bit in SCC2 is set, SCRF generates a CPU interrupt request. In normal operation, clear the SCRF bit by reading SCS1 with SCRF set and then reading the SCDR. Reset clears SCRF. 1 = Received data available in SCDR 0 = Data not available in SCDR
Advance Information 302
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Serial Communications Interface Module (SCI) MOTOROLA
Serial Communications Interface Module (SCI) I/O Registers
IDLE -- Receiver Idle Bit This clearable, read-only bit is set when 10 or 11 consecutive logic 1s appear on the receiver input. IDLE generates an SCI error CPU interrupt request if the ILIE bit in SCC2 is also set. Clear the IDLE bit by reading SCS1 with IDLE set and then reading the SCDR. After the receiver is enabled, it must receive a valid character that sets the SCRF bit before an idle condition can set the IDLE bit. Also, after the IDLE bit has been cleared, a valid character must again set the SCRF bit before an idle condition can set the IDLE bit. Reset clears the IDLE bit. 1 = Receiver input idle 0 = Receiver input active or idle since the IDLE bit was cleared OR -- Receiver Overrun Bit This clearable, read-only bit is set when software fails to read the SCDR before the receive shift register receives the next character. The OR bit generates an SCI error CPU interrupt request if the ORIE bit in SCC3 is also set. The data in the shift register is lost, but the data already in the SCDR is not affected. Clear the OR bit by reading SCS1 with OR set and then reading the SCDR. Reset clears the OR bit. 1 = Receive shift register full and SCRF = 1 0 = No receiver overrun Software latency may allow an overrun to occur between reads of SCS1 and SCDR in the flag-clearing sequence. Figure 14-11 shows the normal flag-clearing sequence and an example of an overrun caused by a delayed flag-clearing sequence. The delayed read of SCDR does not clear the OR bit because OR was not set when SCS1 was read. Byte 2 caused the overrun and is lost. The next flag-clearing sequence reads byte 3 in the SCDR instead of byte 2. In applications that are subject to software latency or in which it is important to know which byte is lost due to an overrun, the flag-clearing routine can check the OR bit in a second read of SCS1 after reading the data register.
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Serial Communications Interface Module (SCI)
Advance Information 303
Serial Communications Interface Module (SCI)
NF -- Receiver Noise Flag Bit This clearable, read-only bit is set when the SCI detects noise on the PTE1/RxD pin. NF generates an NF CPU interrupt request if the NEIE bit in SCC3 is also set. Clear the NF bit by reading SCS1 and then reading the SCDR. Reset clears the NF bit. 1 = Noise detected 0 = No noise detected FE -- Receiver Framing Error Bit This clearable, read-only bit is set when a logic 0 is accepted as the stop bit. FE generates an SCI error CPU interrupt request if the FEIE bit in SCC3 also is set. Clear the FE bit by reading SCS1 with FE set and then reading the SCDR. Reset clears the FE bit. 1 = Framing error detected 0 = No framing error detected PE -- Receiver Parity Error Bit This clearable, read-only bit is set when the SCI detects a parity error in incoming data. PE generates a PE CPU interrupt request if the PEIE bit in SCC3 is also set. Clear the PE bit by reading SCS1 with PE set and then reading the SCDR. Reset clears the PE bit. 1 = Parity error detected 0 = No parity error detected
NORMAL FLAG CLEARING SEQUENCE SCRF = 1 SCRF = 0 SCRF = 1 SCRF = 0 SCRF = 1 SCRF = 0 BYTE 4 READ SCS1 SCRF = 1 OR = 0 READ SCDR BYTE 3 SCRF = 1 OR = 1 SCRF = 0 OR = 0 BYTE 4 READ SCS1 SCRF = 1 OR = 1 READ SCDR BYTE 3
BYTE 1 READ SCS1 SCRF = 1 OR = 0 READ SCDR BYTE 1 SCRF = 1
BYTE 2 READ SCS1 SCRF = 1 OR = 0 READ SCDR BYTE 2
BYTE 3
DELAYED FLAG CLEARING SEQUENCE SCRF = 1 OR = 1 BYTE 2 READ SCS1 SCRF = 1 OR = 0 READ SCDR BYTE 1 SCRF = 0 OR = 1 BYTE 3
BYTE 1
Figure 14-11. Flag Clearing Sequence
Advance Information 304 MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Serial Communications Interface Module (SCI) MOTOROLA
Serial Communications Interface Module (SCI) I/O Registers
14.8.5 SCI Status Register 2 SCI status register 2 (SCS2) contains flags to signal these conditions: * *
Address:
Break character detected Incoming data
$003C Bit 7 6 0 R 0 = Reserved 5 0 R 0 4 0 R 0 3 0 R 0 2 0 R 0 1 BKF R 0 Bit 0 RPF R 0
Read: Write: Reset:
0 R 0 R
Figure 14-12. SCI Status Register 2 (SCS2) BKF -- Break Flag This clearable, read-only bit is set when the SCI detects a break character on the PTE1/RxD pin. In SCS1, the FE and SCRF bits are also set. In 9-bit character transmissions, the R8 bit in SCC3 is cleared. BKF does not generate a CPU interrupt request. Clear BKF by reading SCS2 with BKF set and then reading the SCDR. Once cleared, BKF can become set again only after logic 1s again appear on the PTE1/RxD pin followed by another break character. Reset clears the BKF bit. 1 = Break character detected 0 = No break character detected RPF --Reception-in-Progress Flag This read-only bit is set when the receiver detects a logic 0 during the RT1 time period of the start bit search. RPF does not generate an interrupt request. RPF is reset after the receiver detects false start bits (usually from noise or a baud rate mismatch, or when the receiver detects an idle character. Polling RPF before disabling the SCI module or entering stop mode can show whether a reception is in progress. 1 = Reception in progress 0 = No reception in progress
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Serial Communications Interface Module (SCI)
Advance Information 305
Serial Communications Interface Module (SCI)
14.8.6 SCI Data Register The SCI data register (SCDR) is the buffer between the internal data bus and the receive and transmit shift registers. Reset has no effect on data in the SCI data register.
Address: $003D Bit 7 Read: Write: Reset: R7 T7 6 R6 T6 5 R5 T5 4 R4 T4 3 R3 T3 2 R2 T2 1 R1 T1 Bit 0 R0 T0
Unaffected by reset
Figure 14-13. SCI Data Register (SCDR) R7/T7:R0/T0 -- Receive/Transmit Data Bits Reading address $003D accesses the read-only received data bits, R7:R0. Writing to address $003D writes the data to be transmitted, T7:T0. Reset has no effect on the SCI data register.
14.8.7 SCI Baud Rate Register The baud rate register (SCBR) selects the baud rate for both the receiver and the transmitter.
Address: $003E Bit 7 Read: Write: Reset: 0 R 0
R
6 0
5 SCP1
4 SCP0
3 0
2 SCR2
1 SCR1 0
Bit 0 SCR0 0
R 0 = Reserved 0 0
R 0 0
Figure 14-14. SCI Baud Rate Register (SCBR)
Advance Information 306
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Serial Communications Interface Module (SCI) MOTOROLA
Serial Communications Interface Module (SCI) I/O Registers
SCP1 and SCP0 -- SCI Baud Rate Prescaler Bits These read/write bits select the baud rate prescaler divisor as shown in Table 14-5. Reset clears SCP1 and SCP0. Table 14-5. SCI Baud Rate Prescaling
SCP1:SCP0 00 01 10 11 Prescaler Divisor (PD) 1 3 4 13
SCR2-SCR0 -- SCI Baud Rate Select Bits These read/write bits select the SCI baud rate divisor as shown in Table 14-6. Reset clears SCR2-SCR0. Table 14-6. SCI Baud Rate Selection
SCR2:SCR1:SCR0 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111 Baud Rate Divisor (BD) 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128
Use this formula to calculate the SCI baud rate: f OP Baud rate = ----------------------------------64 x PD x BD where: fOP = internal operating frequency PD = prescaler divisor BD = baud rate divisor Table 14-7 shows the SCI baud rates that can be generated with a 4.9152-MHz crystal with the CGM set for an fOP of 7.3728 MHz and the CGM set for an fOP of 4.9152 MHz.
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Serial Communications Interface Module (SCI)
Advance Information 307
Serial Communications Interface Module (SCI)
Table 14-7. SCI Baud Rate Selection Examples
SCP1:SCP0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 Advance Information 308 Prescaler Divisor (PD) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 SCR2:SCR1:SCR0 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111 Baud Rate Divisor (BD) 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 Baud Rate (fOP = 7.3728 MHz) 115,200 57,600 28,800 14,400 7200 3600 1800 900 38,400 19,200 9600 4800 2400 1200 600 300 28,800 14,400 7200 3600 1800 900 450 225 8861.5 4430.7 2215.4 1107.7 553.8 276.9 138.5 69.2 Baud Rate (fOP = 4.9152 MHz) 76,800 38,400 19,200 9600 4800 2400 1200 600 25,600 12,800 6400 3200 1600 800 400 200 19,200 9600 4800 2400 1200 600 300 150 5907.7 2953.8 1476.9 738.5 369.2 184.6 92.3 46.2
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Serial Communications Interface Module (SCI) MOTOROLA
Advance Information -- MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32
Section 15. Input/Output (I/O) Ports
15.1 Contents
15.2 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
15.3 Port A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 15.3.1 Port A Data Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 15.3.2 Data Direction Register A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 15.4 Port B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 15.4.1 Port B Data Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 15.4.2 Data Direction Register B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 15.5 Port C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 15.5.1 Port C Data Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 15.5.2 Data Direction Register C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 15.6 Port D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 15.7 Port E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 15.7.1 Port E Data Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 15.7.2 Data Direction Register E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 15.8 Port F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 15.8.1 Port F Data Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 15.8.2 Data Direction Register F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
15.2 Introduction
Thirty-seven bidirectional input-output (I/O) pins and seven input pins form six parallel ports. All I/O pins are programmable as inputs or outputs.
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Input/Output (I/O) Ports
Advance Information 309
Input/Output (I/O) Ports
When using the 56-pin package version: * * Set the data direction register bits in DDRC such that bit 1 is written to a logic 1 (along with any other output bits on port C). Set the data direction register bits in DDRE such that bits 0, 1, and 2 are written to a logic 1 (along with any other output bits on port E). Set the data direction register bits in DDRF such that bits 0, 1, 2, and 3 are written to a logic 1 (along with any other output bits on port F).
*
NOTE:
Connect any unused I/O pins to an appropriate logic level, either VDD or VSS. Although PWM6-PWM1 do not require termination for proper operation, termination reduces excess current consumption and the possibility of electrostatic damage.
Bit 7 Read: PTA7 Write: Reset: Read: PTB7 Write: Reset: Read: Write: Reset: Read: Write: Reset: Read: DDRA7 Write: Reset: 0 R 0 = Reserved 0 0 0 0 0 0 DDRA6 DDRA5 DDRA4 DDRA3 DDRA2 DDRA1 DDRA0 0 R PTD6 R PTD5 R 0 PTC6 R Unaffected by reset PTD4 R PTD3 R PTD2 R PTD1 R PTD0 R PTC5 PTC4 PTC3 PTC2 PTC1 PTC0 Unaffected by reset PTB6 PTB5 PTB4 PTB3 PTB2 PTB1 PTB0 Unaffected by reset PTA6 PTA5 PTA4 PTA3 PTA2 PTA1 PTA0 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
Addr.
Register Name Port A Data Register (PTA) See page 312.
$0000
$0001
Port B Data Register (PTB) See page 314.
$0002
Port C Data Register (PTC) See page 316.
$0003
Port D Data Register (PTD) See page 318.
Unaffected by reset
$0004
Data Direction Register A (DDRA) See page 312.
Figure 15-1. I/O Port Register Summary
Advance Information 310
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Input/Output (I/O) Ports MOTOROLA
Input/Output (I/O) Ports Introduction
Addr.
Register Name Data Direction Register B (DDRB) See page 314. Read:
Bit 7 DDRB7 Write: Reset: Read: Write: Reset: 0 0
6 DDRB6 0
5
4
3 DDRB3 0
2 DDRB2 0
1
Bit 0
DDRB5 DDRB4 0 0
DDRB1 DDRB0 0 0
$0005
$0006
Data Direction Register C (DDRC) See page 316.
DDRC6 DDRC5 DDRC4 DDRC3 DDRC2 DDRC1 DDRC0 R 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
$0007 Read: PTE7 Write: Reset: Read: Write: Reset: 0 R 0 PTF5 R PTE6 PTE5
Unimplemented
$0008
Port E Data Register (PTE) See page 319.
PTE4
PTE3
PTE2
PTE1
PTE0
Unaffected by reset PTF4 PTF3 PTF2 PTF1 PTF0
$0009
Port F Data Register (PTF) See page 321.
Unaffected by reset Unimplemented Unimplemented
$000A $000B Read: DDRE7 Write: Reset: Read: Write: Reset: R = Reserved 0 0 R 0 0 DDRF5 R 0 0 DDRE6
$000C
Data Direction Register E (DDRE) See page 320.
DDRE5 DDRE4 0 DDRF4 0
DDRE3 0 DDRF3 0
DDRE2 0 DDRF2 0
DDRE1 DDRE0 0 DDRF1 0 0 DDRF0 0
$000D
Data Direction Register F (DDRF) See page 322.
Figure 15-1. I/O Port Register Summary (Continued)
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Input/Output (I/O) Ports
Advance Information 311
Input/Output (I/O) Ports 15.3 Port A
Port A is an 8-bit, general-purpose, bidirectional I/O port.
15.3.1 Port A Data Register The port A data register (PTA) contains a data latch for each of the eight port A pins.
Address: $0000 Bit 7 Read: PTA7 Write: Reset: Unaffected by reset PTA6 PTA5 PTA4 PTA3 PTA2 PTA1 PTA0 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
Figure 15-2. Port A Data Register (PTA) PTA[7:0] -- Port A Data Bits These read/write bits are software programmable. Data direction of each port A pin is under the control of the corresponding bit in data direction register A. Reset has no effect on port A data.
15.3.2 Data Direction Register A Data direction register A (DDRA) determines whether each port A pin is an input or an output. Writing a logic 1 to a DDRA bit enables the output buffer for the corresponding port A pin; a logic 0 disables the output buffer.
Address: $0004 Bit 7 Read: DDRA7 Write: Reset: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DDRA6 DDRA5 DDRA4 DDRA3 DDRA2 DDRA1 DDRA0 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
Figure 15-3. Data Direction Register A (DDRA)
Advance Information 312
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Input/Output (I/O) Ports MOTOROLA
Input/Output (I/O) Ports Port A
DDRA[7:0] -- Data Direction Register A Bits These read/write bits control port A data direction. Reset clears DDRA[7:0], configuring all port A pins as inputs. 1 = Corresponding port A pin configured as output 0 = Corresponding port A pin configured as input
NOTE:
Avoid glitches on port A pins by writing to the port A data register before changing data direction register A bits from 0 to 1. Figure 15-4 shows the port A I/O logic.
READ DDRA ($0004)
WRITE DDRA ($0004) INTERNAL DATA BUS DDRAx RESET WRITE PTA ($0000) PTAx PTAx
READ PTA ($0000)
Figure 15-4. Port A I/O Circuit When bit DDRAx is a logic 1, reading address $0000 reads the PTAx data latch. When bit DDRAx is a logic 0, reading address $0000 reads the voltage level on the pin. The data latch can always be written, regardless of the state of its data direction bit. Table 15-1 summarizes the operation of the port A pins. Table 15-1. Port A Pin Functions
DDRA Bit 0 1 PTA Bit I/O Pin Mode Input, Hi-Z(2) Output Accesses to DDRA Read/Write X(1) X DDRA[7:0] DDRA[7:0] Accesses to PTA Read Pin PTA[7:0] Write PTA[7:0](3) PTA[7:0]
1. X = don't care 2. Hi-Z = high impedance 3. Writing affects data register, but does not affect input.
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Input/Output (I/O) Ports
Advance Information 313
Input/Output (I/O) Ports 15.4 Port B
Port B is an 8-bit, general-purpose, bidirectional I/O port that shares its pins with the analog-to-digital convertor (ADC) module.
15.4.1 Port B Data Register The port B data register (PTB) contains a data latch for each of the eight port B pins.
Address: $0001 Bit 7 Read: PTB7 Write: Reset: Unaffected by reset PTB6 PTB5 PTB4 PTB3 PTB2 PTB1 PTB0 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
Figure 15-5. Port B Data Register (PTB) PTB[7:0] -- Port B Data Bits These read/write bits are software-programmable. Data direction of each port B pin is under the control of the corresponding bit in data direction register B. Reset has no effect on port B data.
15.4.2 Data Direction Register B Data direction register B (DDRB) determines whether each port B pin is an input or an output. Writing a logic 1 to a DDRB bit enables the output buffer for the corresponding port B pin; a logic 0 disables the output buffer.
Address: $0005 Bit 7 Read: DDRB7 Write: Reset: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DDRB6 DDRB5 DDRB4 DDRB3 DDRB2 DDRB1 DDRB0 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
Figure 15-6. Data Direction Register B (DDRB)
Advance Information 314
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Input/Output (I/O) Ports MOTOROLA
Input/Output (I/O) Ports Port B
DDRB[7:0] -- Data Direction Register B Bits These read/write bits control port B data direction. Reset clears DDRB[7:0], configuring all port B pins as inputs. 1 = Corresponding port B pin configured as output 0 = Corresponding port B pin configured as input
NOTE:
Avoid glitches on port B pins by writing to the port B data register before changing data direction register B bits from 0 to 1. Figure 15-7 shows the port B I/O logic.
READ DDRB ($0005)
WRITE DDRB ($0005) INTERNAL DATA BUS DDRBx RESET WRITE PTB ($0001) PTBx PTBx
READ PTB ($0001)
Figure 15-7. Port B I/O Circuit When bit DDRBx is a logic 1, reading address $0001 reads the PTBx data latch. When bit DDRBx is a logic 0, reading address $0001 reads the voltage level on the pin. The data latch can always be written, regardless of the state of its data direction bit. Table 15-2 summarizes the operation of the port B pins. Table 15-2. Port B Pin Functions
DDRB Bit 0 1 PTB Bit I/O Pin Mode Accesses to DDRB Read/Write X(1) X Input, Hi-Z(2) Output DDRB[7:0] DDRB[7:0] Accesses to PTB Read Pin PTB[7:0] Write PTB[7:0](3) PTB[7:0]
1. X = don't care 2. Hi-Z = high impedance 3. Writing affects data register, but does not affect input.
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Input/Output (I/O) Ports
Advance Information 315
Input/Output (I/O) Ports 15.5 Port C
Port C is a 7-bit, general-purpose, bidirectional I/O port that shares two of its pins with the analog-to-digital convertor module (ADC).
15.5.1 Port C Data Register The port C data register (PTC) contains a data latch for each of the seven port C pins.
Address: $0002 Bit 7 Read: Write: Reset:
R
6 PTC6
5 PTC5
4 PTC4
3 PTC3
2 PTC2
1 PTC1
Bit 0 PTC0
0 R
Unaffected by reset = Reserved
Figure 15-8. Port C Data Register (PTC) PTC[6:0] -- Port C Data Bits These read/write bits are software-programmable. Data direction of each port C pin is under the control of the corresponding bit in data direction register C. Reset has no effect on port C data.
15.5.2 Data Direction Register C Data direction register C (DDRC) determines whether each port C pin is an input or an output. Writing a logic 1 to a DDRC bit enables the output buffer for the corresponding port C pin; a logic 0 disables the output buffer.
Address: $0006 Bit 7 Read: Write: Reset: 0 R 0 R 6 DDRC6 0 = Reserved 5 DDRC5 0 4 DDRC4 0 3 DDRC3 0 2 DDRC2 0 1 DDRC1 0 Bit 0 DDRC0 0
Figure 15-9. Data Direction Register C (DDRC)
Advance Information 316
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Input/Output (I/O) Ports MOTOROLA
Input/Output (I/O) Ports Port C
DDRC[6:0] -- Data Direction Register C Bits These read/write bits control port C data direction. Reset clears DDRC[6:0], configuring all port C pins as inputs. 1 = Corresponding port C pin configured as output 0 = Corresponding port C pin configured as input
NOTE:
Avoid glitches on port C pins by writing to the port C data register before changing data direction register C bits from 0 to 1. Figure 15-10 shows the port C I/O logic.
READ DDRC ($0006)
WRITE DDRC ($0006) INTERNAL DATA BUS DDRCx RESET WRITE PTC ($0002) PTCx PTCx
READ PTC ($0002)
Figure 15-10. Port C I/O Circuit When bit DDRCx is a logic 1, reading address $0002 reads the PTCx data latch. When bit DDRCx is a logic 0, reading address $0002 reads the voltage level on the pin. The data latch can always be written, regardless of the state of its data direction bit. Table 15-3 summarizes the operation of the port C pins. Table 15-3. Port C Pin Functions
DDRC Bit 0 1 PTC Bit I/O Pin Mode Accesses to DDRC Read/Write X(1) X Input, Hi-Z(2) Output DDRC[6:0] DDRC[6:0] Accesses to PTC Read Pin PTC[6:0] Write PTC[6:0](3) PTC[6:0]
1. X = don't care 2. Hi-Z = high impedance 3. Writing affects data register, but does not affect input.
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Input/Output (I/O) Ports
Advance Information 317
Input/Output (I/O) Ports 15.6 Port D
Port D is a 7-bit, input-only port that shares its pins with the pulse width modulator for motor control module (PMC). The port D data register (PTD) contains a data latch for each of the seven port pins.
Address: $0003 Bit 7 Read: Write: Reset:
R
6 PTD6 R
5 PTD5 R
4 PTD4 R
3 PTD3 R
2 PTD2 R
1 PTD1 R
Bit 0 PTD0 R
0 R
Unaffected by reset = Reserved
Figure 15-11. Port D Data Register (PTD) PTD[6:0] -- Port D Data Bits These read/write bits are software programmable. Reset has no effect on port D data. Figure 15-12 shows the port D input logic.
INTERNAL DATA BUS
READ PTD ($0003) PTDx
Figure 15-12. Port D Input Circuit Reading address $0003 reads the voltage level on the pin. Table 15-4 summarizes the operation of the port D pins. Table 15-4. Port D Pin Functions
PTD Bit X
(1)
Pin Mode Input, Hi-Z
(2)
Accesses to PTD Read Pin Write PTD[6:0](3)
1. X = don't care 2. Hi-Z = high impedance 3. Writing affects data register, but does not affect input.
Advance Information 318
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Input/Output (I/O) Ports MOTOROLA
Input/Output (I/O) Ports Port E
15.7 Port E
Port E is an 8-bit, special function port that shares five of its pins with the timer interface module (TIM) and two of its pins with the serial communications interface module (SCI).
15.7.1 Port E Data Register The port E data register (PTE) contains a data latch for each of the eight port E pins.
Address: $0008 Bit 7 Read: PTE7 Write: Reset: Unaffected by reset PTE6 PTE5 PTE4 PTE3 PTE2 PTE1 PTE0 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
Figure 15-13. Port E Data Register (PTE) PTE[7:0] -- Port E Data Bits PTE[7:0] are read/write, software-programmable bits. Data direction of each port E pin is under the control of the corresponding bit in data direction register E.
NOTE:
Data direction register E (DDRE) does not affect the data direction of port E pins that are being used by the TIMA or TIMB. However, the DDRE bits always determine whether reading port E returns the states of the latches or the states of the pins.
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Input/Output (I/O) Ports
Advance Information 319
Input/Output (I/O) Ports
15.7.2 Data Direction Register E Data direction register E (DDRE) determines whether each port E pin is an input or an output. Writing a logic 1 to a DDRE bit enables the output buffer for the corresponding port E pin; a logic 0 disables the output buffer.
Address: $000C Bit 7 Read: DDRE7 Write: Reset: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DDRE6 DDRE5 DDRE4 DDRE3 DDRE2 DDRE1 DDRE0 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
Figure 15-14. Data Direction Register E (DDRE) DDRE[7:0] -- Data Direction Register E Bits These read/write bits control port E data direction. Reset clears DDRE[7:0], configuring all port E pins as inputs. 1 = Corresponding port E pin configured as output 0 = Corresponding port E pin configured as input
NOTE:
Avoid glitches on port E pins by writing to the port E data register before changing data direction register E bits from 0 to 1. Figure 15-15 shows the port E I/O logic.
READ DDRE ($000C)
WRITE DDRE ($000C) INTERNAL DATA BUS DDREx RESET WRITE PTE ($0008) PTEx PTEx
READ PTE ($0008)
Figure 15-15. Port E I/O Circuit
Advance Information 320
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Input/Output (I/O) Ports MOTOROLA
Input/Output (I/O) Ports Port F
When bit DDREx is a logic 1, reading address $0008 reads the PTEx data latch. When bit DDREx is a logic 0, reading address $0008 reads the voltage level on the pin. The data latch can always be written, regardless of the state of its data direction bit. Table 15-5 summarizes the operation of the port E pins. Table 15-5. Port E Pin Functions
DDRE Bit 0 1 PTE Bit X(1) X I/O Pin Mode Accesses to DDRE Read/Write Input, Hi-Z(2) Output DDRE[7:0] DDRE[7:0] Accesses to PTE Read Pin PTE[7:0] Write PTE[7:0](3) PTE[7:0]
1. X = don't care 2. Hi-Z = high impedance 3. Writing affects data register, but does not affect input.
15.8 Port F
Port F is a 6-bit, special function port that shares four of its pins with the serial peripheral interface module (SPI) and two pins with the serial communications interface (SCI).
15.8.1 Port F Data Register The port F data register (PTF) contains a data latch for each of the six port F pins.
Address: $0009 Bit 7 Read: Write: Reset:
R
6 0
5 PTF5
4 PTF4
3 PTF3
2 PTF2
1 PTF1
Bit 0 PTF0
0 R
R Unaffected by reset = Reserved
Figure 15-16. Port F Data Register (PTF)
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Input/Output (I/O) Ports
Advance Information 321
Input/Output (I/O) Ports
PTF[5:0] -- Port F Data Bits These read/write bits are software programmable. Data direction of each port F pin is under the control of the corresponding bit in data direction register F. Reset has no effect on PTF[5:0].
NOTE:
Data direction register F (DDRF) does not affect the data direction of port F pins that are being used by the SPI or SCI module. However, the DDRF bits always determine whether reading port F returns the states of the latches or the states of the pins.
15.8.2 Data Direction Register F Data direction register F (DDRF) determines whether each port F pin is an input or an output. Writing a logic 1 to a DDRF bit enables the output buffer for the corresponding port F pin; a logic 0 disables the output buffer.
Address: $000D Bit 7 Read: Write: Read:
R
6 0
5 DDRF5
4 DDRF4 0
3 DDRF3 0
2 DDRF2 0
1 DDRF1 0
Bit 0 DDRF0 0
0 R
R 0 = Reserved
Figure 15-17. Data Direction Register F (DDRF) DDRF[5:0] -- Data Direction Register F Bits These read/write bits control port F data direction. Reset clears DDRF[5:0], configuring all port F pins as inputs. 1 = Corresponding port F pin configured as output 0 = Corresponding port F pin configured as input
NOTE:
Avoid glitches on port F pins by writing to the port F data register before changing data direction register F bits from 0 to 1. Figure 15-18 shows the port F I/O logic.
Advance Information 322
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Input/Output (I/O) Ports MOTOROLA
Input/Output (I/O) Ports Port F
READ DDRF ($000D)
WRITE DDRF ($000D) INTERNAL DATA BUS RESET WRITE PTF ($0009) PTFx PTFx DDRFx
READ PTF ($0009)
Figure 15-18. Port F I/O Circuit When bit DDRFx is a logic 1, reading address $0009 reads the PTFx data latch. When bit DDRFx is a logic 0, reading address $0009 reads the voltage level on the pin. The data latch can always be written, regardless of the state of its data direction bit. Table 15-6 summarizes the operation of the port F pins. Table 15-6. Port F Pin Functions
DDRF Bit 0 1 PTF Bit X(1) X I/O Pin Mode Accesses to DDRF Read/Write Input, Hi-Z(2) Output DDRF[6:0] DDRF[6:0] Accesses to PTF Read Pin PTF[6:0] Write PTF[6:0](3) PTF[6:0]
1. X = don't care 2. Hi-Z = high impedance 3. Writing affects data register, but does not affect input.
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Input/Output (I/O) Ports
Advance Information 323
Input/Output (I/O) Ports
Advance Information 324
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Input/Output (I/O) Ports MOTOROLA
Advance Information -- MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32
Section 16. Computer Operating Properly (COP)
16.1 Contents
16.2 16.3 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
16.4 I/O Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 16.4.1 CGMXCLK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327 16.4.2 COPCTL Write . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 16.4.3 Power-On Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327 16.4.4 Internal Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 16.4.5 Reset Vector Fetch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 16.4.6 COPD (COP Disable). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 16.5 16.6 16.7 16.8 16.9 COP Control Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Interrupts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Monitor Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329 Wait Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Stop Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
16.2 Introduction
This section describes the computer operating properly module, a free-running counter that generates a reset if allowed to overflow. The computer operating properly (COP) module helps software recover from runaway code. Prevent a COP reset by periodically clearing the COP counter.
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Computer Operating Properly (COP)
Advance Information 325
Computer Operating Properly (COP) 16.3 Functional Description
Figure 16-1 shows the structure of the COP module. A summary of the input/output (I/O) register is shown in Figure 16-2.
TDH
CGMXCLK
13-BIT SIM COUNTER CLEAR ALL BITS CLEAR BITS 12-4
SIM RESET CIRCUIT SIM RESET STATUS REGISTER
INTERNAL RESET SOURCES(1) RESET VECTOR FETCH COPCTL WRITE
8PQAHP9VG@
COPD (FROM CONFIG) RESET COPCTL WRITE
6-BIT COP COUNTER
CLEAR COP COUNTER
Note 1. See 7.4.2 Active Resets from Internal Sources.
Figure 16-1. COP Block Diagram
Addr.
Register Name Read: COP Control Register (COPCTL) Write: See page 328. Reset:
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
Low byte of reset vector Clear COP counter Unaffected by reset
$FFFF
Figure 16-2. COP I/O Register Summary
Advance Information 326
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Computer Operating Properly (COP) MOTOROLA
Computer Operating Properly (COP) I/O Signals
The COP counter is a free-running, 6-bit counter preceded by the 13-bit system integration module (SIM) counter. If not cleared by software, the COP counter overflows and generates an asynchronous reset after 218-24 CGMXCLK cycles. With a 4.9152-MHz crystal, the COP timeout period is 53.3 ms. Writing any value to location $FFFF before overflow occurs clears the COP counter and prevents reset. A COP reset pulls the RST pin low for 32 CGMXCLK cycles and sets the COP bit in the SIM reset status register (SRSR). See 7.8.2 SIM Reset Status Register.
NOTE:
Place COP clearing instructions in the main program and not in an interrupt subroutine. Such an interrupt subroutine could keep the COP from generating a reset even while the main program is not working properly.
16.4 I/O Signals
This section describes the signals shown in Figure 16-1.
16.4.1 CGMXCLK CGMXCLK is the crystal oscillator output signal. CGMXCLK frequency is equal to the crystal frequency.
16.4.2 COPCTL Write Writing any value to the COP control register (COPCTL) (see 16.5 COP Control Register) clears the COP counter and clears bits 12-4 of the SIM counter. Reading the COP control register returns the reset vector.
16.4.3 Power-On Reset The power-on reset (POR) circuit in the SIM clears the SIM counter 4096 CGMXCLK cycles after power-up.
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Computer Operating Properly (COP)
Advance Information 327
Computer Operating Properly (COP)
16.4.4 Internal Reset An internal reset clears the SIM counter and the COP counter.
16.4.5 Reset Vector Fetch A reset vector fetch occurs when the vector address appears on the data bus. A reset vector fetch clears the SIM counter.
16.4.6 COPD (COP Disable) The COPD signal reflects the state of the COP disable bit (COPD) in the configuration register (CONFIG). See Section 5. Configuration Register (CONFIG).
16.5 COP Control Register
The COP control register is located at address $FFFF and overlaps the reset vector. Writing any value to $FFFF clears the COP counter and starts a new timeout period. Reading location $FFFF returns the low byte of the reset vector.
Address: $FFFF Bit 7 Read: Write: Reset: 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
Low byte of reset vector Clear COP counter Unaffected by reset
Figure 16-3. COP Control Register (COPCTL)
16.6 Interrupts
The COP does not generate CPU interrupt requests.
Advance Information 328
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Computer Operating Properly (COP) MOTOROLA
Computer Operating Properly (COP) Monitor Mode
16.7 Monitor Mode
The COP is disabled in monitor mode when VHI is present on the IRQ pin or on the RST pin.
16.8 Wait Mode
The WAIT instruction puts the MCU in low power-consumption standby mode. The COP continues to operate during wait mode.
16.9 Stop Mode
Stop mode turns off the CGMXCLK input to the COP and clears the COP prescaler. Service the COP immediately before entering or after exiting stop mode to ensure a full COP timeout period after entering or exiting stop mode.
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Computer Operating Properly (COP)
Advance Information 329
Computer Operating Properly (COP)
Advance Information 330
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Computer Operating Properly (COP) MOTOROLA
Advance Information -- MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32
Section 17. External Interrupt (IRQ)
17.1 Contents
17.2 17.3 17.4 17.5 17.6 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 IRQ Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335 IRQ Status and Control Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
17.2 Introduction
This section describes the external interrupt (IRQ) module, which supports external interrupt functions.
17.3 Features
Features of the IRQ module include: * * A dedicated external interrupt pin, IRQ Hysteresis buffers
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA External Interrupt (IRQ)
Advance Information 331
External Interrupt (IRQ) 17.4 Functional Description
A logic 0 applied to any of the external interrupt pins can latch a CPU interrupt request. Figure 17-1 shows the structure of the IRQ module. Interrupt signals on the IRQ pin are latched into the IRQ1 latch. An interrupt latch remains set until one of the following actions occurs: * Vector fetch -- A vector fetch automatically generates an interrupt acknowledge signal that clears the latch that caused the vector fetch. Software clear -- Software can clear an interrupt latch by writing to the appropriate acknowledge bit in the interrupt status and control register (ISCR). Writing a logic 1 to the ACK1 bit clears the IRQ1 latch. Reset -- A reset automatically clears both interrupt latches.
*
*
V'' D IRQ
ACK1 CLR
Q
CK IRQ LATCH IMASK1
SYNCHRONIZER
IRQ INTERRUPT REQUEST
MODE1 HIGH VOLTAGE DETECT TO MODE SELECT LOGIC
Figure 17-1. IRQ Module Block Diagram
Addr. Register Name IRQ Status/Control Register (ISCR) See page 336. Read: Write: Reset: Bit 7 0 R 0 R 6 0 R 0 = Reserved 5 0 R 0 4 0 IRQF R 0 0 ACK1 0 0 0 3 2 0 IMASK1 MODE1 1 Bit 0
$003F
Figure 17-2. IRQ I/O Register Summary
Advance Information 332
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 External Interrupt (IRQ) MOTOROLA
External Interrupt (IRQ) Functional Description
The external interrupt pins are falling-edge-triggered and are software-configurable to be both falling-edge and low-level-triggered. The MODE1 bit in the ISCR controls the triggering sensitivity of the IRQ pin. When the interrupt pin is edge-triggered only, the interrupt latch remains set until a vector fetch, software clear, or reset occurs. When the interrupt pin is both falling-edge and low-level-triggered, the interrupt latch remains set until both of these occur: * * Vector fetch, software clear, or reset Return of the interrupt pin to logic 1
The vector fetch or software clear can occur before or after the interrupt pin returns to logic 1. As long as the pin is low, the interrupt request remains pending. When set, the IMASK1 bit in the ISCR masks all external interrupt requests. A latched interrupt request is not presented to the interrupt priority logic unless the IMASK bit is clear.
NOTE:
The interrupt mask (I) in the condition code register (CCR) masks all interrupt requests, including external interrupt requests. (See Figure 17-3.)
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA External Interrupt (IRQ)
Advance Information 333
External Interrupt (IRQ)
FROM RESET
YES
I BIT SET?
NO
INTERRUPT?
YES
NO STACK CPU REGISTERS SET I BIT LOAD PC WITH INTERRUPT VECTOR
FETCH NEXT INSTRUCTION
SWI INSTRUCTION?
YES
NO
RTI INSTRUCTION?
YES
UNSTACK CPU REGISTERS
NO EXECUTE INSTRUCTION
Figure 17-3. IRQ Interrupt Flowchart
Advance Information 334
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 External Interrupt (IRQ) MOTOROLA
External Interrupt (IRQ) IRQ Pin
17.5 IRQ Pin
A logic 0 on the IRQ pin can latch an interrupt request into the IRQ latch. A vector fetch, software clear, or reset clears the IRQ latch. If the MODE1 bit is set, the IRQ pin is both falling-edge-sensitive and low-level-sensitive. With MODE1 set, both of these actions must occur to clear the IRQ1 latch: * Vector fetch, software clear, or reset -- A vector fetch generates an interrupt acknowledge signal to clear the latch. Software can generate the interrupt acknowledge signal by writing a logic 1 to the ACK1 bit in the interrupt status and control register (ISCR). The ACK1 bit is useful in applications that poll the IRQ pin and require software to clear the IRQ1 latch. Writing to the ACK1 bit can also prevent spurious interrupts due to noise. Setting ACK1 does not affect subsequent transitions on the IRQ pin. A falling edge that occurs after writing to the ACK1 bit latches another interrupt request. If the IRQ1 mask bit, IMASK1, is clear, the CPU loads the program counter with the vector address at locations $FFFA and $FFFB. Return of the IRQ pin to logic 1 -- As long as the IRQ pin is at logic 0, the IRQ1 latch remains set.
*
The vector fetch or software clear and the return of the IRQ pin to logic 1 can occur in any order. The interrupt request remains pending as long as the IRQ pin is at logic 0. If the MODE1 bit is clear, the IRQ pin is falling-edge-sensitive only. With MODE1 clear, a vector fetch or software clear immediately clears the IRQ1 latch. Use the branch if IRQ pin high (BIH) or branch if IRQ pin low (BIL) instruction to read the logic level on the IRQ pin.
NOTE:
When using the level-sensitive interrupt trigger, avoid false interrupts by masking interrupt requests in the interrupt routine.
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA External Interrupt (IRQ)
Advance Information 335
External Interrupt (IRQ) 17.6 IRQ Status and Control Register
The IRQ status and control register (ISCR) has these functions: * * *
Address:
Clears the IRQ interrupt latch Masks IRQ interrupt requests Controls triggering sensitivity of the IRQ interrupt pin
$003F Bit 7 6 0 R 0 = Reserved 5 0 R 0 4 0 IRQF R 0 0 3 2 0 IMASK1 ACK1 0 0 0 MODE1 1 Bit 0
Read: Write: Reset:
0 R 0 R
Figure 17-4. IRQ Status and Control Register (ISCR) ACK1 -- IRQ Interrupt Request Acknowledge Bit Writing a logic 1 to this write-only bit clears the IRQ latch. ACK1 always reads as logic 0. Reset clears ACK1. IMASK1 -- IRQ Interrupt Mask Bit Writing a logic 1 to this read/write bit disables IRQ interrupt requests. Reset clears IMASK1. 1 = IRQ interrupt requests disabled 0 = IRQ interrupt requests enabled MODE1 -- IRQ Edge/Level Select Bit This read/write bit controls the triggering sensitivity of the IRQ pin. Reset clears MODE1. 1 = IRQ interrupt requests on falling edges and low levels 0 = IRQ interrupt requests on falling edges only IRQF -- IRQ Flag This read-only bit acts as a status flag, indicating an IRQ event occurred. 1 = External IRQ event occurred. 0 = External IRQ event did not occur.
Advance Information 336
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 External Interrupt (IRQ) MOTOROLA
Advance Information -- MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32
Section 18. Low-Voltage Inhibit (LVI)
18.1 Contents
18.2 18.3 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
18.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 18.4.1 Polled LVI Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 18.4.2 Forced Reset Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 18.4.3 False Reset Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339 18.4.4 LVI Trip Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 18.5 18.6 18.7 18.8 LVI Status and Control Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340 LVI Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341 Wait Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 Stop Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
18.2 Introduction
This section describes the low-voltage inhibit (LVI) module, which monitors the voltage on the VDD pin and can force a reset when the VDD voltage falls to the LVI trip voltage.
18.3 Features
Features of the LVI module include: * * * * Programmable LVI reset Programmable power consumption Digital filtering of VDD pin level Selectable LVI trip voltage
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Low-Voltage Inhibit (LVI)
Advance Information 337
Low-Voltage Inhibit (LVI) 18.4 Functional Description
Figure 18-1 shows the structure of the LVI module. The LVI is enabled out of reset. The LVI module contains a bandgap reference circuit and comparator. The LVI power bit, LVIPWR, enables the LVI to monitor VDD voltage. The LVI reset bit, LVIRST, enables the LVI module to generate a reset when VDD falls below a voltage, VLVRX, and remains at or below that level for nine or more consecutive CGMXCLK. VLVRX and VLVHX are determined by the TRPSEL bit in the LVISCR (see Figure 18-2). LVIPWR and LVIRST are in the configuration register (CONFIG). See Section 5. Configuration Register (CONFIG). Once an LVI reset occurs, the MCU remains in reset until VDD rises above a voltage, VLVRX + VLVHX. VDD must be above VLVRX + VLVHX for only one CPU cycle to bring the MCU out of reset. See 7.4.2.6 Low-Voltage Inhibit (LVI) Reset. The output of the comparator controls the state of the LVIOUT flag in the LVI status register (LVISCR). An LVI reset also drives the RST pin low to provide low-voltage protection to external peripheral devices. See 22.6 DC Electrical Characteristics (VDD = 5.0 Vdc 10%).
V'' LVIPWR FROM CONFIG CPU CLOCK LOW V'' DETECTOR V'' > LVItrip = 0 V'' < LVItrip = 1 V'' DIGITAL FILTER FROM CONFIG LVIRST LVI RESET
TRPSEL FROM LVISCR ANLGTRIP LVIOUT
Figure 18-1. LVI Module Block Diagram
Advance Information 338
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Low-Voltage Inhibit (LVI) MOTOROLA
Low-Voltage Inhibit (LVI) Functional Description
Addr.
Register Name
Bit 7
6 0
5 TRPSEL
4 0 R
3 0 R 0
2 0 R 0
1 0 R 0
Bit 0 0 R 0
$FE0F
Read: LVIOUT LVI Status and Control Register (LVISCR) Write: R See page 340. Reset: 0 R
R 0 = Reserved 0
0
Figure 18-2. LVI I/O Register Summary 18.4.1 Polled LVI Operation In applications that can operate at VDD levels below VLVRX, software can monitor VDD by polling the LVIOUT bit. In the configuration register, the LVIPWR bit must be at logic 1 to enable the LVI module, and the LVIRST bit must be at logic 0 to disable LVI resets. See Section 5. Configuration Register (CONFIG). TRPSEL in the LVISCR selects VLVRX. 18.4.2 Forced Reset Operation In applications that require VDD to remain above VLVRX, enabling LVI resets allows the LVI module to reset the MCU when VDD falls to the VLVRX level and remains at or below that level for nine or more consecutive CPU cycles. In the CONFIG register, the LVIPWR and LVIRST bits must be at logic 1 to enable the LVI module and to enable LVI resets. TRPSEL in the LVISCR selects VLVRX. 18.4.3 False Reset Protection The VDD pin level is digitally filtered to reduce false resets due to power supply noise. In order for the LVI module to reset the MCU, VDD must remain at or below VLVRX for nine or more consecutive CPU cycles. VDD must be above VLVRX + VLVHX for only one CPU cycle to bring the MCU out of reset. TRPSEL in the LVISCR selects VLVRX + VLVHX.
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Low-Voltage Inhibit (LVI)
Advance Information 339
Low-Voltage Inhibit (LVI)
18.4.4 LVI Trip Selection The TRPSEL bit allows the user to chose between 5 percent and 10 percent tolerance when monitoring the supply voltage. The 10 percent option is enabled out of reset. Writing a logic 1 to TRPSEL will enable 5 percent option.
NOTE:
The microcontroller is guaranteed to operate at a minimum supply voltage. The trip point (VLVR1 or VLVR2) may be lower than this. See 22.6 DC Electrical Characteristics (VDD = 5.0 Vdc 10%).
18.5 LVI Status and Control Register
The LVI status register (LVISCR) flags VDD voltages below the VLVRX level.
Address: $FE0F Bit 7 Read: LVIOUT Write: Reset: R 0 R 6 0 TRPSEL R 0 = Reserved 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 5 4 0 3 0 2 0 1 0 Bit 0 0
Figure 18-3. LVI Status and Control Register (LVISCR) LVIOUT -- LVI Output Bit This read-only flag becomes set when the VDD voltage falls below the VLVRX voltage for 32 to 40 CGMXCLK cycles. See Table 18-1. Reset clears the LVIOUT bit.
Advance Information 340
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Low-Voltage Inhibit (LVI) MOTOROLA
Low-Voltage Inhibit (LVI) LVI Interrupts
Table 18-1. LVIOUT Bit Indication
VDD At Level: VDD > VLVRX + VLVHX VDD < VLVRX VDD < VLVRX VDD < VLVRX VLVRX < VDD < VLVRX + VLVHX For Number of CGMXCLK Cycles: Any < 32 CGMXCLK cycles Between 32 & 40 CGMXCLK cycles > 40 CGMXCLK cycles Any LVIOUT
0 0 0 or 1 1 Previous value
TRPSEL -- LVI Trip Select Bit This bit selects the LVI trip point. Reset clears this bit. 1 = 5 percent tolerance. The trip point and recovery point are determined by VLVR1 and VLVH1, respectively. 0 = 10 percent tolerance. The trip point and recovery point are determined by VLVR2 and VLVH2, respectively.
NOTE:
If LVIRST and LVIPWR are at logic 0, note that when changing the tolerence, LVI reset will be generated if the supply voltage is below the trip point.
18.6 LVI Interrupts
The LVI module does not generate interrupt requests.
18.7 Wait Mode
The WAIT instruction puts the MCU in low power-consumption standby mode. With the LVIPWR bit in the configuration register programmed to logic 1, the LVI module is active after a WAIT instruction. With the LVIRST bit in the configuration register programmed to logic 1, the LVI module can generate a reset and bring the MCU out of wait mode.
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Low-Voltage Inhibit (LVI) Advance Information 341
Low-Voltage Inhibit (LVI) 18.8 Stop Mode
If enabled, the LVI module remains active in stop mode. If enabled to generate resets, the LVI module can generate a reset and bring the MCU out of stop mode.
Advance Information 342
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Low-Voltage Inhibit (LVI) MOTOROLA
Advance Information -- MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32
Section 19. Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC)
19.1 Contents
19.2 19.3 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
19.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 19.4.1 ADC Port I/O Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 19.4.2 Voltage Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 19.4.3 Conversion Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346 19.4.4 Continuous Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 19.4.5 Result Justification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 19.4.6 Monotonicity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 19.5 19.6 Interrupts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 Wait Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
19.7 I/O Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 19.7.1 ADC Analog Power Pin (VDDAD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 19.7.2 ADC Analog Ground Pin (VSSAD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 19.7.3 ADC Voltage Reference Pin (VREFH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 19.7.4 ADC Voltage Reference Low Pin (VREFL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 19.7.5 ADC Voltage In (ADVIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 19.7.6 ADC External Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 19.7.6.1 VREFH and VREFL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 19.7.6.2 ANx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 19.7.6.3 Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 19.8 I/O Registers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 19.8.1 ADC Status and Control Register. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 19.8.2 ADC Data Register High . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 19.8.3 ADC Data Register Low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 19.8.4 ADC Clock Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC)
Advance Information 343
Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) 19.2 Introduction
This section describes the 10-bit analog-to-digital converter (ADC).
19.3 Features
Features of the ADC module include: * * * * * * * * * 10 channels with multiplexed input Linear successive approximation 10-bit resolution, 8-bit accuracy Single or continuous conversion Conversion complete flag or conversion complete interrupt Selectable ADC clock Left or right justified result Left justified sign data mode High impedance buffered ADC input
19.4 Functional Description
Ten ADC channels are available for sampling external sources at pins PTC1/ATD9:PTC0/ATD8 and PTB7/ATD7:PTB0/ATD0. To achieve the best possible accuracy, these pins are implemented as input-only pins when the analog-to-digital (A/D) feature is enabled. An analog multiplexer allows the single ADC to select one of the 10 ADC channels as ADC voltage IN (ADCVIN). ADCVIN is converted by the successive approximation algorithm. When the conversion is completed, the ADC places the result in the ADC data register (ADRH and ADRL) and sets a flag or generates an interrupt. See Figure 19-1.
Advance Information 344
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) MOTOROLA
Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) Functional Description
INTERNAL DATA BUS
PTB/Cx ADC CHANNEL x READ PTB/PTC
DISABLE ADC DATA REGISTERS
INTERRUPT LOGIC
CONVERSION COMPLETE
ADC VOLTAGE IN ADVIN ADC CHANNEL SELECT ADCH[4:0]
AIEN
COCO/IDMAS ADC CLOCK PTx CGMXCLK BUS CLOCK CLOCK GENERATOR
ADIV[2:0]
ADICLK
Figure 19-1. ADC Block Diagram
19.4.1 ADC Port I/O Pins PTC1/ATD9:PTC0/ATD8 and PTB7/ATD7:PTB0/ATD0 are general-purpose I/O pins that are shared with the ADC channels. The channel select bits define which ADC channel/port pin will be used as the input signal. The ADC overrides the port logic when that port is selected by the ADC multiplexer. The remaining ADC channels/port pins are controlled by the port logic and can be used as general-purpose input/output (I/O) pins. Writes to the port register or DDR will not have any effect on the port pin that is selected by the ADC. Read of a port pin which is in use by the ADC will return a logic 0.
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC)
Advance Information 345
Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC)
19.4.2 Voltage Conversion When the input voltage to the ADC equals VREFH, the ADC converts the signal to $3FF (full scale). If the input voltage equals VREFL, the ADC converts it to $000. Input voltages between VREFH and VREFL are straight-line linear conversions. All other input voltages will result in $3FF if greater than VREFH and $000 if less than VREFL.
NOTE:
Input voltage should not exceed the analog supply voltages. See 22.14 Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) Characteristics.
19.4.3 Conversion Time Conversion starts after a write to the ADSCR. A conversion is between 16 and 17 ADC clock cycles, therefore: Conversion time = 16 to17 ADC Cycles ADC Frequency
Number of Bus Cycles = Conversion Time x CPU Bus Frequency The ADC conversion time is determined by the clock source chosen and the divide ratio selected. The clock source is either the bus clock or CGMXCLK and is selectable by ADICLK located in the ADC clock register. For example, if CGMXCLK is 4 MHz and is selected as the ADC input clock source, the ADC input clock divide-by-4 prescale is selected and the CPU bus frequency is 8 MHz: Conversion Time = 16 to 17 ADC Cycles = 16 to 17As 4 MHz/4
Number of bus cycles = 16 s x 8 MHz = 128 to 136 cycles
NOTE:
The ADC frequency must be between fADIC minimum and fADIC maximum to meet A/D specifications. See 22.14 Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) Characteristics. Since an ADC cycle may be comprised of several bus cycles (eight, 136 minus 128, in the previous example) and the start of a conversion is initiated by a bus cycle write to the ADSCR, from zero to eight additional bus cycles may occur before the start of the initial ADC cycle. This results in a fractional ADC cycle and is represented as the 17th cycle.
Advance Information 346
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) MOTOROLA
Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) Functional Description
19.4.4 Continuous Conversion In continuous conversion mode, the ADC data registers ADRH and ADRL will be filled with new data after each conversion. Data from the previous conversion will be overwritten whether that data has been read or not. Conversions will continue until the ADCO bit is cleared. The COCO bit is set after the first conversion and will stay set for the next several conversions until the next write of the ADC status and control register or the next read of the ADC data register.
19.4.5 Result Justification The conversion result may be formatted in four different ways: 1. Left justified 2. Right justified 3. Left Justified sign data mode 4. 8-bit truncation mode All four of these modes are controlled using MODE0 and MODE1 bits located in the ADC clock register (ADCR). Left justification will place the eight most significant bits (MSB) in the corresponding ADC data register high, ADRH. This may be useful if the result is to be treated as an 8-bit result where the two least significant bits (LSB), located in the ADC data register low, ADRL, can be ignored. However, ADRL must be read after ADRH or else the interlocking will prevent all new conversions from being stored. Right justification will place only the two MSBs in the corresponding ADC data register high, ADRH, and the eight LSBs in ADC data register low, ADRL. This mode of operation typically is used when a 10-bit unsigned result is desired. Left justified sign data mode is similar to left justified mode with one exception. The MSB of the 10-bit result, AD9 located in ADRH, is complemented. This mode of operation is useful when a result, represented as a signed magnitude from mid-scale, is needed. Finally, 8-bit truncation mode will place the eight MSBs in ADC data register low, ADRL. The two LSBs are dropped. This mode of operation is used when
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC)
Advance Information 347
Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC)
compatibility with 8-bit ADC designs are required. No interlocking between ADRH and ADRL is present.
NOTE:
Quantization error is affected when only the most significant eight bits are used as a result. See Figure 19-2.
8-BIT 10-BIT RESUL7 RESULT 003 00B 00A 009 002 008 007 006 005 001 004 003 002 001 000 000 1/2 1 1/2 1/2 2 1/2 3 1/2 4 1/2 5 1/2 1 1/2 6 1/2 7 1/2 8 1/2 9 1/2 2 1/2 INPUT VOLTAGE REPRESENTED AS 10-BIT INPUT VOLTAGE REPRESENTED AS 8-BIT WHEN TRUNCATION IS USED, ERROR FROM IDEAL 8-BIT = 3/8 LSB DUE TO NON-IDEAL QUANTIZATION. IDEAL 10-BIT CHARACTERISTIC WITH QUANTIZATION = 1/2
IDEAL 8-BIT CHARACTERISTIC WITH QUANTIZATION = 1/2 10-BIT TRUNCATED TO 8-BIT RESULT
Figure 19-2. 8-Bit Truncation Mode Error
19.4.6 Monotonicity The conversion process is monotonic and has no missing codes.
19.5 Interrupts
When the AIEN bit is set, the ADC module is capable of generating a CPU interrupt after each ADC conversion. A CPU interrupt is generated if the COCO bit is at logic 0. The COCO bit is not used as a conversion complete flag when interrupts are enabled.
Advance Information 348 MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) MOTOROLA
Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) Wait Mode
19.6 Wait Mode
The WAIT instruction can put the MCU in low power-consumption standby mode. The ADC continues normal operation during wait mode. Any enabled CPU interrupt request from the ADC can bring the MCU out of wait mode. If the ADC is not required to bring the MCU out of wait mode, power down the ADC by setting ADCH[4:0] in the ADC status and control register before executing the WAIT instruction.
19.7 I/O Signals
The ADC module has 10 input signals that are shared with port B and port C. 19.7.1 ADC Analog Power Pin (VDDAD) The ADC analog portion uses VDDAD as its power pin. Connect the VDDAD pin to the same voltage potential asVDD. External filtering may be necessary to ensure clean VDDAD for good results.
NOTE:
Route VDDAD carefully for maximum noise immunity and place bypass capacitors as close as possible to the package.
19.7.2 ADC Analog Ground Pin (VSSAD) The ADC analog portion uses VSSAD as its ground pin. Connect the VSSAD pin to the same voltage potential as VSS. 19.7.3 ADC Voltage Reference Pin (VREFH) VREFH is the power supply for setting the reference voltage VREFH. Connect the VREFH pin to the same voltage potential as VDDAD. There will be a finite current associated with VREFH. See Section 22. Electrical Specifications.
NOTE:
Route VREFH carefully for maximum noise immunity and place bypass capacitors as close as possible to the package.
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC)
Advance Information 349
Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC)
19.7.4 ADC Voltage Reference Low Pin (VREFL) VREFL is the lower reference supply for the ADC. Connect the VREFL pin to the same voltage potential as VSSAD. A finite current will be associated with VREFL. See Section 22. Electrical Specifications.
NOTE:
In the 56-pin shrink dual in-line package (SDIP), VREFL and VSSAD are tied together.
19.7.5 ADC Voltage In (ADVIN) ADVIN is the input voltage signal from one of the 10 ADC channels to the ADC module.
19.7.6 ADC External Connections This section describes the ADC external connections: VREFH and VREFL, ANx, and grounding. 19.7.6.1 VREFH and VREFL Both ac and dc current are drawn through the VREFH and VREFL loop. The AC current is in the form of current spikes required to supply charge to the capacitor array at each successive approximation step. The current flows through the internal resistor string. The best external component to meet both these current demands is a capacitor in the 0.01 F to 1 F range with good high frequency characteristics. This capacitor is connected between VREFH and VREFL and must be placed as close as possible to the package pins. Resistance in the path is not recommended because the dc current will cause a voltage drop which could result in conversion errors. 19.7.6.2 ANx Empirical data shows that capacitors from the analog inputs to VREFL improve ADC performance. 0.01-F and 0.1-F capacitors with good high-frequency characteristics are sufficient. These capacitors must be placed as close as possible to the package pins.
Advance Information 350
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) MOTOROLA
Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) I/O Registers
19.7.6.3 Grounding In cases where separate power supplies are used for analog and digital power, the ground connection between these supplies should be at the VSSA pin. This should be the only ground connection between these supplies if possible. The VSSA pin makes a good single point ground location. Connect the VREFL pin to the same potential as VSSAD at the single point ground location.
19.8 I/O Registers
These I/O registers control and monitor operation of the ADC: * * * ADC status and control register, ADSCR ADC data registers, ADRH and ARDL ADC clock register, ADCLK
19.8.1 ADC Status and Control Register This section describes the function of the ADC status and control register (ADSCR). Writing ADSCR aborts the current conversion and initiates a new conversion.
Address: $0040 Bit 7 Read: COCO Write: Reset: 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 AIEN ADCO ADCH4 ADCH3 ADCH2 ADCH1 ADCH0 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
Figure 19-3. ADC Status and Control Register (ADSCR) COCO -- Conversions Complete Bit When AIEN bit is a logic 0, the COCO is a read-only bit which is set each time a conversion is completed except in the continuous conversion mode where it is set after the first conversion. This bit is cleared whenever the ADC status and control register is written or whenever the ADC data register is read.
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) Advance Information 351
Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC)
If AIEN bit is a logic 1, the COCO is a read/write bit. Reset clears this bit. 1 = Conversion completed (AIEN = 0) 0 = Conversion not completed (AIEN = 0)/CPU interrupt (AIEN = 1) AIEN -- ADC Interrupt Enable Bit When this bit is set, an interrupt is generated at the end of an ADC conversion. The interrupt signal is cleared when the data register is read or the status/control register is written. Reset clears the AIEN bit. 1 = ADC interrupt enabled 0 = ADC interrupt disabled ADCO -- ADC Continuous Conversion Bit When set, the ADC will convert samples continuously and update the ADR register at the end of each conversion. Only one conversion is allowed when this bit is cleared. Reset clears the ADCO bit. 1 = Continuous ADC conversion 0 = One ADC conversion ADCH[4:0] -- ADC Channel Select Bits ADCH4, ADCH3, ADCH2, ADCH1, and ADCH0 form a 5-bit field which is used to select one of 10 ADC channels. The ADC channels are detailed in Table 19-1.
NOTE:
Take care to prevent switching noise from corrupting the analog signal when simultaneously using a port pin as both an analog and digital input. The ADC subsystem is turned off when the channel select bits are all set to 1. This feature allows for reduced power consumption for the MCU when the ADC is not used.
NOTE:
Recovery from the disabled state requires one conversion cycle to stabilize. The voltage levels supplied from internal reference nodes as specified in Table 19-1 are used to verify the operation of the ADC both in production test and for user applications.
Advance Information 352
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) MOTOROLA
Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) I/O Registers
Table 19-1. Mux Channel Select
ADCH4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ADCH3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 ADCH2 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 ADCH1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 ADCH0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 Input Select PTB0/ATD0 PTB1/ATD1 PTB2/ATD2 PTB3/ATD3 PTB4/ATD4 PTB5/ATD5 PTB6/ATD6 PTB7/ATD7 PTC0/ATD8 PTC1/ATD9 *** Unused * O O O O O O Unused * Reserved ** Unused * VREFH VREFL ADC power off
* If any unused channels are selected, the resulting ADC conversion will be unknown. ** Used for factory testing. *** ATD9 is not available in the 56-pin SDIP package.
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC)
Advance Information 353
Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC)
19.8.2 ADC Data Register High In left justified mode, this 8-bit result register holds the eight MSBs of the 10-bit result. This register is updated each time an ADC single channel conversion completes. Reading ADRH latches the contents of ADRL until ADRL is read. Until ADRL is read, all subsequent ADC results will be lost.
Address: $0041 Bit 7 Read: Write: Reset: R = Reserved AD9 R 6 AD8 R 5 AD7 R 4 AD6 R 3 AD5 R 2 AD4 R 1 AD3 R Bit 0 AD2 R
Unaffected by reset
Figure 19-4. ADC Data Register High (ADRH) Left Justified Mode In right justified mode, this 8-bit result register holds the two MSBs of the 10-bit result. All other bits read as 0. This register is updated each time a single channel ADC conversion completes. Reading ADRH latches the contents of ADRL until ADRL is read. Until ADRL is read, all subsequent ADC results will be lost.
Address: $0041 Bit 7 Read: Write: Reset: R = Reserved 0 R 6 0 R 5 0 R 4 0 R 3 0 R 2 0 R 1 AD9 R Bit 0 AD8 R
Unaffected by reset
Figure 19-5. ADC Data Register High (ADRH) Right Justified Mode
Advance Information 354
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) MOTOROLA
Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) I/O Registers
19.8.3 ADC Data Register Low In left justified mode, this 8-bit result register holds the two LSBs of the 10-bit result. All other bits read as 0. This register is updated each time a single channel ADC conversion completes. Reading ADRH latches the contents of ADRL until ADRL is read. Until ADRL is read, all subsequent ADC results will be lost.
Address: $0042 Bit 7 Read: Write: Reset: R = Reserved AD1 R 6 AD0 R 5 0 R 4 0 R 3 0 R 2 0 R 1 0 R Bit 0 0 R
Unaffected by reset
Figure 19-6. ADC Data Register Low (ADRL) Left Justified Mode In right justified mode, this 8-bit result register holds the eight LSBs of the 10-bit result. This register is updated each time an ADC conversion completes. Reading ADRH latches the contents of ADRL until ADRL is read. Until ADRL is read, all subsequent ADC results will be lost.
Address: $0042 Bit 7 Read: Write: Reset: R = Reserved AD7 R 6 AD6 R 5 AD5 R 4 AD4 R 3 AD3 R 2 AD2 R 1 AD1 R Bit 0 AD0 R
Unaffected by reset
Figure 19-7. ADC Data Register Low (ADRL) Right Justified Mode
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC)
Advance Information 355
Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC)
In 8-bit mode, this 8-bit result register holds the eight MSBs of the 10-bit result. This register is updated each time an ADC conversion completes. In 8-bit mode, this register contains no interlocking with ADRH.
Address: $0042 Bit 7 Read: Write: Reset: R = Reserved AD9 R 6 AD8 R 5 AD7 R 4 AD6 R 3 AD5 R 2 AD4 R 1 AD3 R Bit 0 AD2 R
Unaffected by reset
Figure 19-8. ADC Data Register Low (ADRL) 8-Bit Mode
19.8.4 ADC Clock Register This register selects the clock frequency for the ADC, selecting between modes of operation.
Address: $0043 Bit 7 Read: ADIV2 Write: Reset: 0 R 1 = Reserved 1 1 0 0 0 ADIV1 ADIV0 ADICLK MODE1 MODE0 0 R 0 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0 0
Figure 19-9. ADC Clock Register (ADCLK) ADIV2:ADIV0 -- ADC Clock Prescaler Bits ADIV2, ADIV1, and ADIV0 form a 3-bit field which selects the divide ratio used by the ADC to generate the internal ADC clock. Table 19-2 shows the available clock configurations.
Advance Information 356
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) MOTOROLA
Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) I/O Registers
Table 19-2. ADC Clock Divide Ratio
ADIV2 0 0 0 0 1 ADIV1 0 0 1 1 X ADIV0 0 1 0 1 X ADC Clock Rate ADC input clock /1 ADC input clock /2 ADC input clock /4 ADC input clock /8 ADC input clock /16
X = don't care
ADICLK -- ADC Input Clock Select Bit ADICLK selects either bus clock or CGMXCLK as the input clock source to generate the internal ADC clock. Reset selects CGMXCLK as the ADC clock source. If the external clock (CGMXCLK) is equal to or greater than 1 MHz, CGMXCLK can be used as the clock source for the ADC. If CGMXCLK is less than 1 MHz, use the PLL-generated bus clock as the clock source. As long as the internal ADC clock is at fADIC, correct operation can be guaranteed. See 22.14 Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) Characteristics. 1 = Internal bus clock 0 = External clock, CGMXCLK fADIC = CGMXCLK or bus frequency ADIV[2:0]
MODE1:MODE0 -- Modes of Result Justification Bits MODE1:MODE0 selects among four modes of operation. The manner in which the ADC conversion results will be placed in the ADC data registers is controlled by these modes of operation. Reset returns right-justified mode. 00 = 8-bit truncation mode 01 = Right justified mode 10 = Left justified mode 11 = Left justified sign data mode
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC)
Advance Information 357
Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC)
Advance Information 358
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) MOTOROLA
6qhprADshvAAH8%'C8('HS %H8%'C8('HS"!
Section 20. Power-On Reset (POR)
20.1 Contents
20.2 20.3 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
20.2 Introduction
This section describes the power-on reset (POR) module.
20.3 Functional Description
The POR module provides a known, stable signal to the microcontroller unit (MCU) at power-on. This signal tracks VDD until the MCU generates a feedback signal to indicate that it is properly initialized. At this time, the POR drives its output low. The POR is not a brown-out detector, low-voltage detector, or glitch detector. VDD at the POR must go completely to 0 to reset the MCU. To detect power-loss conditions, use a low-voltage inhibit module (LVI) or other suitable circuit.
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Power-On Reset (POR)
Advance Information 359
Power-On Reset (POR)
Advance Information 360
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Power-On Reset (POR) MOTOROLA
Advance Information -- MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32
Section 21. Break Module (BRK)
21.1 Contents
21.2 21.3 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
21.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362 21.4.1 Flag Protection During Break Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 21.4.2 CPU During Break Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364 21.4.3 TIM1 and TIM2 During Break Interrupts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 21.4.4 COP During Break Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364 21.5 Low-Power Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 21.5.1 Wait Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364 21.5.2 Stop Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365 21.6 Break Module Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 21.6.1 Break Status and Control Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365 21.6.2 Break Address Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 21.6.3 Break Status Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 21.6.4 Break Flag Control Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
21.2 Introduction
This section describes the break module (BRK). The break module can generate a break interrupt that stops normal program flow at a defined address to enter a background program.
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Break Module (BRK)
Advance Information 361
Break Module (BRK) 21.3 Features
Features of the break module include: * * * * Accessible input/output (I/O) registers during the break interrupt Central processor unit (CPU) generated break interrupts Software-generated break interrupts Computer operating properly (COP) disabling during break interrupts
21.4 Functional Description
When the internal address bus matches the value written in the break address registers, the break module issues a breakpoint signal to the CPU. The CPU then loads the instruction register with a software interrupt instruction (SWI) after completion of the current CPU instruction. The program counter vectors to $FFFC and $FFFD ($FEFC and $FEFD in monitor mode). These events can cause a break interrupt to occur: * * A CPU-generated address (the address in the program counter) matches the contents of the break address registers. Software writes a logic 1 to the BRKA bit in the break status and control register.
When a CPU-generated address matches the contents of the break address registers, the break interrupt begins after the CPU completes its current instruction. A return-from-interrupt instruction (RTI) in the break routine ends the break interrupt and returns the microcontroller unit (MCU) to normal operation. Figure 21-1 shows the structure of the break module.
Advance Information 362
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Break Module (BRK) MOTOROLA
Break Module (BRK) Functional Description
IAB15-IAB8
BREAK ADDRESS REGISTER HIGH 8-BIT COMPARATOR IAB15-IAB0 CONTROL 8-BIT COMPARATOR BREAK ADDRESS REGISTER LOW BREAK
IAB7-IAB0
Figure 21-1. Break Module Block Diagram
Addr.
Register Name
Bit 7 R
6 R
5 R
4 R
3 R
2 R
1 BW 0
Bit 0 R
Read: SIM Break Status Register $FE00 (SBSR) Write: See page 367. Reset: Read: SIM Break Flag Control Register (SBFCR) Write: See page 368. Reset: Read: Break Address Register High (BRKH) Write: See page 366. Reset: Read: Break Address Register Low (BRKL) Write: See page 366. Reset:
$FE03
BCFE 0 Bit 15 0 Bit 7 0 BRKE 0
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
$FE0C
14 0 6 0 BRKA 0
13 0 5 0 0
12 0 4 0 0
11 0 3 0 0
10 0 2 0 0
9 0 1 0 0
Bit 8 0 Bit 0 0 0
$FE0D
Read: Break Status and Control $FE0E Register (BRKSCR) Write: See page 365. Reset: Note: Writing a logic 0 clears BW.
0
0 R
0 = Reserved
0
0
0
= Unimplemented
Figure 21-2. I/O Register Summary
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Break Module (BRK)
Advance Information 363
Break Module (BRK)
21.4.1 Flag Protection During Break Interrupts The BCFE bit in the SIM break flag control register (SBFCR) enables software to clear status bits during the break state.
21.4.2 CPU During Break Interrupts The CPU starts a break interrupt by: * * Loading the instruction register with the SWI instruction Loading the program counter with $FFFC and $FFFD ($FEFC and $FEFD in monitor mode)
The break interrupt begins after completion of the CPU instruction in progress. If the break address register match occurs on the last cycle of a CPU instruction, the break interrupt begins immediately.
21.4.3 TIM1 and TIM2 During Break Interrupts A break interrupt stops the timer counters.
21.4.4 COP During Break Interrupts The COP is disabled during a break interrupt when VTST is present on the RST pin.
21.5 Low-Power Modes
The WAIT and STOP instructions put the MCU in low powerconsumption standby modes.
21.5.1 Wait Mode If enabled, the break module is active in wait mode. In the break routine, the user can subtract one from the return address on the stack if SBSW is set. Clear the BW bit by writing logic 0 to it.
Advance Information 364
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Break Module (BRK) MOTOROLA
Break Module (BRK) Break Module Registers
21.5.2 Stop Mode The break module is inactive in stop mode. The STOP instruction does not affect break module register states.
21.6 Break Module Registers
These registers control and monitor operation of the break module: * * * * * Break status and control register (BRKSCR) Break address register high (BRKH) Break address register low (BRKL) SIM break status register (SBSR) SIM break flag control register (SBFCR)
21.6.1 Break Status and Control Register The break status and control register (BRKSCR) contains break module enable and status bits.
Address: $FE0E Bit 7 Read: BRKE Write: Reset: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 BRKA 6 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 0 1 0 Bit 0 0
= Unimplemented
Figure 21-3. Break Status and Control Register (BRKSCR) BRKE -- Break Enable Bit This read/write bit enables breaks on break address register matches. Clear BRKE by writing a logic 0 to bit 7. Reset clears the BRKE bit. 1 = Breaks enabled on 16-bit address match 0 = Breaks disabled on 16-bit address match
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Break Module (BRK)
Advance Information 365
Break Module (BRK)
BRKA -- Break Active Bit This read/write status and control bit is set when a break address match occurs. Writing a logic 1 to BRKA generates a break interrupt. Clear BRKA by writing a logic 0 to it before exiting the break routine. Reset clears the BRKA bit. 1 = When read, break address match 0 = When read, no break address match
21.6.2 Break Address Registers The break address registers (BRKH and BRKL) contain the high and low bytes of the desired breakpoint address. Reset clears the break address registers.
Address: $FE0C Bit 7 Read: Bit 15 Write: Reset: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 14 13 12 11 10 9 Bit 8 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
Figure 21-4. Break Address Register High (BRKH)
Address: $FE0D Bit 7 Read: Bit 7 Write: Reset: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
Figure 21-5. Break Address Register Low (BRKL)
Advance Information 366
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Break Module (BRK) MOTOROLA
Break Module (BRK) Break Module Registers
21.6.3 Break Status Register The break status register (SBSR) contains a flag to indicate that a break caused an exit from wait mode. The flag is useful in applications requiring a return to wait mode after exiting from a break interrupt.
Address: $FE00 Bit 7 Read: R Write: Reset: 0 R R R R R BW R 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
Figure 21-6. SIM Break Status Register (SBSR) BW -- Break Wait Bit This read/write bit is set when a break interrupt causes an exit from wait mode. Clear BW by writing a logic 0 to it. Reset clears BW. 1 = Break interrupt during wait mode 0 = No break interrupt during wait mode BW can be read within the break interrupt routine. The user can modify the return address on the stack by subtracting 1 from it. The following code is an example. This code works if the H register was stacked in the break interrupt routine. Execute this code at the end of the break interrupt routine.
HIBYTE LOBYTE EQU EQU BRCLR TST BNE DEC DOLO RETURN DEC PULH RTI 5 6 ; If not BW, do RTI BW,BSR, RETURN LOBYTE,SP DOLO HIBYTE,SP LOBYTE,SP ; See if wait mode or stop mode ; was exited by break. ; If RETURNLO is not 0, ; then just decrement low byte. ; Else deal with high byte also. ; Point to WAIT/STOP opcode. ; Restore H register.
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Break Module (BRK)
Advance Information 367
Break Module (BRK)
21.6.4 Break Flag Control Register The break flag control register (SBFCR) contains a bit that enables software to clear status bits while the MCU is in a break state.
Address: $FE03 Bit 7 Read: BCFE Write: Reset: 0 R = Reserved R R R R R R R 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
Figure 21-7. SIM Break Flag Control Register (SBFCR) BCFE -- Break Clear Flag Enable Bit This read/write bit enables software to clear status bits by accessing status registers while the MCU is in a break state. To clear status bits during the break state, the BCFE bit must be set. 1 = Status bits clearable during break 0 = Status bits not clearable during break
Advance Information 368
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Break Module (BRK) MOTOROLA
Advance Information -- MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32
Section 22. Electrical Specifications
22.1 Contents
22.2 22.3 22.4 22.5 22.6 22.7 22.8 22.9 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 Absolute Maximum Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 Functional Operating Range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 Thermal Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 DC Electrical Characteristics (VDD = 5.0 Vdc 10%) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 FLASH Memory Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373 Control Timing (VDD = 5.0 Vdc 10%) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374 Serial Peripheral Interface Characteristics (VDD = 5.0 Vdc 10%) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
22.10 TImer Interface Module Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 22.11 Clock Generation Module Component Specifications . . . . . . 378 22.12 CGM Operating Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 22.13 CGM Acquisition/Lock Time Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 22.14 Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) Characteristics. . . . . . . . .380
22.2 Introduction
This section contains electrical and timing specifications. These values are design targets and have not yet been fully characterized.
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Electrical Specifications
Advance Information 369
Electrical Specifications 22.3 Absolute Maximum Ratings
Maximum ratings are the extreme limits to which the MCU can be exposed without permanently damaging it.
NOTE:
This device is not guaranteed to operate properly at the maximum ratings. For guaranteed operating conditions, refer to 22.6 DC Electrical Characteristics (VDD = 5.0 Vdc 10%).
Characteristic(1) Supply voltage Input voltage Input high voltage Maximum current per pin excluding VDD and VSS Storage temperature Maximum current out of VSS Maximum current into VDD
1. Voltages referenced to VSS.
Symbol VDD VIn VHI I TSTG IMVSS IMVDD
Value -0.3 to +6.0 VSS -0.3 to VDD +0.3 VDD + 4 maximum 25 -55 to +150 100 100
Unit V V V mA C mA mA
NOTE:
This device contains circuitry to protect the inputs against damage due to high static voltages or electric fields; however, it is advised that normal precautions be taken to avoid application of any voltage higher than maximum-rated voltages to this high-impedance circuit. For proper operation, it is recommended that VIn be constrained to the range VSS (VIn) VDD. Reliability of operation is enhanced if unused inputs are connected to an appropriate logic voltage level (for example, either VSS or VDD).
Advance Information 370
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Electrical Specifications MOTOROLA
Electrical Specifications Functional Operating Range
22.4 Functional Operating Range
Characteristic Operating temperature range(1) MC68HC908MR24CFU MC68HC908MR24VFU Operating voltage range Symbol TA VDD Value -40 to 85 -40 to 105 5.0 10% Unit C V
1. See Motorola representative for temperature availability. C = Extended temperature range (-40C to +85C) V = Automotive temperature range (-40C to +105C)
22.5 Thermal Characteristics
Characteristic Thermal resistance, 64-pin QFP I/O pin power dissipation Power dissipation(1) Symbol JA PI/O PD Value 76 User determined PD = (IDD x VDD) + PI/O = K/(TJ + 273C) PD x (TA + 273C) + PD2 x JA TA + (PD x JA) 125 Unit C/W W W
Constant(2) Average junction temperature Maximum junction temperature
K TJ TJM
W/C C C
1. Power dissipation is a function of temperature. 2. K is a constant unique to the device. K can be determined for a known TA and measured PD. With this value of K, PD and TJ can be determined for any value of TA.
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Electrical Specifications
Advance Information 371
Electrical Specifications 22.6 DC Electrical Characteristics (VDD = 5.0 Vdc 10%)
Characteristic Output high voltage (ILoad = -2.0 mA) all I/O pins Output low voltage (ILoad = 1.6 mA) all I/O pins PWM pin output source current (VOH = VDD -0.8 V) PWM pin output sink current (VOL = 0.8 V) Input high voltage, all ports, IRQs, RESET, OSC1 Input low voltage, all ports, IRQs, RESET, OSC1 VDD supply current Run(3) Wait(4) Stop(5) I/O ports high-impedance leakage current Input current (input only pins) Capacitance Ports (as input or output) Low-voltage inhibit reset(9) Low-voltage reset/recover hysteresis Low-voltage inhibit reset recovery (VREC1 = VLVR1 + VLVH1) Low-voltage inhibit reset Low-voltage reset/recover hysteresis Low-voltage inhibit reset recovery (VREC2 = VLVR2 + VLVH2) POR re-arm voltage (6) POR rise time ramp POR reset voltage rate(8) Symbol VOH VOL IOH IOL VIH VIL Min VDD -0.8 -- -7 20 0.7 x VDD VSS -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 4.0 40 4.04 3.85 150 4.0 0 0.035 0 VDD + 2.5 Typ(2) -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 4.35 90 4.5 4.15 210 4.4 -- -- 700 -- Max -- 0.4 -- -- VDD 0.3 x VDD 30 12 700 10 1 12 8 4.65 150 4.75 4.45 250 4.6 100 -- 800 VDD + Hi Unit V V mA mA V V mA mA A A A pF V mV V V mV V mV V/ms V V
IDD
IIL IIn COut CIn VLVR1 VLVH1 VREC1 VLVR2 VLVH2 VREC2 VPOR RPOR VPORRST VHi
Monitor mode entry voltage (on IRQ)
1. VDD = 5.0 Vdc 10%, V SS = 0 Vdc, T A = TL to TH, unless otherwise noted 2. Typical values reflect average measurements at midpoint of voltage range, 25C only. 3. Run (operating) IDD measured using external square wave clock source (fOSC = 8.2 MHz). All inputs 0.2 V from rail; no dc loads; less than 100 pF on all outputs. CL = 20 pF on OSC2; all ports configured as inputs; OSC2 capacitance linearly affects run IDD; measured with all modules enabled 4. Wait IDD measured using external square wave clock source (fOSC = 8.2 MHz); all inputs 0.2 V from rail; no dc loads; less than 100 pF on all outputs. C L = 20 pF on OSC2; all ports configured as inputs; OSC2 capacitance linearly affects wait IDD; measured with PLL and LVI enabled 5. Stop IDD measured with PLL and LVI disengaged, OCS1 grounded, no port pins sourcing current. It is measured through combination of VDD, VDDAD, and VDDA. 6. Maximum is highest voltage that POR is guaranteed. 7. Maximum is highest voltage that POR is possible. 8. If minimum VDD is not reached before the internal POR is released, RST must be driven low externally until minimum VDD is reached. 9. The low-voltage inhibit reset is software selectable. Refer to Section 18. Low-Voltage Inhibit (LVI).
Advance Information 372
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Electrical Specifications MOTOROLA
Electrical Specifications FLASH Memory Characteristics
22.7 FLASH Memory Characteristics
Characteristic RAM data retention voltage FLASH program bus clock frequency FLASH read bus clock frequency FLASH page erase time FLASH mass erase time FLASH PGM/Erase to HVEN set up time FLASH high-voltage hold time FLASH high-voltage hold time (mass erase) FLASH program hold time FLASH program time FLASH return to read time FLASH cumulative program HV period FLASH row erase endurance(6) FLASH row program endurance(7) FLASH data retention time(8) Symbol/ Description VRDR -- fRead(1) tErase(2) tMErase(3) tNVS tNVH tNVHL tPGS tPROG tRCV(4) tHV(5) -- -- -- Min 1.3 1 32 k 1 4 10 5 100 5 30 1 -- 10 k 10 k 10 Max -- -- 8.4 M -- -- -- -- -- -- 40 -- 4 -- -- -- Units V MHz Hz ms ms s s s s s s ms Cycles Cycles Years
1. fRead is defined as the frequency range for which the FLASH memory can be read. 2. If the page erase time is longer than tErase (min), there is no erase-disturb, but it reduces the endurance of the FLASH memory. 3. If the mass erase time is longer than tMErase (min), there is no erase-disturb, but it reduces the endurance of the FLASH memory. 4. tRCV is defined as the time it needs before the FLASH can be read after turning off the high voltage charge pump, by clearing HVEN to logic 0. 5. tHV is defined as the cumulative high voltage programming time to the same row before next erase. tHV must satisfy this condition: tNVS + tNVH + tPGS + (tPROG x 64) tHV max.
6. The minimum row endurance value specifies each row of the FLASH memory is guaranteed to work for at least this many erase/program cycles. 7. The minimum row endurance value specifies each row of the FLASH memory is guaranteed to work for at least this many erase/program cycles. 8. The FLASH is guaranteed to retain data over the entire operating temperature range for at least the minimum time specified.
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Electrical Specifications
Advance Information 373
Electrical Specifications 22.8 Control Timing (VDD = 5.0 Vdc 10%)
Characteristic(1) Frequency of operation(2) Crystal option External clock option(3) Internal operating frequency RESET input pulse width low(5) Symbol fOSC fOP tIRL Min 1 dc(4) -- 50 Max Unit
8 32.8 8.2 --
MHz MHz ns
1. VSS = 0 Vdc; timing shown with respect to 20% VDD and 70% V DD, unless otherwise noted 2. See 22.9 Serial Peripheral Interface Characteristics (VDD = 5.0 Vdc 10%) for more information. 3. No more than 10% duty cycle deviation from 50%. 4. Some modules may require a minimum frequency greater than dc for proper operation; see appropriate table for this information. 5. Minimum pulse width reset is guaranteed to be recognized. It is possible for a smaller pulse width to cause a reset.
Advance Information 374
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Electrical Specifications MOTOROLA
Electrical Specifications Serial Peripheral Interface Characteristics (VDD = 5.0 Vdc 10%)
22.9 Serial Peripheral Interface Characteristics (VDD = 5.0 Vdc 10%)
Diagram Number(1) Characteristic(2) Operating frequency Master Slave 1 2 3 4 Cycle time Master Slave Enable lead time Enable lag time Clock (SPCK) high time Master Slave Clock (SPCK) low time Master Slave Data setup time (inputs) Master Slave Data hold time (inputs) Master Slave Access time, slave(3) CPHA = 0 CHPA = 1 Disable time, slave(4) Data valid time after enable edge Master Slave(5) Symbol Min Max Unit
fOP(M) fOP(S) tCYC(M) tCYC(S) tLead(S) tLag(S) tSCKH(M) tSCKH(S) tSCKL(M) tSCKL(S) tSU(M) tSU(S) tH(M) tH(S) tA(CP0) tA(CP1) tDIS(S) tV(M) tV(S)
fOP/128
dc 2 1 15 15 100 50 100 50 45 5 0 15 0 0 -- -- --
fOP/2 fOP
MHz
128 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 40 20 25 10 40
tCYC ns ns ns
5
ns
6
ns
7
ns
8 9 10
ns ns ns
1. All timing is shown with respect to 20% VDD and 70% VDD, unless otherwise noted; assumes 100 pF load on all SPI pins 2. Numbers refer to dimensions in Figure 22-1 and Figure 22-2. 3. Time to data active from high-impedance state 4. Hold time to high-impedance state 5. With 100 pF on all SPI pins
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Electrical Specifications
Advance Information 375
Electrical Specifications
SS INPUT
SS PIN OF MASTER HELD HIGH 1
SPCK, CPOL = 0 OUTPUT
NOTE
5 4
SPCK, CPOL = 1 OUTPUT
NOTE
5 4 6 7 LSB IN 10 BITS 6-1 11 MASTER LSB OUT
MISO INPUT 10 MOSI OUTPUT
MSB IN 11 MASTER MSB OUT
BITS 6-1
Note: This first clock edge is generated internally, but is not seen at the SCK pin.
a) SPI Master Timing (CPHA = 0)
SS INPUT
SS PIN OF MASTER HELD HIGH 1
SPCK, CPOL = 0 OUTPUT
5 4
NOTE
SPCK, CPOL = 1 OUTPUT
5 4 6 7 LSB IN 10 BITS 6-1 11 MASTER LSB OUT
NOTE
MISO INPUT 10 MOSI OUTPUT
MSB IN 11 MASTER MSB OUT
BITS 6-1
Note: This last clock edge is generated internally, but is not seen at the SCK pin.
b) SPI Master Timing (CPHA = 1)
Figure 22-1. SPI Master Timing
Advance Information 376
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Electrical Specifications MOTOROLA
Electrical Specifications Serial Peripheral Interface Characteristics (VDD = 5.0 Vdc 10%)
SS INPUT 1 SPCK, CPOL = 0 INPUT 2 SPCK, CPOL = 1 INPUT 8 MISO INPUT SLAVE 6 MOSI OUTPUT MSB IN MSB OUT 7 10 BITS 6-1 BITS 6-1 11 LSB IN SLAVE LSB OUT 11 5 4 9 NOTE 11 5 4 3
Note: Not defined, but normally MSB of character just received
a) SPI Slave Timing (CPHA = 0)
SS INPUT 1 SPCK, CPOL = 0 INPUT 2 SPCK, CPOL = 1 INPUT 8 MISO INPUT 5 4 10 NOTE SLAVE 6 MOSI OUTPUT MSB IN MSB OUT 7 10 BITS 6-1 BITS 6-1 11 LSB IN 9 SLAVE LSB OUT 5 4 3
Note: Not defined, but normally LSB of character previously transmitted
b) SPI Slave Timing (CPHA = 1)
Figure 22-2. SPI Slave Timing
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Electrical Specifications
Advance Information 377
Electrical Specifications 22.10 TImer Interface Module Characteristics
Characteristic Input capture pulse width Input clock pulse width Symbol tTIH, tTIL tTCH, tTCL Min 125 (1/fOP) + 5 Max -- -- Unit ns ns
22.11 Clock Generation Module Component Specifications
Characteristic Crystal load capacitance Crystal fixed capacitance Crystal tuning capacitance Feedback bias resistor Series resistor Filter capacitor Symbol CL C1 C2 RB RS CF Min -- -- -- -- 0 -- Typ -- 2 * CL 2 * CL 22 M 330 k CFACT* (VDDA/fXCLK) Max -- -- -- -- 1 M -- C BYP must provide low ac impedance from f = fXCLK/100 to 100*fVCLK, so series resistance must be considered Not required Notes Consult crystal manufacturing data Consult crystal manufacturing data Consult crystal manufacturing data
Bypass capacitor
CBYP
--
0.1 F
--
22.12 CGM Operating Conditions
Characteristic Crystal reference frequency Range nominal multiplier VCO center-of-range frequency VCO frequency multiplier VCO center of range multiplier VCO operating frequency Symbol fXCLK fNOM fVRS N L fVCLK Min 1 -- 4.9152 1 1 fVRSMIN Typ -- 4.9152 -- -- -- -- Max 8 -- 32.8 15 15 fVRSMAX Unit MHz MHz MHz -- -- --
Advance Information 378
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Electrical Specifications MOTOROLA
Electrical Specifications CGM Acquisition/Lock Time Specifications
22.13 CGM Acquisition/Lock Time Specifications
Description Filter capacitor multiply factor Acquisition mode time factor Tracking mode time factor Manual mode time to stable Symbol CFACT KACQ KTRK tACQ tAL tLock TRK ACQ Lock UNL nACQ nTRK tACQ Min -- -- -- -- Typ 0.0154 0.1135 0.0174 (8*VDDA)/ (fXCLK*KACQ) (4*VDDA)/ (fXCLK*KTRK) tACQ+tAL -- -- -- -- 32 128 (8*VDDA)/ (fXCLK*KACQ) (4*VDDA)/ (fXCLK*KTRK) tACQ+tAL -- Max -- -- -- -- Notes F/sV V V If C F chosen correctly If C F chosen correctly
Manual stable to lock time Manual acquisition time Tracking mode entry frequency tolerance Acquisition mode entry frequency tolerance Lock entry frequency tolerance Lock exit frequency tolerance Reference cycles per acquisition mode measurement Reference cycles per tracking mode measurement Automatic mode time to stable
-- -- 0
-- --
3.6% 7.2% 0.9% 1.8%
-- -- If C F chosen correctly If C F chosen correctly
6.3%
0
0.9%
-- -- nACQ/fXCLK
--
Automatic stable to lock time Automatic lock time PLL jitter (deviation of average bus frequency over 2 ms)
tAL tLock fJ
nTRK/fXCLK --
-- --
0
(fXCLK) *(0.025%) *(N/4)
N = VCO freq. mult.
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Electrical Specifications
Advance Information 379
Electrical Specifications 22.14 Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) Characteristics
Characteristic Symbol Min Typ Max Unit Notes VDDAD should be tied to the same potential as VDD via separate traces VADIN <= VDDAD
Supply voltage
VDDAD
4.5
--
5.5
V
Input voltages Resolution Absolute accuracy ADC internal clock Conversion range Power-up time Conversion time Sample time Monotonicity Zero input reading Full-scale reading Input capacitance VREFH/VREFL current Absolute accuracy (8-bit truncation mode) Quantization error (8-bit truncation mode)
VADIN BAD AAD fADIC RAD tADPU tADC tADS MAD ZADI FADI CADI IVREF AAD --
0 10 -- 500 k VSSAD 16 16 5
-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
VDDAD 10 4 1.048 M VDDAD -- 17 --
V Bits Counts Hz V tAIC cycles tAIC cycles tAIC cycles Guaranteed
Includes quantization tAIC = 1/fADIC
000 3FC -- -- -- --
-- -- -- 1.6 -- --
003 3FF 30 -- 1 +7/8 -1/8
Hex Hex pF mA LSB LSB
VADIN = VSSAD VADIN = VDDAD Not tested
Includes quantization
Advance Information 380
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Electrical Specifications MOTOROLA
Advance Information -- MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32
Section 23. Mechanical Specifications
23.1 Contents
23.2 23.3 23.4 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 64-Pin Plastic Quad Flat Pack (QFP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382 56-Pin Shrink Dual In-Line Package (SDIP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
23.2 Introduction
This section gives the dimensions for the 64-lead plastic quad flat pack (QFP) and 56-pin shrink dual in-line package (SDIP). Figure 23-1 and Figure 23-2 show the latest package at the time of this publication. To make sure that you have the latest package specifications, contact one of the following: * * Local Motorola Sales Office World Wide Web at http://www.motorola.com/semiconductors/
Follow the World Wide Web on-line instructions to retrieve the current mechanical specifications.
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Mechanical Specifications
Advance Information 381
Mechanical Specifications 23.3 64-Pin Plastic Quad Flat Pack (QFP)
L
48 49 33 32 S S
D
S
S
D
B B P
0.20 (0.008) M C A-B 0.05 (0.002) A-B
-AL
-BB
V
0.20 (0.008)
M
H A-B
-A-, -B-, DDETAIL A
DETAIL A
64
17
1
16
F
-DA 0.20 (0.008) M C A-B 0.05 (0.002) A-B 0.20 (0.008) E C -CSEATING PLANE M S
D
S
J
N
S H A-B
S
D
S BASE METAL
M
DETAIL C 0.20 (0.008) -HDATUM PLANE
D
M
C A-B
S
D
S
SECTION B-B
H
G
M
0.01 (0.004)
U T R
DATUM PLANE
-HQ K W X DETAIL C
NOTES: 1. DIMENSIONING AND TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5M, 1982. 2. CONTROLLING DIMENSION: MILLIMETER. 3. DATUM PLANE H IS LOCATED AT BOTTOM OF LEAD AND IS COINCIDENT WITH THE LEAD WHERE THE LEAD EXITS THE PLASTIC BODY AT THE BOTTOM OF THE PARTING LINE. 4. DATUMS A-B AND D TO BE DETERMINED AT DATUM PLANE H . 5. DIMENSIONS S AND V TO BE DETERMINED AT SEATING PLANE C . 6. DIMENSIONS A AND B DO NOT INCLUDE MOLD PROTRUSION. ALLOWABLE PROTRUSION IS 0.25 (0.010) PER SIDE. DIMENSIONS A AND B DO INCLUDE MOLD MISMATCH AND ARE DETERMINED AT DATUM PLANE H . 7. DIMENSION D DOES NOT INCLUDE DAMBAR PROTRUSION. ALLOWABLE DAMBAR PROTRUSION SHALL BE 0.08 (0.003) TOTAL IN EXCESS OF THE D DIMENSION AT MAXIMUM MATERIAL CONDITION. DAMBAR CANNOT BE LOCATED ON THE LOWER RADIUS OR THE FOOT.
DIM A B C D E F G H J K L M N P Q R S T U V W X
MILLIMETERS MIN MAX 13.90 14.10 13.90 14.10 2.45 2.15 0.45 0.30 2.40 2.00 0.40 0.30 0.80 BSC 0.25 0.23 0.13 0.95 0.65 12.00 REF 10 5 0.17 0.13 0.40 BSC 7 0 0.30 0.13 16.95 17.45 0.13 0 16.95 17.45 0.45 0.35 1.6 REF
INCHES MIN MAX 0.547 0.555 0.547 0.555 0.085 0.096 0.012 0.018 0.079 0.094 0.012 0.016 0.031 BSC 0.010 0.005 0.009 0.026 0.037 0.472 REF 5 10 0.005 0.007 0.016 BSC 0 7 0.005 0.012 0.667 0.687 0.005 0 0.667 0.687 0.014 0.018 0.063 REF
Figure 23-1. MC68HC908MR32FU
Advance Information 382 MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Mechanical Specifications MOTOROLA
Mechanical Specifications 56-Pin Shrink Dual In-Line Package (SDIP)
23.4 56-Pin Shrink Dual In-Line Package (SDIP)
-A-
NOTES: 1. DIMENSIONING AND TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5M, 1982. 2. CONTROLLING DIMENSION: INCH. 3. DIMENSION L TO CENTER OF LEAD WHEN FORMED PARALLEL. 4. DIMENSIONS A AND B DO NOT INCLUDE MOLD FLASH. MAXIMUM MOLD FLASH 0.25 (0.010) INCHES MIN MAX 2.035 2.065 0.540 0.560 0.155 0.200 0.014 0.022 0.035 BSC 0.032 0.046 0.070 BSC 0.300 BSC 0.008 0.015 0.115 0.135 0.600 BSC 0_ 15 _ 0.020 0.040 MILLIMETERS MIN MAX 51.69 52.45 13.72 14.22 3.94 5.08 0.36 0.56 0.89 BSC 0.81 1.17 1.778 BSC 7.62 BSC 0.20 0.38 2.92 3.43 15.24 BSC 0_ 15 _ 0.51 1.02
56
29
-B-
1 28
L C H
-T-
SEATING PLANE
K F D 56 PL 0.25 (0.010) E
M
G
N J
56 PL M
M
DIM A B C D E F G H J K L M N
TA
S
0.25 (0.010)
TB
S
Figure 23-2. MC68HC908MR32B
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Mechanical Specifications
Advance Information 383
Mechanical Specifications
Advance Information 384
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Mechanical Specifications MOTOROLA
Advance Information -- MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32
Section 24. Ordering Information
24.1 Contents
24.2 24.3 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 Order Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
24.2 Introduction
This section contains instructions for ordering the MC68HC908MR16 and MC68HC908MR32.
24.3 Order Numbers
Table 24-1. Order Numbers
MC Order Number(1) 68HC908MR16CFU 68HC908MR16VFU 68HC908MR16CB 68HC908MR16VB 68HC908MR32CFU 68HC908MR32VFU 68HC908MR32CB 68HC908MR32VB
1. FU = quad flat pack B = shrink dual in-line package
Operating Temperature Range -40C to +85C -40C to +105C -40C to +85C -40C to +105C -40C to +85C -40C to +105C -40C to +85C -40C to +105C
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA Ordering Information
Advance Information 385
Ordering Information
Advance Information 386
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 Ordering Information MOTOROLA
Advance Information -- MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32
Appendix A. MC68HC908MR16
A.1 Contents
A.2 A.3 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 Memory Map. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
A.2 Introduction
The information contained in this document pertains to the MC68HC908MR16 with the except of that shown in Figure A-1.
MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MOTOROLA MC68HC908MR16
Advance Information 387
MC68HC908MR16 A.3 Memory Map
$0000 $005F $0060 $035F $0360 $7FFF $8000 $BEFF $BF00 $FDFF $FE00 $FE01 $FE02 $FE03 $FE04 $FE05 $FE06 $FE07 $FE08 $FE09 $FE0A $FE0B $FE0C $FE0D $FE0E $FE0F $FE10 $FEFF $FF00 $FF7D $FF7E $FF7F $FFD1 $FFD2 $FFFF I/O REGISTERS -- 96 BYTES
RAM -- 768 BYTES
UNIMPLEMENTED -- 31,904 BYTES
FLASH -- 16,128 BYTES
UNIMPLEMENTED -- 16,128 BYTES SIM BREAK STATUS REGISTER (SBSR) SIM RESET STATUS REGISTER (SRSR) RESERVED SIM BREAK FLAG CONTROL REGISTER (SBFCR) RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED FLASH CONTROL REGISTER (FLCR) UNIMPLEMENTED UNIMPLEMENTED UNIMPLEMENTED SIM BREAK ADDRESS REGISTER HIGH (BRKH) SIM BREAK ADDRESS REGISTER LOW (BRKL) SIM BREAK FLAG CONTROL REGISTER (SBFCR) LVI STATUS AND CONTROL REGISTER (LVISCR) MONITOR ROM -- 240 BYTES
UNIMPLEMENTED -- 126 BYTES FLASH BLOCK PROTECT REGISTER (FLBPR) UNIMPLEMENTED -- 83 BYTES
VECTORS -- 46 BYTES
Figure A-1. MC68HC908MR16 Memory Map
Advance Information 388 MC68HC908MR16/MC68HC908MR32 -- Rev. 5.0 MC68HC908MR16 MOTOROLA
blank
How to Reach Us:
USA/EUROPE/LOCATIONS NOT LISTED: Motorola Literature Distribution P.O. Box 5405 Denver, Colorado 80217 1-303-675-2140 1-800-441-2447 TECHNICAL INFORMATION CENTER: 1-800-521-6274 JAPAN: Motorola Japan Ltd. SPS, Technical Information Center 3-20-1, Minami-Azabu, Minato-ku Tokyo 106-8573 Japan 81-3-3440-3569 ASIA/PACIFIC: Motorola Semiconductors H.K. Ltd. Silicon Harbour Centre 2 Dai King Street Tai Po Industrial Estate Tai Po, N.T., Hong Kong 852-26668334 HOME PAGE: http://www.motorola.com/semiconductors/
MC68HC908MR32/D REV 5

▲Up To Search▲

Price & Availability of MC68HC908MR32

	To Download MC68HC908MR32 Datasheet File
If you can't view the Datasheet, Please click here to try to view without PDF Reader .